JP2021045443A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To enhance interest in a performance in a game machine capable of executing a performance for changing a display mode of a performance display area.SOLUTION: Texture mapping for relating a performance image EG for copying a performance display area 27TM005A to a three-dimensional object OB disposed in a virtual three-dimensional (x, y, z) space is performed and the object OB after the texture mapping is deformed or moved, and an image when seeing the object OB after the deformation or movement from a viewpoint EY0 is drawn by perspective projection so as to generate an image IM. A game machine can display a specific image by a normal mode, and a specific image by a special mode for suggesting that a degree of expectation toward control to an advantageous state is high. The game machine can display a specific image by adding a first particular performance element when displaying the specific image by a special mode, and can display the specific image by adding a second particular performance element differing from the first particular performance element when displaying the specific image by a normal mode.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 10-26

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine capable of playing a game.

As shown in Patent Document 1, the effect display area of the image display device is composed of a first effect display area and a second effect display area, and a display area of the first effect display area and a display area of the second effect display area. A game machine whose ratio can be changed is proposed.

JP-A-2017-196126 (Fig. 23)

In a game machine capable of performing an effect of changing the display mode of the effect display area as described in Patent Document 1, there is room for improving the interest of the effect.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to improve the interest of the production in a game machine capable of performing the production of changing the display mode of the production display area.

The game machine of means C1
It is possible to set one of a plurality of set values having different advantages (setting values 1 to 6 having different ranges of random numbers for jackpot determination), and an advantageous state advantageous for the player (for example, a jackpot gaming state). ), And is a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) provided with an image display device (image display device 5) capable of displaying an effect image (image IM).
A suggestion effect control means (CPU 120 for effect control) capable of executing a suggestion effect (third setting suggestion effect, fourth setting suggestion effect) for suggesting settings, and
A three-dimensional object (object OB) is placed in a virtual space (virtual three-dimensional (x, y, z) space), and an image when the three-dimensional object (object OB) is viewed from a specific viewpoint is perspectively projected. An image generation means (VDP1500 of the display control unit 123) for generating an effect image (image IM) by drawing with the image is provided.
The image generation means (VDP1500 of the display control unit 123) is
A special image (effect image EG, which may be referred to as a predetermined image in the examples) that imitates the effect display area (effect display area 27TM005A) of the image display device (image display device 5), and a virtual space (virtual three-dimensional). Performs a predetermined process (synthesis process) for associating a three-dimensional object (object OB) arranged in the original (x, y, z) space).
An image when the three-dimensional object (object OB) subjected to the predetermined processing (synthesis processing) is changed (transformed or moved) and the three-dimensional object after the change is viewed from a specific viewpoint (viewpoint EY0) is displayed. Draw by perspective projection to generate a production image (image IM),
further,
A process including super reach A to C in step 097IWS104 in the effect control CPU 120, which can execute a specific effect (for example, super reach A to C) suggesting whether or not it is controlled in an advantageous state. A part in which a table is selected and steps 097IWS106 and S305 are executed), a specific image (for example, a chance-up image) and a predetermined image (for example, character image 097IW11, character image 097IW21) different from the specific image during execution of the specific effect. ) Is provided (for example, a portion in which the process table including the super reach A to C and the chance-up effect is selected in step 097IWS104 in the effect control CPU 120 and steps 097IWS106 and S305 are executed). The specific effect executing means can execute a plurality of types of specific effects (for example, super reach A to C) including at least a first specific effect (for example, super reach A) and a second specific effect (for example, super reach B). Yes, the image display means can display at least the first specific image (for example, image A1, image A2, image A3, image A4) as the specific image during the execution of the first specific effect, and the second specific effect. The second specific image (for example, image B1, image B2, image B3) can be displayed during the execution of the above, and the specific image in the normal mode (for example, white) and the expectation that the specific image is controlled in a more advantageous state than the normal mode. It is possible to display a specific image in a special mode (for example, blue, green, red, iridescent) suggesting a high degree, and the predetermined image is a display mode not related to the expectation degree controlled in an advantageous state. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 15-9 to 15-16, the display mode of the character image 097IW11 and the character image 097IW21 does not change), the image display means is the first special when displaying a specific image according to the special mode. It is possible to display a specific image by adding an effect element (for example, an effect image of display colors of blue, green, red, and rainbow colors), which is different from the first special effect element when displaying a specific image in a normal mode. It is characterized in that a specific image can be displayed by adding a second special effect element (for example, an effect image having a white display color) (see FIGS. 15-9 to 15-16).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the effect of changing the display mode of the effect display area. Further, it is possible to make the player recognize that the specific image is a preview image, and it is possible to draw the player's attention to the specific image.

The game machine of means C2
Means C1 gaming machine
The predetermined image (effect image EG) includes updated update information (first effect information, second effect information), and is used as an effect image (image IM) without performing the predetermined process (composite process). It can be displayed on the image display device (image display device 5) and can be displayed.
The image generation means (VDP1500 of the display control unit 123) is a three-dimensional object (object OB) arranged in a virtual space (virtual three-dimensional (x, y, z) space) as the predetermined process (composite process). ), Texture mapping is performed based on the predetermined image (effect image EG), the three-dimensional object to which the texture mapping is performed is changed (transformed or moved), and the changed three-dimensional object (object). A gaming machine characterized in that an image when OB) is viewed from a specific viewpoint (viewpoint EY0) is drawn by perspective projection to regenerate an effect image (image IM).
According to such a configuration, the processing load of the image generation means can be reduced.

The game machine of means C3
A gaming machine of means C1 or means C2,
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values having different advantages (setting values 1 to 6 having different ranges of random numbers for jackpot determination).
An advantageous state control means (CPU103) that can control an advantageous state (big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player, and
A notice effect control means (CPU 120 for effect control) capable of executing a notice effect (pseudo continuous effect, cut-in notice effect, super reach) suggesting that the advantageous state (big hit game state) is obtained.
A suggestion effect control means (CPU 120 for effect control) capable of executing a suggestion effect (third setting suggestion effect, fourth setting suggestion effect) for suggesting settings, and
A specific effect control means (divided effect) capable of executing a specific effect (divided effect) for updating the first display (first effect image 27TM100) and updating the second display (second effect image 27TM200) different from the first display. A gaming machine characterized by having a production control CPU 120).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the game machine that can be set to any one of the plurality of set values.

The game machine of means C4 is
Means C3 game machine
The advance notice effect control means (effect control CPU 120) has a mode of advance notice effect corresponding to the first display (first effect image 27TM100) and a notice effect corresponding to the second display (second effect image 27TM200). It is possible to make different modes (number of times the pseudo-continuous production is executed (2 times and 1 time), the mode of the cut-in image ("Great chance !!" and "Chance!"), And appearing during super reach. Characters to be (character B and character A))
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to further improve the interest of the specific production.

The game machine of means C5
A gaming machine of means C3 or means C4,
The specific effect control means (effect control CPU 120) terminates the update of one of the first display and the second display and continues the update of the other with the end of the specific effect (the divided effect). Even after the end, it is common with the effect information (images of ally character 27TM500 and enemy character B (27TM510B), and four star-shaped object images 27TM550) displayed on the first effect image 27TM100 immediately before the end of the split effect. Production information is continuously displayed on the screen)
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, even after the specific effect is completed, the update of either the first display or the second display is continued, so that the update of the display is continued. Can make people feel.

The game machine of means C6
The gaming machine according to any one of means C3 to means C5.
The suggestion effect is a first suggestion effect (first setting suggestion effect) in which the proportion of the special display (combination of [bell], [bell], and [bell] mini-slot symbols) is displayed differently depending on the set value. Including
The suggestion effect control means (effect control CPU 120) is a gaming machine characterized in that the first suggestion effect (first setting suggestion effect) corresponding to the second display (second effect image 27TM200) is limited.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused due to the execution of the first suggestion effect.

The game machine of means C7
The gaming machine according to any one of means C3 to means C6.
The suggestion effect includes a second suggestion effect (third setting suggestion effect (setting 6 final effect)) that suggests a specific set value (set value is “6”).
The suggestion effect control means (the effect control CPU 120) is a gaming machine characterized in that the second suggestion effect (third setting suggestion effect (setting 6 final effect)) corresponding to the second display is restricted.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused due to the execution of the second suggestion effect.

The game machine of means C8
The gaming machine according to any one of means C3 to means C7.
A movable body effect control means (CPU 120 for effect control) capable of executing a movable body effect for operating a movable body (movable body 27TM600), and
An operation promotion display means (CPU 120 for effect control) capable of displaying an operation promotion display (operation promotion display 27TM350) that prompts an operation, and
The operation unit (push button 31B) is provided with an operation unit control means (CPU 120 for effect control) capable of setting an operation promotion mode (blinking mode) for encouraging operation.
The operation promotion display means (effect control CPU 120) includes an operation promotion display (operation promotion display 27TM350 shown in FIG. 10-17 (9)) corresponding to the first display and an operation promotion display corresponding to the second display. (Operation promotion display 27TM350 shown in FIG. 10-16 (6)) can be displayed.
The operation unit control means (effect control CPU 120) does not use the operation unit as the operation promotion mode when the specific effect is being executed (as shown in FIG. 10-17 (9), the division effect is executed. In this state, the push button 31B remains in the normal mode (light-off mode)).
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from easily grasping whether to pay attention to the first display or the second display.

The game machine of means C9 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means C3 to means C8.
A mode of the push button 31B, which is capable of operating when the specific effect is not executed and does not operate when the specific effect is executed (in the case of a variable pattern not accompanied by a split effect). It is possible to determine the execution of the effect using the device for changing the push button 31B, but it is not possible to determine the execution of the effect using the device for changing the mode of the push button 31B in the case of a variation pattern accompanied by the divided effect).
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from easily grasping whether to pay attention to the first display or the second display.

The gaming machine of means C10
The gaming machine according to any one of means C3 to means C9.
A movable body effect control means (CPU 120 for effect control) capable of executing a movable body effect for operating a movable body (movable body 27TM600), and
A related information display control means (CPU 120 for effect control) capable of displaying related information (pseudo-ream effect image 27TM300A) related to the movable body effect is provided.
The movable body effect control means (effect control CPU 120) limits the movable body effect when the specific effect is being executed.
The related information display control means can display the related information when the specific effect is being executed (as shown in FIG. 10-16 (4), when the divided effect is being executed, a pseudo-ream. Corresponding to the execution of the effect [Y: Strong], the pseudo-ream effect image 27TM300 is displayed, but the movable body effect is not executed.)
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from easily grasping whether to pay attention to the first display or the second display.

The game machine of means C11
The gaming machine according to any one of means C3 to means C10.
A display body (image liquid crystal panel) capable of displaying a parallax image (three-dimensional image) in which an image for the right eye and an image for the left eye are displayed alternately in the horizontal direction, and a display body provided in front of the display body, the player's left eye. It is provided with an image display means (CPU 120 for effect control) having a parallax forming body (lenticular sheet) for preventing the player from visually recognizing the image for the right eye and preventing the player from visually recognizing the image for the left eye. ,
The image display means (display control unit 123) limits the parallax image display when the specific effect is being executed (the stereoscopic image is not displayed when the division effect is being executed).
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from easily grasping whether to pay attention to the first display or the second display.

The game machine of means C12
The gaming machine according to any one of means C3 to means C11.
Corresponding display control means (CPU 120 for effect control) capable of displaying the corresponding display (hold display, active display) corresponding to the variable display (variable display), and
A change effect control means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a change effect (first change effect) for changing the display mode of the corresponding display is provided.
The corresponding display control means (effect control CPU 120) displays the corresponding display in an area (first reserved display area 27TM011, active display area 27TM031) different from both the first display and the second display.
The change effect control means (effect control CPU 120) limits the change effect when the specific effect is being executed (when the split effect is being executed, the display modes of the hold display and the active display are changed. I try not to let you
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the player can pay attention to the specific effect.

The gaming machine of means C13
The gaming machine according to any one of means C3 to means C12.
The advance notice effect control means (effect control CPU 120) has a first advance notice effect (one pseudo continuous effect) as the advance notice effect, and a second one having a higher ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state than the first advance notice effect. It is possible to execute a notice production (two pseudo continuous productions),
The specific effect control means (effect control CPU 120) ends the update of the second display (second effect image 27TM200) with the end of the specific effect (divided effect), and the first display (first effect). Continue to update image 27TM100),
The rate at which the second notice effect is executed in response to the first display is higher than the rate at which the second notice effect is executed in response to the second display (second effect image with a short display period). The first production image 27TM100, which has a longer display period, has a higher rate of displaying production information with a high expectation of big hits than the 27TM200).
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the player has the expectation that the first display is the one in which the second notice effect is executed, and the update will be continued even after the end of the specific effect. , It is possible to improve the interest of a specific production.

The gaming machine of means C14
The gaming machine according to any one of means C3 to means C13.
A variable display means (CPU103) that executes variable display (variable display) based on a variable display pattern (variable pattern) is provided.
The specific effect control means (effect control CPU 120) can execute a specific effect (divided effect) corresponding to the variable display pattern (variable pattern), and the timing of ending the specific effect corresponds to the variable display pattern. A gaming machine characterized in that it is set at any one of a plurality of end timings (TA1 timing and TA2 timing as shown in FIG. 10-8).
According to such a configuration, it is not necessary to store individual effect data for each variable display pattern accompanied by a specific effect, and it is possible to prevent the storage capacity of the effect data from being excessively increased.

As shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (FIG. 12), it is possible to set one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player, and it corresponds to the setting value before and after the setting change. A game machine that displays a character image has been proposed. For a gaming machine that can be set to any of a plurality of set values, as described in JP-A-2010-201002 (FIG. 12), when an effect of suggesting the setting is executed. In addition, it is preferable that the player feels the interest. The inventions relating to the means A1 to the means A12 and the inventions relating to the means B1 to the means B12 have been made in view of the above-mentioned actual conditions, and the game can be set to any one of a plurality of set values. The purpose is to improve the interest of the production related to the machine.

The game machine of means A1
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values having different advantages (setting values 1 to 6 having different ranges of random numbers for jackpot determination).
An advantageous state control means (CPU103) that can control an advantageous state (big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player, and
A notice effect control means (CPU 120 for effect control) capable of executing a notice effect (pseudo continuous effect, cut-in notice effect, super reach) suggesting that the advantageous state (big hit game state) is obtained.
A suggestion effect control means (CPU 120 for effect control) capable of executing a suggestion effect (third setting suggestion effect, fourth setting suggestion effect) for suggesting settings, and
A specific effect control means (divided effect) capable of executing a specific effect (divided effect) for updating the first display (first effect image 27TM100) and updating the second display (second effect image 27TM200) different from the first display. With a CPU 120) for effect control,
The advance notice effect control means (effect control CPU 120) is a pseudo that suggests a display result of the change display determined in the advance notice effect (change start time effect determination process) corresponding to the first display (first effect image 27TM100). It is possible to execute the advance notice effect (pseudo continuous effect, cut-in notice effect, super reach as the image in the movie) corresponding to the second display (second effect image 27TM200) and the continuous effect, cut-in notice effect, super reach). Yes,
The suggestion effect control means (effect control CPU 120) limits the suggestion effect corresponding to the second display (in the second effect image display area 27TM200A on which the second effect image 27TM200 is displayed, the variation pattern is supported. The specified movie will be played, and the setting suggestion effect will not be executed.)
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, by limiting the suggestion effect corresponding to the second display, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused due to the execution of the suggestion effect and improve the interest of the suggestion effect. ..

The game machine of means A2
It is a game machine of means A1
The advance notice effect control means (effect control CPU 120) has a mode of advance notice effect corresponding to the first display (first effect image 27TM100) and a notice effect corresponding to the second display (second effect image 27TM200). It is possible to make different modes (number of times the pseudo-continuous production is executed (2 times and 1 time), the mode of the cut-in image ("Great chance !!" and "Chance!"), And appearing during super reach. Characters to be (character B and character A))
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to further improve the interest of the specific production.

The game machine of means A3
A gaming machine of means A1 or means A2,
The specific effect control means (effect control CPU 120) terminates the update of one of the first display and the second display and continues the update of the other with the end of the specific effect (the divided effect). Even after the end, it is common with the effect information (images of ally character 27TM500 and enemy character B (27TM510B), and four star-shaped object images 27TM550) displayed on the first effect image 27TM100 immediately before the end of the split effect. Production information is continuously displayed on the screen)
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, even after the specific effect is completed, the update of either the first display or the second display is continued, so that the update of the display is continued. Can make people feel.

The game machine of means A4
The gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to means A3.
The suggestion effect is a first suggestion effect (first setting suggestion effect) in which the proportion of the special display (combination of [bell], [bell], and [bell] mini-slot symbols) is displayed differently depending on the set value. Including
The suggestion effect control means (effect control CPU 120) is a gaming machine characterized in that the first suggestion effect (first setting suggestion effect) corresponding to the second display (second effect image 27TM200) is limited.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused due to the execution of the first suggestion effect.

The game machine of means A5
The gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to means A4.
The suggestion effect includes a second suggestion effect (third setting suggestion effect (setting 6 final effect)) that suggests a specific set value (set value is “6”).
The suggestion effect control means (the effect control CPU 120) is a gaming machine characterized in that the second suggestion effect (third setting suggestion effect (setting 6 final effect)) corresponding to the second display is restricted.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused due to the execution of the second suggestion effect.

The game machine of means A6
The gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to means A5.
A movable body effect control means (CPU 120 for effect control) capable of executing a movable body effect for operating a movable body (movable body 27TM600), and
An operation promotion display means (CPU 120 for effect control) capable of displaying an operation promotion display (operation promotion display 27TM350) that prompts an operation, and
The operation unit (push button 31B) is provided with an operation unit control means (CPU 120 for effect control) capable of setting an operation promotion mode (blinking mode) for encouraging operation.
The operation promotion display means (effect control CPU 120) includes an operation promotion display (operation promotion display 27TM350 shown in FIG. 10-17 (9)) corresponding to the first display and an operation promotion display corresponding to the second display. (Operation promotion display 27TM350 shown in FIG. 10-16 (6)) can be displayed.
The operation unit control means (effect control CPU 120) does not use the operation unit as the operation promotion mode when the specific effect is being executed (as shown in FIG. 10-17 (9), the division effect is executed. In this state, the push button 31B remains in the normal mode (light-off mode)).
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from easily grasping whether to pay attention to the first display or the second display.

The game machine of means A7
The gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to means A6.
A mode of the push button 31B, which is capable of operating when the specific effect is not executed and does not operate when the specific effect is executed (in the case of a variable pattern not accompanied by a split effect). It is possible to determine the execution of the effect using the device for changing the push button 31B, but it is not possible to determine the execution of the effect using the device for changing the mode of the push button 31B in the case of a variation pattern accompanied by the divided effect).
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from easily grasping whether to pay attention to the first display or the second display.

The game machine of means A8
The gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to means A7.
A movable body effect control means (CPU 120 for effect control) capable of executing a movable body effect for operating a movable body (movable body 27TM600), and
A related information display control means (CPU 120 for effect control) capable of displaying related information (pseudo-ream effect image 27TM300A) related to the movable body effect is provided.
The movable body effect control means (effect control CPU 120) limits the movable body effect when the specific effect is being executed.
The related information display control means can display the related information when the specific effect is being executed (as shown in FIG. 10-16 (4), when the divided effect is being executed, a pseudo-ream. Corresponding to the execution of the effect [Y: Strong], the pseudo-ream effect image 27TM300 is displayed, but the movable body effect is not executed.)
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from easily grasping whether to pay attention to the first display or the second display.

The game machine of means A9
The gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to means A8.
A display body (image liquid crystal panel) capable of displaying a parallax image (three-dimensional image) in which an image for the right eye and an image for the left eye are displayed alternately in the horizontal direction, and a display body provided in front of the display body, the player's left eye. It is provided with an image display means (CPU 120 for effect control) having a parallax forming body (lenticular sheet) for preventing the player from visually recognizing the image for the right eye and preventing the player from visually recognizing the image for the left eye. ,
The image display means (display control unit 123) limits the parallax image display when the specific effect is being executed (the stereoscopic image is not displayed when the division effect is being executed).
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from easily grasping whether to pay attention to the first display or the second display.

The game machine of means A10
The gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to means A9.
Corresponding display control means (CPU 120 for effect control) capable of displaying the corresponding display (hold display, active display) corresponding to the variable display (variable display), and
A change effect control means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a change effect (first change effect) for changing the display mode of the corresponding display is provided.
The corresponding display control means (effect control CPU 120) displays the corresponding display in an area (first reserved display area 27TM011, active display area 27TM031) different from both the first display and the second display.
The change effect control means (effect control CPU 120) limits the change effect when the specific effect is being executed (when the split effect is being executed, the display modes of the hold display and the active display are changed. I try not to let you
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the player can pay attention to the specific effect.

The game machine of means A11
The gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to means A10.
The advance notice effect control means (effect control CPU 120) has a first advance notice effect (one pseudo continuous effect) as the advance notice effect, and a second one having a higher ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state than the first advance notice effect. It is possible to execute a notice production (two pseudo continuous productions),
The specific effect control means (effect control CPU 120) ends the update of the second display (second effect image 27TM200) with the end of the specific effect (divided effect), and the first display (first effect). Continue to update image 27TM100),
The rate at which the second notice effect is executed in response to the first display is higher than the rate at which the second notice effect is executed in response to the second display (second effect image with a short display period). The first production image 27TM100, which has a longer display period, has a higher rate of displaying production information with a high expectation of big hits than the 27TM200).
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the player has the expectation that the first display is the one in which the second notice effect is executed, and the update will be continued even after the end of the specific effect. , It is possible to improve the interest of a specific production.

The game machine of means A12
The gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to means A11.
A variable display means (CPU103) that executes variable display (variable display) based on a variable display pattern (variable pattern) is provided.
The specific effect control means (effect control CPU 120) can execute a specific effect (divided effect) corresponding to the variable display pattern (variable pattern), and the timing of ending the specific effect corresponds to the variable display pattern. A gaming machine characterized in that it is set at any one of a plurality of end timings (TA1 timing and TA2 timing as shown in FIG. 10-8).
According to such a configuration, it is not necessary to store individual effect data for each variable display pattern accompanied by a specific effect, and it is possible to prevent the storage capacity of the effect data from being excessively increased.

The game machine of means B1
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values having different advantages (setting values 1 to 6 having different ranges of random numbers for jackpot determination).
An advantageous state control means (CPU103) that can control an advantageous state (big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player, and
A notice effect control means (CPU 120 for effect control) capable of executing a notice effect (pseudo continuous effect, cut-in notice effect, super reach) suggesting that the advantageous state (big hit game state) is obtained.
A suggestion effect control means (CPU 120 for effect control) capable of executing a suggestion effect (fifth setting suggestion effect) for suggesting a setting, and
A specific effect control means (divided effect) capable of executing a specific effect (divided effect) for updating the first display (first effect image 27TM100) and updating the second display (second effect image 27TM200) different from the first display. With a CPU 120) for effect control,
The advance notice effect control means (effect control CPU 120) is a pseudo that suggests a display result of the change display determined in the advance notice effect (change start time effect determination process) corresponding to the first display (first effect image 27TM100). Continuous production, cut-in notice production, super reach), the second display (second production image 27TM200), and notice production corresponding to the second display (pseudo continuous production, cut-in notice production, super reach as images in the movie) ) Is feasible,
The suggestion effect control means (effect control CPU 120) can make the mode of the suggestion effect corresponding to the first display different from the mode of the suggestion effect corresponding to the second display (first effect image 27TM100). The execution rate (40%) of the fifth setting suggestion effect corresponding to is higher than the execution rate (20%) of the fifth setting suggestion effect corresponding to the second effect image 27TM200).
A game machine characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of suggestive production.

The game machine of means B2
It is a game machine of means B1
The advance notice effect control means (effect control CPU 120) has a mode of advance notice effect corresponding to the first display (first effect image 27TM100) and a notice effect corresponding to the second display (second effect image 27TM200). It is possible to make different modes (number of times the pseudo-continuous production is executed (2 times and 1 time), the mode of the cut-in image ("Great chance !!" and "Chance!"), And appearing during super reach. Characters to be (character B and character A))
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to further improve the interest of the specific production.

The game machine of means B3
A game machine of means B1 or means B2,
The specific effect control means (effect control CPU 120) terminates the update of one of the first display and the second display and continues the update of the other with the end of the specific effect (the divided effect). Even after the end, it is common with the effect information (images of ally character 27TM500 and enemy character B (27TM510B), and four star-shaped object images 27TM550) displayed on the first effect image 27TM100 immediately before the end of the split effect. Production information is continuously displayed on the screen)
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, even after the specific effect is completed, the update of either the first display or the second display is continued, so that the update of the display is continued. Can make people feel.

The game machine of means B4
The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to B3.
The suggestion effect is a first suggestion effect (first setting suggestion effect) in which the proportion of the special display (combination of [bell], [bell], and [bell] mini-slot symbols) is displayed differently depending on the set value. Including
The suggestion effect control means (effect control CPU 120) is a gaming machine characterized in that the first suggestion effect (first setting suggestion effect) corresponding to the second display (second effect image 27TM200) is limited.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused due to the execution of the first suggestion effect.

The game machine of means B5
The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to B4.
The suggestion effect includes a second suggestion effect (third setting suggestion effect (setting 6 final effect)) that suggests a specific set value (set value is “6”).
The suggestion effect control means (the effect control CPU 120) is a gaming machine characterized in that the second suggestion effect (third setting suggestion effect (setting 6 final effect)) corresponding to the second display is restricted.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused due to the execution of the second suggestion effect.

The game machine of means B6
The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to B5.
A movable body effect control means (CPU 120 for effect control) capable of executing a movable body effect for operating a movable body (movable body 27TM600), and
An operation promotion display means (CPU 120 for effect control) capable of displaying an operation promotion display (operation promotion display 27TM350) that prompts an operation, and
The operation unit (push button 31B) is provided with an operation unit control means (CPU 120 for effect control) capable of setting an operation promotion mode (blinking mode) for encouraging operation.
The operation promotion display means (effect control CPU 120) includes an operation promotion display (operation promotion display 27TM350 shown in FIG. 10-17 (9)) corresponding to the first display and an operation promotion display corresponding to the second display. (Operation promotion display 27TM350 shown in FIG. 10-16 (6)) can be displayed.
The operation unit control means (effect control CPU 120) does not use the operation unit as the operation promotion mode when the specific effect is being executed (as shown in FIG. 10-17 (9), the division effect is executed. In this state, the push button 31B remains in the normal mode (light-off mode)).
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from easily grasping whether to pay attention to the first display or the second display.

The game machine of means B7
The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to B6.
A mode of the push button 31B, which is capable of operating when the specific effect is not executed and does not operate when the specific effect is executed (in the case of a variable pattern not accompanied by a split effect). It is possible to determine the execution of the effect using the device for changing the push button 31B, but it is not possible to determine the execution of the effect using the device for changing the mode of the push button 31B in the case of a variation pattern accompanied by the divided effect).
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from easily grasping whether to pay attention to the first display or the second display.

The game machine of means B8
The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to B7.
A movable body effect control means (CPU 120 for effect control) capable of executing a movable body effect for operating a movable body (movable body 27TM600), and
A related information display control means (CPU 120 for effect control) capable of displaying related information (pseudo-ream effect image 27TM300A) related to the movable body effect is provided.
The movable body effect control means (effect control CPU 120) limits the movable body effect when the specific effect is being executed.
The related information display control means can display the related information when the specific effect is being executed (as shown in FIG. 10-16 (4), when the divided effect is being executed, a pseudo-ream. Corresponding to the execution of the effect [Y: Strong], the pseudo-ream effect image 27TM300 is displayed, but the movable body effect is not executed.)
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from easily grasping whether to pay attention to the first display or the second display.

The game machine of means B9 is
The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to B8.
A display body (image liquid crystal panel) capable of displaying a parallax image (three-dimensional image) in which an image for the right eye and an image for the left eye are displayed alternately in the horizontal direction, and a display body provided in front of the display body, the player's left eye. It is provided with an image display means (CPU 120 for effect control) having a parallax forming body (lenticular sheet) for preventing the player from visually recognizing the image for the right eye and preventing the player from visually recognizing the image for the left eye. ,
The image display means (display control unit 123) limits the parallax image display when the specific effect is being executed (the stereoscopic image is not displayed when the division effect is being executed).
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from easily grasping whether to pay attention to the first display or the second display.

The game machine of means B10
The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to B9.
Corresponding display control means (CPU 120 for effect control) capable of displaying the corresponding display (hold display, active display) corresponding to the variable display (variable display), and
A change effect control means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a change effect (first change effect) for changing the display mode of the corresponding display is provided.
The corresponding display control means (effect control CPU 120) displays the corresponding display in an area (first reserved display area 27TM011, active display area 27TM031) different from both the first display and the second display.
The change effect control means (effect control CPU 120) limits the change effect when the specific effect is being executed (when the split effect is being executed, the display modes of the hold display and the active display are changed. I try not to let you
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the player can pay attention to the specific effect.

The gaming machine of means B11
The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to B10.
The advance notice effect control means (effect control CPU 120) has a first advance notice effect (one pseudo continuous effect) as the advance notice effect, and a second one having a higher ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state than the first advance notice effect. It is possible to execute a notice production (two pseudo continuous productions),
The specific effect control means (effect control CPU 120) ends the update of the second display (second effect image 27TM200) with the end of the specific effect (divided effect), and the first display (first effect). Continue to update image 27TM100),
The rate at which the second notice effect is executed in response to the first display is higher than the rate at which the second notice effect is executed in response to the second display (second effect image with a short display period). The first production image 27TM100, which has a longer display period, has a higher rate of displaying production information with a high expectation of big hits than the 27TM200).
A game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the player has the expectation that the first display is the one in which the second notice effect is executed, and the update will be continued even after the end of the specific effect. , It is possible to improve the interest of a specific production.

The gaming machine of means B12
The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to B11.
A variable display means (CPU103) that executes variable display (variable display) based on a variable display pattern (variable pattern) is provided.
The specific effect control means (effect control CPU 120) can execute a specific effect (divided effect) corresponding to the variable display pattern (variable pattern), and the timing of ending the specific effect corresponds to the variable display pattern. A gaming machine characterized in that it is set at any one of a plurality of end timings (TA1 timing and TA2 timing as shown in FIG. 10-8).
According to such a configuration, it is not necessary to store individual effect data for each variable display pattern accompanied by a specific effect, and it is possible to prevent the storage capacity of the effect data from being excessively increased.

Further, the embodiment for carrying out the invention described later includes the inventions according to the following means 1 to 7. Conventionally, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-136430 in a game machine,
As a game machine, a game ball, which is a game medium, is launched into a game area by a launching device, and when the game ball wins a prize area such as a prize opening provided in the game area, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the player. There is something that can be done. Further, a variable display device capable of variable display (also referred to as “variation”) of the identification information is provided, and when the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the specific display result in the variable display device, the gaming state (game). The state of the machine. Therefore, specifically, the state in which the game machine is controlled) is changed to give a predetermined game value to the player (so-called pachinko machine).
Further, after setting a predetermined number of bets for one game on a predetermined game medium, the player operates the start lever to start variable display of the identification information by the variable display device, and the player changes each. By operating the stop button provided corresponding to the display device, the variable display of the identification information is stopped within the range of the maximum delay time predetermined from the operation timing, and the variable display of all the variable display devices is displayed. When a prize is generated according to the display result derived when the game is stopped, a predetermined game medium determined in advance is paid out according to the prize, and a specific prize is generated, the player sets the game state to the predetermined game value. There is something that is configured to give to (so-called slot machine).
The game value means that the state of the variable winning ball device provided in the game area of the game machine is in an advantageous state for the player who is likely to win a prize, or is in an advantageous state for the player. It is to generate rights and to be in a state where the conditions for paying out prize balls are easily satisfied.
In the pachinko gaming machine, as a display result of the variable display of the special symbol (identification information) started in the variable display device based on the winning of the game ball in the starting winning opening, a predetermined specific display mode is derived and displayed. If so, a "big hit" will occur. The derivation display is to finally stop and display the symbol (final stop symbol). When a big hit occurs, for example, the big winning opening is opened a predetermined number of times to shift to a big hit game state in which a hit ball is easy to win. Then, in each opening period, when a predetermined number (for example, 10) is won in the large winning opening, the large winning opening is closed. The number of times the large winning opening is opened is fixed to a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 rounds). An opening time (for example, 29 seconds) is determined for each opening, and even if the number of winnings does not reach a predetermined number, the large winning opening is closed when the opening time elapses. Hereinafter, the opening period of each large winning opening may be referred to as a round. In addition, a game in a round may be called a round game.
Further, in the variable display device, symbols other than the symbol that becomes the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol among the left, middle, and right symbols) are stopped and shaken in a state of being consistent with a specific display result for a predetermined time. A big hit can occur before the final result is displayed due to movement, enlargement / reduction or deformation, multiple symbols fluctuating synchronously with the same symbol, or the positions of the displayed symbols being swapped. The effect performed in the state where the sex continues (hereinafter, these states are referred to as the reach state) is referred to as the reach effect. In addition, the reach state and its state are referred to as a reach mode. Further, the variable display including the reach effect is called the reach variable display. Then, when the display result of the symbol that is variablely displayed on the variable display device is not a specific display result, it becomes "off" and the variable display state ends. The player plays the game while enjoying how to generate a big hit.
In such a game machine, a specific image can be displayed during execution of a specific effect, and a specific image according to a normal mode and a special mode suggesting that the expectation of being controlled in an advantageous state is higher than that of the normal mode are specified. Some are configured so that an image can be displayed and a specific image can be displayed by adding a special effect element when displaying a specific image in a special mode. For example, in Patent Document 1, when the first try effect (specific image according to a special aspect) is executed, the player is likely to display the try information (special effect element) and enter the specific game state. It is described that the try information is not displayed when the second try effect (specific image according to the normal mode), which is less likely to be in the specific game state than the first try effect, is executed.
However, when a specific image in a normal mode is displayed, it is difficult for the player to recognize that the specific image is a preview image whose mode changes according to the degree of expectation that the specific image is controlled in an advantageous state, and the player is assigned to the specific image. I can't pay attention to it.

Therefore, it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of making a player recognize that a specific image is a preview image and drawing the player's attention to the specific image.

(Means 1) The other game machine is a game machine that can play a game and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player, and suggests whether or not the game is controlled to the advantageous state. In step 097IWS104 of the effect control CPU 120, a process table including superreach A to C is selected and steps 097IWS106 and S305 are executed. Image display means (for example, character image 097IW11, character image 097IW21) capable of displaying a specific image (for example, a chance-up image) and a predetermined image (for example, character image 097IW11, character image 097IW21) different from the specific image during execution of the specific effect. In step 097IWS104 of the effect control CPU 120, a process table including super reach A to C and a chance-up effect is selected and steps 097IWS106 and S305 are executed), and the specific effect execution means is at least the first specific effect (a part where the specific effect execution means is executed. For example, a plurality of types of specific effects (for example, super reach A to C) including a super reach A) and a second specific effect (for example, super reach B) can be executed, and the image display means can at least display the specific image as a specific image. , The first specific image (for example, image A1, image A2, image A3, image A4) can be displayed during the execution of the first specific effect, and the second specific image (for example, image) is displayed during the execution of the second specific effect. B1, image B2, image B3) can be displayed, and a specific image in a normal mode (for example, white) and a special mode (eg,) suggesting that the expectation of being controlled in an advantageous state is higher than that in the normal mode. It is possible to display a specific image in blue, green, red, and rainbow colors, and the predetermined image is a display mode that is not related to the degree of expectation controlled in an advantageous state (for example, FIGS. 15-9 to 15-16). As shown in, the display mode of the character image 097IW11 and the character image 097IW21 does not change), and the image display means has a first special effect element (for example, blue, green, red, rainbow) when displaying a specific image according to the special mode. A specific image can be displayed by adding a color display color effect image), and a second special effect element (for example, a white display color) that is different from the first special effect element when displaying a specific image in a normal mode is displayed. (Effect image) can be added to display a specific image (see FIGS. 15-9 to 15-16). According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player recognize that the specific image is a preview image, and it is possible to draw the player's attention to the specific image.

(Means 2) In the means 1, the image display means first in a different mode (for example, blue, green, red, rainbow color) depending on the degree of expectation controlled in an advantageous state during the execution of the first specific effect. A specific image can be displayed, and the first specific effect element (for example, an effect image of blue, green, red, and rainbow display colors) of the display mode corresponding to the mode of the first specific image is added. It may be configured so that an image can be displayed (see FIGS. 15-9 to 15-16). According to such a configuration, it is possible to emphasize the difference in the mode of the specific image depending on the display mode of the added first special effect element.

(Means 3) In means 1 or means 2, the image display means can display an image of a common mode (for example, image X) as a first specific image and a second specific image, and can display an image of the common mode. When displaying, it is possible to display the first specific image and the second specific image by adding a common first special effect element (for example, an effect image of a rainbow-colored display color) (FIGS. 15-4 and 15). -5) may be configured as follows. According to such a configuration, the player can be made to recognize that the image of the common mode is displayed as the specific image.

(Means 4) Execution of a notification effect that can execute a notification effect (for example, output of a notification sound) when a specific image is displayed by adding a first special effect element in any one of the means 1 to the means 3. A means (for example, a portion of the effect control CPU 120 for executing step 097IWS311) is provided, and the notification effect executing means does not execute the notification effect when a specific image is displayed by adding the second special effect element (for example). , The effect control CPU 120 may be configured so as not to shift to step 097IWS311 when it is Y in step 097IWS310). According to such a configuration, the player can be made aware of it only when the expectation of being controlled in an advantageous state is high.

(Means 5) In any one of means 1 to means 4, the image display means changes a specific image to which a second special effect element is added into a specific image to which a first special effect element is added (for example, a chance). It may be configured so that the up effects A7, B7, C5) can be executed (see FIGS. 15-4 to 15-6). According to such a configuration, the expectation can be maintained even when the specific image is displayed by adding the second special effect element.

(Means 6) In any one of the means 1 to the means 5, the specific effect executing means includes the effect of the first period (for example, the effect of the first half of the effect period of Super Reach A to C) and the first. The effect of the second period (for example, the effect of the latter half of the effect period of Super Reach A to C) including the effect of notifying whether or not the control is performed in an advantageous state after the period (for example, the notification of the result of success or failure) It is possible to execute the specific effect including, and the image display means can display the specific image during the first period, and restricts the display of the specific image during the second period (see FIG. 15-8). It may be configured. According to such a configuration, the player's consciousness can be focused on whether or not the control is performed in an advantageous state.

(Means 7) A gaming machine that can be set to any of a plurality of set values (for example, set values 1 to 6) having different advantages for the player in any of means 1 to means 6 (means 7). For example, in the pachinko gaming machine 1), a predetermined effect executing means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a predetermined effect in any of a plurality of types of effect modes) as a pattern during variable display. A setting suggestion based on any of PT-1 to PT-7, or a portion capable of executing a reach notice based on patterns PT-8 and PT-9) is provided, and the effect mode of the predetermined effect is controlled to an advantageous state. A special mode for suggesting that (for example, a reach notice based on the special pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9) and a specific mode for suggesting the setting (for example, patterns PT-1 to PT for a specific pattern). When the predetermined effect executing means can execute both the predetermined effect of the special aspect and the predetermined effect of the specific aspect (for example, the variable display of the symbol is started) including the setting suggestion based on any of -7. At the timing when a predetermined period elapses from (the timing before the variable display mode reaches the reach), the predetermined effect of the special mode can be executed with priority over the predetermined effect of the specific mode (for example, the effect control CPU 120). However, in the variable display effect determination process shown in FIG. 14-15 of the first embodiment, when the pattern PT-9 is won in the reach notice lottery, the reach notice (high) based on the pattern PT-9 is executed in the 103SGS294. Even if the part to be decided with priority over the setting suggestion or the lottery of the setting suggestion is executed in 103SGS296, if the setting suggestion (high) based on the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 is not won, the pattern in 103SGS301 A part in which the execution of the reach notice (low) based on the PT-8 is determined with priority over the setting suggestion (low) based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4. / The effect control CPU 120 determines the reach notice. (High)> Setting suggestion (High)> Reach notice (Low)> Setting suggestion (Low) A part that determines the execution of an effect based on any of patterns PT1 to PT-9 at a ratio (Modification 1) 14-20))). According to such a configuration, when the control is performed in an advantageous state, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect of a specific mode from being executed and the effect from becoming inappropriate.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the game control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of 1st special symbol process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control process process. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structure example of a pachinko game machine. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structure of the payout control board. It is a rear view which shows the pachinko game machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. (1) to (3) are explanatory views showing the effect mode of the setting suggestion effect, and (4) is an explanatory diagram showing a table for determining the effect mode of the setting suggestion effect. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of power-on. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of power-on. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of power-on. It is a timing diagram which shows the output period of a security signal. It is explanatory drawing which shows the notification example when the setting changing flag is set at the time of power-on. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of power-on. (1) is an explanatory diagram showing control when a power cut occurs before the set value is fixed, and (2) shows control when a power cut occurs after the set value is fixed. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of each display information displayed on an image display apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the change effect determination process which is executed at the time of a start winning a prize. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a table for determining the final display mode of the active display, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a table for determining a change pattern of the active display. It is explanatory drawing which shows the table for determining the change pattern of the hold display. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect determination process which is executed at the start of fluctuation. (G) is an explanatory diagram showing a table for determining whether or not to execute the first setting suggestion, and (H1) and (H2) are expected degree notices used when executing the first setting suggestion effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the table for deciding whether or not the effect is executed, and (I1) and (I2) are for deciding whether or not the expectation notice effect is executed, which is used when the first setting suggestion effect is not executed. It is explanatory drawing which shows the table of, (J) is explanatory drawing which shows the table for determining the effect mode of the 2nd change effect. (K) is an explanatory diagram showing a winning combination determination table of the expectation degree advance notice effect used when executing the first setting suggestion effect, and (L) is used when not executing the first setting suggestion effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the establishment combination determination table of the expectation degree notice effect, and (M) is the explanatory diagram which shows the table for determining whether or not the second setting suggestion effect is executed. It is a time chart showing the execution timing of various effects. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production mode concerning various productions. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production mode concerning various productions. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the mini reel information. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production information in the division production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the effect mode concerning the division effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern determination table for detachment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern determination table for a big hit. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production decision processing at the time of a start winning a prize. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production mode concerning a movie A. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production mode concerning a movie B. It is a time chart which shows the playback end timing of each movie. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production mode concerning the pseudo-continuous production. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect determination processing at the time of a change start in 1st Embodiment. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an execution / non-execution determination table of the third setting suggestion effect, (B) is an explanatory diagram showing an execution / non-execution determination table of the fourth setting suggestion effect, and (C) is a cut-in notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the execution presence / absence determination table of. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the effect mode related to the third setting suggestion effect, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the effect mode related to the fourth setting suggestion effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production mode regarding the cut-in notice production. It is a time chart which shows the execution timing of various effects in 1st Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production mode concerning various productions in 1st Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production mode concerning various productions in 1st Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production mode concerning various productions in 1st Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production mode concerning various productions in 1st Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production mode concerning various productions in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect determination processing at the time of a change start in 2nd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the execution presence or absence determination table of the 5th setting suggestion effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the effect mode regarding the 5th setting suggestion effect. It is a time chart which shows the execution timing of various effects in 2nd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production mode concerning various productions in 2nd Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the display control part. It is explanatory drawing which shows the drawing method of 3D image processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the composition processing of a production image and an object. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the change which rotates an object after a synthesis process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between a viewpoint and an object in a virtual three-dimensional space. It is a screen view which shows the display mode of the image projected on the virtual screen and the background image. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko game machine. It is a rear perspective view of a pachinko machine. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating production control commands. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is a figure which illustrates the fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the jackpot type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of each big hit. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table (for jackpot A), and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table (for jackpot B and jackpot C), (C). Is an explanatory diagram showing a variation pattern determination table for small hits. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern determination table for detachment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the received command buffer at the time of a moving prize. (A) is a front view of a display monitor, (B) is a view showing a display mode of the display monitor, and (C) is an explanatory view of display contents. It is a flowchart which shows the game control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variable display start setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect determination processing during variable display. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the effect type during variable display. (A) is a diagram showing the effect (reach notice) type determination table A, and (B) is a diagram showing the effect (setting suggestion) type determination table B. (A) to (C) are diagrams showing the flow of the effect during variable display. (A) is a diagram showing an effect mode of reach notice (low) based on pattern PT-8, and (B) is a diagram showing an effect mode of reach notice (high) based on pattern PT-9. (A) is a flowchart showing an example of the effect determination process during variable display as a modification 1, and (B) is a diagram showing a determination ratio of reach notice and setting suggestion when the effect type determination table C is used. (A) is a diagram showing an effect period of the variable display effect as in the second embodiment, and (B) is a diagram showing an effect execution determination table during variable display. (A) is a diagram showing the execution decision ratio of reach notice and setting suggestion in the first period and the second period at the set value 1 and the set value 6 when the fluctuation pattern is normal reach, and (B) is set when the fluctuation pattern is super reach. It is a figure which shows the execution decision ratio of the reach notice and the setting suggestion in the 1st period and the 2nd period in the value 1 and the setting value 6. It is a figure which shows the effect type determination ratio during variable display in the 1st period when the fluctuation pattern is a normal reach. It is a figure which shows the effect type determination ratio during variable display in the 2nd period when the fluctuation pattern is a normal reach. It is a figure which shows the effect type determination ratio during variable display in the 1st period when the fluctuation pattern is super reach. It is a figure which shows the effect type determination ratio during variable display in the 2nd period when the fluctuation pattern is super reach. (A) is a diagram showing the execution decision ratio of the reach notice and the setting suggestion in the first period and the second period in the set value 1 and the set value 6 when the fluctuation pattern is the normal reach in the third embodiment, and (B) is the figure showing the execution decision ratio of the setting suggestion. It is a figure which shows the execution decision ratio of the reach notice and the setting suggestion in the 1st period and the 2nd period in the set value 1 and the set value 6 in super reach. It is a figure which shows the effect type determination ratio during variable display in the 1st period when the fluctuation pattern is a normal reach. It is a figure which shows the effect type determination ratio during variable display in the 2nd period when the fluctuation pattern is a normal reach. It is a figure which shows the effect type determination ratio during variable display in the 1st period when the fluctuation pattern is super reach. It is a figure which shows the effect type determination ratio during variable display in the 2nd period when the fluctuation pattern is super reach. It is a figure which shows the production period of the effect during variable display as Example 4. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect determination processing during variable display as Example 4. (A) is a diagram showing the execution decision ratio of the reach notice and the setting suggestion in the first period at the set value 1 and the set value 6 in the fluctuation pattern common to the normal reach and the super reach in the fourth embodiment, and (B) is the fluctuation pattern. The figure showing the execution decision ratio of the reach notice and the setting suggestion in the second period at the set value 1 and the set value 6 in the normal reach, (C) shows the fluctuation pattern in the second period in the set value 1 and the set value 6 in the super reach. It is a figure which shows the execution decision ratio of the reach notice and the setting suggestion of. It is a figure which shows the effect type determination ratio during variable display in the 1st period. It is a figure which shows the effect type determination ratio during variable display in the 2nd period when the fluctuation pattern is a normal reach. It is a figure which shows the effect type determination ratio during variable display in the 2nd period when the fluctuation pattern is super reach. It is a figure which shows the production period of the effect during variable display as a modification 2. (A) is a diagram showing the execution decision ratio of the reach notice and the setting suggestion in the first period at the set value 1 and the set value 6 which are common to all the variation patterns in the modified example 2, and (B) is a diagram in which the variation pattern is normal reach / super reach. The figure showing the execution decision ratio of the reach notice and the setting suggestion in the second period in the set value 1 and the set value 6 in common, (C) shows the variation pattern common to the normal reach and the super reach, and the third in the set value 1 and the set value 6. It is a figure which shows the execution decision ratio of the reach notice and the setting suggestion in 3 periods. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the fluctuation pattern table. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display start setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the chance up effect setting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the chance up production decision table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the chance up production decision table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the chance up production decision table. It is a flowchart which shows the effect processing during variable display. It is a timing chart for explaining the display timing of the chance-up image and the success / failure result notification during the execution of the super reach. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the production mode of super reach. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the production mode of super reach. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the production mode of super reach. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the production mode of super reach. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the production mode of super reach. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the production mode of super reach. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the production mode of super reach. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the production mode of super reach.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1 etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1, showing an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly classified into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined ball launching device and is driven into the game area.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the right side of the game area), a variable display (also referred to as a special figure game) of a special symbol (also referred to as a special figure) as a plurality of types of special identification information is displayed. The first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to be performed are provided. Each of these consists of 7-segment LEDs and the like. The special symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off.

The "variable display" of the special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Fluctuations include update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. When the special symbol or the ordinary symbol described later is changed, a plurality of types of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative symbols described later, a plurality of types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. The variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is blinked and displayed. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). The variable display may be expressed as a variable display or a variable display.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a "second special symbol". Further, the special figure game using the first special figure is also referred to as a "first special figure game", and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a "second special figure game". It should be noted that there may be one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol.

Further, below the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, a right-handed display 26 for prompting a right-handed operation of aiming at the right side of the game area and performing a firing operation is provided. There is. The right-handed display 26 is composed of, for example, LEDs, and is lit and controlled by a game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103) mounted on the main board 11 (see FIG. 2).

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effects images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a decorative symbol (a symbol indicating a number or the like) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbol is synchronized with the first special figure game or the second special figure game. Is variablely displayed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, up and down) in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". Direction scroll display and update display). It should be noted that the special figure game and the variable display of the decorative pattern that are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

Further, for example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a display area for displaying the hold display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is held is provided. In this example, the first hold display area 5A for displaying the hold display corresponding to the variable display of the first special figure and the second hold display for displaying the hold display corresponding to the variable display of the second special figure. A region 5B is provided. A display area for displaying an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5. Hold display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display compatible display corresponding to variable display.

Further, on the right side of the image display device 5, a right-handed notification LED 37 for prompting a right-handed operation is provided. The right-handed notification LED 37 is lit and controlled by the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 (see FIG. 2).

The number of variable displays on hold is also called the number of stored items on hold. The number of reserved storage corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first reserved storage number, and the number of reserved storage corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second reserved storage number. Further, the total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as a total reserved storage number.

Further, at a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided, and the first hold indicator 25A has the number of LEDs lit. The first hold storage number is displayed, and the second hold display 25B displays the second hold storage number according to the number of LED lights.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A having a first starting winning opening is provided. The game ball that has won the first start winning opening is guided to the back surface of the game board 2 and is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A. When a game ball is detected by the first start port switch 22A, a predetermined number (1 piece) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information.

Further, a row of nails 19 is provided on the right side of the first start winning opening so that the game ball flowing down from the right side of the game area does not enter the area provided with the first starting winning opening. Has been done. In this way, by providing the row of nails 19 for preventing the game ball that has flowed down from the right side of the game area from entering, the game ball is launched by aiming at the left side of the game area (so-called left-handed strike). The game ball can be won in the first starting winning opening only when the operation) is performed.

In this example, since the row of nails 19 is provided, the game ball can be won in the first starting winning opening only when the left-handed operation is performed. Not limited to. For example, since the first start winning opening is provided on the left side of the game area, the game ball may be configured to be able to win the first starting winning opening only when the left-handed operation is performed, or the first starting winning opening may be won. A game ball may be configured to be able to win a prize in the first starting winning opening only when the left-handed operation is performed by providing the mouth on the left side of the game area and also providing the row of nails 19.

A passing gate 41 is provided on the right side of the image display device 5. The game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21.

Below the passage gate 41, a special variable winning ball device 7 that forms a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 extends in the left-right direction in a slightly inclined state, and moves the plate-shaped bottom member formed as the bottom surface of the flow path through which the game ball flows in the front-rear direction to move the bottom surface. The large winning opening located below the member is changed into an open state in which the game ball can win a prize (also referred to as an open state) and a closed state in which the game ball cannot win a prize (also referred to as a closed state). The special variable winning ball device 7 moves the bottom member forward in the jackpot game state that occurs when a specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. The bottom member is moved backward from the closed state in which the bottom member is moved forward toward the rear, and the opening control for opening the large winning opening, which is the winning area, is executed.

Below the special variable winning ball device 7, a special variable winning ball device 17 forming a special winning opening for small hits and a variable winning ball device 6B having a second starting winning opening are provided. FIG. 1 As shown in, a special variable winning ball device 17 is arranged on the left side, and a variable winning ball device 6B is arranged adjacent to the right side thereof. The special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B extend in the left-right direction in a slightly inclined state, and have a plate-shaped bottom member formed as the bottom surface of a flow path through which the game ball flows in the front-rear direction. By moving forward and backward, the game ball can be won in the special winning opening and the second starting winning opening located below the bottom member (also called the open state) and the game ball cannot be won in the closed state (closed state). Change to). The special variable winning ball device 17 has a bottom member in a small hit game state that occurs when a predetermined display result (small hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. The bottom member is moved backward from the closed state in which the bottom member is moved forward, and the opening control is executed so that the special winning opening, which is the winning area, is opened. Further, the variable winning ball device 6B moves the bottom member backward from the closed state in which the bottom member is moved forward toward the front when the symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 20. The opening control for opening the second starting winning opening, which is the winning area, is executed.

In this example, the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning ball device 17, and the variable winning ball device 6B are formed to have the same structure. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, since the bottom member of the special variable winning ball device 7 is formed so as to be slightly inclined from the upper left to the lower right, the game ball dropped on the special variable winning ball device 7 is formed. If the special variable winning ball device 7 is in the closed state, it moves on the special variable winning ball device 7 from the upper left to the lower right, and falls on the variable winning ball device 6B below it.

Further, in this example, the special variable winning ball device 17 is slightly larger than the variable winning ball device 6B. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, since the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B are formed in such a manner that the bottom surface member is slightly inclined from the upper right to the lower left, the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 17 are formed. The game ball on the winning ball device 6B moves from the upper right to the lower left on the special variable winning ball device 17 or the variable winning ball device 6B when the special variable winning ball device 17 or the variable winning ball device 6B is in the closed state. Go. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, since the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 6B are arranged adjacent to each other, the special variable winning ball device 7 is placed on the variable winning ball device 6B without winning a prize. If the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 6B is moved backward and the second starting winning opening is in the open state, the game ball wins the second starting winning opening and the special variable winning ball The game ball does not flow toward the device 17. On the other hand, if the second starting winning opening is not in the open state, the game ball moves on the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 6B and is guided toward the special variable winning ball device 17. At this time, if the bottom member of the special variable winning ball device 17 is moved backward and the special winning opening is in the open state, the game ball wins the special winning opening. Further, if the special winning opening is not open, the game ball moves on the bottom member of the special variable winning ball device 17 and falls toward the out opening as it is.

Further, in this example, the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning ball device 17, and the variable winning ball device 6B are formed with a plurality of regulation pieces for reducing the flow speed of the game ball flowing down on the bottom surface member. There is. In this example, the special variable winning ball device 7, the special variable winning ball device 17, and the variable winning ball device 6B are provided with a restricting piece, so that the game flows down from the upper left to the lower right or from the upper right to the lower left. The flow direction of the game ball is changed so that the ball meanders with the movement of the front-back component, and the time required for the flow is delayed as compared with the case without the regulation piece.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 1, the special variable winning ball device 17 is arranged on the left side and the variable winning ball device 6B is arranged on the right side. However, the special variable winning ball device 17 and the variable winning ball device 17 are arranged. The bottom member of the ball device 6B is formed so as to gently incline from the upper right to the lower left, and when the bottom member is not retracted and is in the closed state, the variable winning ball device 6B is used as the special variable winning ball device. Since the game ball is configured to flow toward 17, in this sense, the variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the upstream side, and the special variable winning ball device 17 is provided on the downstream side. It can be said that it is.

A switch (first count switch 23) capable of detecting a winning game ball in the large winning opening is provided in the large winning opening. When a game ball is detected by the first count switch 23, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information. Therefore, if the special variable winning ball device 7 is open-controlled and the large winning opening is opened, it is in an advantageous state for the player. On the other hand, if the special variable winning ball device 7 is closed and controlled to close the large winning opening, the player cannot pass (enter) the game ball through the large winning opening to obtain the winning ball. It will be a disadvantage.

A switch (second count switch 24) capable of detecting a winning game ball in the special winning opening is provided in the special winning opening. When a game ball is detected by the second count switch 24, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information. Here, when the game ball passes (enters) the special winning opening opened in the special variable winning ball device 17, the number of winning balls is smaller than that when the game ball wins the large winning opening. For example, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball passes (enters) through other winning holes such as the first starting winning opening 1 and the second starting winning opening. Therefore, if the special variable winning ball device 17 is open-controlled and the special winning opening is opened, it is in an advantageous state for the player. On the other hand, if the special variable winning ball device 17 is closed and controlled and the special winning opening is closed, the player cannot obtain the winning ball by passing (entering) the game ball through the special winning opening. It will be a disadvantage.

Further, in the second start winning opening, a second starting opening switch 22B capable of detecting a winning game ball in the second starting winning opening is provided. When a game ball is detected by the second start port switch 22B, a predetermined number (1 piece) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information.

Hereinafter, the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be collectively referred to as a starting winning opening or a starting opening.

In this pachinko gaming machine 1, a passing gate 41, a special variable winning ball device 7 (large winning opening), a variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning opening), and a special variable winning ball device 17 (special winning opening) Is provided on the right side of the gaming area, so when the player is in a big hit game or in a KT state (so-called small hit time), the player aims at the right side of the gaming area and performs a firing operation (so-called right-handed operation). )I do.

A general winning opening 10 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four positions on the lower left and right sides of the game area), which is always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when entering any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

The entry of a game ball into each winning opening including the general winning opening 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning a prize at the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as a starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the left side of the game area). As an example, the ordinary symbol display 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of the ordinary symbol as a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from the special symbol. The ordinary symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The normal symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of a normal pattern is also called a normal figure game.

A normal symbol display 25C is provided above the normal symbol display 20. The normal figure hold display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal figure hold storages, which is the number of normal figure games whose execution is held, by the number of LEDs lit.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, since the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is executed based on the passage of the game ball through the passing gate 41, the passing gate 41 plays a role as a normal starting area. However, even when the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed, the passage gate 41 also plays a role as an operating region because the game shifts to the jackpot gaming state based on the passage of the game ball through the passage gate 41. Therefore, the passing gate 41 is configured as a dual-purpose gate that plays the role of both a normal starting region and an operating region.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an out opening for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the game machine frame 3, and further, frame LEDs 9 for game effects are provided around the game area. ..

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (not shown in FIG. 1), a movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided.

At the lower right position of the game machine frame 3, a ball striking operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to launch the game ball toward the game area by the striking ball launching device is provided.

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, the game balls paid out as prize balls and the game balls rented by the predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be able to be supplied to the hitting ball launching device. ) A hit ball supply plate (upper plate) is provided. Below the upper plate, a hit ball supply plate (lower plate) is provided, in which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be gripped and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed and operated by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

A push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area so that the player can perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. The operation on the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting the movement (operation, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Outline of the progress of the game)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the gaming state is the normal state, it is advantageous for the player to perform a firing operation (so-called left-handed operation) aiming at the left side of the gaming area. When the player performs a left-handed operation by rotating the ball striking operation handle 30 included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol is displayed. The first special figure game by the device 4A is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special figure game is being executed or during the period controlled by the big hit game state or the small hit game state described later (the start prize has occurred). If the special figure game based on the start winning cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special figure game based on the approach is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In the first special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes "big hit". .. In addition, if a special symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") different from the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "missing". Even in the first special figure game, the small hit symbol may be stopped and displayed at an extremely low rate, resulting in a "small hit".

After the display result in the first special figure game becomes "big hit", the big hit game state is controlled as an advantageous state advantageous to the player on condition that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41.

In the big hit game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined mode. The open state includes the elapsed timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the large winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until the earlier timing. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the large winning opening can be opened in one round, and is also hereinafter referred to as an opening upper limit period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is open in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until the maximum number of times (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the big hit game state, the player can obtain the prize ball by letting the game ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the opening upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

A jackpot type is set for "big hit". For example, prepare multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and opening upper limit period) of the big winning opening, and gaming states (normal state, probability change state (high probability state), KT state, high base state, etc.) after the big hit game state. , The jackpot type is set according to these. As the jackpot type, a jackpot type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained or a jackpot type in which a small number of prize balls or almost no prize balls can be obtained may be provided.

After the jackpot game state is completed, it may be controlled to a probability variation state, a KT state, or a high base state according to the jackpot type.

In the probability variation state (probability fluctuation state), the probability variation control in which the probability that the display result becomes a "big hit" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The probabilistic state is a state that is more advantageous for the player because it is a state in which a “big hit” is likely to occur in addition to improving the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol.

In the KT state, KT control is executed, which is more likely to be a small hit than in the normal state. In this pachinko gaming machine 1, since a certain amount of prize balls can be obtained even in the small hit game state, the number of prize balls obtained is smaller than that in the big hit game state, but it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the high base state, the control (time reduction control) that shortens the average special figure fluctuation time (period in which the special figure is changed) is shorter than the normal state is executed (time reduction state). Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening is also executed by improving the probability of becoming the game ball from the normal state. The high base state is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol) is improved, which is advantageous for the player.

The probabilistic state, KT state, and high base state continue until any one of the end conditions such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next big hit game state are satisfied first. To do. A game whose end condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also called a number cut (number cut probability change, etc.).

The normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot gaming state that is advantageous for the player, a probability variation state, a KT state, and a high base state, and the display result in the special figure game is "big hit". The pachinko game machine 1 controls the same as the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (when a predetermined return process is not executed after the power is turned on, for example, when a system reset is performed). It is in a state of being reset.

When the jackpot game is completed and the game state is controlled to the probability change state, the KT state, or the high base state, it is advantageous for the player to perform a firing operation (right-handed operation) aiming at the right side of the game area. When the player performs a right-handed strike operation on the ball striking operation handle 30 included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display 20 is started. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during which the previous normal drawing game is being executed (when the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41 but the normal drawing game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately). , The game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal symbol game, if a specific normal symbol (design per normal symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "per normal symbol". On the other hand, if the normal symbol other than the normal symbol (the normal symbol lost symbol) is stopped and displayed as the confirmed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "normal symbol lost". When it becomes "per normal drawing", the opening control is performed so that the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period (the second starting winning opening is opened).

When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In the second special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes "big hit". If a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol, for example, "2") different from the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "small hit". Further, if a special symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "missing".

After the display result in the second special figure game becomes "big hit", the big hit game state is controlled as an advantageous state advantageous to the player on condition that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41. After the display result in the second special figure game becomes "small hit", it is controlled to the small hit game state.

In the small hit game state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. As with the big hit type, the small hit type may be provided for the "small hit".

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state is continuously controlled to the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small hit" (however, "small hit" occurs. If the special figure game at the time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above number of times cut, the game state is naturally changed).

The game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big winning opening) during the big hit game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to a probabilistic state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects of notifying the progress of the game and enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, and in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and / or a point of the frame LED9. Equal / extinguishing, movement of the movable body 32, etc. may be performed.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" provided in the image display device 5, the first special figure game or the first special figure game or the first 2 In response to the start of the special figure game, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as the finalized special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, the final decorative symbol (combination of three decorative symbols) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. ) Is also displayed (derived) as a stop.

In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display of a decorative symbol that has not yet been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination described later. It is a mode in which is continuing.

In addition, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative symbol. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (display result of the special figure game or variable display of the decorative symbol) to be "big hit" (also called big hit reliability or big hit expectation) is determined according to the production mode. Multiple different types of reach effects are performed. Reach production includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has a higher hit reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a fixed decorative symbol that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration). The display result of the variable display of the symbol is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". ..

In the case of a "probability change jackpot" that is controlled to a probability change state after the end of the jackpot game state, an odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and displayed as a stop, and the probability change state is entered after the end of the jackpot game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", an even number of decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be aligned and displayed as a stop. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a probabilistic symbol, and the even-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a non-probable variable symbol (normal symbol). After the non-probability change symbol becomes the reach mode, the promotion effect that finally becomes the "probability change jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", a fixed decorative symbol (for example, "for example," "is a predetermined small hit combination as a display result of variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5. 1 3 5 ”etc.) Is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a“ small hit ”). As an example, the decorative symbols constituting the chance eyes are stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit type of the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state), and when it becomes "small hit". , A common fixed decorative symbol may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "missing", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode, and the variable display result of the decorative symbol is a fixed decorative symbol of a non-reach combination ("" (Also referred to as "non-reach loss") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "missing", after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a predetermined reach combination ("reach loss") that is not a jackpot combination. The fixed decorative symbol (also referred to as) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be "reach loss").

The effect that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute includes displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution and a look-ahead notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display (variable display in which execution is suspended) before execution. As the look-ahead notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the usual mode may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 5, one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays by temporarily stopping the decorative symbol during the variable display of the decorative symbol and then restarting the variable display. The pseudo-continuous production may be executed.

Even during the big hit game state, the big hit middle effect that notifies the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit middle effect, an effect of notifying the number of rounds and a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit gaming state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small hit game state, the small hit medium effect for notifying the small hit game state is executed. It should be noted that the big hit game during the small hit game state and in some big hit types (the big hit type in the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state, for example, the big hit type in which the subsequent game state is a highly accurate state). By executing a common effect depending on the state, the player may not know whether the player is currently in the small hit game state or the big hit game state. In such a case, by executing a common effect after the end of the small hit game state and after the end of the big hit game state, it is not possible to distinguish between the high accuracy state and the low accuracy state. You may.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with, for example, a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13, an LED control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of a special figure game (including management of hold), execution of a normal figure game (including management of hold), and a big hit. It has a function to control a game state, a small hit game state, a game state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105 are provided.

The CPU 103 performs a process of controlling the progress of the game (a process of realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing the program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (data such as a fluctuation pattern described later, an effect control command described later, and various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. .. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are stored for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The game random number may be one that is updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (one that is updated by software).

The I / O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display 20, first hold). It is configured to include an output port for transmitting (a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the normal figure hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 includes various switches for detecting game balls (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch (first count switch 23 and second count switch 24). )) Detect signals (such as a detection signal indicating that the game ball has passed or entered and the switch is turned on) are taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. By transmitting the detection signal, the passage or approach of the game ball is detected.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits a solenoid drive signal (for example, a solenoid 81, a solenoid 82, a signal for turning on the solenoid 83, etc.) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for an ordinary electric accessory or a prize-winning door. It is transmitted to the solenoid 82 and the solenoid 83 for the special winning opening.

The main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control) issues an effect control command (command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game) according to the progress of the game as a part of controlling the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of a special figure game (including a jackpot type)) and a variation pattern used when executing a special figure game (details will be described later). )), The game status (for example, the start and end of the variable display, the opening status of the large winning opening, the occurrence of winning, the number of stored memories, the game status), the command for specifying the occurrence of an error, and the like are included.

The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and produces an effect (various effects according to the progress of the game) based on the received effect control command. It has a function of executing various notifications (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery).

The effect control board 12 is equipped with an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 is a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 by executing the program stored in the ROM 121 (a process for realizing the above-mentioned function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed). (Including the decision, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal output when an operation by the player is detected and an appropriate signal indicating the operation content). It may also instruct the control unit 123.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CG ROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes the effect based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 supplies the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120, thereby causing the image display device 5 to display the effect image. The display control unit 123 further controls the sound designation signal (the signal that specifies the sound to be output) in order to output the sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the frame LED 9 and the right-handed notification LED 37. It is supplied to the board 13 or an LED signal (a signal for designating an LED lighting / extinguishing mode) is supplied to the LED control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 32.

The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let me.

The LED control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the frame LED 9 and the right-handed notification LED 37, drives the frame LED 9 and the right-handed notification LED 37 based on the LED signal, and is in a manner specified by the LED signal. The frame LED 9 and the right-handed notification LED 37 are turned on / off. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting / extinguishing of the LED.

The effect control CPU 120 executes audio output, LED lighting / extinguishing control (sound designation signal, LED signal supply, etc.), and movable body 32 control (signal supply for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 updatablely counts numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used to execute various effects. The effect random number may be one that is updated (updated by software) when the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 is for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, LED signal) and an input port for taking in the effect control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 11. It is configured to include the output port of.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the LED control board 14, are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operations on the main board 11 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output ports, etc.), settings for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on the power supply board, for example. When the power is turned on with the clear switch turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), the initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the game machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether or not the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power interruption), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stop of the power supply. In this power supply stop processing, a processing of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up to the RAM 102, a data protection processing of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes addition of an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and a process of backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data (including various flags, various timer states, etc.) for advancing the game, as well as the state of the backup flag and the error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (used by using an error detection code) and determines whether or not the data is normal (step). S5). In step S5, for example, the parity bit and the checksum are used to determine whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply is stopped. When it is determined that these match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, so the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply is stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents (contents of the backed up data) of the RAM 102. As a result, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped, and if the special symbol is changing, the change of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing recovery from the power failure to the effect control board 12 (step S7). In accordance with this, the effect control command that specifies the game state before the power failure that is backed up, and the effect control that specifies the display result of the special figure game that is being executed when the special figure game is being executed. You may want to send a command. For these commands, the same commands that are set to be transmitted in the special symbol process processing described later can be used. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command that specifies the time of recovery from the power failure, the image display device 5, for example, notifies that the image display device 5 has recovered from the power failure or is recovering from the power failure. Display the screen to do so. The effect control CPU 120 may display an appropriate screen based on the effect control command.

After the restoration process or the initialization process is completed and the effect control command is transmitted to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes the random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer is interrupted periodically every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and interrupts are permitted (step S12). ). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, the CPU 103 executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to perform the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port via the switch circuit 110. It is determined whether or not detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B, the first count switch 23, and the second count switch 24 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, the jackpot information (information indicating the number of times the jackpot has occurred) and the start information (starting) supplied to the hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1. Data such as information indicating the number of times of winning (information indicating the number of times of winning, etc.) and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times of probability change state, etc.) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes the first special symbol process process (step S25A). By executing the first special symbol process process for each timer interrupt by the CPU 103, it is possible to manage the execution and hold of the first special symbol game, control the big hit game state and the small hit game state, control the game state, and the like. (Details will be described later). Further, the CPU 103 executes the second special symbol process process (step S25B). By executing the second special symbol process process for each timer interrupt by the CPU 103, it is possible to manage the execution and hold of the second special symbol game, control the big hit game state and the small hit game state, control the game state, and the like. To. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is possible to simultaneously execute the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol in parallel.

Following the first special symbol process process and the second special symbol process process, the normal symbol process process is executed (step S26). By executing the normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, the CPU 103 manages the execution and hold of the normal figure game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passing of the game ball through the passing gate 41). It enables opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "per-figure hit". The execution of the normal figure game is performed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of normal figure reservations is displayed by turning on the normal figure hold display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process process, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when a power failure occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes the command control process (step S27). The CPU 103 may send and set an effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to a control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

Further, although the description is omitted in FIG. 4, in the game control timer interrupt process, a test terminal is a process for outputting a test signal so that the control state of the game machine can be confirmed outside the game machine. Processing is also executed. In the test terminal processing, the CPU 103 also controls to output a test signal (right-handed test signal) that can identify the period during which the right-handed operation is performed. Specifically, in the test terminal processing, the CPU 103 controls to output a right-handed test signal during the big hit game, during the small hit game based on the variation display of the second special symbol, and during the KT state. On the other hand, in the test terminal processing, the CPU 103 does not control to output a right-handed test signal during the small hit game based on the variation display of the first special symbol.

FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25A shown in FIG. 4 as the first special symbol process process. In this first special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes the first start winning prize determination process (step S101A).

In the first start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning in the first starting winning opening, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the first hold storage number is executed. When a start prize is generated in the first start prize opening, a random value for determining a display result (including a jackpot type) and a fluctuation pattern is extracted and stored as hold information in the first hold storage buffer provided in the RAM 102. Will be done. Further, a process of pre-reading and determining a display result or a fluctuation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After storing the hold information and the first hold storage number, the effect control board 12 is transmitted to send the effect control command for designating the determination results such as the occurrence of the start winning prize, the first hold memory number, and the look-ahead determination. The settings are made. The effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is produced from the main board 11 by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 4, for example, after the first special symbol process process is completed. It is transmitted to the substrate 12.

After executing the first start winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110A to S121A according to the value of the first special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S110A to S121A) of the first special symbol process process, a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The first special symbol normal process in step S110A is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In this first special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game based on the presence or absence of reserved information and the like. Further, in the first special symbol normal processing, whether or not the display result of the first special symbol or the decorative symbol is set as "big hit" or "small hit" or "big hit" is set based on the random value for determining the display result. The jackpot type of the case is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the first special symbol normal processing, a definite special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. .. After that, the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the first special symbol normal processing ends.

When making various determinations based on the random number value, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (a table in which the determination value to be compared with the random number value is assigned to the determination result) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The first variation pattern setting process in step S111A is executed when the value of the first special figure process flag is “1”. In this first fluctuation pattern setting process, a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns are set using random values for determining the fluctuation pattern based on a preliminary determination result of whether or not the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". It includes the process of deciding which one to use. In the first variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the first variation pattern setting process ends.

The fluctuation pattern includes the execution time of the special symbol game (special symbol fluctuation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol (presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative symbol. It specifies the content of the effect (type of reach effect, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The first special symbol variation process in step S112A is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is “2”. In this first special symbol variation process, the process of setting the first special symbol to be varied in the first special symbol display device 4A and the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the first special symbol are measured. Processing to be done is included. In addition, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the fluctuation of the first special symbol reaches the special symbol fluctuation time, the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the first special symbol fluctuation processing is completed. To do.

In this example, since the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel, for example, the first special symbol variation process (step S112A) is performed. When the variable display of the special symbol is being displayed, a small hit may occur in the variable display of the second special symbol and the game may be controlled by the small hit game. In this case, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) determines whether or not the small hit game is in progress (specifically, the value of the second special figure process flag is the second small hit). (Determining whether or not the value corresponds to the pre-opening process to the second small hit end process), and if the small hit game is in progress, the value of the first special figure process flag corresponds to the first special symbol variation process. The value is not changed, and the value of the first special symbol process flag can be updated to a value corresponding to the next first special symbol stop process if the small hit game is not in progress. By performing such control, the variation display of the first special symbol is interrupted during the small hit game based on the variation display of the second special symbol, and the variation display of the first special symbol is restarted after the end of the small hit game. It is controlled to do. Not limited to such control, for example, during the small hit game based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, the process of measuring the elapsed time from the start of the fluctuation of the first special symbol is interrupted (timer). It may be configured to suspend the update).

Further, for example, the small hit ending period as the small hit end processing period may be configured to be different depending on the game state. For example, if the variable display of the first special symbol is interrupted in the normal state, the suspension period of the variable display of the first special symbol becomes long, and the execution period and the suspension period of the variable display of the first special symbol become longer. If the difference becomes large, it is necessary to absorb the interruption period by stopping the shaking of the decorative pattern, which gives the player a sense of discomfort. Therefore, in the normal state, it is desirable to make the small hit ending period shorter than the KT state (first KT state, second KT state). In this case, for example, the small hit ending period may be 0.5 seconds in the normal state, whereas the small hit ending period may be 3 seconds in the KT state.

Further, in the case of the above configuration, for example, in the first KT state, it is practically difficult for the game ball to win a prize in the small hit control, and no particular effect is performed. Therefore, the small hit ending period is shorter than in the second KT state. It may be configured to do so. On the other hand, in the second KT state, since the game ball is easy to win in the small hit control and the effect of emphasizing the small hit control is executed, the small hit ending period may be longer than in the first KT state. .. In this case, for example, the small hit ending period may be 0.5 seconds in the first KT state, whereas the small hit ending period may be 3 seconds in the second KT state.

Further, as for the small hit fanfare period as the small hit opening pretreatment period, the length of the period may be different depending on the game state, as in the above-mentioned small hit ending period.

The first special symbol stop process in step S113A is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is “3”. In this first special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A stops the fluctuation of the first special symbol, and the confirmed special symbol that is the display result of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed (derived). The process of making settings is included. Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "9". If the display result is "missing", the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "miss", the game state is also updated when the probability change state, the KT state, or the high base state is controlled and the end of the number of cuts is established. .. When the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated, the first special symbol stop process ends.

The process of waiting for passage through the first gate in step S114A is executed when the value of the fourth special figure process flag is “4”. In this first gate passage waiting process, control is performed to wait for the game ball to pass through the passing gate 41. When the passage of the game ball to the passing gate 41 is detected, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "5".

The first jackpot opening preprocessing in step S115A is executed when the value of the first special figure process flag is “5”. In this first big hit pre-opening process, based on the fact that the display result is "big hit", etc., the process of starting the execution of the round in the big hit game state and setting the big winning opening to be in the open state, etc. It is included. When the large winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, the upper limit period for opening the big winning opening and the upper limit number of executions for the round are set according to which type of jackpot is used. When these settings are completed, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "6", and the first jackpot release preprocessing ends.

The process during opening of the first jackpot in step S116A is executed when the value of the first special figure process flag is “6”. In this first big hit opening process, the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the first count switch 23, and the like are used. , It includes a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state. Then, when the large winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "7" after executing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door. Then, the processing during the opening of the first jackpot is completed.

The first jackpot release post-processing in step S117A is executed when the value of the first special figure process flag is “7”. In this first big hit post-opening process, there is a process of determining whether or not the number of executions of the round that opens the big winning opening has reached the set maximum number of executions, and a big hit when the maximum number of executions is reached. It includes processing to make settings for ending the game state. Then, when the number of round executions has not reached the upper limit, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "6", while when the number of round executions reaches the upper limit, the first special figure Figure The value of the process flag is updated to "8". When the value of the first special figure process flag is updated, the post-processing after opening the first jackpot ends.

The first jackpot end process of step S118A is executed when the value of the first special figure process flag is “8”. The first jackpot end process corresponds to a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period corresponding to the period in which the ending effect as an effect action for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed, and the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing for performing various settings for starting probabilistic change control, KT control, and high-base control. When such a setting is made, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the first jackpot end process ends.

The first small hit release preprocessing in step S119A is executed when the value of the first special figure process flag is “9”. This first small hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting the special winning opening to be open in the small hit game state based on the display result being "small hit". .. At this time, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the first small hit release preprocessing ends.

The process during opening of the first small hit in step S120A is executed when the value of the first special figure process flag is “10”. In this first small hit opening process, the process of measuring the elapsed time since the special winning opening is opened, and the timing of returning the special winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time, etc. It includes processing to determine whether or not it has become. When the special winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small hit game state is reached, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "11", and the process during the opening of the first small hit is completed.

The first small hit end process of step S121A is executed when the value of the first special figure process flag is “11”. The first small hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit game state is executed elapses. Here, when the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit game state has elapsed, the value of the first special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the first small hit end process ends.

The process executed in the second special symbol process process (step S25B) is the same as the process executed in the first special symbol process process (step S25A). That is, in the first special symbol process process described with reference to FIG. 5, if "first" is read as "second", the second special symbol process process will be explained. Further, each random number value extracted in the first start winning determination process of the second special symbol process process (step S25B) is stored in the second hold storage buffer provided in the RAM 102 as hold information.

In this example, the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel. Therefore, for example, the transition to the second special symbol variation process is performed to change the second special symbol. When the display is in progress, a small hit may occur in the variable display of the first special symbol, and the game may be controlled by a small hit game. In this case, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103) determines whether or not the small hit game is in progress (specifically, the value of the first special figure process flag is the first small hit). (Determining whether or not the value corresponds to the pre-opening process to the first small hit end process), and if the small hit game is in progress, the value of the second special figure process flag corresponds to the second special symbol variation process. The value is not changed, and the value of the second special symbol process flag can be updated to a value corresponding to the next second special symbol stop process if the small hit game is not in progress. By performing such control, the variation display of the second special symbol is interrupted during the small hit game based on the variation display of the first special symbol, and the variation display of the second special symbol is restarted after the end of the small hit game. It is controlled to do. Not limited to such control, for example, during the small hit game based on the fluctuation display of the first special symbol, the process of measuring the elapsed time from the start of the fluctuation of the second special symbol is interrupted (timer). It may be configured to suspend the update).

Regarding the small hit control based on the variation display of the second special symbol, the length of the small hit fanfare period and the small hit ending period may be different depending on the game state.

(Main operation of the effect control board 12)
Next, the main operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. When the effect control board 12 receives the power supply voltage from the power source board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 6 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71) to clear the RAM 122, set various initial values, and press the effect control board 12. Set the registers of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). Further, the initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on the register setting of the CTC, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and waits.

Further, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt disabled, but if a CPU that is not automatically interrupt disabled is used, an interrupt occurs. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, among the input ports included in the I / O 125, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in, for example, the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122. After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt enable, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and the command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are used. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read effect control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that which effect control command is received and the content specified by the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process process or the like. Turn on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display the background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation in the decorative light emitting body such as the frame LED 9 and the decorative LED, and the driving of the movable body 32. Control to operate various production devices such as operation is performed. Further, regarding the control content of the effect operation using various effect devices, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed according to the effect control command or the like transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the effect control process process in step S76, the effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by the software. After that, the process returns to the process of step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes the read-ahead notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, a determination, determination, and setting for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold storages specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command or the like for designating the start of the variable display is received from the main board 11. Etc. are included. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 is to be started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (fixed decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the reach effect, and various types are based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command. It is determined whether or not various effects such as a notice effect are executed, their modes, and the execution start timing. Then, an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result and the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of the decorative symbol, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is completed. The display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 in response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , Driving the movable body 32, outputting voice and sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting the command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and commanding the LED control board 14 (illumination signal). Various effect controls are executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on / off / blinking the frame LED 9 and the decorative LED according to the output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or a command is received from the main board 11 to specify that the fixed decorative symbol is to be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, the final decorative symbol, which is the display result of the decorative symbol, is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the effect process during variable display ends.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command that specifies to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when the effect control command for specifying the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received, if the command specifies the start of the big hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is set to "6". Update to. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small hit medium effect process. In addition, when the reception waiting time of the command elapses without receiving the command specifying to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "missing". Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the waiting process for hitting the special figure ends.

The small hit medium effect process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “4”. In this small hit medium effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect content in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the set content. .. Further, in the small hit middle effect processing, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify that the small hit game state is terminated, the value of the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small hit end effect. Update to a certain "5" and end the small hit medium production process.

The small hit end effect process in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “5”. In this small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to, for example, the end of the small hit game state, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the set contents. To execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end effect process is terminated.

The jackpot effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this big hit middle effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect content in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the set content. Further, in the big hit middle effect processing, for example, the value of the effect control process flag is set to the value corresponding to the ending effect process in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify the end of the big hit game state. Update to 7 ”and end the production process during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, and various effect controls of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents Run. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending effect process ends.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic explanation is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize, but the game medium is enclosed and a score is given based on the occurrence of a prize. It may be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko game machine 1 is shown as a game machine, but a medal is inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the player When a symbol is stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by, if the combination of stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus) The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed and provided by the detachable recording medium to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the computer device and the like in advance. It may take the form of being distributed by installing it in the storage device of the. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from another device on the network connected via the communication line or the like by providing the communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The game can be executed not only by attaching a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the programs and data downloaded via the communication line or the like in the internal memory or the like. It may be a form of direct execution using hardware resources on the other device side on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Further, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, one of the expressions for comparison of various ratios such as the execution ratio of the production (expressions such as "high", "low", and "differentiate") is "0%". It may be included. For example, one may have a proportion of "0%" and the other may have a proportion of "100%" or less than "100%".

[Explanation of feature 21TM]
Next, the feature unit 21TM will be described. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with various control boards such as a main board 11, an effect control board 12, and a terminal board (information output board) 21TM016 as shown in FIG. 8-1. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is also equipped with a relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, a launch control board, and an interface board are arranged on the back surface of the game board 2 and the like in the pachinko game machine 1.

As shown in FIG. 2 described above, the main board 11 includes a first start port switch 22A, a second start port switch 22B, a first special symbol display device 4A, a second special symbol display device 4B, and the like. Various components are connected, and various effect devices such as speakers 8L, 8R, and frame LED 9 are connected to the effect control board 12, but these are omitted in FIG. 8-1.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and as shown in FIG. 8-3, is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a state of being housed in the board case 21TM201, and allows the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Various circuits for control are installed. The main board 11 is mainly addressed to a sub-side control board including a random number setting function used in a special figure game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch or the like arranged at a predetermined position, and an effect control board 12. , It has a function to output and transmit a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, and a function to output various information to the hall management computer. Further, the main board 11 controls lighting / extinguishing of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to control the lighting / extinguishing of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The variable display of a predetermined display symbol, such as controlling the variable display of the normal symbol 20 and controlling the variable display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 20 by performing lighting / extinguishing / color development control of the normal symbol display 20 and the like. It also has a control function.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-3, the main board 11 is provided with a display monitor 21TM029 that can be visually recognized from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and various prize information related to winning is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. It also has a display function. A display changeover switch 21TM030 is provided on the left side of the display monitor 21TM029, and the information displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 can be switched by operating the display changeover switch 21TM030.

The main board 11 incorporates various signals such as a power cutoff signal, a clear signal, and a reset signal in addition to detection signals from, for example, a game control microcomputer 100 and various switches for detecting a game ball, and is used as a game control microcomputer. The switch circuit 110 to be transmitted to the 100 and the information output circuit 112 for outputting various signals such as security signals from the terminal board 21TM016 are mounted.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-3, the main substrate 11 shown in FIG. 8-1 is enclosed in a substrate case 21TM201 made of a transparent synthetic resin material, and the display monitor 21TM029 is in the center of the main substrate 11. (For example, 7 segments) are arranged, and a display changeover switch 21TM030 is arranged on the right side of the display monitor 21TM029. The display monitor 21TM029 and the display changeover switch 21TM030 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when the main board 11 is visually recognized. A lock switch 21TM051 (see FIG. 8-1) for switching to a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode, which will be described later, is provided in the lower center of the back surface of the main board 11. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized when the gaming machine frame 3 is not opened, the front surface when the main board 11 is visually recognized is the back surface side of the gaming board 2 when the gaming machine frame 3 is opened. This is the front when visually recognizing, and is different from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the front surface when the main board 11 is visually recognized and the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be common.

Further, the main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control) has each winning opening (large winning opening, second starting winning opening, first starting winning opening, first to fourth general winning openings, hereinafter, "entrance area". The number of game balls entering the (also referred to as) is totaled, and various prize information such as the ratio and the combination ratio based on the total is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029, and these prize information is displayed. As a result, various winning information such as the ratio and the role ratio after installation in the amusement park can be confirmed. That is, on the manufacturer side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is usual to design the gaming board surface so that the gaming ball enters the general winning opening (passing the test) at a predetermined frequency. In addition, when conducting the test, it is confirmed whether or not the game ball has entered the general winning opening at a predetermined frequency. Further, even after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed, it is confirmed what kind of adjustment is being made, and as a result of the adjustment, whether the gaming ball has entered the general winning opening at the frequency as designed. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is possible to recognize what kind of adjustment has been made in the pachinko gaming machine 1 after installation.

In addition, the power supply board is enclosed in a board case made of a permeable synthetic resin material, and set values such as a jackpot winning probability (ball output rate), which will be described later, are changed in the lower right side of the back surface of the power supply board. A clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 and a power supply switch 21TM055 that function as setting switches for the purpose are provided. By operating the power switch 21TM055 while the power supply voltage is not supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1, a clerk at the game hall or the like operates the power switch 21TM055 on each board such as the main board 11, the effect control board 12, and the payout control board 21TM037. Operating voltage is supplied. Further, if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated at the timing when the power switch 21TM055 is operated, a clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100, and the initialization process (RAM clear) described later is performed. Will be executed. By arranging the power switch 21TM055 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 close to each other on the same power supply board, it is easy to perform the power-on operation and the initialization operation.

The lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 are provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and cannot be operated unless the gaming machine frame 3 that can be opened by a predetermined key operation is opened. Only the clerk who has the specified key can operate it. Further, since the lock switch 21TM051 requires key operation, only the clerk who has the key to operate the lock switch 21TM051 can operate the lock switch 21TM051 among the clerk of the game store. Further, the lock switch 21TM051 is a switch capable of executing an ON / OFF switching operation by a predetermined key, but the switching operation can be executed and an operation different from the switching operation (for example, a pushing operation) is executed. It may be a possible switch.

The lock switch 21TM051 can maintain an ON state or an OFF state. That is, the lock switch 21TM051 can maintain the ON state or the OFF state even if no force is applied by the clerk of the amusement park or the like. Further, the lock switch 21TM051 has a configuration in which the key can be inserted and removed only in the OFF state. According to such a configuration, the clerk of the game hall must turn off the lock switch 21TM051 in order to collect the key, so that the clerk of the game hall or the like leaves the lock switch 21TM051 in the ON state. It can be prevented from being lost.

As shown in FIG. 8-3, in the lower part on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the gaming balls that have won the winning openings and the gaming balls that have entered the out openings are discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1. A nozzle (discharge port) is provided, and a discharge port switch 21TM070 for detecting a game ball discharged from the pachinko gaming machine 1 (detecting a launched game ball) is provided in the nozzle. ing. The outlet switch 21TM070 is connected to the switch circuit 110.

The control signal transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control commands include, for example, a display control command used to control an image display operation in the image display device 5, a voice control command used to control sound output from speakers 8L and 8R, a frame LED 9 and decorations. It includes LED control commands used to control the lighting operation of the LED.

FIG. 8-2 is a block diagram showing components related to payout, such as the payout control board 21TM037 and the ball payout device 21TM097. As shown in FIG. 8-2, the payout control board 21TM037 is equipped with a payout control microcomputer 21TM370 including a payout control CPU 21TM371. In this embodiment, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is a one-chip microcomputer, and at least RAM is built in. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370, RAM (not shown), ROM (not shown) containing the payout control program, the I / O port, and the like constitute the payout control board 21TM037. That is, the payout control board 21TM037 is realized by the payout control CPU 21TM371, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 having RAM and ROM, and the I / O port. Further, the I / O port may be built in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

The detection signals from the ball-out switch 21TM187, the full tank switch 21TM048, and the payout number count switch 21TM301 are input to the I / O port 21TM372f of the payout control board 21TM037 via the relay board 21TM072. In this embodiment, the detection signal from the payout number count switch 21TM301 is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 and then output to the main board 11 via the I / O port 21TM372a and the output circuit 21TM373B. ..

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-2, the payout control board 21TM037 has a game machine frame opening sensor that detects the opening of the game machine frame 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2, and can open and close the front surface of the game board 2. A door frame opening sensor for detecting the opening of the glass door frame 3a covering the glass door frame 3a and a game machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 equipped with the same are connected, and various abnormalities are found based on the detection signals output from these sensors. It also has a function to determine the occurrence of (error). The detection signal when the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 is detected and the detection signal when the opening of the glass door frame 3a is detected are input to different terminals, so that the payout control microcomputer is used. The 21TM370 can distinguish between the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a.

Further, the detection signal from the payout motor position sensor 21TM295 is input to the I / O port 21TM372e of the payout control board 21TM037 via the relay board 21TM072. The payout motor position sensor 21TM295 is a sensor consisting of a light emitting element (LED) and a light receiving element for detecting the rotational position of the payout motor 21TM289, and is used to detect that the game ball is clogged, that is, so-called ball biting. .. In the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 mounted on the payout control board 21TM037, the detection signal from the ball out switch 21TM187 indicates the ball out state, or the detection signal from the full tank switch 21TM048 indicates the full tank state. Then, the ball payout process is stopped.

Further, when the detection signal from the full tank switch 21TM048 indicates a full tank state, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is at a low level with respect to the launch board 21TM090 in order to stop the ball launch from the ball launcher. Outputs a full tank signal. The launch motor signal to the launch motor 21TM094 output by the AND circuit 21TM091 of the launch board 21TM090 is transmitted from the launch board 21TM090 to the launch motor 21TM094. The full tank signal from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is input to one of the input sides of the AND circuit 21TM091 mounted on the launch board 21TM090, and the drive signal from the drive signal generation circuit 21TM092 (for driving the launch motor 21TM094). The signal, which serves to supply power from the power supply board), is input to the other side of the input side of the AND circuit 21TM091. Then, the launch motor signal of the AND circuit 21TM091 is input to the launch motor 21TM094. That is, while the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 outputs the full tank signal, the output of the launch motor signal to the launch motor 21TM094 is stopped.

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 includes a serial communication circuit 21TM380 for inputting / outputting (transmitting / receiving) a signal by serial communication with the game control microcomputer 100. In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 are connected to each other via the serial communication circuit 21TM505 and 21TM380 between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. In order to confirm, signals (prize ball request signal, received ACK signal) are exchanged (transmitted / received) at regular intervals (for example, 1 second). That is, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a signal for confirming the connection (a prize ball request signal in this embodiment) at regular intervals via the serial communication circuit 21TM505, and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When receiving the prize ball request signal from the game control microcomputer 100, transmits a signal (received ACK signal) notifying the fact to the game control microcomputer 100. In this embodiment, by superimposing specific data on the prize ball request signal and the reception ACK signal, the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 are performed at the timing of transmitting and receiving the prize ball request signal and the reception ACK signal. It is configured to exchange specific data with and from. For example, when a prize is won, the game control microcomputer 100 sets data indicating the number of prize balls to be paid out by differently setting a predetermined bit of the prize ball request signal, and the prize for which the setting is made. The ball request signal is transmitted to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Then, when the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 finishes the prize ball payout operation, the data indicating the end of the prize ball is set by changing a predetermined bit of the received ACK signal, and the received ACK signal with the setting is played. It is transmitted to the control microcomputer 100. In addition, when a predetermined error (error such as ball lending, full tank, out of ball, etc.) occurs, the data indicating the content of the error is set by changing the predetermined bit of the received ACK signal, and the setting is set. The received ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100.

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 transmits a prize ball information signal indicating the number of prize balls paid out and a ball rental number signal indicating the number of balls to be rented to a terminal board (external terminal board for frame and external terminal board for board) via the output port 21TM372b. (Including and) Output to 21TM160. A driver circuit is installed outside the output port 21TM372b, but the description is omitted in FIG. 8-2.

Further, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 outputs an error signal to the error display LED 21TM374 by the 7-segment LED via the output port 21TM372c. Further, a signal for instructing lighting / extinguishing is output to the prize ball LED21TM053 and the ball-out LED 21TM054 via the output port 21TM372b. A detection signal from the error release switch 21TM375 for canceling the error state is input to the input port 21TM372f of the payout control board 21TM037. The error release switch 21TM375 is used to release the error state by software reset.

Further, the drive signal from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 to the payout motor 21TM289 is transmitted to the payout motor 21TM289 in the payout mechanism portion of the ball payout device 21TM097 via the output port 21TM372a and the relay board 21TM072. A driver circuit (motor drive circuit) is installed outside the output port 21TM372a, but the description is omitted in FIG. 8-3.

A card unit control microcomputer is mounted on the card unit 21TM050 installed adjacent to the game machine. Further, the card unit 21TM050 is provided with a usable indicator lamp, a connecting stand direction indicator, a card insertion indicator lamp, and a card insertion slot. The frequency display LED 21TM060, the ball lending LED 21TM061, the ball lending switch 21TM062, and the return switch 21TM063 are connected to the interface board (relay board) 21TM066.

From the interface board 21TM066 to the card unit 21TM050, a ball lending switch signal indicating that the ball lending switch 21TM062 has been operated and a return switch signal indicating that the return switch 21TM063 has been operated are given to the card unit 21TM050. .. Further, the card unit 21TM050 gives the interface board 21TM066 a card balance display signal indicating the balance of the prepaid card and a ball lending availability display signal. Between the card unit 21TM050 and the payout control board 21TM037, a connection signal (VL signal), a unit operation signal (BRDY signal), a ball lending request signal (BRQ signal), a ball lending completion signal (EXS signal), and a pachinko machine operation signal ( The PRDY signal) is transmitted and received via the input port 21TM372f and the output port 21TM372d. An interface board 21TM066 is interposed between the card unit 21TM050 and the payout control board 21TM037. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 8-2, signals such as the connection signal (VL signal) are transmitted and received between the card unit 21TM050 and the payout control board 21TM037 via the interface board 21TM066.

When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 mounted on the payout control board 21TM037 outputs a PRDY signal to the card unit 21TM050. Further, the card unit control microcomputer outputs a VL signal when the power is turned on. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 determines the connected / unconnected state of the card unit 21TM050 based on the input state of the VL signal. When the card is accepted by the card unit 21TM050, the ball lending switch is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input, the card unit control microcomputer outputs the BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037. When a predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit control microcomputer outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037.

Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 raises the XS signal for the card unit 21TM050, and when it detects the fall of the BRQ signal from the card unit 21TM050, it drives the payout motor 21TM289 and sends a predetermined number of rental balls to the player. Pay out. Then, when the payout is completed, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 shuts down the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050. After that, on condition that the BRDY signal from the card unit 21TM050 is not in the ON state, the prize ball payout control is executed when the payout command signal is received from the game control microcomputer 100.

The power supply voltage AC24V used in the card unit 21TM050 is supplied from the payout control board 21TM037. That is, the power supply from the power supply board to the card unit 21TM050 is performed via the payout control board 21TM037 and the interface board 21TM066. In this example, a fuse for protecting the card unit 21TM050 is provided in the AC24V power supply line for the card unit 21TM050 arranged in the interface board 21TM066, and a voltage equal to or higher than a predetermined voltage is supplied to the card unit 21TM050. Is prevented.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment has a configuration in which the winning probability (ball output rate) of a big hit changes according to a set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing described later, the jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) is changed by using the display result judgment table (winning probability) according to the set value. .. The set value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest payout rate, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 the lower the payout rate. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and the smaller the value is in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, the lower the advantage is.

8-4 (A) to 8-4 (F) are explanatory views showing a display result determination table corresponding to each set value. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with the MR1 is set. In each display result determination table, the variable special figure designation buffer is 1 (first), that is, the case where the first special symbol is the target of the variable display and the variable special figure designation buffer is 2 (second). That is, a determination value for a big hit is set for each of the cases where the second special symbol is the target of the variable display.

As shown in FIG. 8-4 (A), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 1 is used, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, that is, the first special symbol is the target of the variable display. If it is, the jackpot will be won with a lower probability (1/300) than when the set values are "2", "3", "4", "5", and "6". ing. Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Is targeted for variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/300) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-4 (B), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 2 is used and the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is "1". The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/280) than in some cases. Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Is targeted for variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/280) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-4 (C), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 3 is used and the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is "1". The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/280) than when it is "2". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Is targeted for variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/280) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-4 (D), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 4 is used and the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is "1". The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/250) than in the case of "2" and "3". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Is targeted for variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/250) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-4 (E), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 5 is used and the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is "1". The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/235) than in the case of "2", "3", and "4". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Is targeted for variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/235) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-4 (F), when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 5 is used and the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is "1". The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/220) than in the case of "2", "3", "4", and "5". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Is targeted for variable display, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/220) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and the value of MR1 corresponds to any of the jackpots shown in FIGS. 8-4 (A) to 8-4 (F). If it matches the hit determination value, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (big hit A to big hit F). That is, the winning of the big hit is determined with the probability according to the set value. The "probability" shown in FIGS. 8-4 (A) to (F) indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit. Further, determining whether or not to make a big hit means determining whether or not to control the big hit game state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B is determined. It also means deciding whether or not to make a big hit design.

Further, in this embodiment, the CPU 103 uses the display result determination table shown in FIGS. 8-4 (A) to (F) to determine whether or not to make a big hit, but the big hit determination table is used. The jackpot is determined separately by using a common table for the case of the variable display of the first special symbol and the case of the variable display of the second special symbol regardless of the variable special symbol designation buffer. May be good.

In the present embodiment, a total of 6 setting values, 1 to 6, are provided as setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to this. The set value that can be set in may be 2, 3, 4, 5, or 7 or more.

(Setting suggestion production)
The effect control CPU 120 that has received the setting command can suggest the set value by executing the effect according to the set value specified by the setting command. For example, it is possible to suggest the set value to the player by making the mode of the ending effect executed when the jackpot game state ends different according to the designated set value. 8-5 (1), (2), and (3) show an example of the setting suggestion effect. FIG. 8-5 (1) shows an example in which the ending image in the "sunny" mode is selected on the jackpot end screen, and FIG. 8-5 (2) shows an example in which the ending screen in the "cloudy" mode is selected on the jackpot end screen. For example, FIG. 8-5 (3) shows an example in which the ending image of the "rain" mode is selected on the jackpot end screen. Further, FIG. 8-5 (4) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a table for determining the mode of the setting suggestion effect based on the set value specified by the setting command.

The CPU 103 transmits a setting command for specifying a set value to the effect control CPU 120. Further, when the jackpot game state ends, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command for executing the ending effect on the image display device 5 to the effect control CPU 120. By storing the set value specified by the received setting command in the RAM 102, the effect control CPU 120 can determine the mode of the ending effect based on the stored set value. For example, based on the effect control command transmitted when the jackpot game state ends, the image display device 5 stores the characters (“BONUS end” character) notifying that the jackpot game state has ended. It is possible to display the ending image of the mode (sunny mode, cloudy mode, rain mode) determined based on the set value.

In the table shown in FIG. 8-5 (4), the setting values specified by the setting command are "1, 2", "3, 4", and "5, 6". When the mode of the setting suggestion effect is determined to be the "sunny" mode shown in FIG. 8-5 (1), the mode is determined to be the "cloudy" mode shown in FIG. 8-5 (2), and FIG. When determining the "rain" mode shown in 5 (3), the determination value of is assigned.

When the setting value specified by the received setting command is "1" or "2", the effect control CPU 120 suggests setting the "sunny" mode shown in (1) at a low rate (for example, 20%). Decided to execute the effect (ending effect), and decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the "cloudy" mode shown in (2) at a medium ratio (for example, 40%), and medium. (For example, 40%), it is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the "rain" mode shown in (3). Further, when the set value specified by the received setting command is "3" or "4", the effect control CPU 120 has a low ratio (for example, 20%) of the "sunny" mode shown in (1). Decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect), and decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the "cloudy" mode shown in (2) at a high rate (for example, 50%). (For example, 30%), it is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the "rain" mode shown in (3). Further, when the set value specified by the received setting command is "5" or "6", the effect control CPU 120 has a high ratio (for example, 50%) of the "sunny" mode shown in (1). Decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect), and decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the "cloudy" mode shown in (2) at a low rate (for example, 20%). (For example, 30%), it is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the "rain" mode shown in (3).

In this way, by making the determination ratio of each mode of the setting suggestion effect different according to the set value, the player becomes interested in how the setting suggestion effect is executed, and the setting suggestion is performed. It is possible to improve the interest of the production. In this example, the player becomes interested in how the ending effect executed when the jackpot game state ends is executed, and in particular, the ending effect is executed in the "sunny" mode. You will expect it to be done.

(Processing when power is turned on)
Next, the power-on processing will be described.
8-6 to 8-8 are diagrams showing an example of processing executed by the game control microcomputer 100 when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on.

As shown in FIG. 8-6, the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 checks the data in the backup RAM area after the power is turned on (step S21TM4010). This process performs a parity check as a data check.

If the check result is normal (YES in step S21TM4010), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 matches a regular value, for example, 0 to 5. Is confirmed (step S21TM4020). In this example, as the setting values stored in the setting value storage area, 6 numbers of 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5 are set as regular values, and 6 levels of setting values having different jackpot probabilities are provided. ing. The setting value 0 in this example corresponds to the setting value 1 shown in FIG. 8-4 and the like described above, and the setting value 1 in this example corresponds to the setting value 2 shown in FIG. 8-4 and the like described above, and the setting in this example. The value 2 corresponds to the set value 3 shown in FIG. 8-4 and the like described above, the set value 3 in this example corresponds to the set value 4 shown in FIG. 8-4 and the like described above, and the set value 4 in this example is described above. It corresponds to the set value 5 shown in FIG. 8-4 and the like, and the set value 5 in this example corresponds to the set value 6 shown in FIG. 8-4 and the like described above.

Here, in this example, when the pachinko game machine 1 is shipped from the game machine maker (before it is installed in the game hall), the value having the lowest jackpot probability among the above-mentioned regular values is stored in the set value storage area. It is assumed that (0 in this example) is stored. If the data in the set value storage area is corrupted, it may not be a regular value. If the set value is a normal value (YES in step S21TM4020), it is confirmed whether or not the setting changing flag is set (step S21TM4030). The setting changing flag is set when the mode shifts to the setting change mode described later (step S21TM4580), and is cleared when the lock switch 21TM051 is switched to the OFF state (step S21TM4720).

If the setting changing flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (step S21TM4040).

If the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4040), the CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag to 1 (step S21TM4050). The value of the RAM clear flag is a value indicating whether or not it is decided to execute RAM clear (initialization of the gaming state), and if the value is 1, it is determined that RAM clear is executed. It shows that it was done. In this example, the RAM clear is not actually executed when the RAM clear flag is set to 1, and when the setting change mode is controlled, the RAM clear is executed after the processing related to the setting change mode is completed. Will be done.

The area where the value of the RAM clear flag is stored is not included in the backup RAM area. Therefore, when the power is cut off, the value of the RAM clear flag is not retained, and the value of the RAM clear flag at the time of power restoration is 0 (the initial value is not set). Note that the notification that the game state is initialized may be performed before being controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and as will be described later, after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed. It may be done.

On the other hand, if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM4040), the CPU 103 shifts to step S21TM4060.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state (step S21TM4060). Here, as described above, the open state of the game machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be detected by the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300, and the game machine frame / door frame open. From the sensor 21TM300, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 outputs a detection signal indicating that the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 has been detected and a detection signal indicating that the open state of the glass door frame 3a has been detected. When the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 recognizes that the open state of the game machine frame 3 has been detected, it notifies the game control microcomputer 100 that the open state of the game machine frame 3 has been detected. When it recognizes that the open state of the glass door frame 3a has been detected, the game control microcomputer 100 is notified that the open state of the glass door frame 3a has been detected. , The open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be individually recognized.

The game machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects the open state of the glass door frame 3a, which is a detection signal indicating that the open state of the game machine frame 3 has been detected, to the game control microcomputer 100. When the configuration is such that a detection signal indicating that is output (that is, when the game control microcomputer 100 includes the game machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300), the game control microcomputer 100 has these. By inputting the detection signal, the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be individually recognized.

When the CPU 103 recognizes the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a (YES in step S21TM4060), it confirms whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (step S21TM4070). .. Then, if the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4070), the process proceeds to the process after step S21TM4510 related to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode shown in FIG. 8-7. When the mode is changed to the setting change mode, the set value can be confirmed and changed, and when the mode is changed to the setting confirmation mode, the set value can be confirmed.

That is, when the data check result of the backup RAM area is normal (YES in step S21TM4010), the set value is a normal value (YES in step S21TM4020), and the power is not cut off during the setting change (YES). The set value is changed and / on the condition that the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state (YES in step S21TM4060) and the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4070) in step S21TM4030). Or it can be confirmed. On the other hand, if the gaming machine frame 3 is in the closed state (NO in step S21TM4060) or the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM4070), either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. The process proceeds to step S21TM4760 (transmission of setting command) described later without being controlled by the mode.

In the present embodiment, in order to make it possible to confirm the set value (setting confirmation mode) although the change of the set value is not permitted, (1) the game machine frame 3 is in the open state, and (2) ) Two conditions are required that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state. When it is confirmed by the determination process of step S21TM4060 and step S21TM4070 that all of the conditions (1) and (2) are satisfied, the CPU 103 is in a state where the set value can be confirmed (setting confirmation). It is possible to shift to mode). Further, in addition to these conditions (1) and (2), the RAM clear flag is set based on the determination that (3) the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES). As will be described later, it is possible to shift to a state in which the set value can be changed (setting change mode) on condition that the setting value has been changed.

As described above, the lock switch 21TM051 that must be operated to confirm or change the set value is provided on the back side of the game board 2, and must be operated unless the game machine frame 3 is in the open state. I can't. If the lock switch 21TM051 is operated even though the game machine frame 3 is not in the open state, there is an abnormality in the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300, or something is wrong. There is a possibility that the set value is being confirmed or changed by means. In such a state, it is inappropriate to allow confirmation or change of the set value. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the gaming machine frame 3 is not in the open state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set to the setting confirmation mode. And it is not controlled by any of the setting change modes.

In the present embodiment, as the condition (1), when either the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set to the setting confirmation mode or the setting change mode. Although it is controllable, it is not limited to such a form, and even if the glass door frame 3a is in the open state, if the gaming machine frame 3 is not in the open state, the setting confirmation mode and the setting change mode It may not be controlled by any of the above.

On the other hand, when the open state of the game machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a is not recognized in step S21TM4060 (NO in step S21TM4060), that is, the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are both. When it is in the closed state, the process proceeds to step S21TM4760 (transmission of the setting command) described later without being controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Further, when it is confirmed in step S21TM4070 that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM4070), it is not controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and is not controlled by any of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. Move to (Send setting command).

In the data check of the backup RAM area (step S21TM4010), if the check result is abnormal (NO in step S21TM4010), the CPU 103 shifts to step S21TM4120. Further, in the check of the value stored in the set value storage area (step S21TM4020), if the regular value (0 to 5) is not stored in the set value storage area (NO in step S21TM4020), the CPU 103 , Step S21TM4120. Further, in the check of the setting changing flag (step S21TM4030), if it is confirmed that the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), the CPU 103 shifts to step S21TM4120.

Here, even if a regular value (0 to 5) is stored in the set value storage area, if a part of the backup RAM area is damaged, it is determined as NO in step S21TM4010. Then, the process proceeds to step S21TM4120. That is, if there is a possibility that the value stored in the set value storage area is inappropriate, the setting is changed based on the setting change mode transition condition (step S21TM4120 to step S21TM4140 described later) being satisfied. It will be controlled by the mode. Further, even if the check result is normal (YES in step S21TM4010) in the data check of the backup RAM area (YES in step S21TM4010), the regular value (0 to 5) is not stored in the set value storage area. (NO in step S21TM4020), the setting change mode is controlled based on the condition that the setting change mode transition condition (step S21TM4120 to step S21TM4140 described later) is satisfied. Further, when the setting change mode is controlled when the power is cut off last time, the setting change mode is controlled based on the condition of the setting change mode transition condition (step S21TM4120 to step S21TM4140 described later) is satisfied. It will be.

In step S21TM4120, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state (step S21TM4120). When the CPU 103 recognizes the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a (YES in step S21TM4120), it confirms whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (step S21TM4130). ..

If the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4130), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (step S21TM4140).

If the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4140), the CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag to 1 (step S21TM4150). Then, the processes after step S21TM4510 related to the setting change mode shown in FIG. 8-7 are executed.

On the other hand, when the open state of the game machine frame 3 or the open state of the glass door frame 3a is not recognized in step S21TM4120 (NO in step S21TM4120), that is, the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are both. In the closed state, in step S21TM4130, the lock switch 21TM051 is not in the ON state (NO in step S21TM4130), and in step S21TM4140, the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is not in the ON state. (NO in step S21TM4140), the CPU 103 does not execute the processing after step S21TM4510 related to the setting change mode, and the setting value stored in the setting value storage area may be abnormal. The indicated set value abnormality error command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120.

When the effect control CPU 120 receives the set value abnormality error command, the image display device 5 notifies that the set value may be abnormal. For example, the message "The setting value may be abnormal" is displayed. Further, the effect control CPU 120 shifts the image display device 5 to the setting change mode when the power is turned off (the power switch 21TM055 is turned off) and then turned on again (when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on). The notification prompts the user to perform an operation for changing the set value (determine the set value). For example, the message "Please turn on the power again after the power is turned off to shift to the setting change mode" is displayed. It should be noted that the same notification may be performed by the voice output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined loop process (repetition of steps S21TM420 to step S21TM4220) until the power is turned off.

In this loop processing, after the CPU 103 waits for 4 ms (step S21TM4200), the character "E" is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029, so that "the set value is not a normal value (0 to 5)". Although there is a possibility, the transition condition for controlling to the setting change mode (that all are determined to be YES in steps S21TM4120 to S21TM4140) is not satisfied and the transition to the setting change mode has not been performed. " Notify (step S21TM4210). Then, the security signal is output from the output terminal (terminal number 10) to which one end of the security signal line is connected (step S21TM4220). The security signal is input to an external device to which the other end of the security signal line is connected (for example, a hall computer that manages information on a plurality of game machines, a card unit or a ring lamp device provided corresponding to the game machine, etc.). Will be done.

During the loop processing period, the character "E" is displayed every 4 ms on the 7-segment display provided in the display monitor 21TM029. By providing a weight of 4 ms, it is possible to prevent excessive heat from staying in the 7-segment display and damaging the display. In addition, the security signal is continuously output during the loop processing period. By outputting the security signal to the outside, a predetermined event (in this example, the set value is a normal value (0 to 5)) in the pachinko gaming machine 1 based on the input of the security signal in an external device such as a hall computer. ), But the transition condition for controlling to the setting change mode is not satisfied and the transition to the setting change mode has not occurred) can be identified.

The loop processing in steps S21TM420 to S21TM4220 is continued until the power supply is stopped (until the power switch 21TM055 is turned off).

That is, when the data check result of the backup RAM area is abnormal (NO in step S21TM4010), when the set value is not a normal value (NO in step S21TM4020), and when the power is cut off during the setting change (NO). That is, if the setting changing flag is set when the power is turned on and YES is determined in step S21TM4030), the game should not be played in this state. Before shifting to the normal game processing (for example, the game control timer interrupt processing including the prize ball processing, the special symbol process processing, etc.), it is necessary to fix the set value of the set value storage area to a regular value. Therefore, the RAM clear flag is set to shift to the setting change mode.

In the present embodiment, in order to be in a state where the set value can be changed (setting change mode), (1) the game machine frame 3 is in the open state, and (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state. (3) Three conditions are required that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state. The CPU 103 is in a state where the set value can be changed when it is confirmed by the determination process of step S21TM4120, step S21TM4130, and step S21TM4140 that all of the conditions (1) to (3) are satisfied. It is possible to shift to the setting change mode).

If any of the conditions (1) to (3) is not satisfied, the change of the set value is not permitted, so that the set value of the set value storage area can be fixed to a regular value. Therefore, it is not possible to shift to normal game processing. Therefore, if NO is determined in any of the determination processes of step S21TM4120, step S21TM4130, and step S21TM4140, the process proceeds to the loop process (step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220) described above.

If the process shifts to the loop process (step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220), the normal game process cannot be performed. Therefore, the clerk at the game hall must temporarily turn off the pachinko gaming machine 1 and turn it on again. It doesn't become. In this way, if the conditions for shifting to the setting change mode are not satisfied, the power is turned off once, and all the conditions (1) to (3) are satisfied when the next power is turned on. Then, the mode is changed to the setting change mode, and the setting value of the setting value storage area is fixed to a regular value.

When any of the conditions (1) to (3) is not satisfied, the CPU 103 predetermined the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. It is also possible to urge the power to be turned off by emitting light in the power off instruction mode.

In the present embodiment, when the setting changing flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030), the setting value is not allowed to be changed, but the setting value can be confirmed (setting confirmation mode). , (1) The gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state (YES in step S21TM4060), and (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4070).

However, when the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), (1) the game machine frame 3 is in the open state (YES in step S21TM4120), and (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state. Even when the two conditions of (YES in step S21TM4130) are satisfied, the setting confirmation mode is not controlled. Even when these conditions (1) and (2) are satisfied, if it is determined in step S21TM4140 that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is not in the ON state (NO), It is controlled to the game stop state (loop processing of step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220) without being controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

Next, the processes related to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-7 and 8-8. In the process of FIG. 8-7, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 matches a normal value (any of 0 to 5 in this example) ( Step S21TM4510). If a regular value (0 to 5) is stored in the set value storage area (YES in step S21TM4510), the process proceeds to step S21TM4530. When a regular value (0 to 5) is not stored in the set value storage area (NO in step S21TM4510), the CPU 103 has the lowest jackpot probability as a regular value in the set value storage area, "0". Is stored (step S21TM4520). Then, the process proceeds to step S21TM4530.

Next, the CPU 103 executes a power cutoff process after performing a weight of 4 ms (step S21TM4530) (step S21TM4540). In the power cutoff process, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not a power cutoff signal based on a power cutoff including an unexpected power failure is input, and if a power cutoff signal is input, the power supply is supplied. Immediately before the operation becomes inoperable due to the stop, the power supply stop processing is executed. In this power supply stop processing, a processing of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up to the RAM 102, a data protection processing of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes addition of an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and a process of backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data (including various flags, various timer states, etc.) for advancing the game, as well as the state of the backup flag and the error detection code. That is, in the power cutoff process, check data is stored in a predetermined backup area.

As a result, when controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (when the iterative processing of steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620 or the iterative processing of steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4570 and step S21TM4650 is being performed), the power supply is supplied. If a disconnection occurs, the data check will be properly executed in step S21TM4010 after the power is restored.

Next, the CPU 103 causes the display monitor 21TM029 to display the value corresponding to the set value (0 to 5 in this example) stored in the set value storage area (step S21TM4550). Here, the value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 is a value (1 to 6) obtained by adding 1 to the value (0 to 5) stored in the set value storage area. Since the clerk of the game hall usually recognizes the range of the set value as 1 to 6, if the value stored in the set value storage area is displayed as it is on the display monitor 21TM029, the clerk of the game hall actually displays it. There is a risk of erroneously recognizing the set value of. Therefore, in this example, [value stored in the set value storage area + 1] is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 as a set value. Next, the CPU 103 outputs a security signal (step S21TM4560).

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the RAM clear flag is 0 (step S21TM4570). If the RAM clear flag is 0 (YES in step S21TM4570), that is, if the RAM clear is not executed after the mode (here, the setting confirmation mode) ends, the CPU 103 specifies that the setting confirmation mode has been controlled. The setting confirmation mode command is transmitted (step S21TM4650), and the process proceeds to step S21TM4680. The effect control CPU 120 can identify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting confirmation mode based on the reception of the setting confirmation mode command. Therefore, it is possible to notify that the game machine is controlled to the setting confirmation mode by the image display device 5 and the speakers 8L and 8R.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO in step S21TM4570), that is, if the RAM clear is executed after the mode (here, the setting change mode) is completed, the CPU 103 changes the set value. Set the setting changing flag indicating that there is a possibility (step S21TM4580). Since the area in which the value of the setting changing flag is stored is included in the backup RAM area, the value of the setting changing flag is retained even when the power is turned off. Therefore, if a power failure occurs while the setting change mode is being controlled, the value of the setting changing flag is 1 (set state) when the power is turned on next time.

Next, the CPU 103 transmits a setting change mode command that specifies that the setting change mode has been controlled (step S21TM4590). The effect control CPU 120 can identify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting change mode based on the reception of the setting change mode command. Therefore, it is possible to notify that the game machine is controlled to the setting change mode by the image display device 5 and the speakers 8L and 8R.

Next, the CPU 103 inputs the setting changeover switch information indicating whether or not the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated (step S21TM4600), and confirms whether or not the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated. (Step S21TM4610).

If the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is not operated (NO in step S21TM4610), the CPU 103 proceeds to step S21TM4680. When the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated (YES in step S21TM4610), the CPU 103 updates the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 (step S21TM4620), and moves to step S21TM4680. Transition. The updated set value is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 in the next step S21TM4550.

Each time the clerk of the amusement park operates the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 (YES in step S21TM4610), the set value stored in the set value storage area is updated (step S21TM4620). For example, the regular setting value is in the range of 0 to 5, and the setting value stored in the setting value storage area when the setting change mode is controlled (when the power is turned on or when the power is cut off last time) is 3. If there is, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is updated in the order of 3 → 4 → 5 → 0 → 1 → 2 → 3 for each setting change operation, and the display monitor 21TM029 responds accordingly. The displayed information will be updated in the order of 4 → 5 → 6 → 1 → 2 → 3 → 4.

Here, the display of the current setting value (step S21TM4550), the output of the security signal (step S21TM4560), and the transmission of the setting confirmation mode command (step S21TM4650) can be executed, but the setting change mode command is transmitted (step S21TM4590). ) And the state in which the update of the set value (step S21TM4620) cannot be executed corresponds to the setting confirmation mode in which the set value can be confirmed or the set value cannot be changed. During the period controlled by the setting confirmation mode, the processes of steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4570 and step S21TM4650 are repeatedly executed.

In the setting confirmation mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES is determined in step S21TM4070), and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state (NO is determined in step S21TM4040 and the RAM clear flag). Is still 0).

In addition, the current set value can be displayed (step S21TM4550) and the security signal can be output (step S21TM4560), and the setting change mode command can be transmitted (step S21TM4590) and the set value can be updated (step S21TM4620). The state corresponds to a setting change mode in which the set value can be confirmed and changed.

In the setting change mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (determined as YES in step S21TM4070 or step S21TM4130), and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4040 or step S21TM4140). It is determined and controlled based on (the RAM clear flag is set to 1 in step S21TM4050 or step S21TM4150).

The setting confirmation mode command is a command that is transmitted only once when the setting confirmation mode is controlled. Therefore, when the CPU 103 transmits the setting confirmation mode command, it is possible to identify that the setting confirmation mode command has been transmitted, and the setting confirmation mode command transmission flag that does not require backup storage when the power is turned off should be set. , When the setting changing flag is cleared (step S21TM4720), the setting confirmation mode command transmission flag may be cleared. Then, the setting confirmation mode command may be transmitted only when the setting confirmation mode command transmission flag is not set. Similarly, the setting change mode command is a command that is transmitted only once when the setting change mode is controlled. Therefore, the CPU 103 should set the setting change mode command transmission flag which can identify that the setting change mode command has been transmitted when the setting change mode command is transmitted and which does not require backup storage when the power is turned off. , When the setting changing flag is cleared (step S21TM4720), the setting change mode command transmission flag may be cleared. Then, the setting change mode command may be transmitted only when the setting change mode command transmission flag is not set.

In step S21TM4680, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state. Then, if the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (NO in step S21TM4680), the weight of 4 ms (step S21TM4530) is performed again, and then the processes after step S21TM4540 are repeated. That is, if the value of the RAM clear flag is 0, the control of the setting confirmation mode is continued, and if the value of the RAM clear flag is 1, the control of the setting change mode is continued.

In step S21TM4680, if the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (YES in step S21TM4680), the CPU 103 terminates the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode and sets 1000 ms as the value of the security signal timer (step S21TM4710). By setting a predetermined time as the value of the security signal timer, the security signal is continuously output until the value of the security signal timer changes from the predetermined time to 0 ms in the information output process when the normal game processing is started. Will be done. For example, when the game control timer interrupt process is executed every 2 ms, the value of the security signal timer is subtracted by 2 ms, and the output of the security signal is stopped when the value reaches 0 ms. Therefore, at the time of step S21TM4710, the remaining output period of the security signal is set to 1000 ms regardless of whether the setting change mode has ended or the setting confirmation mode has ended.

That is, as shown in FIG. 8-9 (1), the output of the security signal is started corresponding to the start of the control of either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (step S21TM4560), and the setting change mode and the setting confirmation are performed. Corresponding to the end of the control of any of the modes, the value of the security signal timer is set so that the security signal is continuously output until at least 1 sec has elapsed from the end of the control of either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Set (step S21TM4710).

Here, the process of starting the output of the security signal in step S21TM4560 determines whether it is controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (which mode is controlled). It is being executed as a common process (without). Further, in step S21TM4710, the process of setting the remaining output period of the security signal is also determined regardless of whether it is controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (which mode is controlled). It is being executed as a common process. In this way, the security signal output control is simplified by sharing the security signal output start control and output end control between the case of being controlled in the setting change mode and the case of being controlled in the setting confirmation mode. , The control burden can be reduced.

In addition, the output of the security signal is started in response to the start of control in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and the security signal is output in response to the end of control in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. By stopping, it is possible to appropriately notify an external device such as a hall computer that the game machine may have been controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

Here, in step S21TM4710 immediately after the control of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed, the security signal is a common value (1000 ms) between the case where the setting change mode is controlled and the case where the setting confirmation mode is controlled. It is set in the timer. However, if both the output start control and the output end control of the security signal are shared between the case where the setting change mode is controlled and the case where the setting change mode is controlled, which mode is used on the external device side. It becomes difficult to grasp whether it is controlled.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-9 (2), when the setting change mode is controlled, that is, when the RAM clear flag is set to 1, the security signal is once in step S21TM4710. After setting 1000 ms as the timer value, 30000 ms is reset (overwritten) as the security signal timer value in step S21TM1465 after clearing the RAM based on the determination of NO in step S21TM4770 described later. There is. That is, after the remaining output period of the security signal is once set to 1 sec, the remaining output period of the security signal is reset (overwritten) to 30 sec.

When the signal output control shown above is performed, the final output stop timing of the security signal is as shown in FIG. 8-9 (2), and when the setting confirmation mode is controlled, the setting confirmation mode ends. It is the timing when 1 sec has elapsed from the above, and when it is controlled to the setting change mode, it is the timing when 30 sec has elapsed from the end of the setting change mode.

Specifically, when the setting confirmation mode is controlled (RAM is not cleared and the value of the security signal timer is not changed from 1 second), the game control timer interrupt after the interrupt is permitted is interrupted. In the process (for example, information output process), the output of the security signal is continued until the value of the security signal timer changes from 1000 ms to 0 ms, and the setting change mode is controlled (RAM clear is performed). When the value of the security signal timer is changed from 1 second to 30 seconds), the value of the security signal timer is changed from 30,000 ms to 0 ms in the game control timer interrupt process (for example, information output process) after the interrupt is permitted. The output of the security signal will be continued until becomes. In addition, when the setting confirmation mode is controlled, when the setting change mode is controlled, the value of the security signal timer is set for a predetermined time (1000 ms or 30000 ms) at the timing before the transition to the game control timer interrupt processing. ) To 0 ms, the output of the security signal may be continued, and after the output of the security signal is completed, the process may shift to the game control timer interrupt process.

In this way, the security signal is continuously output for at least 1 sec depending on whether the control of the setting confirmation mode is finished or the control of the setting change mode is finished, and the security signal is controlled to the setting change mode. In this case, the security signal is continuously output until 30 sec elapses after the control of the setting change mode is completed. With such a configuration, while standardizing the output control of the security signal, the output period of the security signal can be different depending on whether the mode is controlled in the setting confirmation mode or the setting change mode.

As a result, it is also possible to grasp whether the external device is controlled to the setting confirmation mode without executing the initialization process, or is controlled to the setting change mode by executing the initialization process. .. For example, if the output period of the security signal is less than 30 seconds, it can be specified that the setting confirmation mode is controlled without executing the initialization process, and if the output period of the security signal is 30 seconds or more, the initial setting is performed. It is possible to estimate that there is a possibility that the conversion process is executed and the setting change mode is controlled.

A security signal is also output when an error for which the game is stopped, such as a magnetic abnormality, is detected by the abnormality detection sensor. The security signal in this case is continuously output until the power of the game machine is turned off. Further, the CPU 103 sets an abnormality detection flag in the backup area (however, the area cleared by the initialization process) of the RAM 102 based on the fact that the abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection sensor. Then, it is assumed that the security signal is output for 4 minutes based on the fact that the abnormality detection flag is set when the power is restored.

Here, when the setting confirmation mode is controlled at the time of power restoration, the RAM clear is not executed, so that the value of the abnormality detection flag is not initialized in the signal output processing and remains set. It is possible to continuously output the security signal for 4 minutes after the power is turned on. That is, it is possible not to limit the output period of the security signal to the period from the end of the control of the setting confirmation mode to the elapse of one second. On the other hand, if the setting change mode is controlled when the power is restored, the RAM is cleared, so the abnormality detection flag is cleared in the subsequent signal output processing (power off occurs). Sometimes it is unclear whether or not an error has been detected), and as a result, the security signal output period is the period from the end of the setting change mode until 30 seconds have passed (depending on the execution of RAM clear). Period).

In the example shown in step S21TM4710 of FIG. 8-7, 1 second is set as the value of the security signal timer, but the present invention is not limited to this mode and is the first after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed. The value of the security signal timer set to is at least a period during which the external device can recognize that the security signal has been output, and may be, for example, 50 ms or more. That is, a common 50 ms may be set as the value of the security signal timer when the setting change mode ends and when the setting confirmation mode ends.

After the process of step S21TM4710, the CPU 103 clears the setting changing flag (step S21TM4720). Here, if the power is cut off after that because the setting changing flag is cleared, it is determined that the setting changing flag is not set when the power is restored (NO in step S21TM4030). Become.

Next, the CPU 103 erases the set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (step S21TM4730). Then, the set value (any of 0 to 5) stored in the set value storage area is set in the setting command, and the setting command is transmitted (step S21TM4760). Even if neither the setting change mode nor the setting confirmation mode is controlled when the power is turned on, the process of step S21TM4760 will be executed and the setting command will be transmitted.

Here, the player usually recognizes that the range of the set value is 1 to 6, and the value specified by the setting command (the value stored in the set value storage area) on the effect control CPU 120 side is used as it is as an image. If the display is displayed on the display device 5, the player may misunderstand the set value. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 side recognizes the value obtained by adding 1 to the value (0 to 5) specified by the setting command as the set value (1 to 6), and sets the set values 1 to 6. In the range, the effect that suggests the set value is executed.

Not limited to such a form, the CPU 103 sets a value (1 to 6) obtained by adding 1 to the set value (0 to 5) stored in the set value storage area in the setting command to control the effect. It may be transmitted to the CPU 120 for use. As a result, the range of the set value specified by the setting command becomes 1 to 6, which matches the range normally recognized by the player. On the effect control CPU 120 side, the set value (1 to 6) specified by the setting command is displayed as it is on the image display device 5, or an effect suggesting the set value (1 to 6) specified by the setting command is executed. By doing so, the set value can be appropriately notified or suggested. Further, it is not necessary for the effect control CPU 120 side to perform addition processing on the set value specified by the received setting command, and the control load on the effect control CPU 120 side can be reduced.

As described above, the effect control CPU 120 can specify that the setting confirmation mode or the setting change mode has ended by receiving the setting command. In addition, it is possible to suggest the set value by executing the effect according to the set value specified by the setting command. For example, it is possible to suggest the set value to the player by making the mode of the ending effect executed when the jackpot game state ends different according to the designated set value.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the RAM clear flag is 0 (step S21TM4770).

Here, when the value of the RAM clear flag is 0 (YES in step S21TM4770), the data check result of the backup RAM area is normal (YES in step S21TM4010), and the set value is a normal value (step). It is determined that S21TM4020 is YES), the power is not cut off during the setting change (NO in step S21TM4030), and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM4040). ) Therefore, it is sufficient to execute the process at the time of power failure recovery without clearing the RAM.

When the value of the RAM clear flag is 0, the CPU 103 executes a process when the data check result of the backup RAM area is normal when the power is turned on, and after the interrupt is permitted, the game control timer interrupt process (special). (Including design process processing, etc.) That is, when neither the setting change mode nor the setting confirmation mode is controlled, or when the control of the setting confirmation mode is completed, the CPU 103 performs RAM based on the value of the RAM clear flag being 0. Without executing clear, a backup command will be sent as a command when the power is turned off and restored, and the normal game processing will be started.

In the effect control CPU 120, based on the reception of this backup command (command at the time of restoration), the restoration from the power failure was performed based on the data at the time of power supply stop (RAM clear is not performed). That) is recognized. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the backup command, for example, the effect devices such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L, 8R, and the frame LED 9 are restored from the power failure based on the data when the power supply is stopped. (RAM clearing has not been performed) can be notified.

On the other hand, the fact that the value of the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO in step S21TM4770) means that the RAM clear is set to 1 in step S21TM4050 or step S21TM4150, and it is determined to execute the RAM clear. Therefore, it is sufficient to execute the process at the time of turning on the power accompanied by clearing the RAM.

When the value of the RAM clear flag is 1, the CPU 103 executes a process of setting 30 seconds as the value of the security signal timer and a process when the data check result of the backup RAM area is abnormal when the power is turned on. , After the interrupt is permitted, the process may be shifted to the game control timer interrupt process (including the special symbol process process, etc.).

As shown in FIG. 8-8, the CPU 103 performs the RAM clear process based on the RAM clear flag being 1 (step S21TM1410). In the RAM clear processing, the data (special symbol process flag, probability change flag, time saving flag, hold storage, etc.) indicating the game state before the power supply is stopped stored in the game state information storage area of the RAM 102 is cleared, and the initial value is obtained. Is set, but the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is not cleared and is not changed before the RAM clear process. In addition, the area in which each aggregated value (game information that can be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029) such as the continuous ratio, the combination ratio, and the base is stored for each set value is not cleared, and each aggregated value for each set value is not cleared. The value does not change before the RAM clearing process. Then, by displaying the character "C" on the display monitor 21TM029 or the like, it is notified that the game state has been initialized (step S21TM1420). By the RAM clear processing, predetermined data (for example, data of the count value of the counter for generating a random number for determining a normal symbol hit) is initialized to 0, but is an arbitrary value or a predetermined value. It may be initialized to. Further, the entire area of the RAM 102 may not be initialized, and predetermined data (for example, data of the count value of the counter for generating a random number for determining a normal symbol hit) may be left as it is.

The reason why the set value stored in the set value storage area is not cleared in this RAM clear process is as follows: (a) If the setting change mode is not controlled, a regular value is set in the set value storage area when the power is turned on. It means that it has been stored (YES in step S21TM4020), and (b) if it is controlled to the setting change mode, is the value of the setting value storage area set to 0 (step S21TM4520) or is in the setting change mode? This is because the regular value is stored by the operation (step S21TM4610 and step S21TM4620). Further, after the RAM clear processing, the setting change mode cannot be controlled, and there is no opportunity to change the value stored in the setting value storage area.

Next, the CPU 103 sets the start address of the initialization table stored in the ROM 101 as a pointer (step S21TM1430), and sequentially sets the contents of the initialization table in the work area (step S21TM1440). By the processing of step S21TM1430 and step S21TM1440, for example, a random number counter for determining a normal symbol hit, a special symbol buffer, a total prize ball number storage buffer, a special symbol process flag, and other flags for selectively performing processing according to the control state. The initial value is set.

After executing step S21TM1430 and step S21TM1440, the CPU 103 reads out the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 (step S21TM1450). In the game control timer interrupt process, which will be described later, the jackpot determination in the special symbol process process is executed based on the set value read here. Next, the CPU 103 transmits an initialization command that specifies that the initialization process has been performed when the power is turned on (or when the setting change mode ends) (step S21TM1460). In the effect control CPU 120, the initialization process is performed based on the reception of this initialization command (the RAM is cleared without the recovery from the power failure based on the data when the power supply is stopped). Recognize what was done). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the initialization command, for example, in the effect devices such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L, 8R, and the frame LED 9, the game state and the like are initialized (data when the power supply is stopped). It is possible to notify that the RAM has been cleared without recovering from the power failure based on the above.

Next, the CPU 103 sets 30 seconds as the value of the security signal timer (step S21TM1465). As a result, the value (1 second) of the security signal timer set in step S21TM4710 after the end of the setting change mode is changed (overwritten) to the value (30 seconds) corresponding to the execution of RAM clear. become. Further, when the RAM clear is executed without being controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, step S21TM4710 is not executed (1 second is set as the value of the security signal timer). The value of the security signal timer is set to 30 seconds corresponding to the RAM clear being executed. On the other hand, when the RAM clear is not executed (including the case where the setting confirmation mode is controlled), the process of this step S21TM1465 is not executed, so that the value of the security signal timer is 1 second set in step S21TM4710. There is up to.

Since the value of the security signal timer is set in step S21TM1465 or step S21TM4710 described above, the security signal is output in the game control timer interrupt process after the interrupt is permitted (information output process). After that, each time the game control timer interrupt process is executed by the interrupt permission, the value of the security signal timer is subtracted by 2 ms, and the output of the security signal is stopped at the timing when the value of the security signal timer becomes 0. Will be.

Then, the CPU 103 executes the setting process of the serial communication circuit 21TM505 (step S21TM1480). In this setting process, a connection confirmation signal is output from the output circuit 21TM067 of the main board 11 to the input circuit 21TM373A of the payout control board 21TM037. Further, the serial communication circuit 21TM505 of the game control microcomputer 100 and the serial communication circuit 21TM380 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 are set in a state in which communication can be executed.

Next, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S21TM1490). The CPU 103 makes settings for causing the random number circuit 104 to update the value of the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, for example, by executing the process according to the random number circuit setting program.

Then, in step S21TM1500, the CPU 103 sets the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied at predetermined time (for example, 2 ms). That is, as an initial value, a value corresponding to, for example, 2 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register). In this embodiment, it is assumed that the timer is interrupted periodically every 2 ms.

Next, the CPU 103 repeatedly executes the display random number update process (step S21TM1520) and the initial value random number update process (step S21TM1530). When executing the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process, the interrupt prohibition state is set (step S21TM1510), and when the execution of the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process is completed, the interrupt enable state is set. Set (step S21TM1540). As a result, the game shifts to the normal game processing in which the game control timer interrupt processing can be executed. In this embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining the stop symbol of the special symbol when it is not a big hit, or a random number for determining whether or not to reach when it is not a big hit, and is for display. The random number update process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating a random number for display. Further, the initial value random number update process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. In this embodiment, the initial value random number determines the initial value of the count value of the counter for generating a random number for determining whether or not to hit the normal symbol (normal symbol hit determination random number generation counter). It is a random number to do. Game control processing that controls the progress of the game, which will be described later (the game control microcomputer 100 controls the game devices such as the effect display device, the variable winning ball device, and the ball payout device provided in the game machine. In the process of performing, or the process of transmitting a command signal to be controlled by another microcomputer, also called the game device control process), the count value of the random number for normal symbol hit determination is one round (taking the random number for normal symbol hit judgment). When the step is taken by the number of numerical values between the minimum value and the maximum value of the possible value), the initial value is set in the counter.

In this example, when the RAM clear flag is determined to be 0 (YES) in step S21TM4770, the CPU 103 determines whether the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are both in the closed state. Without confirmation (regardless of the state of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a), the process shifts to the process at the time of power failure recovery, but not limited to this form, the RAM clear flag is set in step S21TM4770. If it is determined to be 0 (YES), the condition is that both the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are in the closed state (depending on the state of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a). You may move to the process when the power is cut off and restored.

Further, in this example, when the CPU 103 determines in step S21TM4770 that the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO), the CPU 103 determines whether the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are both in the closed state. Without confirmation (regardless of the state of the game machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a), the process shifts to the process at the time of turning on the power (process after step S21TM1410 (RAM clear)). Not limited to this, when the RAM clear flag is determined to be 1 (NO) in step S21TM4770, the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are both closed (game machine frame). 3 or depending on the state of the glass door frame 3a), the process at the time of turning on the power (process after step S21TM1410 (RAM clear)) may be started.

As shown above, the clerk of the amusement park puts the pachinko game machine 1 into the setting change mode by turning on the lock switch 21TM051 and turning on the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 when the power is turned on. It is possible to control it, and it is also possible to initialize the game state and the like (execute RAM clear). Further, by turning on the lock switch 21TM051 and turning off the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 when the power is turned on, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be controlled to the setting confirmation mode, and the gaming state, etc. Is not initialized (NO is determined in step S21TM4040 or step S21TM4140 and the RAM clear flag is not set to 1). In this way, the clerk of the game hall can select whether to control the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and also can select whether to initialize the game state or the like. There is.

As described above, if the setting changing flag is set when the power is turned on, it means that the setting change mode was controlled when the power was turned off, so the setting value is in an unstable state. There is a possibility that the set value to be confirmed on the playground side is not stored in the set value storage area. In the examples shown in FIGS. 8-6 to 8-8, the CPU 103 is in a game stopped state (step) without shifting to the normal game processing based on the fact that the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030). S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220 (loop processing) can be controlled, and a security signal is output in response to control to the game stop state (step S21TM4220).

With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the game from being started (the game control timer interrupt process is executed) in a state where the set value is unstable, and when the power is turned on, the power is supplied. It is possible to notify the external device that the setting change mode was controlled when the disconnection occurred.

Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 8-6 to 8-8, the CPU 103 has a condition for shifting to the setting change mode based on the fact that the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030). When step S21TM4120 to step S21TM4140 are all YES) is not satisfied, a set value error error command is transmitted (step S21TM4190), and a display monitor is displayed in the game stopped state (loop processing of steps S21TM420 to step S21TM4220). An error display for displaying the character "E" is performed on 21TM029 (step S21TM4210).

In the example shown in FIG. 8-10, by displaying the letter "E" on each of the 7-segment displays 21TM029A to 21TM029D constituting the display monitor 21TM029, an abnormality occurs in the clerk of the amusement park (in the setting change mode). (There is a possibility that the power supply was cut off while it was being controlled) is clearly notified. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 that has received the setting value abnormality error command displays the message "Please turn on the power again after the power is turned off to shift to the setting change mode" on the image display device 5, thereby displaying the game hall. Operation to change the set value by shifting to the setting change mode when the power is turned on again (when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on) after the power is turned off (power switch 21TM055 is turned off). (Confirm the set value).

In this example, (a) when the setting changing flag is set when the power is turned on, and the transition condition for controlling the setting change mode is satisfied, that is, (i) the game machine frame 3 is set. It is in the open state (YES in step S21TM4120), (iii) the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4130), and (iii) the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (step S21TM4140). If YES) is determined, the setting change mode is controlled. As a result, the error display on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: display of "E" on the display monitor 21TM029) is not executed, and the message display on the effect control board 12 side ("The power is turned on again after the power is turned off"). Please move to the setting change mode. ") Will not be performed either.

Here, in the effect control CPU 120 that has received the setting change mode command (step S21TM4590), the image display device 5 has controlled the setting change mode, that is, the setting change operation (operation of the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052). ), It is possible to notify that the set value can be changed. For example, the message "In the setting change mode" or the message "Please change the setting value by performing the setting change operation" can be displayed on the image display device 5. As a result, the clerk of the amusement park can grasp that the setting change mode is controlled, and by operating the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area By switching the lock switch 21TM051 to the OFF state after changing to the planned set value, the set value can be fixed and the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be shifted to the normal game processing.

On the other hand, (b) when the setting changing flag is set when the power is turned on, and the transition condition for controlling the setting change mode is not satisfied, that is, among the above (i) to (iii). If any of the above conditions is not satisfied, the game is stopped (step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220 loop processing) after the setting value error error command is transmitted (step S21TM4190) without being controlled by the setting change mode. .. As a result, an error display on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: display of "E" on the display monitor 21TM029) is executed, and a message display on the effect control board 12 side ("The power is turned on again after the power is turned off"). Please move to the setting change mode. ") Will also be performed.

In this way, the error display on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: display of "E" on the display monitor 21TM029) is executed, and the message display on the effect control board 12 side ("The power is turned on again after the power is turned off"). If the setting change mode is also performed, the condition for shifting to the setting change mode after the power is restored is the state of the game machine even though the power is cut off during the setting change mode. It will be notified that the state is not established. In this case, the clerk of the game hall, etc. knows that the game is not controlled in the setting change mode and is in the game stop state (it is necessary to turn on the power again to control the setting change mode). It is possible. Therefore, after the power is turned off once, the power is turned on again by operating so that all the conditions (i) to (iii) for shifting to the setting change mode are satisfied. Then, in the setting change mode, by operating the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is changed to the planned setting value, and then the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off. By switching to the state, the set value can be fixed and the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be shifted to the normal gaming process.

In this way, when the power is cut off in the setting change mode, the state of the game machine can be appropriately notified when the power is restored.

Here, if the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is satisfied when the power is restored (a), an error display (step S21TM4210: display of "E" on the display monitor 21TM029) is displayed on the main board 11 side. It will automatically shift to the setting change mode without being disturbed, and it is possible to avoid unnecessary error display and prompt the user to change the setting value appropriately.

On the other hand, if the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is not satisfied when the power is restored (b), the mode cannot be switched to the setting change mode when the power is restored even though the power is cut off during the setting change mode. Since it is in the state, it is forcibly controlled to the game stop state (loop processing of step S21TM420 to step S21TM4220), and an error display on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: display of "E" on the display monitor 21TM029) It will be done. As a result, it is possible to limit the progress of the game in an unstable state in which the set value is not fixed, and it is possible to realize appropriate game control.

When the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), the transition conditions (i) to (iii) for shifting to the setting change mode are all satisfied, and the transition condition (i) is satisfied. )-(Iii) may not be satisfied, and different commands may be sent as commands indicating that the set value may be abnormal.

For example, if the transition condition is satisfied, it is a command indicating that the set value may be abnormal, and the mode has been changed to the setting change mode (or the condition for transition is satisfied). On the production control CPU 120 that received this command, the message "The setting value may be abnormal" and the message "It is automatically controlled to the setting change mode" are displayed as images. It is preferable to display it on the device 5. On the other hand, if the transition condition is not satisfied, the setting value abnormality error command in step S21TM4190 may be transmitted as described above.

After the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode is completed and the normal game processing is started, (1) the lock switch 21TM051 is operated when both the game machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are in the closed state. A lock switch operation command is transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 to the effect control CPU 120 according to the fact (from the OFF state to the ON state), and (2) the setting changeover switch (clear switch). ) 21TM052 is operated (from the OFF state to the ON state), and the setting changeover switch operation command is transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 to the effect control CPU 120.

Then, the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120) is controlled in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode based on the reception of the lock switch operation command and / or the setting changeover switch operation command. Despite the fact that there is no such operation, it is possible to identify that an operation for changing the set value has been performed and notify the fact. For example, based on the reception of the lock switch operation command, the image display device 5 executes an abnormal operation warning notification that displays the characters "lock switch operation has been detected." In addition, based on the reception of the setting changeover switch operation command, the abnormal operation warning notification that displays the characters "The operation of the setting changeover switch has been detected." Is executed. As a result, the clerk of the amusement park clearly understands that the operation for changing the set value has been performed even though it is not controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and is illegal. It is possible to confirm whether or not is performed.

Not limited to such a form, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 has been operated after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed and the normal game processing is started. The lock switch operation command and the setting changeover switch operation command may not be transmitted without confirming whether or not the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated. In this way, during the period during which the normal game process (game control timer interrupt process) is being executed, the execution status of the operation for changing the set value and the operation for confirming the set value is not confirmed. This makes it possible to reduce the control load on the game control microcomputer 100.

(Modified example of processing at power-on)
In the example shown in FIG. 8-6, when the setting changing flag is set when the power is turned on (YES in step S21TM4030), (i) the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state (YES in step S21TM4120). ), (Ii) The lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4130), and (iii) the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4140). Only when it was confirmed that the RAM clear flag was set to 1 (step S21TM4150), the mode was changed to the setting change mode (NO in step S21TM4570).

Not limited to such a form, as shown in FIG. 8-11, when the setting changing flag is set when the power is turned on (YES in step S21TM4030), the three conditions (i) to (iii) are satisfied. The RAM clear flag may be set to 1 (step S21TM4150) and the mode may be shifted to the setting change mode (NO in step S21TM4570) without confirming whether or not it is satisfied.

In the process shown in FIG. 8-11, when the data check result of the backup RAM area is abnormal (NO in step S21TM4010) and the set value is not a normal value (NO in step S21TM4020), the setting changing flag is set. If this is the case (YES in step S21TM4030), the RAM clear flag is set to 1 (step S21TM4150) without determining whether the conditions (i) to (iii) are satisfied, and the setting is changed. The portion controlled by the mode (NO in step S21TM4570) and not controlled in the game stopped state (process corresponding to the loop process of step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220) is different from the process shown in FIG. 8-6. The other parts are the same as the processes shown in FIGS. 8-6 to 8-8.

Even in such a form, the RAM clear flag is set to 1 and the setting is changed to the setting change mode based on the setting changing flag being set when the power is turned on. It is possible to appropriately determine the state of the game machine when the power is cut off during the change.

In the example shown in FIG. 8-11, when the setting changing flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030), (i) the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, and (ii) the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on. It is controlled to the setting change mode based on the three conditions that the state is in the state and the (iii) clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (determined as NO in step S21TM4570). (The setting value of the setting value storage area can be changed), whereas when the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), (i) to (iii) Regardless of whether or not the three conditions are satisfied, the setting change mode is forcibly controlled.

In this way, if a power failure occurs while the setting change mode is being controlled, the three conditions (i) to (iii) are based on the fact that the setting changing flag is set when the power is restored. By automatically controlling the setting change mode regardless of whether or not is satisfied, the workability for fixing the set value can be improved.

Here, when the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), the setting is made even if the condition (ii) that the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (YES in step S21TM4130) is not satisfied. It will be controlled to the change mode. As a result, in the setting change mode, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is changed by operating the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 while the lock switch 21TM051 remains OFF. (Step S21TM461-10 in FIG. 8-7).

As described above, the condition for terminating the setting change mode is to switch the lock switch 21TM051 from the ON state to the OFF state (determine YES in step S21TM4680). Therefore, the clerk of the amusement park who has performed the operation of changing the set value temporarily turns the lock switch 21TM051 from the OFF state if the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state in order to confirm the set value and end the setting change mode. After switching to the ON state, the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state (YES is determined in step S21TM4680).

In this way, the condition for starting the control of the setting change mode depending on whether the setting changing flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030) or the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030). By making the conditions for ending the control of the setting change mode (the operation of switching the lock switch 21TM051 from the ON state to the OFF state) common, the conditions for ending the control of the setting change mode are clarified. We are trying to properly shift to normal game processing.

Here, even if the lock switch 21TM051 is urged to be turned ON when the setting change mode is controlled based on the setting changing flag being set (YES in step S21TM4030). good. For example, when the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), the CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag to 1 in step S21TM4150 and transmits a setting value error error command (in step S21TM4190 described above). The corresponding process is executed), and the effect control CPU 120 that receives the set value error error command (step S21TM4110) says, "Turn on the lock switch once, and then switch it off after changing the set value." The message may be displayed on the image display device 5.

In the processes shown in FIGS. 8-6 to 8-8 and 8-11, it is not possible to shift to the normal game process when the setting changing flag is set. Therefore, when the pachinko machine maker ships the pachinko game machine 1 (before installation in the game hall), the setting changing flag is set in advance, and then the game hall side goes through the setting change mode. Unless the set value is changed and the setting change mode is terminated, the pachinko gaming machine 1 cannot be played. As a result, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed in the game hall, it is possible to ensure that the pachinko game machine 1 is controlled to the setting change mode to perform the setting change operation and take measures to determine the set value.

As shown in FIGS. 8-6 to 8-8, the RAM clear (step S21TM1410) is always executed when the setting change mode is controlled. This is because, as shown in FIG. 8-4, the range of random numbers determined to be big hits differs depending on the set value. For example, an event in which the big hit judgment random number extracted at the time of starting prize before the setting change is judged to be a big hit in relation to the setting value before the change, but is judged to be out of order in relation to the setting value after the change. On the contrary, although it is determined to be out of order in relation to the set value before the change, an event may occur in which it is determined to be a big hit in relation to the set value after the change. In such a case, the game after the setting change is continued based on the big hit judgment random number extracted at the time of the start winning before the setting change (the game control timer interrupt processing including the special symbol process process is executed). Since this is inappropriate, the hold memory (hold memory of special symbol, hold memory of normal symbol) is cleared by initializing the game state, and the number of hold memory is set to the initial value (0). There is.

Further, during the period controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, as a result of the interrupt permission of step S21TM1540 being not performed, the switch processing (step S21 shown in FIG. 4) in the game control timer interrupt processing is not performed. , Starting prizes, passing through gates, etc. are invalid. This is because the random number circuit setting process (step S21TM1490) and the like have not yet been executed during the period controlled by the setting change mode, and the random numbers have not been updated. If a random number is extracted based on the start winning prize during the period controlled by the setting change mode, the same random number value will be obtained regardless of the start winning timing, and the game will be played based on such a random number value. Since it is inappropriate to proceed, the start prize and gate passage are invalidated.

(Set value storage control when the power is cut off while changing the set value)
Next, the set value storage control when a power failure occurs while changing the set value will be described with reference to FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 8-7, the setting value itself stored in the setting value storage area is changed by operating the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 in the setting change mode.

First, regarding the control when the power is cut off before the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state (before the end of the setting change mode) by the operation of changing the set value during the setting change mode, FIG. This will be described with reference to -12 (1).

As shown in order 1, when the power is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is set to the ON state (the clear switch 21TM052 is also set to the ON state) and the setting change mode is controlled. In this example, when the power is turned on, "0" is stored as a set value in the set value storage area of the RAM 102. Next, as shown in order 2, the set value "0" stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is read as the setting change mode is started, and the read set value is set to 1. "1" is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this point, the lock switch 21TM051 remains ON.

Next, as shown in order 3, the set value stored in the set value storage area is "0" based on the operation of the first setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 in the setting change mode. Is changed to "1", and "2", which is obtained by adding 1 to the changed set value, is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this point, the lock switch 21TM051 remains ON. Further, as shown in order 4, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is "1" based on the second operation of the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 in the setting change mode. Is changed to "2", and "3", which is obtained by adding 1 to the changed set value, is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this point, the lock switch 21TM051 remains ON.

Next, as shown in order 5, it is assumed that the power supply is cut off while the lock switch 21TM051 remains in the ON state in the setting change mode, that is, before the operation for ending the setting change mode is performed. At this time, the set value "2" after the second operation of the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is stored in the set value storage area. In the power off state, the set value "2" stored in the set value storage area formed in the backup area of the RAM 102 is held as it is.

Next, as shown in order 6, when the power is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is set to the ON state (the clear switch 21TM052 is also set to the ON state) and the setting change mode is controlled. When the power is turned on, "2" is stored as a set value in the set value storage area of the RAM 102. This set value "2" is a value stored in the set value storage area when the power is cut off during the previous setting change mode.

Next, as shown in order 7, the set value "2" stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is read as the setting change mode is started, and the read set value is set to 1. "3" is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this point, the lock switch 21TM051 remains ON.

Since the setting changing flag is set when the power is turned on in order 6, when the control shown in FIG. 8-11 described above is applied, even if the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (or cleared). Even if the switch 21TM052 is in the OFF state), it will be automatically controlled to the setting change mode. Therefore, the state of the lock switch 21TM051 in the order 6 and the order 7 may be an OFF state.

In this way, when the set value is changed in the setting change mode and the power is cut off without turning off the lock switch 21TM051 (without ending the setting change mode), the power is restored at the time of power restoration. , The set value after the change in the previous setting change mode is held in the set value storage area. Therefore, when the power is restored, the set value that has already been planned may be set. In this case, the clerk at the game hall ends the setting change mode without performing an operation to change the set value again. Since the game machine may be shifted to the normal game processing, the workability can be improved.

Next, regarding the control when the power is cut off after the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state (after the setting change mode ends) by the operation of changing the set value during the setting change mode. This will be described with reference to FIG. 8-12 (2).

The order 1 to order 4 are the same as the example shown in FIG. 8-12 (1), and the description thereof will be omitted. Next, as shown in order 5, in the setting change mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state, so that the setting change mode ends. As a result, the set value "2" after the operation of the second setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is performed is fixed as the final set value. At this time, "2" is stored as a set value in the set value storage area, and "3" is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 by adding 1 to the confirmed set value.

After that, as shown in order 6, it is assumed that the power switch 21TM055 is turned off and the power supply is stopped. In this power-off state, the set value "2" stored in the set value storage area formed in the backup area of the RAM 102 is held as it is.

Next, as shown in order 7, when the power is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is set to the ON state (the clear switch 21TM052 is also set to the ON state) and the setting change mode is controlled. When the power is turned on, "2" is stored as a set value in the set value storage area of the RAM 102. This setting value "2" is a value finally stored in the setting value storage area at the end of the previous setting change mode.

Next, as shown in order 8, the set value "2" stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is read as the setting change mode is started, and the read set value is set to 1. "3" is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this point, the lock switch 21TM051 remains ON.

As shown in FIGS. 8-12 (1) and 8-12, when the power supply is cut off while the setting change mode is controlled, and when the power supply is stopped after the setting change mode control is completed. In either case, when the power is restored, the set value after being changed according to the setting change operation in the previous setting change mode, that is, the set value stored in the set value storage area immediately before the power is turned off, is displayed. , It is a valid setting value (setting value stored in the setting storage area when the power is restored).

It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the storage control of the set value shown in FIG. 8-12. That is, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area when controlled in the setting change mode is copied to the setting information temporary storage area, and the setting changeover switch (clear switch) is used when the setting change mode is controlled. When 21TM052 is operated, the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area is changed without changing the setting value in the setting value storage area, and the setting change mode is terminated (lock switch 21TM051 is turned on). Based on the operation of switching from the state to the OFF state), the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area is stored (overwritten) in the setting value storage area to confirm the setting value. You may. In this case, the set value to be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 is a value (1 to 6) obtained by adding 1 to the set value (0 to 5) stored in the set information temporary storage area. As the set value stored in is changed, the set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 also changes.

With such a configuration, the setting is controlled even when the setting change mode is performed when the power is turned on and the setting change operation is performed (when the setting value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 is changed). If the power is cut off without completing the operation to end the change mode (without switching the lock switch 21TM051 to the OFF state), the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is the power supply. It means that it has not been changed since it was turned on (before the setting change operation was performed in the setting change mode). That is, in the power supply stop state, the set value stored in the set value storage area at the time of the previous power-on is still held. Therefore, the set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A) when controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the power is restored is stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 when the power is turned on last time. It will be a value according to the set value that was set.

In this way, the set value when the power is cut off while being controlled in the setting change mode can be appropriately set. Further, when the power supply is stopped in an unstable state in which the setting change mode is not ended, the change of the setting value can be restricted.

For the control related to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode shown in the above embodiment, a plurality of setting values (for example, 0 to 5) are provided, and the jackpot probability differs depending on the setting values. It is applicable, but not limited to this, although a plurality of set values (for example, 0 to 5) are provided, the jackpot probability is common regardless of the set value (for example, for all of the set values 0 to 5). It can also be applied to a game machine (with a jackpot probability of 1/300).

Further, the present feature section 21TM discloses the following inventions.

As shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine including a setting changing means for changing a setting value in a plurality of stages based on a setting changing operation from the outside has been proposed. Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-200506 (paragraph 0102), a gaming machine has been proposed in which a "big hit signal" or the like is output from an external output terminal of a main control board. Regarding a gaming machine as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), when it is necessary for an external device to grasp the control state related to the setting when changing the setting value or the like. However, even if the signal output technique of the conventional gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-500206 (paragraph 0102) is applied, there is a problem that it is difficult for the external device to grasp the signal output technique. is there. The invention according to the means O1 to the means O4 is made in view of the above-mentioned actual conditions, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of appropriately notifying the control state related to the setting to the outside of the game machine.

The game machine of means O1
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing control (big hit determination processing in special symbol process processing, etc.) according to a set value (six stages of set values 0 to 5 in which the range of random numbers for jackpot determination is different). ,
A setting change mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620) capable of controlling a setting change mode in which a set value can be changed, and a game control microcomputer 100.
Setting confirmation mode control means (step S21TM4530 to step S21TM4570 and step S21TM4650 capable of executing the game control microcomputer 100) that can control the setting confirmation mode in which the set value can be confirmed, and
With a specific signal output means (game control microcomputer 100 that outputs a security signal in step S21TM4560) that outputs a specific signal (security signal) in response to the start of control in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. ,
A setting means (a game control microcomputer 100 for setting a value of a security signal timer) for setting a value (value of a security signal timer) for a period during which a specific signal is output is provided.
The setting means can set a predetermined value common to the case where the setting change mode is controlled and the case where the setting confirmation mode is controlled (1 second is set as the value of the security signal timer in step S21TM4710). ),
The specific signal output means outputs a specific signal in response to the end of control of either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode until at least a period corresponding to the predetermined value elapses (in the setting confirmation mode). With the end, the security signal is continuously output until 1 second elapses from the end of the setting confirmation mode, and with the end of the setting change mode, the security signal is continuously output until 30 seconds elapse from the end of the setting change mode. To do)
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the state of the gaming machine related to the setting can be appropriately notified to the external device.

The game machine of means O2 is
It is a game machine of means O1
It is provided with an initialization means for initializing the game state (a game control microcomputer 100 that executes RAM clear (step S21TM1410) based on the fact that the RAM clear flag is set in step S21TM4050 and step S21TM4150).
The initialization means initializes the game state according to the control of the setting change mode (when the setting change mode is controlled, the RAM clear is executed after the setting change mode is controlled).
After setting the predetermined value (after setting 1 second as the value of the security signal timer in step S21TM4710), the setting means can set a specific value corresponding to a period longer than the period corresponding to the predetermined value. (When RAM clear is executed, 30 seconds can be set as the value of the security signal timer in step S21TM1465).
The specific signal output means outputs a specific signal until a period corresponding to the specific value elapses in response to the end of the control of the setting change mode (from the end of the setting change mode with the end of the setting change mode). Continuously output security signals until 30 seconds have passed)
It is characterized by that.
According to this, a specific signal is output at least for a period corresponding to a predetermined value in both cases when the control of the setting change mode is finished and when the control of the setting confirmation mode is finished, and the setting is changed. When controlled to a mode, a specific signal is output for a period longer than the period corresponding to the predetermined value. Therefore, the setting process by the setting means is standardized and the output differs between the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. It is possible to set the period.

The gaming machine of means O3 is
A gaming machine of means O1 or means O2,
In the setting change mode, when the power supply to the game machine is stopped without performing a specific operation for ending the setting change mode (detection that the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off in step S21TM4680). In step S21TM4580, the setting change flag is set based on the shift to the setting change mode in the backup area of the specific information storage means (RAM 102, which stores the setting change flag), and the setting change mode ends. Based on this, a game control microcomputer 100) that clears the setting changing flag in step S21TM4720 is provided.
When the power supply to the game machine is started and the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means (it is determined in step S21TM4030 at the time of power restoration that the setting changing flag is set). (In some cases), the game is stopped and a specific signal is output (the processing of steps S21TM420 to S21TM4220 is repeatedly executed until the power is turned off based on the fact that the conditions for shifting to the setting change mode are not satisfied). Is possible.
According to this, when the power supply is stopped during the control of the setting change mode, the state of the game machine can be appropriately notified to the external device when the power supply is restarted.

The game machine of means O4
Any gaming machine selected from means O1 to means O3.
A game control means for controlling the progress of the game (a game control microcomputer 100 that executes a game control timer interrupt process) and
It is equipped with an effect control means (CPU 120 for effect control) that controls the execution of the effect.
The game control means
Display means (display monitor 21TM029) and
The setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 that executes the processes of steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620) and
In the setting change mode, power is supplied to the game machine without performing a specific operation for ending the setting change mode (without detecting an operation in which the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off in step S21TM4680). Specific information storage means for storing specific information when stopped (in the backup area of the RAM 102, the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4580 based on the shift to the setting change mode, and the setting change mode is terminated. Based on the game control microcomputer 100), which clears the setting changing flag in step S21TM4720, and
When the power supply to the game machine is started and the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means (it is determined in step S21TM4030 at the time of power restoration that the setting changing flag is set). (In some cases), it is possible to execute an error notification in the display means and send an error command to the effect control means (a set value abnormality error command is sent in step S21TM4190, and a display monitor is displayed in the error display in step S21TM4210. It is possible to display the letter "E" on 21TM029),
In response to receiving the error command, the effect control means notifies the image display device 5 to prompt an operation for changing the set value (“The power is turned on again after the power is turned off to enter the setting change mode”. Display the message "Please migrate")
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the state of the game machine can be appropriately notified to the clerk of the game hall, and the operation for changing the set value can be urged.

Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine including a setting changing means for changing a setting value in a plurality of stages based on a setting changing operation from the outside has been proposed. In a gaming machine as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), it is necessary to appropriately notify the state of the gaming machine when the power supply is stopped when the set value is changed. The inventions relating to the means P1 to the means P4 have been made in view of the above-mentioned actual conditions, and provide a gaming machine that appropriately notifies the state of the gaming machine when the power supply is stopped when the set value is changed. To provide.

The game machine of means P1
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing control (big hit determination processing in special symbol process processing, etc.) according to a set value (six stages of set values 0 to 5 in which the range of random numbers for jackpot determination is different). ,
A setting change mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620) capable of controlling a setting change mode in which a set value can be changed, and a game control microcomputer 100.
Specific information storage means for storing specific information that can be identified as being controlled in the setting change mode (the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4580 based on the transition to the setting change mode, and the setting change mode is terminated. Based on this, the game control microcomputer 100) that clears the setting changing flag in step S21TM4720 is provided.
The specific information storage means can store the specific information even after the power supply to the game machine is stopped (the value of the setting changing flag is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102).
When the power supply to the game machine is started and the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means (it is determined in step S21TM4030 at the time of power restoration that the setting changing flag is set). In some cases), it is further provided with an error notification means capable of executing error notification (a game control microcomputer 100 that displays an error in step S21TM4210 when the transition condition to the setting change mode is not satisfied). ..
According to this, when the power supply is stopped in the setting change mode, the state of the game machine can be appropriately notified.

The game machine of means P2 is
It is a game machine of means P1
The setting change mode control means satisfies the setting change condition (when the power is turned on, the game machine frame 3 is in the open state, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the clear switch (setting). It is possible to control the setting change mode based on the changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state).
When the power supply to the game machine is started and the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means (it is determined in step S21TM4030 at the time of power restoration that the setting changing flag is set). (In some cases), based on the fact that the setting change condition is satisfied, it is possible to control the setting change mode without executing the error notification (at the time of turning on the power, all in steps S21TM4120, step S21TM4130, and step S21TM4140). Based on the determination of YES, the mode shifts to the setting change mode without shifting to the loop processing of steps S21TM420 to step S21TM4220).
It is characterized by that.
According to this, when the condition to be controlled in the setting change mode is satisfied, the setting change mode is controlled without executing the error notification, and unnecessary error notification is avoided and the set value is appropriately set. You can encourage changes.

The game machine of means P3 is
A gaming machine of means P1 or means P2,
When the power supply to the game machine is started and the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means (it is determined in step S21TM4030 at the time of power restoration that the setting changing flag is set). (In some cases), it is possible to execute the error notification and put the game in the game stop state (when the power is turned on, if the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is not satisfied (step S21TM4120 to step S21TM4140). If NO is determined in (), the process proceeds to the loop processing of step S21TM420 to step S21TM4220 without shifting to the setting change mode)
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to limit the progress of the game in a state where the set value is unstable, and it is possible to realize appropriate game control.

The game machine of means P4
Any gaming machine selected from means P1 to means P3.
A game control means for controlling the progress of the game (a game control microcomputer 100 that executes a game control timer interrupt process) and
It is equipped with an effect control means (CPU 120 for effect control) that controls the execution of the effect.
The game control means
Display means (display monitor 21TM029) and
The setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 that executes the processes of steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620) and
With the specific information storage means,
When the power supply to the game machine is started and the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means (it is determined in step S21TM4030 at the time of power restoration that the setting changing flag is set). (In some cases), it is possible to execute the error notification in the display means and send an error command to the effect control means (a set value abnormality error command is sent in step S21TM4190 and displayed in the error display in step S21TM4210). It is possible to display the letter "E" on the monitor 21TM029),
In response to receiving the error command, the effect control means notifies the image display device 5 to prompt an operation for changing the set value (“The power is turned on again after the power is turned off to enter the setting change mode”. Display the message "Please migrate")
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the state of the game machine can be appropriately notified to the clerk of the game hall, and the operation for changing the set value can be urged.

Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine including a setting changing means for changing a setting value in a plurality of stages based on a setting changing operation from the outside has been proposed. In a gaming machine as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), it is necessary to appropriately determine the state of the gaming machine when the power supply is stopped when the set value is changed. The inventions according to the means Q1 to the means Q5 have been made in view of the above-mentioned actual conditions, and provide a game machine that appropriately determines the state of the game machine when the power supply is stopped when the set value is changed. To do.

The game machine of means Q1
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing control (big hit determination processing in special symbol process processing, etc.) according to a set value (six stages of set values 0 to 5 in which the range of random numbers for jackpot determination is different). ,
A setting change mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620) capable of controlling a setting change mode in which a set value can be changed, and a game control microcomputer 100.
Specific information storage means for storing specific information that can be identified as being controlled in the setting change mode (the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4580 based on the transition to the setting change mode, and the setting change mode is terminated. Based on this, the game control microcomputer 100) that clears the setting changing flag in step S21TM4720 is provided.
The specific information storage means can store the specific information even after the power supply to the game machine is stopped (the value of the setting changing flag is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102).
The setting change mode control means sets the setting changing flag in step S21TM4030 at the time of power restoration when the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means when the power supply to the game machine is started. When it is determined that it is set), it is controlled to the setting change mode (when the power is turned on, the game machine frame 3 is in the open state, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the clear switch is set. (Setting changeover switch) Automatically controls to the setting change mode regardless of whether or not the condition for shifting to the setting change mode that 21TM052 is in the ON state is satisfied.)
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the state of the game machine can be appropriately determined when the power supply is stopped in the setting change mode accompanied by the initialization of the game state.
The RAM is set based on the initialization means (for example, step S21TM4050 and step S21TM4150) in which the gaming machine of means Q1 initializes the gaming state in response to the control of the setting change mode. A game control microcomputer 100) that executes clearing (step S21TM1410) may be further provided.

The game machine of means Q2 is
It is a game machine of means Q1
The setting change mode control means is based on the fact that the setting change condition is satisfied when the specific information is not stored in the specific information storage means when the power supply to the game machine is started. Controlled to the setting change mode (when the power is turned on, if the setting changing flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030), the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, and the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state. To shift to the setting change mode in which the RAM clear flag is 1 (RAM clear is executed after the setting change mode ends because the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state). (The mode shifts to the setting change mode based on the condition being satisfied), and when the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means, the setting change condition is not satisfied or not. Controlling to the setting change mode (when the setting changing flag is set when the power is turned on (YES in step S21TM4030), regardless of whether or not the conditions for shifting to the setting change mode are satisfied. Automatically control to change setting mode)
It is characterized by that.
According to this, when the power is cut off during the setting change mode control, the setting change mode is set even when the setting change condition is not satisfied based on the specific information stored at the time of power restoration. Since it will be controlled, workability can be improved.

The game machine of means Q3 is
A gaming machine of means Q1 or means Q2,
The setting change mode control means is a transition operation when the power supply to the game machine is started (when the power is turned on, when the setting change flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030), the game machine frame 3 Is in the open state, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the RAM clear flag is 1. (The clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state, so that the RAM is cleared after the setting change mode ends. Is executed), it is possible to control to the setting change mode based on the condition for shifting to the setting change mode), and when the setting change mode is controlled. It is possible to terminate the setting change mode based on a specific operation (it was confirmed that the lock switch 21TM051 was turned off in step S21TM4680).
The specific information storage means stores the specific information when it is controlled to the setting change mode (sets the setting changing flag at the timing of step S21TM4580 when the control of the setting change mode is started), and the specific operation. When the setting change mode ends, the specific information is deleted (the setting changing flag is cleared at the timing of step S21TM4720 when the control of the setting change mode ends).
The setting change mode control means said, when the power supply to the game machine is started, when the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means, regardless of whether or not the transition operation is performed. Controlled to the setting change mode (when the setting changing flag is set when the power is turned on (YES in step S21TM4030), regardless of whether or not the conditions for shifting to the setting change mode are satisfied. The setting change mode is automatically controlled), and the setting change mode is terminated based on the specific operation (the setting change mode is terminated based on the confirmation that the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off in step S21TM4680. Let)
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the conditions for terminating the control of the setting change mode can be appropriately determined.

The game machine of means Q4 is
Any gaming machine selected from means Q1 to means Q3.
It is equipped with a set value storage means (a set value storage area of the RAM 102 in which the set value is stored) for storing the set value (six stages of set values 0 to 5 in which the range of random numbers for jackpot determination is different).
It is possible to execute control according to the set value stored in the set value storage means (big hit determination process in the special symbol process process, etc.).
The set value stored in the set value storage means is changed based on the change operation when the setting change mode is controlled (when the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated in step S21TM4610). Change the setting value stored in the setting value storage area),
The setting change mode control means terminates the setting change mode based on a specific operation when the setting change mode is controlled (it was confirmed in step S21TM4680 that the lock switch 21TM051 was turned off. Exit the setting change mode based on),
The set value storage means is changed by the change operation in the setting change mode when the power supply to the game machine is stopped without performing the specific operation when controlled in the setting change mode. The set value is continuously stored (the set value storage area is formed in the backup area of the RAM 102, and when the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated during the setting change mode, the set value storage area is stored. Since the setting value itself stored in is changed, the setting value after being changed by the change operation is retained even if the power is cut off during the setting change mode.)
It is characterized by that.
According to this, when the power supply is restarted, the set value after being changed by the change operation in the setting change mode before the power failure occurs is stored in the set value storage means, and the set value corresponds to the set value. Workability can be improved because control is executed.

The game machine of means Q5 is
Any gaming machine selected from means Q1 to means Q3.
It is equipped with a set value storage means (a set value storage area of the RAM 102 in which the set value is stored) for storing the set value (six stages of set values 0 to 5 in which the range of random numbers for jackpot determination is different).
It is possible to execute control according to the set value stored in the set value storage means (big hit determination process in the special symbol process process, etc.).
The setting change mode control means is stored in the setting value storage area when the change operation when the setting change mode is controlled and (when the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated in the setting change mode). (Change only the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area, not the existing setting value), and change the setting value stored in the setting value storage means based on the specific operation after the change operation. The setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area at that time is stored in the setting value storage area based on the confirmation that the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off in the setting change mode. To confirm it as a valid setting value and exit the setting change mode),
When the setting value storage means is controlled in the setting change mode and the power supply to the game machine is stopped without performing the specific operation, the change operation is performed in the setting change mode. Stores the set value before it is set (even if the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated during the setting change mode, if the lock switch 21TM051 is not switched off, the setting value itself stored in the setting value storage area Is not changed, so if a power failure occurs during the setting change mode, the setting value before being controlled to the setting change mode is retained.)
It is characterized by that.
According to this, when the power supply is stopped in an unstable state in which the setting change mode is not ended, the change of the setting value can be restricted.

[Explanation of feature 16TM]
Next, the feature unit 16TM will be described. 9-1 (A1) and 9-1 (B1) are explanatory views showing specific examples of the hold display and the active display in the present embodiment. The hold display is the display information corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol that has not been executed, and the active display is the display information corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol that has been executed. In the present embodiment, a first hold display area 16TM011 for displaying the first hold storage number (0 to 4 first hold display 16TM001) is provided at the lower left of the screen of the image display device 5, and the image display device An active display area 16TM013 is provided at the lower center of the screen of No. 5 where the active display 16TM003 corresponding to the currently executing fluctuation display is displayed.

Further, when the gaming state is controlled to the low accuracy low base state (normal state), the mini effect area 16TM035, which will be described later, is located in the special effect area 16TM035 provided below the active display 16TM003 at the lower center of the screen of the image display device 5. Slot 16TM030 is displayed. In this example, since the mini slot 16TM030 is displayed directly below the active display 16TM003, the player sees the mini slot 16TM030 as if it were the pedestal of the active display 16TM003. That is, since the mini-slot 16TM030 is displayed at a position corresponding to the active display 16TM003, the player can easily grasp that the mini-slot 16TM030 executes the effect corresponding to the variable display being executed. Can be done.

In the present embodiment, the mini slot 16TM030 can be displayed regardless of whether or not the variable display of the special symbol is executed (whether or not the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed) and regardless of the number of reserved storages. Information.

When the first hold storage number is not 0, the effect control CPU 120 displays the first hold display 16TM001 in the first hold display area 16TM011 in a number corresponding to the first hold storage number. That is, in the first hold display 16TM001, the start condition (for example, winning the first start winning opening) is satisfied, but the start condition (for example, the variable display of the special symbol is not executed, and the game is controlled to the jackpot game state. Information corresponding to the variable display (and the variable display of the decorative symbol) of the first special symbol in which the second reserved memory number is 0 and the first reserved memory number is not 0) is not established. Is. When a plurality of first hold displays 16TM001 are displayed in the first hold display area 16TM011, the first hold display 16TM001 corresponds to the order close to the active display area 16TM013 (from the right when viewed from the player). The start condition of the variable display is satisfied.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the active display 16TM003 in the active display area 16TM013 when the variable display of the decorative symbol is being executed. That is, the active display 16TM003 is a big hit game in which the start condition (for example, the variable display of the special symbol is not executed) after the start condition (for example, winning the first start winning opening or the second start winning opening) is satisfied. This is information corresponding to the variable display (and the variable display of the decorative symbol) of the special symbol for which the state is not controlled and the number of reserved memories is not 0).

In the present embodiment, as described above, the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed in response to the variable display of the special symbol. As shown in FIGS. 9-1 (A1) and 9-1 (A1) and (B1), the area at the upper center of the image display device 5 on which the decorative symbol is variablely displayed and stopped is displayed. The symbol display area 5R is used.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9-1 (A1) and (B1), the symbol is smaller than the decorative symbol displayed in the upper right portion of the image display device 5, and the special symbol is variablely displayed. A symbol indicating whether or not the symbol is displayed and the display result of the special symbol is called a small symbol. The variable display of the small symbol can be executed in parallel with the variable display of the special symbol, and the stop display of the small symbol can also be executed in parallel with the stop display of the special symbol. Then, the area at the upper right of the screen of the image display device 5, in which the small symbols corresponding to the first special symbol are variablely displayed and stopped, is displayed from the left in the small symbol display area 5l, the small symbol display area 5c, and the small symbol display area. Let it be 5r. The small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r have smaller display areas than the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Therefore, the visibility of the small symbol is lower than the visibility of the decorative symbol.

As shown in FIGS. 9-1 (A1) and 9-1 (B1), in the present embodiment, when the image is controlled to the low accuracy low base state (normal state), the mini slot is set in the special effect area 16TM035 of the image display device 5. 16TM030 is displayed. In the mini-slot 16TM030, variable display of a plurality of types of mini-slot symbols is executed. In the first mini-slot variable display described later, as shown in FIG. 9-1 (A2), the mini-slots of "replay", "bell", "watermelon", "cherry", "7", and "blank" The symbols are variably displayed, and in the second mini-slot variable display, which will be described later, as shown in FIG. 9-1 (B2), the symbols without the warning characters (“not displayed”) and the jackpot expectation are displayed. The mini-slot symbols of "CHANGE", "super heat", and "FEVER", which are symbols consisting of suggestive notice characters, are variably displayed.

(Variable display of the first mini slot)
As shown in FIG. 9-1 (A1), in the present embodiment, when controlled to the low accuracy low base state (normal state), the variation display of the special symbol (variation display of the decorative symbol, variation of the small symbol). Each time the display) is executed, the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1 (areas corresponding to each of the three reels in the slot machine) are divided into three areas, "left", "middle", and "right". ), The first mini-slot variable display in which the mini-slot symbol is variably displayed (for example, vertical scroll display or update display) can be executed. In the first mini-slot variable display, the mini-slot symbols are displayed in one stage (one line) in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1. In the following description, the term "variable display" simply means a variable display of a special symbol, a variable display of a decorative symbol corresponding to a variable display of a special symbol, or a variable display of a small symbol.

Here, as shown in FIG. 9-1 (A2), in each mini-slot symbol display area of the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 (3 reels), "replay", "bell", "watermelon", A plurality of types of symbols that can be distinguished from each other, such as "cherry", "7", and "blank (horizontal linear object (-) in this example)", are variably displayed in a predetermined order.

Then, when the mini-slot symbols are stopped in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1, if the combinations of symbols called the winning combinations are aligned, the winning combination is established as if the winning combination was established. The winning combination may be a combination of the same symbols or a combination including different symbols. The winning combination in this embodiment is a combination of the same symbol and a combination including different symbols. In the case of a combination of different symbols, the winning combination is "off".

In the present embodiment, the winning combination is established when the combinations of the same symbols are aligned. For example, when the same symbol combinations of [bell], [bell], and [bell] are aligned in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1, the role of "bell" is established. Similarly, if the same combination of [watermelon], [watermelon], and [watermelon] is available, the role of "watermelon" is established, and if the same combination of [cherry], [cherry], and [cherry] is available, "cherry". The role of "cherry" is established, and when the combinations of the same symbols of [7], [7], and [7] are complete, the role of "7 match" is established. However, when the same combinations of [blank], [blank], and [blank] are aligned in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1, the same treatment is performed as when the winning combination is "missing".

(Variable display of the second mini slot)
As shown in FIG. 9-1 (B1), in the present embodiment, after the first mini-slot variable display is executed (after any of the above-mentioned successful combinations is established), the two are not divided into a plurality. In a single mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 (area corresponding to one reel), it is possible to execute a second mini-slot variable display in which the mini-slot symbol is variably displayed (for example, vertical scroll display or update display). is there. In the second mini-slot variable display, the mini-slot symbols are displayed in one stage (one line) in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1.

Here, as shown in FIG. 9-1 (B2), in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 (1 reel), "no display", "CHANGE", "extreme heat", and "FEVER" can be distinguished from each other. A plurality of types of symbols are variably displayed in a predetermined order. In the present embodiment, the display result by the second mini-slot variable display, that is, the display result of the variable display of the special symbol being executed by the displayed characters (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol being executed). Is suggested to be a "big hit".

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9-1 (A1) and 9-1 (B1), the number of fluctuation displays executed after the gaming state is controlled to the low probability low base state (normal state) is counted. The fluctuation number display 16TM040 indicating the value of the fluctuation number counter is displayed at the lower left of the screen of the image display device 5. The value indicated by the variation display 16TM040 allows the player to grasp the number of variation displays executed in the normal state. In the examples shown in FIGS. 9-1 (A1) and 9-1 (B1), "125" is displayed as the variation number display 16TM040, and the variation display has already been executed 124 times since the gaming state shifts to the normal state. It shows the state in which the 125th fluctuation display is being executed at the present time.

Here, the variation number display 16TM040 is different from the normal mode (for example, the white mode) by executing the second setting suggestion effect described later based on the set value of the game machine. For example, it changes to purple mode).

It should be noted that the display mode of the variation number display 16TM040 is expected to be different from the normal mode (for example, white mode), the normal mode, and the above-mentioned setting suggestion mode (for example, purple mode) based on the display result of the variation display to be executed. A notice effect (for example, referred to as a second expected degree notice effect) that changes to a degree notice mode (for example, a red mode) may be executed. However, in the same variation display, both the second setting suggestion effect and the second expectation notice effect are not executed, and if it is decided to execute the second setting suggestion effect, the second setting suggestion effect is displayed. Expectation notice production shall not be executed. That is, the second setting suggestion effect is executed with priority over the second expectation notice effect.

FIG. 9-2 is a flowchart showing a change effect determination process executed at the time of starting winning. The effect control CPU 120 executes the start winning change effect determination process shown in FIG. 9-2 in the pre-reading advance notice setting process (step S161) of the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7.

In the start winning change effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first receives a set of start winning commands (for example, a symbol designation command, a variable category command) based on the occurrence of a start winning to the first starting winning opening. , And whether or not the first hold storage number addition designation command) has been newly received (step S16TM1000).

The symbol designation command is an effect control command that indicates whether or not a big hit is obtained and the judgment result of the type of big hit among the judgment results at the time of winning. The CPU 103 determines whether or not a jackpot will be achieved and the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot based on the jackpot determination random number and the jackpot type determination random number extracted at the time of starting winning, and a symbol for designating the determination result. Output the specified command. Further, the variation category command is an effect control command that indicates the determination result of the variation pattern among the determination results at the time of winning. The CPU 103 determines whether or not it will be normal reach, whether or not it will be super reach, etc. based on the random number for determining the variation pattern type extracted at the time of starting winning, and outputs a variation category command that specifies the determination result. To do. Further, the first hold storage number addition designation command is an effect control command for designating that the first hold storage number has been increased by 1.

Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 newly stores one set of start winning commands (symbol designation command, variable category command, and first hold storage number addition designation command) in the start winning command storage area. Determine if it is. If a new command for starting a set of winning prizes has not been received (NO in step S16TM1000), the process ends as it is.

If one set of commands at the time of starting winning is newly received, the effect control CPU 120 determines the final display mode of the active display and the final display mode determination table of the active display (FIG. 9-3 (A)), which will be described later. It is determined based on (see step S16TM1010). The final display mode of the active display determined in step S16TM1010 is the final display color of the active display determined at the time of starting winning. In the present embodiment, after the active display has changed to the final display color, the warning characters may be superimposed and displayed on the active display according to the execution of the expectation warning effect described later. That is, there is a possibility that the mode of the active display may change from the final display mode of the active display determined at the time of winning the start, based on the effect determination process at the start of the fluctuation.

FIG. 9-3 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the final display mode determination table of the active display. As shown in FIG. 9-3 (A), in this embodiment, as the final display mode of the active display 16TM003, any one of "normal mode (white mode)", "blue mode", and "red mode" is used. It is possible to determine, and a determination value is assigned to each of these modes.

As shown in FIG. 9-3 (A), when the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing" (that is, when the judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is "missing"), the starting winning is said. The final display mode of the active display 16TM003 corresponding to the variable display based on (new first hold storage) is the normal mode (white circle display) at a rate of 70% and the blue mode (blue) at a rate of 25%. (Round display), and the red mode (red round display) at a rate of 5%.

On the other hand, when the judgment result at the time of the start winning is "big hit" (that is, when the judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), it is based on the start winning (new first hold memory). The final display mode of the active display 16TM003 corresponding to the variable display is a normal mode at a rate of 10%, a blue mode at a rate of 30%, and a red mode at a rate of 60%.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines the change pattern of the active display, the execution presence / absence of the first change effect, and the number of executions based on the change pattern determination table of the active display (see FIG. 9-3 (B)). (Step S16TM1020).

FIG. 9-3 (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a table for determining a change pattern of the active display. In this embodiment, any one of the change pattern 001 to the change pattern 025 can be determined as the change pattern of the active display, and a determination value is assigned to each of these change patterns.

As shown in FIG. 9-3 (B), the active display at the time of active shift is the normal mode, and (1) the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing" (that is, by the symbol designation command). If the specified judgment result is "missing"), the change pattern of the active display corresponding to the change display based on the start winning prize (new first hold memory) has a probability of 70% change pattern 001. The determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 002 is selected and the change pattern 002 is selected with a probability of 25%, and the change pattern 003 is selected with a probability of 5%. On the other hand, (2) when the judgment result at the time of the start winning is "big hit" (that is, when the judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the start winning (new first hold). As for the change pattern of the active display corresponding to the variation display based on the memory), the change pattern 001 is selected with a probability of 10%, the change pattern 002 is selected with a probability of 30%, and the change pattern 003 is selected with a probability of 60%. Judgment values are assigned so that

In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 determines the final display mode of the active display when a start winning prize occurs, but the display mode of the active display at the time of active shift is different from the final display mode. Will execute an active change effect that changes the display mode of the active display.

Here, when the display mode of the active display is changed (when the active change effect is executed) and when the display mode of the active display is not changed (when the active change effect is not executed), the display mode of the active display is changed. It is possible to perform a first change effect that suggests that it may change. This first change effect has a success mode and a failure mode. In the example shown below, when the first change effect of the success mode is executed, the display mode of the active display is changed and the failure mode is changed. When the first change effect of is executed, the display mode of the active display shall not be changed. Further, the first change effect is an effect in which the character acts on the active display. When the first change effect of the success mode is executed, the character acts on the active display to change the display mode of the active display, and when the first change effect of the failure mode is executed, the character Acts on the active display, but does not change the display mode of the active display.

The number of executions of the first change effect in the change pattern 001 is 0. The number of times of execution of the first change effect in the change pattern 002 is one, and the first change effect of the failure mode is executed. The number of times of execution of the first change effect in the change pattern 003 is two, and in each case, the first change effect of the failure mode is executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-3 (B), the active display at the time of active shift is in the blue mode, and (1) the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing" (that is, symbol designation). If the judgment result specified by the command is "missing"), the change pattern of the active display corresponding to the change display based on the start winning prize (new first hold memory) is 30% of the change pattern 011. Selected with probability, change pattern 012 is selected with 27% probability, change pattern 013 is selected with 23% probability, change pattern 014 is selected with 10% probability, change pattern 015 is selected with 5% probability. The determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 016 is selected and the change pattern 016 is selected with a probability of 5%. On the other hand, (2) when the judgment result at the time of the start winning is "big hit" (that is, when the judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the start winning (new first hold). As for the change pattern of the active display corresponding to the variation display based on the memory), the change pattern 011 is selected with a probability of 5%, the change pattern 012 is selected with a probability of 10%, and the change pattern 013 is selected with a probability of 15%. The determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 014 is selected with a probability of 20%, the change pattern 015 is selected with a probability of 25%, and the change pattern 016 is selected with a probability of 25%.

At this time, the number of executions of the first change effect in the change pattern 011 is 0. The number of times of execution of the first change effect in the change pattern 012 is one, and the first change effect of the failure mode is executed. The number of executions of the first change effect in the change pattern 013 is two, and the first change effect of the failure mode is executed in each case. The number of executions of the first change effect in the change pattern 014 is one, and the first change effect of the success mode is executed. The number of executions of the first change effect in the change pattern 015 is two, and after the first change effect of the failure mode is executed, the first change effect of the success mode is executed. The number of executions of the first change effect in the change pattern 016 is two, and after the first change effect of the success mode is executed, the first change effect of the failure mode is executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-3 (B), the active display at the time of active shift is in the red mode, and (1) the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing" (that is, symbol designation). If the judgment result specified by the command is "missing"), the change pattern of the active display corresponding to the change display based on the start winning prize (new first hold memory) is 35% of the change pattern 021. The change pattern 022 is selected with a probability of 25%, the change pattern 023 is selected with a probability of 20%, the change pattern 024 is selected with a probability of 10%, and the change pattern 025 is selected with a probability of 10%. Judgment values are assigned so that they are selected. On the other hand, (2) when the judgment result at the time of the start winning is "big hit" (that is, when the judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the start winning (new first hold). As for the change pattern of the active display corresponding to the variation display based on the memory), the change pattern 022 is selected with a probability of 5%, the change pattern 022 is selected with a probability of 15%, and the change pattern 023 is selected with a probability of 30%. The determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 024 is selected with a probability of 25% and the change pattern 025 is selected with a probability of 25%.

At this time, the number of executions of the first change effect in the change pattern 021 is 0. The number of executions of the first change effect in the change pattern 022 is one, and the first change effect of the success mode is executed. The number of executions of the first change effect in the change pattern 023 is two, and the first change effect of the success mode is executed in each case. The number of executions of the first change effect in the change pattern 024 is two, and after the first change effect of the failure mode is executed, the first change effect of the success mode is executed. The number of executions of the first change effect in the change pattern 025 is two, and after the first change effect of the failure mode is executed, the first change effect of the success mode is executed.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines the change pattern of the hold display based on the change pattern determination table of the hold display (see FIGS. 9-4 (C) to (F)) (step S16TM1030), and performs the process as it is. finish.

FIG. 9-4 (C) shows a change pattern of the hold display for one hold when the first hold storage number stored in the first hold storage area is “1”. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a table. In this embodiment, any one of the change pattern 101 to the change pattern 103 can be determined as the change pattern of the hold display, and a determination value is assigned to each of these change patterns.

As shown in FIG. 9-4 (C), the active display at the time of active shift is the normal mode, and (1) the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing" (that is, by the symbol designation command). If the specified determination result is "missing"), the change pattern 101 is 100% as the change pattern of the first hold display corresponding to the change display based on the start winning prize (new first hold memory). Judgment values are assigned so that they are selected with probability. On the other hand, (2) when the judgment result at the time of the start winning is "big hit" (that is, when the judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the start winning (new first hold). A determination value is assigned to the change pattern of the first hold display corresponding to the change display based on the memory) so that the change pattern 101 is selected with a probability of 100%.

As shown in FIG. 9-4 (C), the active display at the time of active shift is in the blue mode, and (1) the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing" (that is, by the symbol designation command). If the specified determination result is "missing"), the change pattern 102 of the first hold display corresponding to the change display based on the start winning prize (new first hold memory) is 100%. Judgment values are assigned so that they are selected with probability. On the other hand, (2) when the judgment result at the time of the start winning is "big hit" (that is, when the judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the start winning (new first hold). A determination value is assigned to the change pattern of the first hold display corresponding to the change display based on the memory) so that the change pattern 102 is selected with a probability of 100%.

As shown in FIG. 9-4 (C), the active display at the time of active shift is in the red mode, and (1) the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing" (that is, by the symbol designation command). If the specified determination result is "missing"), the change pattern 103 of the first hold display corresponding to the change display based on the start winning prize (new first hold memory) is 100%. Judgment values are assigned so that they are selected with probability. On the other hand, (2) when the judgment result at the time of the start winning is "big hit" (that is, when the judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the start winning (new first hold). A determination value is assigned to the change pattern of the first hold display corresponding to the change display based on the memory) so that the change pattern 103 is selected with a probability of 100%.

In the description of FIG. 9-4, the active shift means that the first hold display 16TM001 shifts from the first hold display area 16TM011 to the active display area 16TM013 (as a result, the determination target at the time of starting winning is obtained. The active display 16TM003 corresponding to the variable display is displayed).

In this embodiment, when the first hold display 16TM001 shifts from the first hold display area 16TM011 to the active display area 16TM013, the display mode is not changed. That is, the display mode of the first hold display 16TM001 immediately before the active shift and the display mode of the active display 16TM003 immediately after the active shift match.

In the present embodiment, the display mode of the first hold display 16TM001 is not changed at the time of active shift, but the display mode of the first hold display 16TM001 is changed at the time of active shift. You may let me.

FIG. 9-4 (D) is for determining a change pattern of the hold display for two holds when the first hold storage number stored in the first hold storage area is “2”. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a table. In this embodiment, any of the change patterns 201 to 206 can be determined as the change pattern of the hold display, and a determination value is assigned to each of these change patterns.

As shown in FIG. 9-4 (D), the active display at the time of active shift is the normal mode, and (1) the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing" (that is, by the symbol designation command). If the specified determination result is "missing"), the change pattern 201 of the first hold display corresponding to the change display based on the start winning prize (new first hold memory) is 100%. Judgment values are assigned so that they are selected with probability. On the other hand, (2) when the judgment result at the time of the start winning is "big hit" (that is, when the judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the start winning (new first hold). A determination value is assigned to the change pattern of the first hold display corresponding to the change display based on the memory) so that the change pattern 201 is selected with a probability of 100%.

As shown in FIG. 9-4 (D), the active display at the time of active shift is in the blue mode, and (1) the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing" (that is, by the symbol designation command). If the specified determination result is "missing"), the change pattern of the first hold display corresponding to the change display based on the start winning prize (new first hold memory) is 40% of the change pattern 202. The determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 203 is selected with a probability and the change pattern 203 is selected with a probability of 60%. On the other hand, (2) when the judgment result at the time of the start winning is "big hit" (that is, when the judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the start winning (new first hold). As for the change pattern of the first hold display corresponding to the variation display based on the memory), the determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 202 is selected with a probability of 60% and the change pattern 203 is selected with a probability of 40%. There is.

As shown in FIG. 9-4 (D), the active display at the time of active shift is in the red mode, and (1) the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing" (that is, by the symbol designation command). If the specified determination result is "missing"), the change pattern of the first hold display corresponding to the change display based on the start winning prize (new first hold memory) is 10% of the change pattern 204. The determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 205 is selected with a probability, the change pattern 205 is selected with a probability of 30%, and the change pattern 206 is selected with a probability of 60%. On the other hand, (2) when the judgment result at the time of the start winning is "big hit" (that is, when the judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the start winning (new first hold). As for the change pattern of the first hold display corresponding to the change display based on the memory), the change pattern 204 is selected with a probability of 60%, the change pattern 205 is selected with a probability of 30%, and the change pattern 206 has a probability of 10%. Judgment values are assigned so that they are selected in.

FIG. 9-4 (E) is for determining a change pattern of the hold display for three holds when the first hold storage number stored in the first hold storage area is “3”. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a table. In this embodiment, any one of the change pattern 301 to the change pattern 310 can be determined as the change pattern of the hold display, and a determination value is assigned to each of these change patterns.

As shown in FIG. 9-4 (E), the active display at the time of active shift is the normal mode, and (1) the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing" (that is, by the symbol designation command). If the specified determination result is "missing"), the change pattern of the first hold display corresponding to the change display based on the start winning prize (new first hold memory) is 100% of the change pattern 301. Judgment values are assigned so that they are selected with probability. On the other hand, (2) when the judgment result at the time of the start winning is "big hit" (that is, when the judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the start winning (new first hold). A determination value is assigned to the change pattern of the first hold display corresponding to the change display based on the memory) so that the change pattern 301 is selected with a probability of 100%.

As shown in FIG. 9-4 (E), the active display at the time of active shift is in the blue mode, and (1) the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing" (that is, by the symbol designation command). If the specified determination result is "missing"), the change pattern of the first hold display corresponding to the change display based on the start winning prize (new first hold memory) is 20% of the change pattern 302. Judgment values are assigned so that the change pattern 303 is selected with a probability, the change pattern 303 is selected with a probability of 20%, and the change pattern 304 is selected with a probability of 60%. On the other hand, (2) when the judgment result at the time of the start winning is "big hit" (that is, when the judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the start winning (new first hold). As for the change pattern of the first hold display corresponding to the change display based on the memory), the change pattern 302 is selected with a probability of 40%, the change pattern 303 is selected with a probability of 40%, and the change pattern 304 has a probability of 20%. Judgment values are assigned so that they are selected in.

As shown in FIG. 9-4 (E), the active display at the time of active shift is in the red mode, and (1) the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing" (that is, by the symbol designation command). If the specified judgment result is "missing"), the change pattern of the first hold display corresponding to the change display based on the start winning prize (new first hold memory) is 13% of the change pattern 305. The change pattern 306 is selected with a probability of 13%, the change pattern 307 is selected with a probability of 4%, the change pattern 308 is selected with a probability of 20%, and the change pattern 309 is selected with a probability of 20%. The determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 310 is selected and the change pattern 310 is selected with a probability of 30%. On the other hand, (2) when the judgment result at the time of the start winning is "big hit" (that is, when the judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the start winning (new first hold). As for the change pattern of the first hold display corresponding to the change display based on the memory), the change pattern 305 is selected with a 20% probability, the change pattern 306 is selected with a 20% probability, and the change pattern 307 has a 30% probability. The determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 308 is selected with a probability of 13%, the change pattern 309 is selected with a probability of 13%, and the change pattern 310 is selected with a probability of 4%.

FIG. 9-4 (F) is for determining a change pattern of the hold display for four holds when the first hold storage number stored in the first hold storage area is “4”. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a table. In this embodiment, any of the change patterns 401 to 415 can be determined as the change pattern of the hold display, and a determination value is assigned to each of these change patterns.

As shown in FIG. 9-4 (F), the active display at the time of active shift is the normal mode, and (1) the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing" (that is, by the symbol designation command). If the specified determination result is "missing"), the change pattern of the first hold display corresponding to the change display based on the start winning prize (new first hold memory) is 100% of the change pattern 401. Judgment values are assigned so that they are selected with probability. On the other hand, (2) when the judgment result at the time of the start winning is "big hit" (that is, when the judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the start winning (new first hold). A determination value is assigned to the change pattern of the first hold display corresponding to the change display based on the memory) so that the change pattern 401 is selected with a probability of 100%.

As shown in FIG. 9-4 (F), the active display at the time of active shift is in the blue mode, and (1) the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing" (that is, by the symbol designation command). If the specified judgment result is "missing"), the change pattern of the first hold display corresponding to the change display based on the start winning prize (new first hold memory) is 20% of the change pattern 402. Judgment values are assigned so that the change pattern 403 is selected with a probability of 20%, the change pattern 404 is selected with a probability of 20%, and the change pattern 405 is selected with a probability of 40%. .. On the other hand, (2) when the judgment result at the time of the start winning is "big hit" (that is, when the judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the start winning (new first hold). As for the change pattern of the first hold display corresponding to the change display based on the memory), the change pattern 402 is selected with a probability of 30%, the change pattern 403 is selected with a probability of 30%, and the change pattern 404 has a probability of 30%. The determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 405 is selected with a probability of 10%.

As shown in FIG. 9-4 (F), the active display at the time of active shift is in the red mode, and (1) the judgment result at the time of starting winning is "missing" (that is, by the symbol designation command). If the specified judgment result is "missing"), the change pattern of the first hold display corresponding to the change display based on the start winning prize (new first hold memory) is 3% of the change pattern 406. The change pattern 407 is selected with a probability of 3%, the change pattern 408 is selected with a probability of 3%, the change pattern 409 is selected with a probability of 10%, and the change pattern 410 is selected with a probability of 10%. Selected, change pattern 411 is selected with a 10% probability, change pattern 412 is selected with a 15% probability, change pattern 413 is selected with a 15% probability, and change pattern 414 is selected with a 15% probability. , The determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 415 is selected with a probability of 16%. On the other hand, (2) when the judgment result at the time of the start winning is "big hit" (that is, when the judgment result specified by the symbol designation command is "big hit"), the start winning (new first hold). As for the change pattern of the first hold display corresponding to the change display based on the memory), the change pattern 406 is selected with a probability of 10%, the change pattern 407 is selected with a probability of 10%, and the change pattern 408 is selected with a probability of 10%. The change pattern 409 is selected with a 15% probability, the change pattern 410 is selected with a 15% probability, the change pattern 411 is selected with a 15% probability, and the change pattern 412 is selected with a 7% probability. The determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 413 is selected with a probability of 7%, the change pattern 414 is selected with a probability of 7%, and the change pattern 415 is selected with a probability of 4%.

(Production determination process at the start of variable display)
When starting the variation display of the special symbol, the CPU 103 includes a display result specification command for specifying the display result, a variation pattern specification command for specifying the variation pattern, and a hold storage number subtraction specification command (first hold storage number subtraction designation). The command or the second hold storage number subtraction designation command) is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120.

The effect control CPU 120 is a hold storage number subtraction designation command (first hold) that specifies that the hold storage number has been subtracted when the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is started. Storage number subtraction specification command or second hold storage number subtraction specification command), display result specification command to specify the display result (big hit or miss, big hit type when it becomes a big hit), and the fluctuation time and effect contents of the special symbol (big hit or miss, big hit type) Based on the fact that a set of commands called a variation pattern specification command for specifying (reach, pseudo-ream, etc.) is received from the game control microcomputer 100, the variation display of the special symbol is executed, and the special symbol is executed. It is possible to specify the fluctuation time and the content of the production (reach, pseudo-ream, etc.).

Further, the effect control CPU 120 receives a special symbol (first special symbol) from the game control microcomputer 100 when the variable display of the special symbol is completed and the display result is confirmed. It is possible to identify that the variable display of the symbol or the second special symbol) is completed and the display result is derived.

FIG. 9-5 is a flowchart showing an effect determination process executed at the start of fluctuation. The effect control CPU 120 executes the effect change start effect determination process shown in FIG. 9-5 in the variable display start setting process (step S171) of the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7. Specifically, when the effect control CPU 120 receives the above-mentioned one set of commands accompanying the start of the variation display of the special symbol, the display result designation is the variation display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol. An effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute an effect) to be executed based on a command and a variation pattern specification command is set, and a decorative pattern based on the specified variation pattern is set. The effect to be executed during the variation display is determined by the effect determination process at the start of the variation shown in FIG. 9-5.

First, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the first setting suggestion effect, which will be described later, based on the execution / non-execution determination table of the first setting suggestion effect (see FIG. 9-6 (G)) (step S16TM2000). ..

Here, in the present embodiment, the first setting suggestion effect can be executed as an effect suggesting the currently set setting value in the low probability low base state. In this first setting suggestion effect, in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1 of the mini-slot 16TM030, the combination of [bell], [bell], and [bell] mini-slot symbols is stopped and displayed as the same symbol combination. By doing so, it is a production that makes the role of "Bell" established. That is, based on the fact that the combination of the [bell], [bell], and [bell] mini-slot symbols is stopped and displayed in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1 of the mini-slot 16TM030, the player sets the set value. Recognize that the first setting suggestion effect for suggesting has been executed.

As shown in the table of FIG. 9-6 (G), determination values for determining whether or not to execute the first setting suggestion effect are assigned according to the currently set setting values. When the set value is "1", the effect control CPU 120 decides not to execute the first setting suggestion effect at a rate of 97%, and decides to execute the first setting suggestion effect at a rate of 3%. When the set value is "2", it is decided not to execute the first setting suggestion effect at a rate of 96%, and it is decided to execute it at a rate of 4%. When the set value is "3", it is decided not to execute the first setting suggestion effect at a rate of 95%, and it is decided to execute it at a rate of 5%. When the set value is "4", it is decided not to execute the first setting suggestion effect at a rate of 94%, and it is decided to execute it at a rate of 6%. When the set value is "5", it is decided not to execute the first setting suggestion effect at a rate of 93%, and it is decided to execute it at a rate of 7%. When the set value is "6", it is decided not to execute the first setting suggestion effect at a rate of 92%, and it is decided to execute it at a rate of 8%.

As shown in FIG. 9-6 (G), the execution rate of the first setting suggestion effect differs depending on the set value, and the higher the set value, the higher the rate of execution of the first setting suggestion effect. Become. In the present embodiment, since the effect determination process at the start of the variation is executed each time the variation display is executed, it is determined whether or not the first setting suggestion effect is executed for each variation display (step S16TM2000). That is, it is determined whether the winning combination of the first mini-slot variable display described above is set to [bell] or "off". As a result, the player becomes interested in whether or not the first setting suggestion effect is executed each time the variable display is executed, and the first relative to the number of times the variable display is executed. You will also be interested in the number of times the setting suggestion effect is executed (execution rate of the first setting suggestion effect). According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player guess the set value for each variable display, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Next, when the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute the first setting suggestion effect (YES in step S16TM2010), the presence or absence of execution of the expectation notice effect is selected when the first setting suggestion effect is executed. It is determined based on the execution / non-execution determination table 1 (see FIGS. 9-6 (H1) and (H2)) of the expected degree advance notice effect (step S16TM2020). On the other hand, when it is decided not to execute the first setting suggestion effect (NO in step S16TM2010), the process proceeds to step S16TM2120 described later.

FIG. 9-6 (H1) shows the execution ratio of the expectation level advance notice effect when it is determined to execute the first setting suggestion effect and the display result is “out of place”. In the table 1 for determining whether or not the expectation degree advance notice effect is executed, determination values for determining whether or not the expectation degree advance notice effect is executed are assigned to each of the deviation patterns. When the variation pattern is "non-reach out" (variation time is 10 seconds), the effect control CPU 120 determines that the expectation level advance notice effect is not executed at a rate of 100%. Further, when the fluctuation pattern is "out of normal reach" (variation time is 30 seconds), it is decided not to execute the expectation notice effect at a rate of 100%. In addition, when the fluctuation pattern is "out of super reach" (fluctuation time is 120 seconds), it is decided not to execute the expectation notice effect at a rate of 60%, and it is decided to execute it at a rate of 40%. To do.

FIG. 9-6 (H2) shows the execution ratio of the expectation level advance notice effect when the first setting suggestion effect is determined to be executed and the display result is a “big hit”. In the table 1 for determining whether or not the expectation degree advance notice effect is executed, determination values for determining whether or not the expectation degree advance notice effect is executed are assigned to each of the jackpot fluctuation patterns. When the fluctuation pattern is "normal reach jackpot" (variation time is 30 seconds), the effect control CPU 120 determines that the expectation level advance notice effect is not executed at a rate of 100%. In addition, when the fluctuation pattern is "super reach jackpot" (variation time is 120 seconds), it is decided not to execute the expectation notice effect at a rate of 20%, and it is decided to execute it at a rate of 80%. To do.

As shown in FIGS. 9-6 (H1) and 9-6 (H2), whether or not the expectation level advance notice effect is executed is determined based on the fluctuation pattern (variation time). In the present embodiment, when it is decided to execute the first setting suggestion effect, the fluctuation pattern (variation time) is non-reach off (10 seconds), normal reach off (30 seconds), or normal reach jackpot (30 seconds). If it is (seconds), it is decided not to execute the expectation notice effect at a rate of 100%, and if the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) is out of super reach (120 seconds), the expectation notice effect is performed. It is decided to execute at a rate of 40%, and in the case of a super reach jackpot (120 seconds), it is decided to execute the expectation notice effect at a rate of 80%.

When a fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation time (non-reach off (10 seconds), normal reach off (30 seconds), normal reach jackpot (30 seconds)) is selected, both the first setting suggestion effect and the expectation notice effect There is not enough time to perform the production of. Therefore, when the fluctuation display based on the fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation time is executed, although the first setting suggestion effect can be executed, the expectation notice effect is not executed after the execution of the first setting suggestion effect. There is.

On the other hand, when a fluctuation pattern with a long fluctuation time (super reach off (120 seconds), super reach jackpot (120 seconds)) is selected, both the first setting suggestion effect and the expectation notice effect are produced. There is enough time to do it. Therefore, it is possible to execute the expectation degree advance notice effect after executing the first setting suggestion effect.

As described above, in the present embodiment, whether or not the first setting suggestion effect is executed is determined based on a common table regardless of the fluctuation time. When the fluctuation time is short, the fluctuation time is long. In any case, the first setting suggestion effect is executed at a common ratio. On the other hand, the expectation notice effect is executed at a higher rate when the fluctuation time is long than when the fluctuation time is short. That is, when the fluctuation time of the variable display to be executed is shorter than [the ratio of the expected degree notice effect to be executed after the first setting suggestion effect is executed], the fluctuation time of the variable display to be executed is longer. [The rate at which the expectation notice effect is executed after the first setting suggestion effect is executed] is higher.

Next, when the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute the expectation notice effect (YES in step S16TM2030), the display result of stopping and displaying in the second mini-slot variable display described above, and the second change. Whether or not to execute the effect is determined based on the character icon determination table (see FIG. 9-6 (J)) (step S16TM2040). The second change effect changes the display mode of the active display 16TM003 by superimposing a character icon based on the "character symbol as a display result stopped by the second mini-slot variable display" on the active display 16TM003. It is a production to make you. In the present embodiment, the second change effect is executed except when the display result stopped by the second mini-slot variable display becomes the display result of "no display" in which the character symbol is not displayed. Become. On the other hand, when it is decided not to execute the expectation degree advance notice effect (NO in step S16TM2030), the process proceeds to step S16TM2060 described later.

FIG. 9-6 (J) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the character icon determination table. As shown in FIG. 9-6 (J), in this embodiment, when it is decided to execute the expectation notice effect, the character symbol is a mini slot as the display result of the second mini slot variable display. It is possible to determine either "no display", which is a display result that is not displayed in the symbol display area 5LCR1, or "CHANGE", "extreme heat", or "FEVER", which are character symbols, and each of these displays. Judgment values are assigned to each result.

As shown in FIG. 9-6 (J), when the display result of the fluctuation display is "missing" (that is, when the display result specified by the display result specification command is "missing"), the fluctuation is concerned. As the display result of the second mini-slot variable display to be executed in the display, "no display" is selected at a rate of 70%, "CHANGE" is selected at a rate of 25%, and "extreme heat" is selected at a rate of 5%. Is selected.

On the other hand, when the display result of the fluctuation display is a "big hit" (that is, when the display result specified by the display result specification command is a "big hit"), the second mini-slot variable to be executed in the fluctuation display is variable. As the display result of the display, "No display" is selected at a rate of 22%, "CHANGE" is selected at a rate of 35%, "Fever" is selected at a rate of 40%, and "Intense heat" is selected at a rate of 3%. "FEVER" is selected. Therefore, when the display result of the second mini-slot variable display is "FEVER", the occurrence of a big hit is confirmed.

As shown in FIG. 9-6 (J), regarding the display result of the second mini-slot variable display (variable display on one reel), "no display" <"CHANGE" <"super heat" <"FEVER" The expectation that it will be a big hit is high in this order. Therefore, when any of the character symbols of "CHANGE", "super heat", and "FEVER" is stopped (when the second change effect is executed after that), none of the character symbols is displayed without stopping. The rate of big hits is higher than when the result is "no display" (when the second change effect is not executed after that). Further, since the jackpot expectation degree differs depending on the character symbol to be stopped, the player pays attention to the display result of the second mini-slot variable display.

In the present embodiment, when the character symbol (any of "CHANGE", "super heat", and "FEVER") is stopped as the display result of the second mini-slot variable display, the display mode of the active display is changed. The second change effect is executed. Specifically, when any of the character symbols "CHANGE", "extreme heat", and "FEVER" is stopped and displayed in the mini slot symbol display area 5LCR1 (1 reel) of the mini slot 16TM030, (i) The stopped-displayed character symbol moves upward from the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 and acts on the active display 16TM003 displayed in the active display area 16TM013 (see FIG. 9-10 (11)), (ii). The active display 16TM003 and the character icon based on the moved character pattern are superimposed and displayed (see FIG. 9-10 (12)). This character icon is an icon indicating the same character as the character symbol that is the display result of the second mini-slot variable display. That is, an effect in which a character icon indicating the same character as the character symbol as the display result is added to the active display 16TM003 is executed as the second change effect. On the other hand, when the display result of the second mini-slot variable display is "no display", the second change effect is not executed.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 uses the expected degree advance notice effect establishment combination when executing the first setting suggestion effect in the expectation degree advance notice effect establishment combination determination table 1 (see FIG. 9-7 (K)). (Step S16TM2050), and the process proceeds to step S16TM2060.

FIG. 9-7 (K) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the establishment combination determination table 1 of the expectation degree notice effect. As shown in FIG. 9-7 (K), in this embodiment, when it is decided to execute the first setting suggestion effect, the expected degree advance notice effect is established, more specifically, the expectation degree. "Out of place", "watermelon", "watermelon (via replay)", "cherry", "cherry (via replay)", as the winning combination of the first mini-slot variable display executed in the advance notice production (same below), It is possible to determine any of "cherry (freeze)", "7-match", and "7-match (freeze)", and a determination value is assigned to each of these established combinations.

In the present embodiment, when "out of place" is selected as the winning combination of the expectation notice effect, the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1 are stopped and displayed with a combination of mini-slot symbols including different symbols. For example, when [Replay] is displayed in the mini-slot symbol display area 5L1, [Replay] is displayed in the mini-slot symbol display area 5C1, and [Bell] is stopped and displayed in the mini-slot symbol display area 5R1, the expected degree advance notice effect is established. It becomes "off".

In the present embodiment, when "watermelon", "cherry", and "7 sets" are selected as the winning combination of the expectation notice effect, the mini slot symbol display area 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 is a mini with the same symbol combination. Stop and display the slot symbol. For example, when the combination of the mini-slot symbols of [watermelon], [watermelon], and [watermelon] is stopped and displayed as the combination of the same symbols in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1, the expected degree notice effect is established. Becomes "watermelon".

In the present embodiment, when "watermelon (via replay)" and "cherry (via replay)" are selected as the winning combination of the expectation notice effect, the same symbols are displayed in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1. After stopping and displaying the combination of [Replay], [Replay], and [Replay] mini-slot symbols as a combination, the mini-slot symbols are re-variated in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1 to display the mini-slot symbols. Areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 can be combined with [watermelon], [watermelon], [watermelon] mini-slot symbols, or [cherry], [cherry], [cherry] mini-slot symbols as a combination of the same symbols. Stop display.

In the present embodiment, when "cherry (freeze)" or "7-match (freeze)" is selected as the winning combination of the expectation notice effect, the normal mode (freeze) is set in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1. After executing the variable display of the mini-slot symbol in a freeze mode different from the scroll display or update display from top to bottom), [cherry], [cherry], and [cherry] are displayed in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1. ], Or the combination of the mini-slot symbols of [7], [7], and [7] is stopped and displayed. The variable display of the freeze mode in the present embodiment is a mini-slot symbol that executes scroll display or update display from the bottom to the top while the visibility of the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1 is reduced. It is a variable display.

As shown in FIG. 9-7 (K), when the display result to be stopped and displayed in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 is "no display" (a symbol in which characters are not displayed) (that is, the second change effect is not executed). In the case of), the winning combination in the expectation notice production is "missing" at a rate of 100%.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-7 (K), when the character symbol to be stopped and displayed in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 is "CHANGE" (that is, the character icon to be superimposed and displayed on the active display in the second change effect is ". In the case of "CHANGE"), the winning combination in the expectation notice production is "missing" at a rate of 5%, "watermelon" at a rate of 45%, and "watermelon (via replay)" at a rate of 20%. 20% will be "cherry", 2% will be "cherry (via replay)", and 8% will be "cherry (freeze)".

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-7 (K), when the character symbol to be stopped and displayed in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 is "extreme heat" (that is, the character icon to be superimposed and displayed on the active display in the second change effect is displayed. In the case of "super heat"), the winning combination in the expectation notice production is "watermelon" at a rate of 15%, "watermelon (via replay)" at a rate of 10%, and "watermelon" at a rate of 40%. It becomes "cherry", 10% becomes "cherry (via replay)", and 25% becomes "cherry (freeze)".

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-7 (K), when the character symbol to be stopped and displayed in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 is "FEVER" (that is, the character icon to be superimposed and displayed on the active display in the second change effect is ". In the case of "FEVER"), the winning combination in the expectation notice production is "7 sets" at a rate of 70% and "7 sets (freeze)" at a rate of 30%.

As shown in FIG. 9-7 (K), when the winning combination is "off", the stop symbol is "no display" or "CHANGE", and when the winning combination is "watermelon" or "cherry", the stop symbol ( When the character icon) becomes "CHANGE" or "super heat" and the winning combination is "7 sets", the stop symbol (character icon) becomes "FEVER". In addition, when the winning combination is "off", "no display" is more likely to be selected as the stop symbol than "CHANGE", and when the winning combination is "watermelon", the stop symbol (character icon) is "super heat". "CHANGE" is easier to select than "CHANGE", and when the winning combination is "cherry", "super heat" is more likely to be selected as the stop symbol (character icon) than "CHANGE".

That is, with respect to the stop symbol of the second mini-slot variable display, the degree of expectation controlled to the jackpot game state increases in the order of "no display" <"CHANGE" <"super heat" <"FEVER", and the first Regarding the winning combination of the mini-slot variable display, the degree of expectation controlled by the jackpot game state is higher in the order of "missing" <"watermelon" <"cherry" <"7 matching". In addition, when "7-match" is selected as the winning combination of the first mini-slot variable display, the stop symbol of the second mini-slot variable display is always "FEVER", so "7-match" is confirmed as a big hit. It is a production of. According to such a configuration, the degree of expectation controlled by the jackpot game state can be different depending on the winning combination composed of a plurality of types of mini-slot symbols, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Here, as shown in FIG. 9-7 (K), the winning combination with the variable display of the freeze mode is limited to "cherry (freeze)" and "7 sets (freeze)". Then, when "cherry (freeze)" is selected as the winning combination, the display result (character icon) becomes "CHANGE" or "super heat", and when "7 matching (freeze)" is selected as the winning combination. The notice character (character icon) is "FEVER". That is, when the mini-slot symbol performs variable display in the freeze mode, the winning combination of "cherry" or higher ("cherry" or "7 sets") is determined, so that the mini-slot symbol is variablely displayed in the normal mode. The expectation that the jackpot game state will be controlled is higher than when it is performed. According to such a configuration, the player can pay attention to the variable display mode of the mini-slot pattern, and the interest of the game can be improved.

On the other hand, when the effect control CPU 120 decides not to execute the first setting suggestion effect (NO in step S16TM2010), the presence or absence of the expectation notice effect is selected when the first setting suggestion effect is not executed. It is determined based on the execution / non-execution determination table 2 (see FIGS. 9-6 (I1) and (I2)) of the expected degree advance notice effect (step S16TM2120).

FIG. 9-6 (I1) shows the execution ratio of the expectation level advance notice effect when it is determined not to execute the first setting suggestion effect and the display result is “off”. In the table 2 for determining whether or not the expectation degree advance notice effect is executed, determination values for determining whether or not the expectation degree advance notice effect is executed are assigned to each of the deviation patterns. When the variation pattern is "non-reach out" (variation time is 10 seconds), the effect control CPU 120 determines that the expectation level advance notice effect is not executed at a rate of 100%. In addition, when the fluctuation pattern is "out of normal reach" (variation time is 30 seconds), it is decided not to execute the expectation notice effect at a rate of 80%, and it is decided to execute it at a rate of 20%. .. In addition, when the fluctuation pattern is "out of super reach" (fluctuation time is 120 seconds), it is decided not to execute the expectation notice effect at a rate of 40%, and it is decided to execute it at a rate of 60%. To do.

FIG. 9-6 (I2) shows the execution ratio of the expectation level advance notice effect when it is determined not to execute the first setting suggestion effect and the display result is a “big hit”. In the table 2 for determining whether or not the expectation degree advance notice effect is executed, determination values for determining whether or not the expectation degree advance notice effect is executed are assigned to each of the jackpot fluctuation patterns. When the fluctuation pattern is "normal reach jackpot" (variation time is 30 seconds), the effect control CPU 120 decides not to execute the expectation notice effect at a rate of 30%, and executes it at a rate of 70%. Decide on that. In addition, when the fluctuation pattern is "super reach jackpot" (variation time is 120 seconds), it is decided not to execute the expectation notice effect at a rate of 10%, and it is decided to execute it at a rate of 90%. To do.

Here, in the examples of FIGS. 9 (H1) and 9 (H2) in which it is decided to execute the first setting suggestion effect, when the fluctuation pattern of "normal reach" is selected, the expectation notice effect is not executed. In the examples of FIGS. 9 (I1) and (I2), which were determined (“no execution” is 100%) but determined not to execute the first setting suggestion effect, the “normal reach” fluctuation pattern was selected. In some cases, it may be decided to execute the expectation notice effect ("execution" is 20% for "normal reach off" and 70% for "normal reach jackpot").

Further, in the example of FIGS. 9 (H1) and 9 (H2) determined to execute the first setting suggestion effect, the ratio of executing the expectation notice effect when the fluctuation pattern of "super reach" is selected ("" In the example of FIGS. 9 (I1) and (I2), it was decided not to execute the first setting suggestion effect, rather than 40% for "super reach out" and 80% for "super reach jackpot". When the fluctuation pattern is selected, the ratio of executing the expectation notice effect is higher (60% for "super reach out" and 90% for "super reach jackpot"). As described above, in the present embodiment, when the first setting suggestion effect is not executed, the expectation notice effect is executed at a higher rate than when the first setting suggestion effect is executed. ..

Next, when the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute the expectation notice effect (YES in step S16TM2130), the display result of stopping and displaying in the second mini-slot variable display described above, and the second change. Whether or not to execute the effect is determined based on the character icon determination table (see FIG. 9-6 (J)) (step S16TM2140). On the other hand, when it is decided not to execute the expectation degree advance notice effect (NO in step S16TM2130), the process proceeds to step S16TM2060 described later.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 uses the expected degree advance notice effect establishment combination when the first setting suggestion effect is not executed in the expectation degree advance notice effect establishment combination determination table 2 (see FIG. 9-7 (L)). (Step S16TM2150), and the process proceeds to step S16TM2060.

FIG. 9-7 (L) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the establishment combination determination table 2 of the expectation degree notice effect. As shown in FIG. 9-7 (L), in this embodiment, when it is decided not to execute the first setting suggestion effect, the expected degree advance notice effect is established, more specifically, the expectation degree. "Out of place", "watermelon", "watermelon (via replay)", "cherry", "cherry (via replay)", as the winning combination of the first mini-slot variable display executed in the advance notice production (same below), It is possible to determine any of "cherry (freeze)", "7-match", and "7-match (freeze)", and a determination value is assigned to each of these established combinations.

As shown in FIG. 9-7 (L), when the display result to be stopped and displayed in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 is "no display" (a symbol in which characters are not displayed) (that is, the second change effect is not executed). In the case), the winning combination in the expectation notice production is "missing" at a rate of 100%.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-7 (L), when the character symbol to be stopped and displayed in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 is "CHANGE" (that is, the character icon to be superimposed and displayed on the active display in the second change effect is ". In the case of "CHANGE"), the winning combination in the expectation notice production is "missing" at a rate of 5%, "watermelon" at a rate of 15%, and "watermelon (via replay)" at a rate of 50%. Then, 2% becomes "cherry", 18% becomes "cherry (via replay)", and 10% becomes "cherry (freeze)".

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-7 (L), when the character symbol to be stopped and displayed in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 is "extreme heat" (that is, the character icon to be superimposed and displayed on the active display in the second change effect is displayed. In the case of "super heat"), the winning combination in the expectation notice production is "watermelon" at a rate of 10%, "watermelon (via replay)" at a rate of 15%, and "watermelon" at a rate of 10%. It becomes "cherry", 38% becomes "cherry (via replay)", and 27% becomes "cherry (freeze)".

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-7 (L), when the character symbol to be stopped and displayed in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 is "FEVER" (that is, the character icon to be superimposed and displayed on the active display in the second change effect is ". In the case of "FEVER"), the winning combination in the expectation notice production is "7 sets" at a rate of 30% and "7 sets (freeze)" at a rate of 70%.

In the present embodiment, there are cases where it is decided to execute the first setting suggestion effect and cases where it is decided not to execute the first setting suggestion effect. An example is shown in which the winning combination of the variable display (that is, the winning combination other than the "bell") is determined based on different tables, but it is not limited to such a form, and it is decided to execute the first setting suggestion effect. The winning combination of the first mini-slot variable display (that is, the winning combination other than "bell") in the expectation notice effect is common between the case where the first setting suggestion effect is performed and the case where it is decided not to execute the first setting suggestion effect. It may be decided based on the table of. That is, while step S16TM2020 and step S16TM2120 determine whether or not to execute the expectation degree advance notice effect at different ratios (based on the execution presence / absence determination table of the different expectation degree advance notice effect), the step S16TM2050 and step S16TM2150 have a common winning combination. The winning combination of the first mini-slot variable display in the expectation notice effect may be determined based on the determination table.

As shown above, in the present embodiment, when the gaming state is the low probability low base state (normal state), the first mini-slot symbol display area 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 is used every time the variation display is executed. The mini-slot variable display (first time) is executed, and the winning combination is "bell" or "missing". Then, after the end of the first mini-slot variable display (first time), (i) when the first mini-slot variable display (second time) is executed during the variable display (expectation notice effect is executed). (Case) and (ii) the first mini-slot variable display (second time) is not executed (the expectation notice effect is not executed).

Here, (i) when the first mini-slot variable display (second time) is executed (when the expectation degree notice effect is executed), the established combination determined based on the established combination determination table is established. Later, the second mini-slot variable display (first time) is further executed in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1. Then, as the display result of the second mini-slot variable display (first time), (a) a symbol that does not include a character ("not displayed") or (b) a character symbol ("CHANGE", "super heat"". , "FEVER") stops. (B) When the character symbol ("CHANGE", "super heat", "FEVER") is stopped, the second change effect in which the character icon based on the character symbol is added to the active display is executed. Become.

As described above, in the above embodiment, the second mini-slot variable display (first time) is executed, and (a) the symbol (“no display”) that does not include the character is stopped, that is, the second. Even if the change effect is not executed, (i) the first mini-slot variable display (second time) is always executed before that, and the effect is always "missing". .. Not limited to this, when the second mini-slot variable display (first time) is executed and (a) the symbol (“no display”) that does not include the character is stopped (when the second change effect is not executed). In addition, in (i) the first mini-slot variable display (second time) executed before that, there is a possibility that a winning combination other than "off" is established.

In addition, when the second mini-slot variable display (first time) is executed and (a) a symbol (“no display”) that does not include a character is stopped (when the second change effect is not executed), (I) The first mini-slot variable display (second time) itself may not be executed. That is, after the first mini-slot variable display (first time) in the mini-slot symbol display area 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 (in the 3-reel system), the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 (in the 1-reel system). The second mini-slot variable display (first time) may be executed.

Further, as a display result of the second mini-slot variable display (first time), (b) the character symbol (“CHANGE”, “super heat”, “FEVER”) may be stopped without fail. That is, when the second mini-slot variable display (in the one-reel system) in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 is executed, the second change effect may be executed after that. When such an effect configuration is adopted, the winning combination of (i) the first mini-slot variable display (second time) executed before the second mini-slot variable display (first time) is "missing". It may not be.

Next, when the value of the fluctuation count counter is 25 × n (n is an integer) [a multiple of 25] (YES in step S16TM2060), the effect control CPU 120 executes the second setting suggestion effect described later. Whether or not to execute the second setting suggestion effect is determined based on the execution / non-execution determination table (see FIG. 9-7 (M)) (step S16TM2070), and the process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the value of the fluctuation count counter is not 25 × n (n is an integer) (NO in step S16TM2060), the process ends as it is.

Here, in the present embodiment, the second setting suggestion effect can be executed as an effect suggesting the currently set setting value in the low probability low base state. In this second setting suggestion effect, the fluctuation number display 16TM040 displayed in the normal mode (white mode in this example) at the lower left of the screen of the image display device 5 is displayed in purple at the timing when the variation display of the special symbol is started. It is an effect that changes the mode. Then, when a predetermined period elapses from the start of the second setting suggestion effect, the second setting suggestion effect is ended, and the variation number display 16TM040 displayed in purple on the lower left of the screen of the image display device 5 is displayed in the normal mode. Return to.

In FIG. 9-7 (M), determination values for determining whether or not to execute the second setting suggestion effect are assigned according to the currently set set values. When the set value is "1", the effect control CPU 120 decides not to execute the second setting suggestion effect at a rate of 90%, and decides to execute the second setting suggestion effect at a rate of 10%. When the set value is "2", it is decided not to execute the second setting suggestion effect at a rate of 88%, and it is decided to execute the second setting suggestion effect at a rate of 12%. When the set value is "3", it is decided not to execute the second setting suggestion effect at a rate of 86%, and it is decided to execute it at a rate of 14%. When the set value is "4", it is decided not to execute the second setting suggestion effect at a rate of 84%, and it is decided to execute the second setting suggestion effect at a rate of 16%. When the set value is "5", it is decided not to execute the second setting suggestion effect at a rate of 82%, and it is decided to execute it at a rate of 18%. When the set value is "6", it is decided not to execute the second setting suggestion effect at a rate of 80%, and it is decided to execute the second setting suggestion effect at a rate of 20%.

In the present embodiment, when the game state is the low probability low base state, the mini slot 16TM030 is displayed on the image display device 5, and the first setting suggestion effect, the second change effect, and the expectation level advance notice effect are executed. However, the image display device 5 is not limited to such a mode, and the image display device 5 is mini-sized when the gaming state is any of a low-accuracy high-base state, a high-accuracy high-base state, and a high-accuracy low-base state. Slot 16TM030 may be displayed and any of the first setting suggestion effect, the second change effect, or the expectation degree advance notice effect may be executed.

Further, in the present embodiment, an example is shown in which the variation number display 16TM040 is displayed on the image display device 5 and the second setting suggestion effect is executed when the game state is the low probability low base state. Not limited to the form, when the gaming state is any of the low accuracy high base state, the high accuracy high base state, and the high accuracy low base state, the image display device 5 displays the variation number display 16TM040, and the second The setting suggestion effect may be executed.

As shown in FIG. 9-5, after determining whether or not to execute the first setting suggestion effect in step S16TM2000, whether or not to execute the expectation notice effect is determined in step S16TM2020 or step S16TM2120, and further, in step S16TM2050 or step S16TM2150. The role of establishing the expectation notice production has been decided. When the first setting suggestion effect is determined in step S16TM2000, as shown in FIG. 9-6 (G), whether or not the first setting suggestion effect is executed is determined based on the currently set setting value. In this embodiment, the first setting suggestion effect can be executed regardless of the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time).

Further, when the first setting suggestion effect is executed (YES in step S16TM2010) and the expectation level advance notice effect is executed, as shown in FIGS. 9-6 (H1) and (H2), the fluctuation pattern (variation time) Based on the above, it is decided whether or not to execute the expectation notice production. If the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) is non-reach out of reach (10 seconds), normal reach out of reach (30 seconds), or normal reach jackpot (30 seconds), it is decided that "expectation notice effect is not executed" at a rate of 100%. On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) is out of the super reach (120 seconds), it is decided to "execute the expectation notice effect" at a rate of 40%, and in the case of the super reach jackpot (120 seconds). Determines to "execute the expectation notice effect" at a rate of 80%.

In this way, the first setting suggestion effect can be executed regardless of the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time), and the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1 of the image display device 5 can be executed regardless of the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time). , [Bell], [Bell], [Bell] mini-slot symbol combinations can be stopped and displayed. Further, when the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) is super reach (120 seconds), the first setting suggestion effect and the expectation level advance notice effect can be executed, and the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1 and 5C1 of the image display device 5 can be executed. After displaying the combination stop display of the [bell], [bell], and [bell] mini-slot symbols on 5R1, the same other than [bell] is displayed in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1 of the image display device 5. It is possible to stop and display a combination of symbols (for example, [watermelon], [watermelon], [watermelon] or [7], [7], [7], etc.). According to such a configuration, in the mini slot 16TM030, the first setting suggestion effect suggesting the set value can be executed, and the expectation notice effect suggesting the expectation that the display result becomes a "big hit" can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As shown in FIG. 9-6 (G), each time the first setting suggestion effect having a different execution ratio is executed according to the set value, the player himself counts the number of times the first setting suggestion effect is executed. , The player himself calculates the execution rate of the first setting suggestion effect [execution rate of the first setting suggestion effect = (number of times the first setting suggestion effect is executed / number of fluctuations) × 100], and the calculated first setting suggestion The player can infer the set value by determining which of the set values of the execution ratio of the first setting suggestion effect for each well-known set value the effect execution ratio is close to.

Temporarily, a configuration was adopted in which the determination of whether or not to execute the expectation degree notice effect is performed before the determination of whether or not the first setting suggestion effect is executed, and the expectation degree advance notice effect is executed with priority over the first setting suggestion effect. In that case, due to the relationship between the decision to execute the expectation notice effect and the fluctuation time, the execution lottery of the first setting suggestion effect itself is not performed, or the execution lottery of the first setting suggestion effect is won. Even so, there may be a case where the first setting suggestion effect is not executed because the expectation notice effect is prioritized. As a result, the degree of deviation between the execution ratio of the first setting suggestion effect calculated by the player and the execution ratio of the first setting suggestion effect based on the actual set value becomes large. Then, the importance of the first setting suggestion effect as an element for estimating the set value is reduced, and the player may not pay attention to it. In order to solve such a problem, as shown in step S16TM2000 and step S16TM2020 of FIG. 9-5, whether or not to execute the first setting suggestion effect is determined before whether or not the expectation level advance notice effect is executed. A configuration is adopted in which the first setting suggestion effect is executed with priority over the expectation notice effect.

(Specific example of executing change effect and setting suggestion effect)
Next, with respect to specific examples when it is decided to execute the first change effect, the second change effect, the first setting suggestion effect, the second setting suggestion effect, and the expectation degree notice effect, FIGS. 9-8 to 9 This will be described using -10. 9-8 are time charts when the first change effect, the second change effect, the first setting suggestion effect, the second setting suggestion effect, and the expectation level advance notice effect are executed, and FIGS. 9-9 and 9 -10 shows an example of the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 when the first change effect, the second change effect, the first setting suggestion effect, the second setting suggestion effect, and the expectation degree advance notice effect are executed. It is explanatory drawing.

In the production example shown in FIGS. 9-8 to 9-10, when the CPU 103 wins a start, the display result of the variation display corresponding to the start prize is a "big hit" in the first start prize determination process (S101A). This is an example when it is determined that this is the case (when specified by the symbol specification command). Then, based on this, the effect control CPU 120 determines the final display mode (final display color) of the active display to the red mode in step S16TM1010 in the start winning change effect determination process, and changes the active display in step S16TM1020. This is an example in the case where the pattern is decided to be the change pattern 022 and the first change effect of the success mode is decided to be executed.

Further, the CPU 103 determines that the display result of the fluctuation display becomes a "big hit" at the start of the fluctuation (specified by the display result specification command), and sets the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the fluctuation display to the "super reach jackpot". This is an example of the case where "(120 seconds)" is determined (when specified by the fluctuation pattern command). Then, based on this, the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute the first setting suggestion effect in step S16TM2000 in the change start effect determination process at the start of fluctuation, and executes the expectation notice effect in step S16TM2020. In step S16TM2040, it was decided to set the display result of the second mini-slot variable display to "extreme heat" and to execute the second change effect, and in step S16TM2050, the expectation notice effect was produced. This is an example in which it is decided that the winning combination of is "cherry (freeze)", and it is decided to execute the second setting suggestion effect in step S16TM2070.

First, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (1), when the gaming state is controlled to the low probability low base state, the display of the variation display of the first special symbol that was executed last time (most recently executed). Based on the result being "off", the effect control CPU 120 when the fluctuation display is fixedly stopped in the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5. The combination of decorative patterns (in this example, "247") is continuously displayed. Further, based on the fact that the display result of the variation display of the first special symbol (most recently executed) executed last time was "missing", the small symbol display area 5l and the small symbol display area of the image display device 5 In 5c and the small symbol display area 5r, the combination of small symbols (“247” in this example) when the fluctuation display is fixedly stopped is continuously displayed. The effect control CPU 120 displays four first hold displays 16TM001 in the first hold display area 16TM011 of the image display device 5 in response to the number of first hold storages being 4.

In the low-accuracy low-base state, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (1), the number of times the variable display is executed in the low-accuracy low-base state (normal state) in the image display device 5 is calculated. The fluctuation number display 16TM040 is displayed. In this example, it is assumed that the fluctuation display has been executed 124 times so far after shifting to the low-accuracy low-base state, and as shown in FIG. 9-9 (1), the fluctuation count display 16TM040 is set to "124" or the like. The screen when the character of is displayed in the normal mode (white mode) is shown.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 is based on the fact that the winning combination (display result) of the variable display of the mini slot symbol that was executed last time (most recently executed) was "missing", and the mini of the image display device 5 In the slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1, the combination of mini-slot symbols ([replay], [replay], and [bell] in this example) when the variable display is fixedly stopped is continuously displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (2), when the CUP 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol (timing of T1 shown in FIG. 9-8), the effect control CPU 120 is the image display device 5. The variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and the variable display of the small symbol is started in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 displays the active display 16TM003 corresponding to the fluctuation display currently being executed in the active display area 16TM013 of the image display device 5, and corresponds to the case where the first reserved storage number is 3. Then, three first hold display 16TM001 are displayed in the first hold display area 16TM011 of the image display device 5.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (2), the effect control CPU 120 continues the variable display of the decorative symbol in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, and steps. Based on the decision to execute the second setting suggestion effect in S16TM2070, the second setting suggestion effect is executed. In this example, it is assumed that the fluctuation display has been executed 125 times so far after shifting to the low-accuracy low-base state, and as shown in FIG. 9-9 (2), the fluctuation count display 16TM040 is "125" or the like. The case where the characters of are displayed in purple mode is shown. The player grasps that the setting suggestion is made by changing the display mode of the variation number display 16TM040 from the conventional normal mode (white mode) to the purple mode. At this time, the variable display of the small symbols is continued in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (3), the effect control CPU 120 continues the variable display of the decorative symbol in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 (FIG. 9). (Timing of T2 shown in −8), based on the decision to execute the first setting suggestion effect in step S16TM2000, the minislot in the minislot symbol display area 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 of the image display device 5. The variable display of the symbol (variable display of the first mini slot) is started. At this time, the variable display of the small symbols is continued in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (4), the effect control CPU 120 continues the variable display of the decorative symbol in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 (FIG. 9). (Timing of T3 shown in −8), the second setting suggestion effect is terminated, and the variation number display 16TM040 (characters such as “125”) displayed in the purple mode is returned to the normal mode (white mode). At this time, the variation display of the small symbols is continued in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5, and the mini slot symbols are variable in the mini slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1 of the image display device 5. The display is continuing.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (5), the effect control CPU 120 continues the variable display of the decorative symbol in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 (FIG. 9). (Timing of T4 shown in −8), success based on the decision in step S16TM1020 to set the change pattern of the active display to the change pattern 022 and to execute the first change effect of the success mode. The first change effect of the aspect is executed. In this example, the character 16TM050 appears, and an effect of throwing a ball toward the active display 16TM003 is executed. By displaying an image in which the ball thrown by the character 16TM050 corresponds to the active display 16TM003, the player can be expected to change the mode of the active display 16TM003.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continues the variable display of the small symbols in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5, and in the mini slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1 of the image display device 5. , The variable display of the mini slot symbol is continued.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (6), the effect control CPU 120 continues the variable display of the decorative symbol in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 (FIG. 9). (Timing of T5 shown in −8), the display mode of the active display 16TM003 is changed from the normal mode to the red mode (in this example, the white round display to the red round shape) in response to the execution of the first change effect of the successful mode. Display). At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continues the variable display of the small symbols in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. Further, the effect control CPU 120 is a combination of mini-slot symbols when the first setting suggestion effect is executed in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 of the image display device 5 (in this example, [bell] [ Bell] [Bell]) is stopped and displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (7), the effect control CPU 120 continues the variable display of the decorative symbol in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 (FIG. 9). (Timing of T6 shown in -8), based on the fact that it was decided in step S16TM2050 that the winning combination of the expectation notice effect was "cherry (freeze)", the expectation notice effect was executed and the image display device. In the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1 of 5, variable display of the mini-slot symbol in the freeze mode is started. In this example, when the variable display of the freeze mode is executed, the blackout image 16TM100 is displayed as a covering image covering the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1, thereby reducing the visibility of the mini-slot symbol and visually recognizing it. In a difficult state, the variable display (scroll display or update display) of the mini slot symbol is executed from the bottom to the top. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continues the variable display of the small symbols in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

In the present embodiment, in order to reduce the visibility of the mini slot symbol, the dark image 16TM100 covering the mini slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1 is displayed, so that the mini has a lower display priority than the dark image 16TM100. Although the slot pattern is difficult to see, it is slightly visible (that is, the layer transparency of the darkened image 16TM100 is not 0%), but it is not limited to such a form and is more than the darkened image 16TM100. A mini-slot symbol with a low display priority (an image whose display layer is lower and can be seen behind the darkened image 16TM100 when viewed from the player) becomes completely invisible (that is, the layer transparency of the darkened image 16TM100 is 0). %).

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (8), the effect control CPU 120 continues the variable display of the decorative symbol in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 (FIG. 9). (Timing of T7 shown in -8), based on the fact that it was decided in step S16TM2050 that the winning combination of the expectation notice effect was "cherry (freeze)", the mini-slot symbol display area 5L1 of the image display device 5 In 5, C1 and 5R1, the combination of mini-slot symbols ([cherry], [cherry], and [cherry] in this example) when the winning combination is "cherry" is stopped and displayed. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continues the variable display of the small symbols in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-10 (9), the effect control CPU 120 sets "7" in the symbol display area 5L and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5 at the timing when the reach state in the fluctuation pattern should be established. The decorative symbol of No. 1 is stopped and displayed to bring it into a reach state, and the characters "reach !!" are displayed on the upper part of the image display device 5 (timing of T8 in FIG. 9-8). At this time, in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r, the variable display of the small symbol is continued. That is, the small symbol is also stopped in the small symbol display area 5l corresponding to the symbol display area 5L in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, and in the small symbol display area 5r corresponding to the symbol display area 5R in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. It is continuously displayed in a variable manner without being displayed.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 changes the mode of the mini-slot 16TM030 from the mode corresponding to the first mini-slot variable display to the mode corresponding to the second mini-slot variable display when the reach state is established. .. That is, the area where the mini-slot 16TM030 is displayed is changed from the 3-reel mini-slot symbol display area 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 to the 1-reel mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1. One reel mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 can display any one of a plurality of types of mini-slot symbols ("no display", "CHANGE", "super heat", "FEVER") as a display result. If the result is a symbol containing a notice character ("CHANGE", "super heat", "FEVER"), the icon of the notice character that is the display result is added to the active display based on the display result. The second change effect is executed. Then, the effect control CPU 120 starts variable display of the mini-slot symbol in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-10 (10), the effect control CPU 120 determines in step S16TM2040 that the display result of the second mini-slot variable display is "extreme heat", that is, Based on the fact that the notice character of the expectation notice effect is decided to be "super heat", the design including the notice character of "super heat" is stopped and displayed in the mini slot symbol display area 5LCR1 of the image display device 5. (Timing of T9 in FIG. 9-8). At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continues the variable display of the small symbols in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-10 (11), the effect control CPU 120 has decided to execute the second change effect (stop and display the symbol including the warning character) in step S16TM2040. Based on this, the second change effect is executed (timing of T10 in FIG. 9-8). In this example, when the display mode of the active display 16TM003 is changed, the mini-slot symbol (in this example, the “super heat” symbol) that is stopped and displayed in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 is displayed from the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1. The effect of moving to the active display area 16TM013 and acting on the active display 16TM003 is executed. More specifically, by displaying an effect image indicating that the mini-slot symbol (in this example, the “super heat” symbol) protruding from the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 hits the active display 16TM003, the effect image is displayed. It suggests to the player that the mode of the active display 16TM003 changes. At this time, in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r, the variable display of the small symbol is continued.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-10 (12), the battle effect is executed according to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach. Here, as the battle effect is executed, the ally character 16TM060 and the enemy character 16TM070 are displayed on the image display device 5 (timing of T11 shown in FIG. 9-8). At this time, the effect control CPU 120 continues the variable display of the small symbols in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 superimposes and displays the character icon based on the mini-slot symbol (in this example, the character icon of "super heat") that is stopped and displayed in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 on the active display 16TM003. The display mode of the active display 16TM003 is changed. That is, a character icon indicating the same character as the notice character (“super heat” in this example) that is the display result is added to the active display 16TM003.

As shown in FIGS. 9-9 and 9-10, when the active display 16TM003 corresponding to the currently executing fluctuation display is displayed in the active display area 16TM013, the mini slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 The combination of mini-slot symbols whose winning combination is "cherry" ([cherry], [cherry], and [cherry] in this example) is stopped and displayed (Fig. 9-9 (8)), and then the mini-slot symbol is displayed. The mini-slot symbol (“super heat” in this example) as a warning character for the expectation notice effect is stopped and displayed in area 5LCR1 (Fig. 9-10 (10)), and then stopped in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1. The second change effect of adding a character icon indicating the same character as the displayed mini-slot pattern character (“super heat” in this example) to the active display 16TM003 is being executed (FIGS. 9-10 (11) and (12). )).

According to such a configuration, the display mode of the active display 16TM003 is changed according to the combination of the mini-slot symbols stopped and displayed in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1 in which the first setting suggestion effect is executed. Since the two-change effect can be executed, the interest of the setting suggestion effect can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-8 to 9-10, the first setting suggestion effect is terminated before the battle effect executed according to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach is started. I am trying to do it. That is, before the battle effect is executed, in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 of the image display device 5, a combination of mini-slot symbols corresponding to the first setting suggestion effect (in this example, [bell] [ Bell] [Bell]) is hidden. In this way, the first setting suggestion effect that suggests the set value is executed in the first half of the variation display (before the reach state is established), that is, in the stage before the display result of the variation display is suggested. It is possible to raise interest in suggestive production. In addition, the latter half of the fluctuation display (after the reach state is established), that is, the stage after the display result of the fluctuation display is suggested (after the battle effect for notifying whether or not the display result becomes a "big hit" is started). Then, since the first setting suggestion effect has already been completed, it is possible to pay attention to the display result (result of the battle effect) of the variable display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (1), the mini-slot symbol display of the image display device 5 is based on the determination that the first setting suggestion effect is not executed and the expectation notice effect is not executed. In areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1, the combination of mini-slot symbols whose winning combination is "out of place" (in this example, [replay], [replay], and [bell]) stops. Further, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (6), based on the decision to execute the first setting suggestion effect, the mini-slot symbol display area 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 of the image display device 5 is established. The combination of mini-slot symbols whose role is "bell" ([bell] [bell] [bell] in this example) stops. Further, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (8), the mini-slot symbol display of the image display device 5 is based on the fact that it is decided to execute the expectation notice effect and the winning combination is determined to be "cherry". In areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1, the combination of mini-slot symbols whose winning combination is "cherry" (in this example, [cherry], [cherry], and [cherry]) stops. In this way, since it is possible to stop and display any one of a plurality of types of winning combinations in the mini slot 16TM030, the variable display of the minislot symbol is executed in the minislot 16TM030 for the game. You can improve your interest.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-9 (2) and (3), the number of fluctuations is displayed in the lower left area of the image display device 5 which is different from the special effect area 16TM035 (lower center of the screen of the image display device 5). A second setting suggestion effect is performed in which the 16TM040 is changed from the normal mode (white mode) to the purple mode. Here, as shown in FIG. 9-6 (G), the execution rate of the first setting suggestion effect ranges from 3% (set value 1) to 8% (set value 6), whereas the figure shows. As shown in 9-7 (M), the execution rate of the second setting suggestion effect ranges from 10% (setting value 1) to 20% (setting value 6), so that both effects are executed the same number of times. Assuming that this is done, the second setting suggestion effect makes it easier to guess the set value than the first setting suggestion effect. Specifically, the execution ratio calculated based on the number of executions of the first setting suggestion effect is compared with the predetermined effect execution ratio (3% to 8%) corresponding to each set value (1 to 6). Therefore, the set value corresponding to the effect execution ratio closest to the former is estimated as the set value of the game machine. Further, the execution ratio calculated based on the number of executions of the second setting suggestion effect is compared with the predetermined effect execution ratio (10% to 20%) corresponding to each set value (1 to 6), and the former is selected. The set value corresponding to the closest effect execution ratio is estimated as the set value of the game machine. When such an estimation is made, the set value estimated based on the number of executions of the second setting suggestion effect is larger than the set value estimated based on the number of executions of the first setting suggestion effect. It is highly possible that it is the setting value of the machine (the reliability of the setting suggestion is high). However, in the present embodiment, the execution lottery is performed for each variation display for the first setting suggestion effect, and the execution lottery is performed for each 25 variation display for the second setting suggestion effect. The execution frequency of the setting suggestion effect is higher than the execution frequency of the second setting suggestion effect. Therefore, the first setting suggestion effect is executed more times within the same fluctuation display number of times (within the same time) than the second setting suggestion effect, which is useful for estimating the set value. .. As described above, by providing a plurality of types of setting suggestion effects in which the ratio of the set values suggested by the effects to the set values of the game machine is different, the interest of the setting suggestion effects can be improved.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9-9 and 9-10, variable display of small symbols is executed in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r provided in the upper right part of the screen of the image display device 5. ing. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 9-9, the first setting suggestion effect is executed in the special effect area 16TM035 (lower center of the screen of the image display device 5), and the first setting suggestion effect is executed in the lower left of the screen of the image display device 5. 2 Setting suggestion effect is executed. In this way, in the upper part of the screen, the variation display of the small symbol is executed as the effect corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol, whereas in the lower part of the screen, the setting suggestion effect (first setting suggestion effect, second setting suggestion effect, second). By executing the setting suggestion effect), the visibility of one of the effects does not deteriorate.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-3 (A), as the display mode of the active display based on the determination result at the time of starting winning, a plurality of types of display modes (normal mode, blue mode, and red mode) ( Display color). Then, as shown in FIG. 9-9 (5), the display mode (display) of the active display 16TM003 is accompanied by the appearance of the character 16TM050 and the execution of the action effect of the mode of throwing the ball toward the active display 16TM003. The first change effect of changing the normal mode (color) from the normal mode (white circle display) to the red mode (red circle display) is executed. Further, the second mini-slot variable display is executed in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 based on the determination result at the start of the fluctuation, and the character icon indicated by the character symbol is displayed based on the character symbol that is the display result. The second change effect added to the active display 16TM003 is executed. In this way, the first change effect that changes the display color of the active display according to the action effect executed in the area different from the area where the setting suggestion effect is executed, and the area where the first setting suggestion effect is executed ( A second change effect that changes the display shape of the active display according to the action effect based on the notice character displayed in the special effect area 16TM035). Can be further improved.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-10 (11) and 9-10, a mini-slot symbol stopped in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 when the second change effect is executed (in this example, "extreme heat"). However, the effect of jumping out of the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 and hitting the active display 16TM003 displayed in the active display area 16TM013 is executed. Specifically, after the effect image indicating that the mini-slot symbol (“super heat” in this example) protruding from the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 hits the active display 16TM003 is displayed, the mini-slot symbol display area A character icon indicating the same character as the character of the mini-slot pattern stopped at 5LCR1 is added to the active display 16TM003. According to such a configuration, the effect executed in the mini-slot 16TM030 and the display mode of the active display 16TM003 can be related to each other, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-7 (K) and 9-7 (L), the winning combination of the expectation notice effect (first mini-slot variable display (second time)) in the mini-slot 16TM030 is "missing" and "watermelon". , "Cherry", and "7 sets". Then, depending on the determined winning combination, the selection ratio of whether the display result of the second mini-slot variable display is "no display", "CHANGE", "super heat", or "FEVER" is selected. It's different. Further, in the present embodiment, when the display result of the second mini-slot variable display is any of the character symbols of "CHANGE", "super heat", and "FEVER", the mode of the character symbol and the mode of the character symbol are determined. It matches the mode of the character icon added to the active display 16TM003. That is, which mode of the character icon is added to the active display 16TM003 is determined according to the winning combination of the expectation level advance notice effect (first mini-slot variable display (second time)) executed in the mini-slot 16TM030. The proportions are different. According to such a configuration, the effect executed in the mini-slot 16TM030 and the display mode of the active display 16TM003 can be related to each other, and the interest in the game can be improved.

(Display of the total result of the winning combination)
In the present embodiment, during the demo display, the "volume adjustment" icon for adjusting the volume during the game, the "light amount adjustment" icon for adjusting the light amount during the game, and the low accuracy low base state (normal state). ), And a menu screen including an icon of "mini reel information" for confirming the number of times the variation is displayed (the number of times the variation of the special symbol is displayed) and the number of times each winning combination is won in the mini slot 16TM030 is displayed. By operating the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B on this menu screen, each icon of "volume adjustment", "light intensity adjustment", and "mini reel information" can be selected.

FIG. 9-11 is displayed on the full screen of the image display device 5 when the "mini reel information" icon is selected by operating the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B while the menu screen is displayed. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the mini reel information.

As shown in FIGS. 9-11, the characters "mini reel information" are displayed in the upper left portion of the screen of the image display device 5. Further, in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, the cumulative number of fluctuation displays (variation display of special symbols) executed in the low accuracy low base state (normal state) and the number of winnings of each winning combination in the mini slot 16TM030 The mini reel information 16TM200 including the above, the selecting tab 16TM210 displaying the characters "today", and the next selection tab 16TM220 displaying the characters "previous day" are displayed. Further, on the right side of the screen of the image display device 5, an operation promotion display 16TM270 prompting to operate the stick controller 31A is displayed corresponding to the selected tab 16TM210. Further, at the lower right of the screen of the image display device 5, an operation promotion display 16TM280 prompting the user to operate the push button 31B is displayed together with the characters “return”.

In the mini reel information 16TM200, the character "rotation speed" is displayed at the top as an item indicating the number of fluctuation display times, and in response to this, the cumulative total of fluctuation display executed in the low probability low base state (normal state). The number of times "XXXXX times" is displayed. In the second row, the character "bell" is displayed as an item indicating the winning combination bell, and in response to this, the cumulative number of times the winning combination is "bell" in the first mini-slot variable display "AAAA". "Times" and "Bell" winning probability "(1 / aaaa.a)" [= Cumulative number of times "Bell" was established / Cumulative number of fluctuation displays executed in the low probability low base state (normal state)] It is displayed. In the third row, the character "watermelon" is displayed as an item indicating the winning combination of watermelons, and in response to this, the cumulative number of times the winning combination is "watermelon" in the first mini-slot variable display "BBBB". "Times" and "Watermelon" winning probability "(1 / bbbb.b)" [= Cumulative number of times "Watermelon" was established / Cumulative number of fluctuation displays executed in the low probability low base state (normal state)] It is displayed. In the 4th row, the character "cherry" is displayed as an item indicating the winning combination cherry, and in response to this, the cumulative number of times the winning combination is "cherry" in the first mini-slot variable display "CCCC". "Times" and "Cherry" winning probability "(1 / cccc.c)" [= Cumulative number of times "Cherry" was established / Cumulative number of fluctuation displays executed in the low probability low base state (normal state)] It is displayed. In the 5th row, the character "777" is displayed as an item indicating 7 sets of winning combinations, and correspondingly, the cumulative number of times that the winning combination is "7 sets" in the first mini-slot variable display. "DDDD times" and the winning probability of "7 sets" "(1 / ddddd.d)" [= Cumulative number of times when "7 sets" are established / Low probability Low base state (normal state) Cumulative number] is displayed.

The cumulative number of times "7 sets" has been won (DDDD times) is a combination of mini slot symbols that are "7 sets" in the mini slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1 of the mini slot 16TM030 (in this example). , [7] [7] [7]) indicate the number of times the game has stopped, and is counted separately from the number of times the jackpot has occurred and displayed as an item different from the number of times the jackpot has occurred.

In addition, each cumulative number of times (XXXX times, AAAA times, BBBB times, CCCC times, DDDD times) is displayed in a maximum of 4 digits, and the count is stopped at "9999 times". In addition, the denominator of the winning probability is displayed with a maximum of 5 digits including the first decimal place, and the count stops at "1 / 99999.9". For each winning combination, if the number of winnings is 1 or more, the winning probability is displayed, and if the number of winnings is 0, the winning probability display is hidden.

In the present embodiment, the RAM 122 of the effect control board 12 stores the history information (each cumulative number of times described above, etc.) related to the mini reel information, and the effect control CPU 120 images the mini reel information based on the stored history information. It can be displayed on the display device 5. Specifically, the history information for three days of "today", "the day before", and "the day before the previous day" is stored in the backup storage area of the RAM 122, and the history information is retained even when the power is turned off.

As the mini reel information, the mini reel information of "today" is set as the default, and the characters "today" are displayed on the selected tab 16TM210 and the characters "previous day" are displayed on the next selection tab 16TM220. Further, an operation promotion display 16TM270 prompting the operator to operate the stick controller 31A is displayed on the right side of the screen of the image display device 5. Every time the controller sensor unit detects that the stick controller 31A has been operated while the operation promotion display 16TM270 is displayed, the mini reel information is switched from "previous day" to "two days before", and the selected tab 16TM210 is displayed. The characters are switched from "previous day" to "two days before", and the characters on the next selection tab 16TM220 are switched from "two days before" to "today". Then, when the controller sensor unit detects that the stick controller 31A has been operated while the mini reel information of "the day before the previous day" is selected, the information is switched to the mini reel information of "today" again, and the characters on the selected tab 16TM210 are displayed. Is switched to "today", and the characters on the next selection tab 16TM220 are switched to "previous day".

When the power of the game machine is turned on, the power-on history stored in the backup RAM is referred to, and if the date of the previous power-on and the date of the current power-on are different, the history information of the "previous day" is changed to ". After storing in the storage area corresponding to "the day before the previous day" (overwriting the history information), the history information of "today" is stored in the storage area corresponding to "the day before" (overwriting of the history information), and the data is updated. .. As a result, when the power is turned on at the start of business of "today", the "previous day" and "previous day" and "previous day" are based on the updated "previous day" and "previous day" historical information stored in the backup storage area. It is possible to display the mini reel information of "every day".

Further, in the present embodiment, an operation promotion display 16TM280 prompting the user to operate the push button 31B is displayed at the lower right of the screen of the image display device 5 together with the characters “return”. When the push sensor detects that the push button 31B has been operated while the operation promotion display 16TM280 is displayed, the display of the mini reel information ends and the screen returns to the menu screen.

As shown in FIG. 9-11, when the "mini reel information" icon is selected by operating the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B while the menu screen is displayed, "today" and "today" are backed up. The mini reel information based on the history information of "the day before" and "the day before the previous day" is displayed on the image display device 5. Then, in the mini reel information 16TM200, the execution probability of the first setting suggestion effect, and the winning probability of "bell", "(1 / aaaa.a)" [= cumulative number of times "bell" is established / low probability low base Cumulative number of variable displays executed in the state (normal state)] is displayed.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the player himself counts the number of times the first setting suggestion effect is executed, the player himself calculates the execution ratio of the first setting suggestion effect, and the calculated first setting suggestion effect is performed. The set value can be estimated by determining which of the set values of the execution rate of the first setting suggestion effect for each well-known set value the execution rate is close to. However, when the player himself counts the number of times the first setting suggestion effect is executed, the number of times the first setting suggestion effect is executed may be erroneously counted. In the present embodiment, the player operates the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B during the demo display to confirm the execution probability (the winning probability of the "bell") of the first setting suggestion effect in the mini reel information. Therefore, even if the number of executions of the first setting suggestion effect is erroneously counted, the accurate execution probability of the first setting suggestion effect can be easily grasped.

(Other variants)
(1) In the above embodiment, the first setting suggestion effect and the second setting suggestion effect are effects suggesting the currently set value, but the first setting suggestion effect and the second setting suggestion effect are , It can be said that it is a production that suggests that the setting has been changed. For example, the execution rate of the first setting suggestion effect is close to the execution rate of the first setting suggestion effect (well-known execution rate) corresponding to the setting value 4, and the execution rate of the second setting suggestion effect is the set value. It is difficult for the player to estimate the actual set value when it is close to the execution ratio (well-known execution ratio) of the second setting suggestion effect corresponding to 2. However, in such a situation, the execution rate of the first setting suggestion effect indicated by the mini reel information of "the day before" and "the day before the previous day" is the execution rate of the first setting suggestion effect corresponding to the set value 1 (well known). The player can infer that it is highly likely that the set value has been changed at least when it is close to the execution rate of. That is, it can be inferred that the set values of "the day before" and "the day before the previous day" are the set values 1, and since there is a high possibility that the set values have been changed for "today", the current set values. Can be inferred to be at least a set value of 2 or more.

The setting suggestion effect (first setting suggestion effect, second setting suggestion effect) may be an effect executed at different ratios depending on whether or not the set value is changed on the day. For example, when the set value is changed on the day, the setting suggestion effect may be executed at a higher rate than when the set value is not changed on the day.

Further, the setting suggestion effect (first setting suggestion effect, second setting suggestion effect) may be an effect executed at different ratios depending on the set value. For example, the effect may be executed at a higher rate when the set value is 3 or more than when the set value is 2 or less. Further, the setting suggestion effect (first setting suggestion effect, second setting suggestion effect) may be an effect in which the effect mode is determined at different ratios according to the set value. For example, when the set value is 2 or less, the display color of the setting suggestion effect is determined to be blue at a rate of 70% and red at a rate of 30%, while the set value is 3 or more. The display color of the setting suggestion effect may be determined to be blue at a rate of 30% and red at a rate of 70%.

(2) In the above embodiment, the degree of expectation that is controlled to the jackpot game state differs depending on the winning combination, and the degree of expectation increases in the order of "missing" <"watermelon" <"cherry" <"7 sets". An example is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a form, and the degree of expectation of a jackpot of a specific jackpot type may be different depending on the winning combination. For example, the degree of expectation that the jackpot type will be a probabilistic jackpot differs depending on the winning combination, and the degree of expectation may be higher in the order of "missing" <"watermelon" <"cherry" <"7 sets".

(3) In the above embodiment, an example of executing the first mini-slot variable display (first time) in which the winning combination is "off" based on the decision not to execute the first setting suggestion effect. Although shown, not limited to this, based on the decision not to execute the first setting suggestion effect, (i) execute the first mini-slot variable display (first time) in which the winning combination is "out of place". In some cases, (ii) the first mini-slot variable display itself may not be executed.

When such an effect configuration is adopted and (ii) the first mini-slot variable display itself is not executed based on the decision not to execute the first setting suggestion effect, (a) When it is decided to execute the expectation notice effect, the first mini-slot variable display related to the expectation notice effect is executed, and a winning combination other than "bell" (including "missing") is used as the winning combination. After the establishment, the second mini-slot variable display related to the expected degree notice effect is executed. On the other hand, based on the decision not to execute the first setting suggestion effect, it was decided not to execute (b) the expectation notice effect when (ii) the first mini-slot variable display itself is not executed. Occasionally, neither the first mini-slot variable display nor the second mini-slot variable display is executed during the variable display.

(4) In the above embodiment, when the menu screen is displayed during the demo display, the mini reel information is displayed by selecting the "mini reel information" icon by operating the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B. An example is shown in which the image display device 5 displays the execution probability of the first setting suggestion effect, but the present invention is not limited to this form, and the mini reel information may be displayed during a period other than the demo display. For example, during the jackpot game state including the fanfare period and the ending period, or during the variable display period, the mini reel information can be obtained by selecting the "mini reel information" icon by operating the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B. It may be displayed on the image display device 5 and the execution probability of the first setting suggestion effect may be notified. It should be noted that the execution probability of the first setting suggestion effect may be notified without requiring an operation, for example, an advantage for the player such as an ending period of the big hit game state and a variable display at which the high base state ends. The execution probability of the first setting suggestion effect may be displayed at the end of the above period.

(5) In the above embodiment, an example in which the mini reel information is displayed on the image display device 5 is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode, and the mini reel information is displayed in an area different from that of the image display device 5. Is also good. For example, in a gaming machine provided with a sub-image display device that displays various effects images different from the image display device 5, mini reel information is displayed on the sub-image display device during a demo display, a jackpot game state, or a variable display. You may.

(6) In the above embodiment, an example is shown in which the second change effect is an effect of changing the display mode of the active display, but the second change effect is not limited to such a form, and the second change effect is a hold display. It may be an effect that changes the display mode. For example, the display result (character symbol) of the second mini-slot variable display is used to execute a look-ahead notice effect for notifying the display result of the variable display (variable display that is the target of the look-ahead notice) that has not been executed, and the second A second change effect may be executed in which a character icon based on the display result of the mini-slot variable display is added to the hold display corresponding to the variable display that is the target of the pre-reading notice. As described above, the display result suggested by the second mini-slot variable display is not limited to the display result of the variable display that has been executed, and may be the display result of the variable display that has not been executed. In addition, the target of the response information changed by the second change effect is not limited to the response information corresponding to the executed variation display (active display), but also the response information corresponding to the non-executed variation display (hold display). It may be.

(7) In the above embodiment, the first mini-slot variable display executed in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 (3 reels) is performed twice (the first winning combination is "bell" or "missing". ", The second successful combination is other than" bell ") has been shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first mini-slot variable display may be executed three times or more. For example, based on the decision to execute the first setting suggestion effect, the first mini-slot variable display is executed twice, and the expectation degree advance notice effect is executed. The first mini-slot variable display related to the advance notice effect may be performed twice, and the second mini-slot variable display related to the expectation advance notice effect may be executed. For example, when the first mini-slot variable display is executed a total of four times, the first winning combination is set to "missing" and then the second winning combination is set to "bell" (first setting suggestion effect), the third time. It is possible to set the 4th winning combination to "cherry" after setting the winning combination to "watermelon".

(8) In the above embodiment, an example in which the second mini-slot variable display is executed only once based on the decision to execute the expectation degree advance notice effect is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this. The variable display of 2 mini slots may be executed twice or more. For example, after the display result of the first mini-slot variable display is set to "CHANGE", the display result of the second mini-slot variable display may be set to "extreme heat". In this way, when the second mini-slot variable display is executed a plurality of times, each display result is determined so that the display result with a high expectation is not followed by the display result with a low expectation. The fall of the notice character shall be restricted.

Further, the second change effect may be executed a plurality of times in response to the execution of the second mini-slot variable display a plurality of times. For example, based on the fact that the display result of the first mini-slot variable display is "CHANGE", the character icon of "CHANGE" is superimposed on the active display, and then the display result of the second mini-slot variable display is displayed. Is changed to "super heat", and instead of the character icon of "CHANGE", the character icon of "super heat" may be superimposed on the active display. In this way, when the second change effect is executed a plurality of times, each display mode is determined so that the display mode with high expectation does not change to the display mode with low expectation, and the active display is displayed. It shall limit the decline of the display mode.

(9) In the above embodiment, only the freeze mode is exemplified as the special mode of the variable display of the mini-slot symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of types of special modes may be provided. For example, as a special mode, in addition to the freeze mode described above, a mode in which the speed at which the mini-slot symbol is variably displayed (scrolling speed) is extremely faster or extremely slower than the normal mode may be provided, and the variable display may be provided. A mode in which the mini-slot symbol to be played is enlarged (for example, 200% of the normal mode) may be provided. Further, the ratio of the winning combination may be different depending on the type of the special aspect. For example, in the second special mode (freeze mode) than in the first special mode (mode in which the mini slot symbol is enlarged), the winning combination of the variable display of the mini slot symbol is "cherry" or "7 sets". The ratio may be high.

(10) In the above embodiment, a plurality of variable display patterns (variable display times) of mini-slot symbols may be provided. For example, as the variable display pattern of the mini-slot symbol, a variable display pattern having a variable display time of 3.5 seconds and a variable display pattern having a variable display time of 30 seconds may be provided. Then, the winning combination may be determined at different ratios according to the variable display pattern of the mini-slot symbol. For example, in the case of a variable display pattern having a variable display time of 30 seconds, the ratio of the winning combinations being "cherry" or "7 sets" is higher than in the case of a variable display pattern having a variable display time of 3.5 seconds. May be high.

(11) In the above embodiment, at the timing when the combination of the mini-slot symbols is stopped and displayed in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1 (the winning combination is established), the mini-slot symbol corresponds to the winning combination. The effect image may be displayed in the display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1. For example, when "replay" is established as a winning combination, a blue effect image is displayed, when "bell" is established as a winning combination, a yellow effect image is displayed, and "watermelon" is established as a winning combination. , If a green effect image is displayed and "cherry" is established as a winning combination, a red effect image is displayed, and if "7 alignment" is established as a winning combination, a rainbow-colored effect image is displayed. Good.

(12) In the above embodiment, an example is shown in which the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1 are stopped and displayed as a winning combination for notifying that a big hit has been confirmed, but the present invention is not limited to this. , "BAR alignment" may be stopped and displayed as a winning combination to notify that the jackpot has been confirmed. To stop and display the "BAR alignment" as a winning combination is to stop and display the combination of [BAR], [BAR], and [BAR] in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1. Further, the probability variation jackpot may be determined when "7 alignment" is established, and the normal jackpot may be determined when "BAR alignment" is established.

(13) In the above embodiment, the mini-slot 16TM030 including the mini-slot symbol does not depend on whether or not the variable display of the special symbol is executed (whether or not the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed). Although an example of information that can be displayed regardless of the number of reserved storages has been shown, the mini slot 16TM030 may be hidden during a predetermined period, not limited to such a form. For example, the mini slot 16TM030 may be hidden during the period when the super reach effect is being executed.

(14) In the above-described embodiment, an example is shown in which the same winning combination (for example, [bell]) is not established multiple times except for "off" during one special symbol variation display. Not limited to such a form, the same winning combination (for example, [bell]) that is not “out of place” may be established multiple times during one variation display of the special symbol. In the case of adopting such a configuration, if the total number of times that the winning combination (for example, [Bell]) is established is included in the cumulative number of times, [How many fluctuation displays out of the executed n fluctuation displays] It becomes extremely difficult to grasp the most important information for guessing the set value, such as whether the winning combination [bell] is established in response to the above, and the importance of the information displayed in the mini reel information 16TM200 becomes important. It may drop and the player may not pay attention. In order to solve such a problem, even if the same winning combination (for example, [Bell]) is established multiple times during one special symbol variation display, the same winning combination is displayed during this variation display. The cumulative number of times is counted, assuming that the number of times it has been established is one. For example, even if the winning combination of "bell" is established three times during one special symbol variation display, the number of times the winning combination of "bell" is established during this variation display is regarded as one, and the mini reel Information 16 Add 1 to the cumulative number of times the TM200 "bell" has been won.

(15) In the above embodiment, an example in which the display mode of the variation number display 16TM040 is changed from the normal mode (white mode) to the setting suggestion mode (for example, purple mode) at a rate corresponding to the set value is shown, but it is specified. With respect to the set value of (for example, a set value such as 5 or 6 which is particularly advantageous for the player), the setting suggestion mode may be different from the case of other set values. For example, when the set value is in the range of 1 to 4, the display mode of the fluctuation number display 16TM040 is changed from the normal mode (white mode) to the first setting suggestion mode (for example, purple mode) at a ratio corresponding to the set value. When the set value is 5 or 6, the display mode of the variation number display 16TM040 is changed from the normal mode (white mode) to the second setting suggestion mode (for example, gold mode) at a ratio corresponding to the set value. As for whether or not to use the first setting suggestion mode, the lottery is performed once every 25 times as described above, whereas as to whether or not to use the second setting suggestion mode, 50 A separate lottery may be held once a time. Then, when it is decided to use the second setting suggestion mode, the fluctuation number display 16TM040 is displayed as the second setting suggestion mode (for example, the gold mode) regardless of whether or not it is decided to use the first setting suggestion mode. ).

(16) In the above embodiment, an example is shown in which the execution rate of the first setting suggestion effect is set in common regardless of the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) in the low probability low base state (normal state). Not limited to this, the execution rate of the first setting suggestion effect may be different depending on the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time). For example, the fluctuation pattern of the long fluctuation time is larger than the fluctuation pattern of the short fluctuation time. , The first setting suggestion effect may be executed at a high rate.

(17) In the above embodiment, an example is shown in which the variable display of the mini-slot symbol is executed at the lower center of the screen and the set value is suggested by the display result, but the mini-slot is not limited to such a mode. The set value may be suggested by another effect executed in response to the variable display of the symbol. For example, an effect in which any one of a plurality of types of characters appears in response to the variable display of the mini-slot symbol may be executed, and the set value may be suggested by the type of the appearing character.

Note that the variable display of the mini-slot symbol and other effects corresponding to the variable display of the mini-slot symbol may be executed in an area different from the lower center of the screen. For example, it may be executed in an area that does not overlap (do not overlap) with the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R at the right edge or the left edge of the screen, and is a display device (so-called sub-display device) different from the image display device 5. It may be executed.

(18) In the above embodiment, the effect acting on the hold display and the effect acting on the active display are the lower center (see FIG. 9-10 (11)) or the lower right (FIG. 9-9 (5)) of the screen. Although examples are shown in (see), these effects may be performed in different areas. For example, it may be executed in an area that does not overlap (do not overlap) with the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R at the right edge or the left edge of the screen, and is a display device (so-called sub-display device) different from the image display device 5. It may be executed.

(19) In the above embodiment, an example is shown in which the setting suggestion effect and the expectation level advance notice effect by the variable display of the mini slot symbol are executed in the low probability low base state (normal state), but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be executed in a high-accuracy high-base state or a high-accuracy low-base state (KT control in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in a normal state).

In such an effect configuration, the execution rate of the setting suggestion effect (the rate at which the winning combination is "bell") is [(a variable display of the decorative symbol (special symbol) executed in the gaming state in which the setting suggestion effect can be executed). The ratio of (the number of times the setting suggestion effect is executed in the game state (the number of times the winning combination is "bell" in the variable display of the mini-slot symbol) to the number of times)]. If the variable display of the mini-slot symbol is executed in, [(the number of times the winning combination is "bell" in the variable display of the mini-slot symbol executed in the high-accuracy high-base state) ÷ (high-accuracy high-base) The execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect is calculated by the variable display number of the decorative symbol (special symbol) executed in the state), and the set value is suggested by the calculated value. In addition, the high accuracy and low base state (KT state). ) When the variable display of the mini-slot symbol is executed, [(the number of times that the winning combination is "bell" in the variable display of the mini-slot symbol executed in the high accuracy low base state (KT state)) ÷ (Number of variations of the decorative symbol (special symbol) executed in the high-accuracy low-base state (KT state))] calculates the execution rate of the setting suggestion effect, and the calculated value suggests the set value.

In the above [Explanation of the feature unit 16TM], an example of the configuration relating to the following means A1 to means A10 and an example of the configuration relating to the following means B1 to means B10 are shown.

Here, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (FIG. 12), it is possible to set any of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player, and the setting values before and after the setting change can be set. A game machine that displays a character image according to the above has been proposed. With respect to a gaming machine that can be set to any one of a plurality of set values as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (FIG. 12), there is room for improving the interest of the production. The configuration according to the means A1 to the means A10 shown below and the configuration according to the means B1 to the means B10 shown below are made in view of the above-mentioned actual conditions, and any one of a plurality of set values is set. The purpose is to improve the interest of the production related to the game machine that can be set to the value.

The gaming machine of means A1 (pachinko gaming machine 1) is
A setting means (game control microcomputer 100) that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (setting values 1 to 6 having different ranges of random numbers for jackpot determination) having different advantages for the player.
Variable display means (microcomputer 100 for game control, CPU 120 for effect control) capable of executing variable display (variable display), and
An advantageous state control means (microcomputer 100 for game control) that can control an advantageous state (big hit game state) that is advantageous for the player, and
A display means (CPU 120 for effect control, image display device 5) is provided.
The display means includes a special display (combination of mini-slot symbols whose winning combination is "bell") corresponding to a setting suggestion relating to the setting means, and a specific display corresponding to the suggestion of controlling the advantageous state (establishing combination is "bell"). It is possible to display "watermelon", "cherry", or a combination of mini-slot symbols that are "7 sets", "no display", "CHANGE", "super heat", or "FEVER" symbol).
When the variable display period is a predetermined period, the special display can be displayed (when the fluctuation pattern (variation time) is non-reach off (10 seconds), normal reach off (30 seconds), or normal reach jackpot (30 seconds). It is possible to stop and display the combination of mini-slot symbols whose winning combination is "bell"), and when the variable display period is longer than the predetermined period, the special display can be displayed and then the specific display can be displayed. (When the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) is out of super reach (120 seconds) or super reach jackpot (120 seconds), the winning combination is "bell" after the combination of mini-slot symbols whose winning combination is "bell" is stopped and displayed. Stop and display the combination of mini-slot symbols that are "watermelon", "cherry", or "7 sets", and stop and display the "no display", "CHANGE", "super heat", or "FEVER" symbol. It is possible).
According to such a configuration, since the special display can be displayed with priority over the specific display, it is possible to improve the interest in setting suggestion.

The game machine of means A2
It is a game machine of means A1
A production control means (CPU 120 for production control) for controlling the production is provided.
When the variable display (variable display) by the variable display means (game control microcomputer 100, effect control CPU 120) is executed, the effect control means displays the special display at a different ratio according to a set value. Whether or not to perform is determined (whether or not the first setting suggestion effect is executed is determined for each variation display (step S16TM2000), and as shown in FIG. 9-6 (G), the first setting is made according to the set value. The execution rate of the suggestion effect is different)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the player can infer the set value when the variable display is executed.

The game machine of means A3
A gaming machine of means A1 or means A2,
A production control means (CPU 120 for production control) for controlling the production is provided.
When the variable display (variable display) by the variable display means (microcomputer 100 for game control, CPU 120 for effect control) is executed, the effect control means displays the special display at a different ratio according to a set value. It is determined whether or not to perform the determination, and after making the determination, it is determined whether or not to display the specific display (as shown in FIG. 9-5, whether or not to execute the first setting suggestion effect is determined in step S16TM2000. Later, in step S16TM2020, it is determined whether or not to execute the expectation notice effect).
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, after deciding whether or not to display the special display, it is decided whether or not to display the specific display, so that it is possible to perform appropriate effect control in which the special display is prioritized.

The game machine of means A4
Any gaming machine selected from means A1 to means A3.
The display means (effect control CPU 120, image display device 5) displays the special display (combination of mini-slot symbols whose winning combination is "bell") when a specific effect (battle effect in super reach) is executed. It is characterized by being hidden.
According to such a configuration, the player can pay attention to the specific effect.

The game machine of means A5
Any gaming machine selected from means A1 to means A4.
The variable display means (CPU 120 for effect control) can execute variable display of decoration identification information (variable display of decorative symbols).
The display means (effect control CPU 120, image display device 5) is a variable display (mini slot symbol) of information different from the decorative identification information in a specific area (mini slot symbol display area 5L1, 5C1, 5R1, or 5LCR1). (Variable display) can be executed, and the special display (combination of mini-slot symbols whose winning combination is "bell") or the specific display (establishing combination is "watermelon", "cherry", or " A combination of mini-slot symbols that will be "7 sets", or a combination of "CHANGE", "super heat", or "FEVER" character symbols), or a predetermined display (a combination of mini-slot symbols whose winning combination is "off"), or , "No display" pattern) can be displayed.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the production performed in a specific area of the display means.

The game machine of means A6
Any gaming machine selected from means A1 to means A5.
The variable display means (CPU 120 for effect control) can execute variable display of decoration identification information (variable display of decorative symbols).
The display means (effect control CPU 120) can execute variable display (variable display of the mini-slot symbol) of information different from the decorative identification information in a specific area (mini-slot symbol display area 5L1, 5C1, 5R1). ,
When the variable display mode executed in the specific area becomes a special mode (freeze mode), the ratio controlled to the advantageous state (big hit gaming state) is higher than that when the special mode (freeze mode) does not occur. High (As shown in FIG. 9-7 (K), when the mini-slot symbol performs a variable display of the freeze mode, the winning combination is "cherry (freeze)" or "7 sets (freeze)", and "cherry". Since the above-mentioned winning combination (“cherry” or “7-match”) is determined, the expectation that the mini-slot symbol will be controlled to the jackpot game state is higher than when the variable display of the normal mode is performed).
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the variable display mode becomes a special mode, so that the player can pay attention to the display means.

The game machine of means A7
Any gaming machine selected from means A1 to means A6.
There are multiple types of the specific display (there are "watermelon", "cherry", and "7 sets" as the winning combination, and the display results include "no display", "CHANGE", "super heat", and "FEVER". ),
The ratio controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on the type of the specific display (as shown in FIG. 9-7 (K), the expectation degree controlled to the jackpot gaming state is "watermelon"<"cherry"< It is higher in the order of "7 sets")
It is characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to be interested in the type of specific display.

The game machine of means A8
Any gaming machine selected from means A1 to means A7.
A storage means (RAM 122 of the effect control board 12) for storing the display history of the special display (the cumulative number of times the combination of mini-slot symbols whose winning combination is "bell" is stopped and displayed)
When the predetermined condition is satisfied (when the menu screen is displayed, the icon of "mini reel information" is selected by operating the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B), the information regarding the display history (the establishment combination is It is characterized by including a history display means (an image display device 5 for displaying mini reel information 16TM200) capable of displaying a "winning probability of becoming a bell").
According to such a configuration, the player can easily grasp the information regarding the display history of the special display in order to estimate the set value.

The game machine of means A9
Any gaming machine selected from means A1 to means A8.
The display means (effect control CPU 120) can display a special display (variation number display 16TM040) suggesting a set value in a special area (lower left of the screen of the image display device 5).
The ratio at which the special display is displayed is different from the ratio at which the special display is displayed (the first setting suggestion effect is an execution lottery for each variable display, and the second setting suggestion effect is 25 times. A lottery is held for each variable display),
The ratio of the set value suggested by the special display corresponding to the set value of the game machine is different from the ratio of the set value suggested by the special display corresponding to the set value of the game machine (FIG. 9-6). As shown in FIG. 9-7 (M), while the execution rate of the first setting suggestion effect is 3% (set value 1) to 8% (set value 6) as shown in (G). In addition, since the execution rate of the second setting suggestion effect is 10% (setting value 1) to 20% (setting value 6), the actual effect execution rate between the first setting suggestion effect and the second setting suggestion effect. The ratio of the set value estimated based on is different from the set value of the game machine is different)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the ratio of the suggested set value corresponding to the set value of the game machine differs depending on whether the display is the special display or the special display. You can pay attention to what is suggested.

The game machine of means A10
Any gaming machine selected from means A1 to means A9.
The variable display means (CPU 120 for effect control) can execute the variable display (variable display of the decorative symbol) of the first decorative identification information in the first area (decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R in the center of the screen). , Variable display of the second decoration identification information (variable display of small symbols), which is less visible than the first decoration identification information, can be executed in the second area (small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, 5r at the upper right of the screen). Yes,
The display means (CPU 120 for effect control) can display at least one of the special display or the specific display in the first area (mini slot symbols in the mini reel symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 at the lower center of the screen). The combination is displayed), and the display of the special display and the specific display in the second area is restricted (the mini-slot symbol is not displayed in the small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r).
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the variable display of the second decorative identification information in the second region from being lowered.

The gaming machine of means B1 (pachinko gaming machine 1) is
A setting means (game control microcomputer 100) that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (setting values 1 to 6 having different ranges of random numbers for jackpot determination) having different advantages for the player.
Variable display means (microcomputer 100 for game control, CPU 120 for effect control) capable of executing variable display (variable display), and
An advantageous state control means (microcomputer 100 for game control) that can control an advantageous state (big hit game state) that is advantageous for the player, and
A display means (CPU 120 for effect control, image display device 5) is provided.
The display means includes a special display corresponding to a setting suggestion related to the setting means (combination of mini-slot symbols whose winning combination is "bell") and a specific display corresponding to the suggestion of controlling an advantageous state (establishing combination is "bell"). It is possible to display "watermelon", "cherry", or a combination of mini-slot symbols that are "7 sets", "no display", "CHANGE", "super heat", or "FEVER" symbol) in a specific area. ,
Corresponding display means (CPU 120 for effect control, image display device 5) capable of displaying the corresponding display (active display 16TM003) corresponding to the variable display, and
The specific display is displayed in the specific area (as shown in FIG. 9-9 (8), a combination of mini-slot symbols whose winning combination is "cherry" is provided in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1. After the stop display is displayed, as shown in FIG. 9-10 (10), the mode of the corresponding display is changed in response to the stop display of the character symbol of "super heat" in the mini slot symbol display area 5LCR1). Change effect to be made (as shown in FIGS. 9-10 (11) and (12), a second change effect is added to the active display 16TM030 with a character icon indicating the same character as the character of the mini-slot pattern (“super heat”)). A gaming machine characterized by comprising an effect executing means (CPU 120 for effect control) capable of executing the above.
According to such a configuration, a gaming machine capable of displaying a special display corresponding to a setting suggestion can perform a change effect in response to the specific display being displayed in a specific area. Can be improved.

The game machine of means B2
It is a game machine of means B1
There are a plurality of types of special modes (normal mode, blue mode, red mode) as the mode of the corresponding display (active display).
The effect executing means (effect control CPU 120) is a gaming machine capable of executing a special effect (first change effect) that changes the special aspect of the corresponding display.
According to such a configuration, the player can be expected to change the corresponding display of the special aspect.

The game machine of means B3
A game machine of means B1 or means B2.
The effect executing means (effect control CPU 120) can execute an effect acting on the corresponding display (active display) that is the target of the change effect as the change effect (second change effect) (FIG. 9-10). As shown in (11) and (12), an effect indicating that the mini-slot symbol (“super heat”) stopped and displayed in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 jumps out of the mini-slot 16TM30 and hits the active display 16TM003. After the image is displayed, a character icon indicating the same characters as the characters (“super heat”) of the mini-slot symbol stopped and displayed in the mini-slot symbol display area 5LCR1 is added to the active display 16TM030).
It is characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of change production.

The game machine of means B4
A game machine according to any one of means B1 to means B3.
There are a plurality of types of the specific display (the first mini-slot variable display has "off", "watermelon", "cherry", and "7 sets" as the winning combination, and the second mini-slot variable display has "7 sets" as the display result. There are "No display", "CHANGE", "Intense heat", "FEVER"),
Depending on the type of the specific display, the mode of the corresponding display to be the target of the change effect is determined at a different ratio (as shown in FIGS. 9-7 (K) and (L), the first in the expectation notice effect. The winning combination of the 1 mini-slot variable display is determined to be "out of place", "watermelon", "cherry", or "7 sets", and the second mini-slot depends on which winning combination is determined. The selection ratio of whether the display result of the variable display is "no display", "CHANGE", "extreme heat", or "FEVER" is different, and the display result of the second mini-slot variable display is different. Since it matches the mode of the character icon added to the active display 16TM003, it is added to the active display 16TM003 depending on which combination of the first mini-slot variable display in the expectation notice effect is determined. The ratio of the mode of the character icon is different)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the type of the specific display and the mode of the corresponding display related to each other, and it is possible to improve the interest of the production.

The game machine of means B5
Any gaming machine selected from means B1 to means B4.
A production control means (CPU 120 for production control) for controlling the production is provided.
When the variable display (variable display) by the variable display means (microcomputer 100 for game control, CPU 120 for effect control) is executed, the effect control means displays the special display at a different ratio according to a set value. It is determined whether or not to perform the determination, and after making the determination, it is determined whether or not to display the specific display (as shown in FIG. 9-5, whether or not to execute the first setting suggestion effect is determined in step S16TM2000. Later, in step S16TM2020, it is determined whether or not to execute the expectation notice effect).
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, after deciding whether or not to display the special display, it is decided whether or not to display the specific display, so that it is possible to perform appropriate effect control in which the special display is prioritized.

The game machine of means B6
Any gaming machine selected from means B1 to means B5.
The variable display means (CPU 120 for effect control) can execute variable display of decoration identification information (variable display of decorative symbols).
The display means (effect control CPU 120, image display device 5) is a variable display (mini slot symbol) of information different from the decorative identification information in a specific area (mini slot symbol display area 5L1, 5C1, 5R1, or 5LCR1). (Variable display) can be executed, and the special display (combination of mini-slot symbols whose winning combination is "bell") or the specific display (establishing combination is "watermelon", "cherry", or " A combination of mini-slot symbols that will be "7 sets", or a combination of "CHANGE", "super heat", or "FEVER" character symbols), or a predetermined display (a combination of mini-slot symbols whose winning combination is "off"), or , "No display" pattern) can be displayed.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the production performed in a specific area of the display means.

The game machine of means B7
Any gaming machine selected from means B1 to means B6.
The variable display means (CPU 120 for effect control) can execute variable display of decoration identification information (variable display of decorative symbols).
The display means (effect control CPU 120) can execute variable display (variable display of the mini-slot symbol) of information different from the decorative identification information in a specific area (mini-slot symbol display area 5L1, 5C1, 5R1). ,
When the variable display mode executed in the specific area becomes a special mode (freeze mode), the ratio controlled to the advantageous state (big hit gaming state) is higher than that when the special mode (freeze mode) does not occur. High (As shown in FIG. 9-7 (K), when the mini-slot symbol performs a variable display of the freeze mode, the winning combination is "cherry (freeze)" or "7 sets (freeze)", and "cherry". Since the above-mentioned winning combination (“cherry” or “7-match”) is determined, the expectation that the mini-slot symbol will be controlled to the jackpot game state is higher than when the variable display of the normal mode is performed).
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the variable display mode becomes a special mode, so that the player can pay attention to the display means.

The game machine of means B8
Any gaming machine selected from means B1 to means B7.
There are multiple types of the specific display (there are "watermelon", "cherry", and "7 sets" as the winning combination, and the display results include "no display", "CHANGE", "super heat", and "FEVER". ),
The ratio controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on the type of the specific display (as shown in FIG. 9-7 (K), the expectation degree controlled to the jackpot gaming state is "watermelon"<"cherry"< It is higher in the order of "7 sets")
It is characterized by that.
With such a configuration, it is possible to be interested in the type of specific display.

The game machine of means B9 is
Any gaming machine selected from means B1 to means B8.
A storage means (RAM 122 of the effect control board 12) for storing the display history of the special display (the cumulative number of times the combination of mini-slot symbols whose winning combination is "bell" is stopped and displayed)
When the predetermined condition is satisfied (when the menu screen is displayed, the icon of "mini reel information" is selected by operating the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B), the information regarding the display history (the establishment combination is It is characterized by including a history display means (an image display device 5 for displaying mini reel information 16TM200) capable of displaying a "winning probability of becoming a bell").
According to such a configuration, the player can easily grasp the information regarding the display history of the special display in order to estimate the set value.

The game machine of means B10
Any gaming machine selected from means B1 to means B9.
The display means (effect control CPU 120) can display a special display (variation number display 16TM040) suggesting a set value in a special area (lower left of the screen of the image display device 5).
The ratio at which the special display is displayed is different from the ratio at which the special display is displayed (the first setting suggestion effect is an execution lottery for each variable display, and the second setting suggestion effect is 25 times. A lottery is held for each variable display),
The ratio of the set value suggested by the special display corresponding to the set value of the game machine is different from the ratio of the set value suggested by the special display corresponding to the set value of the game machine (FIG. 9-6). As shown in FIG. 9-7 (M), while the execution rate of the first setting suggestion effect is 3% (set value 1) to 8% (set value 6) as shown in (G). In addition, since the execution rate of the second setting suggestion effect is 10% (setting value 1) to 20% (setting value 6), the actual effect execution rate between the first setting suggestion effect and the second setting suggestion effect. The ratio of the set value estimated based on is different from the set value of the game machine is different)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the ratio of the suggested set value corresponding to the set value of the game machine differs depending on whether the display is the special display or the special display. You can pay attention to what is suggested.

[Explanation of feature 27TM]
Next, the feature unit 27TM will be described. The gaming machine shown in the above-mentioned [Explanation of the feature unit 16TM], that is, the gaming machine whose set value can be changed may include the feature unit 27TM shown below.

Specifically, in the gaming machine provided with the feature unit 27TM, the effect image (the effect image corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol) displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5 during the variation display of the special symbol is reduced. A divided effect is executed in which the left portion of the effect display area and the right portion of the effect display area are divided and displayed in this manner (see FIG. 10-1). By this division effect, the game gives the impression that the variable display of a plurality of special symbols (or the variable display of a plurality of decorative symbols corresponding to each of the variable display of the plurality of special symbols) is being executed in parallel at the same time. Can be given to a person. In this [Explanation of the feature unit 27TM], the description of the same configuration as that shown in the above-mentioned [Explanation of the feature unit 16TM] will be omitted.

(Screen configuration when executing split production)
FIG. 10-1 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of each effect information displayed on the screen when the division effect is executed in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-1, the area where the effect information can be displayed on the image display device 5 (the area of the entire screen) is defined as the effect display area 27TM005A.

The first small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r are provided in the upper left portion of the effect display area 27TM005A, and the first small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r correspond to the variable display of the first special symbol. The variable display of the first small symbol is executed. In addition, a second small symbol display area is provided in the upper right part of the screen of the effect display area 27TM005A, and in this second small symbol display area, the variation of the second small symbol corresponding to the variation display of the second special symbol is provided. The display shall be executed.

That is, in this embodiment, as the variable display of the effect symbol corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol (main effect symbol) is executed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In the first small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r, variable display of the first small symbol (a sub-effect symbol that is smaller than the main effect symbol and has low visibility) is executed. Further, as the variable display of the effect symbol corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol (main effect symbol) is executed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and the second small symbol display area. Then, the variation display of the second small symbol (the symbol for the sub-effect that is smaller than the symbol for the main effect and has low visibility) is executed.

At the bottom of the effect display area 27TM005A, a first hold display area 27TM011 for displaying the first hold storage number (1st hold display 27TM010 of 0 to 4) and an active display 27TM030 corresponding to the currently executing fluctuation display are displayed. An active display area 27TM031 and a second hold display area 27TM021 for displaying the second hold storage number (2nd hold display 27TM020 of 0 to 4) are provided. With the active display area 27TM031 in the center, the left side is the first hold display area 27TM011 and the right side is the second hold display area 27TM021 when viewed from the player.

Further, in the vicinity of the left end portion of the effect display area 27TM005A and in the central portion in the vertical direction, a first reserved storage number special display area 27TM015 for displaying the first reserved storage number numerically is provided, and in the vicinity of the right end portion of the effect display area 27TM005A. A second reserved storage number special display area 27TM025 for displaying the second reserved storage number numerically is provided in the central portion in the vertical direction. Since the number of objects corresponding to the first hold storage number (first hold display 27TM010) is displayed in the first hold display area 27TM011, the number of objects is larger than the first hold storage number displayed in the first hold display area 27TM011. 1 Hold storage number The first hold storage number displayed in the special display area 27TM015 is less noticeable and less visible. Further, since the number of objects corresponding to the second hold storage number (second hold display 27TM020) is displayed in the second hold display area 27TM021, the number of objects displayed in the second hold display area 27TM021 is larger than the second hold storage number displayed. However, the second reserved storage number displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 27TM025 is less noticeable and less visible.

In the split effect, the combination of the decorative symbol (main effect symbol) to be displayed in a variable manner and the frame surrounding the decorative symbol is increased from one set to two sets, and one of them is displayed in the first effect image display area 27TM100A. The other is displayed in the second effect image display area 27TM200A. In the first effect image display area 27TM100A, the first effect image 27TM100 and the first effect image frame 27TM110 including the first decorative symbol (first main effect symbol) are displayed. In the second effect image display area 27TM200A, the second effect image 27TM200 and the second effect image frame 27TM210 including the second decorative symbol (second main effect symbol) are displayed.

In this way, the first effect information including the first effect image 27TM100 and the first effect image frame 27TM110 displayed in the first effect image display area 27TM100A, and the second effect displayed in the second effect image display area 27TM200A. The second effect information including the image 27TM200 and the second effect image frame 27TM210 are both effect information corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol being executed. For example, when the variation display of the first special symbol is being executed, the first effect information and the second effect information correspond to the variation display of the first special symbol (variation display of the common special symbol). Will be displayed in parallel at the same time.

Here, as for the first effect information (effect information including the first effect image 27TM100 and the first effect image frame 27TM110 displayed in the first effect image display area 27TM100A), the variable display of the special symbol is started. Correspondingly, the effect information corresponding to the variation pattern specification command received by the effect control CPU 120 continues even after the division effect is completed during the variation display period of the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern specification command. The effect information (for example, the first decorative pattern) that can be displayed in the effect display area 27TM005A is included.

On the other hand, the second effect information (effect information including the second effect image 27TM200 and the second effect image frame 27TM210 displayed in the second effect image display area 27TM200A) also corresponds to the start of variable display of the special symbol. The effect information corresponds to the variation pattern designation command received by the effect control CPU 120, but unlike the first effect information, the effect is divided during the variation display period of the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern specification command. This is the effect information that is not displayed (controlled to be hidden) when is completed.

Further, the first effect image 27TM100 and the second effect image 27TM200 are images displayed side by side for a predetermined period (within a period during which the split effect is executed), and one of them is different from the other within the predetermined period. It may be an aspect. Further, in the present embodiment, the first effect image 27TM100 is an image of the advance notice effect (for example, a cut-in image of the cut-in advance notice effect described later) that suggests the display result of the variation display determined in the effect determination process at the start of the change. ) May be superimposed.

On the other hand, the second production image 27TM200 is used as a movie (in this example, movie A (short / long) and movie B (short / long), which will be described later) for a predetermined period corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. It is an image based on. Therefore, unlike the first effect image 27TM100, the advance notice effect image suggesting the display result of the change display determined in the change start effect determination process is not superimposed and displayed, but the notice is given as an image in the movie. An image of the effect (for example, a cut-in image described later) may be displayed.

When the divided effect is executed, (1) the first effect image display area 27TM100A is formed on the right side of the effect display area 27TM005A, and the second effect image display area 27TM200A is formed on the left part of the effect display area 27TM005A. When one pattern of effect control is executed, contrary to (1), (2) a second effect image display area 27TM200A is formed on the right side of the effect display area 27TM005A, and on the left side of the effect display area 27TM005A. The effect control of the second pattern in which the first effect image display area 27TM100A is formed may be executed. In the example shown in FIG. 10-1, (1) the effect control of the first pattern is executed in the divided effect.

In the present embodiment, in the determination by the CPU 103 at the start of fluctuation of the special symbol (for example, the determination at the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol), (1) the right part of the screen becomes the first effect image display area 27TM100A, and the left part of the screen. Is determined to execute the effect control of the first pattern that becomes the second effect image display area 27TM200A, and the first effect image 27TM100 and the first effect image frame 27TM110 are displayed on the right side of the screen. The second effect image 27TM200 and the second effect image frame 27TM210 are displayed on the left side of the screen (see FIG. 10-1).

Further, in the determination by the CPU 103 at the start of fluctuation of the special symbol (for example, the determination at the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol), (2) the right part of the screen becomes the second effect image display area 27TM200A, and the left part of the screen becomes the first. Based on the decision to execute the effect control of the second pattern that becomes the effect image display area 27TM100A, the first effect image 27TM100 and the first effect image frame 27TM110 are displayed on the left side of the screen, and the right part of the screen. The second effect image 27TM200 and the second effect image frame 27TM210 will be displayed.

When the effect control of the first pattern is executed in the split effect, the first effect information is displayed on the right side of the screen, and the second effect information is displayed on the left side of the screen (in the case of FIG. 10-1). The first effect image 27TM100 and the first effect image frame 27TM110 including the background image and the decorative pattern reduced compared to before the split effect are the left side of the rectangle (the side on the center side of the screen) rather than the right side of the rectangle (the side on the right side of the screen). ) Is displayed short, and the upper side of the rectangle and the lower side of the rectangle are displayed so that the distance between the two is narrowed from the right edge (right side of the screen) to the left edge (center side of the screen). That is, in the first effect image 27TM100 and the first effect image frame 27TM110, the left end (center side of the screen) is located on the back side of the screen (direction away from the player) from the right end (right side of the screen) in the virtual three-dimensional space. The first effect image 27TM100 and the first effect image frame 27TM110 are viewed from a viewpoint that is perpendicular to the screen and is closer to the player than the screen.

Further, the second effect image 27TM200 and the second effect image frame 27TM210 including the background image and the decorative pattern reduced from those before the split effect are on the right side (center side of the screen) of the rectangle rather than the left side (left side of the screen) of the rectangle. The upper side of the rectangle and the lower side of the rectangle are displayed so that the distance between them narrows from the left edge (left side of the screen) to the right edge (center side of the screen). That is, in the second effect image 27TM200 and the second effect image frame 27TM210, the right end (center side of the screen) is located on the back side of the screen (direction away from the player) from the left end (left side of the screen) in the virtual three-dimensional space. The second effect image 27TM200 and the second effect image frame 27TM210 are viewed from a viewpoint that is perpendicular to the screen and is closer to the player than the screen.

On the other hand, when the effect control of the second pattern is executed in the split effect, the second effect information is displayed on the right side of the screen, and the first effect information is displayed on the left side of the screen (What is FIG. 10-1?). In the opposite case), the first effect image 27TM100 including the background image and the decorative pattern reduced compared to before the split effect, and the first effect image frame 27TM110 are on the right side of the rectangle (the left side of the screen) rather than the left side of the rectangle (the left side of the screen). The side on the center side of the screen) is displayed short, and the upper side of the rectangle and the lower side of the rectangle are displayed so that the distance between the two is narrowed from the left edge (left side of the screen) to the right edge (center side of the screen). That is, in the first effect image 27TM100 and the first effect image frame 27TM110, the right end (center side of the screen) is located on the back side of the screen (direction away from the player) from the left end (left side of the screen) in the virtual three-dimensional space. The first effect image 27TM100 and the first effect image frame 27TM110 are viewed from a viewpoint that is perpendicular to the screen and is closer to the player than the screen.

Further, the second effect image 27TM200 and the second effect image frame 27TM210 including the background image and the decorative pattern reduced from those before the split effect are on the left side (center side of the screen) of the rectangle rather than the right side (right side of the screen) of the rectangle. The upper side of the rectangle and the lower side of the rectangle are displayed so that the distance between them narrows from the right edge (right side of the screen) to the left edge (center side of the screen). That is, in the second effect image 27TM200 and the second effect image frame 27TM210, the left end (center side of the screen) is located on the back side of the screen (direction away from the player) from the right end (right side of the screen) in the virtual three-dimensional space. The second effect image 27TM200 and the second effect image frame 27TM210 are viewed from a viewpoint that is perpendicular to the screen and is closer to the player than the screen.

(First Embodiment)
As shown in [Explanation of the feature unit 16TM], the effect control CPU 120 that has received the setting command can suggest the set value by executing the effect according to the set value specified by the setting command. is there. That is, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests a set value. In the first embodiment described below, as an example in which the setting suggestion effect can be executed during the division effect, the setting suggestion effect can be executed in the first effect image display area 27TM100A, while the second effect image display area 27TM200A can be executed. It is characterized in that the setting suggestion effect is not executed in.

(Specific example of split production)
A specific mode of the division effect will be described with reference to FIG. 10-2. FIG. 10-2 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect image displayed on the image display device 5 when the division effect is executed.

In the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 that has received the variation pattern designation command accompanied by the split effect has an effect image corresponding to the variation pattern specification command accompanied by the split effect, and various effects determined by the effect determination process at the start of the variation. The effect image is displayed in the effect display area 27TM005A during the variation display period of the decorative symbol based on the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command.

As shown in FIG. 10-2 (1), before the execution of the division effect, in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, the decoration identification information is synchronized with the variable display of the first special symbol. The decorative design (main production design) is displayed in a variable manner. When the CUP 103 is executing the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 determines the decorative symbol (information corresponding to the first special symbol) in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. In the first small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5, the variation display of the first small symbol (information corresponding to the first special symbol) is executed.

Before executing the split effect, the effect control CPU 120 displays a single background image in the effect display area 27TM005A, and displays a left decorative symbol in the symbol display area 5L on the left side of the center of the effect display area 27TM005A. A middle decoration symbol is displayed in the symbol display area 5C at the center of the effect display area 27TM005A, and a right decoration symbol is displayed in the symbol display area 5R on the right side of the center of the effect display area 27TM005A.

The display mode of the background image and the decorative pattern before the division effect is that a plurality of decorative patterns (left decorative pattern, middle decorative pattern, right decorative pattern) are superimposed on the rectangular background image at the same size and at equal intervals. It has become. That is, the background image and the decorative design are arranged parallel to the screen in the virtual three-dimensional space, and the background image and the decorative design are viewed from a viewpoint perpendicular to the screen (on the player side of the screen). It is an aspect.

Further, since the effect control CPU 120 has the first reserved storage number of 3, "3" is displayed in the first reserved storage number special display area 27TM015 of the image display device 5, and the second reserved storage number is 0. Therefore, "0" is displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 27TM025 of the image display device 5. Further, the active display area 27TM031 displays the active display 27TM030 corresponding to the fluctuation display currently being executed, and the first hold display area 27TM011 displays three first hold displays 27TM010.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 displays a combination of two sets of background images and decorative patterns based on the background image and decorative pattern in the information displayed in the effect display area 27TM005A as the divided effect is executed. Appear on region 27TM005A. The combination of one of them becomes the first effect information including the first effect image 27TM100, and the other becomes the second effect information including the second effect image 27TM200.

As shown in FIG. 10-2 (2), the effect control CPU 120 displays the first effect image 27TM100 in the first effect image display area 27TM100A on the right side of the effect display area 27TM005A as the divided effect is executed, and produces the effect. The second effect image 27TM200 is displayed in the second effect image display area 27TM200A on the left side of the display area 27TM005A. That is, in this example, based on the decision to execute the effect control of the first pattern, the first effect information is displayed on the right side of the screen, and the second effect information is displayed on the left side of the screen. ing.

Then, in the first symbol display area 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 of the first effect image 27TM100, the variation display of the first decorative symbol as the decoration identification information is performed in response to the variation display of the first special symbol, and the second In the second symbol display area 5L2, 5C2, 5R2 of the effect image 27TM200, the variation display of the second decorative symbol as the decoration identification information is performed corresponding to the variation display of the first special symbol. At this time, in response to the continuous execution of the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 is the first small symbol display area 5l, 5c, 5r of the image display device 5. The variable display of the design is continued.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 continuously displays "3" in the first reserved storage number special display area 27TM015 of the image display device 5, and in the second reserved storage number special display area 27TM025 of the image display device 5. "0" is continuously displayed. Further, in the active display area 27TM031, the active display 27TM030 corresponding to the currently executing fluctuation display is continuously displayed, and in the first hold display area 27TM011, three first hold display 27TM010 are continuously displayed. It is displayed.

That is, in the present embodiment, the division effect is executed, the first effect image 27TM100 is displayed in the first effect image display area 27TM100A on the right side of the screen, and the second effect image 27TM200A is displayed in the second effect image display area 27TM200A on the left side of the screen. Even when 27TM200 is displayed, the positions of the first reserved storage number special display area 27TM015, the second reserved storage number special display area 27TM025, the active display area 27TM031, and the first reserved display area 27TM011 are divided. Without changing from each position before the start of the production, the first hold storage number "3", the second hold storage number "0", the active display 27TM030, and the first hold display 27TM010 are set at each position before the start of the split production. It is continuously displayed in.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-2 (3), when a predetermined period elapses after the division effect is executed, the effect control CPU 120 gradually enlarges and displays the first effect image 27TM100. In the enlarged display period in which the first effect image 27TM100 is gradually enlarged and displayed, the first effect image 27TM100 has a higher priority than the second effect image 27TM200 (the display layer is higher than the second effect image 27TM200, and the player It is displayed in a superimposed manner so that it can be seen from the front. As described above, regarding the display priority of the first effect image 27TM100 and the second effect image 27TM200 in the enlarged display period, the relationship of the second effect image 27TM200 <the first effect image 27TM100 is established. In the area where the effect image 27TM100 and the second effect image 27TM200 overlap, the visibility of the first effect image 27TM100 is higher than the visibility of the second effect image 27TM200.

After the first effect image 27TM100 is further enlarged and displayed from the state of FIG. 10-2 (3) to completely cover the second effect image 27TM200 (after the second effect image 27TM200 becomes completely invisible). Finally, at the timing when the rectangle of the first effect image 27TM100 (first effect image frame 27TM110) was enlarged and displayed until it overlapped with the rectangle of the effect display area 27TM005A (the state shown in FIG. 10-2 (4)). Sometimes) the split effect ends.

As shown in FIGS. 10-2 (3) and (4), at the timing when the division effect ends, the first decorative symbol displayed in the first symbol display area 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 of the first effect image 27TM100 After the division effect is completed, it will be displayed as a decorative pattern in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the effect display area 27TM005A.

As described above, the display period of the first effect information displayed in the effect display area 27TM005A is longer than that of the second effect information. Further, the first effect information when the split effect ends and the effect information displayed in the effect display area 27TM005A after the division effect ends share common effect information (for example, a combination of the same decorative symbols). Therefore, the continuity of the effect is guaranteed from the execution of the split effect to the end of the split effect.

Therefore, for the player, the first effect information in which the same effect information is continuously displayed even after the end of the divided effect is the true effect information, and is hidden when the divided effect ends. It can also be said that the second production information (movie associated with the fluctuation pattern in advance) is false production information. Further, the first effect information that becomes more visible when the divided effect ends is the true effect information, and the second effect information that becomes less visible when the divided effect ends (a variable pattern in advance). It can also be said that the movie associated with) is fake production information.

(Determination of fluctuation pattern)
As described above, the ROM 101 stores a fluctuation pattern determination table for determining the fluctuation pattern. The CPU 103 is based on a variation pattern determination table corresponding to the display result (“missing” or “big hit”) of the variation display determined at the start of the variation of the special symbol, and a random number for determining the variation pattern extracted at the start winning. The fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation display is determined. Then, a fluctuation pattern designation command for designating the fluctuation pattern is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120.

In the present embodiment, as the variation pattern determination table, the variation pattern determination table for deviation used when it is determined in advance that the variation display result is "off", and the variation display result is set to "big hit". A fluctuation pattern determination table for jackpots, which is used when it is determined in advance, is prepared in advance.

(Variation pattern type)
As shown in FIG. 10-3, in the present embodiment, the types of variation patterns for loss are classified into "non-reach loss", "normal reach loss", "super reach A loss", and "super reach B loss". There is. Then, for each type of variation pattern, each corresponding to the presence / absence of execution of the split effect, the mode of the split effect (second display movie type), the number of executions of the pseudo-ream and the mode of the pseudo-ream (pseudo-ream type). There is a variation pattern.

For the "non-reach out of reach" variation pattern type, the combination of decorative symbols indicating that the variation display result is finally "out of reach" is fixedly stopped without the reach state being established after the variation display is started. This is the type of fluctuation pattern.

The fluctuation pattern type of "normal reach off" is that after the fluctuation display is started and the reach state is established, the fluctuation display result is finally "off" without executing the super reach effect (battle effect) described later. This is a type of fluctuation pattern in which the combination of decorative symbols indicating that the pattern is fixed and stopped.

The fluctuation pattern type of "Super Reach A Off" is whether or not a big hit is won by a battle between a friendly character and an enemy character A as a super reach effect after the fluctuation display is started and the reach state is established. The battle effect A that informs the player is executed, the effect that the ally character is defeated by the enemy character A is executed, and the combination of the decorative symbols indicating that the variable display result is finally "off" is confirmed and stopped. This is the type of fluctuation pattern.

The fluctuation pattern type of "Super Reach B Off" is whether or not a big hit is won by a battle between a friendly character and an enemy character B as a super reach effect after the fluctuation display is started and the reach state is established. The battle effect B is executed to notify the player, the effect that the ally character is defeated by the enemy character B is executed, and the combination of the decorative symbols indicating that the variable display result is finally "off" is confirmed and stopped. This is the type of fluctuation pattern.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-4, in the present embodiment, there are various types of jackpot fluctuation patterns, such as "normal reach jackpot", "super reach A jackpot", and "super reach B jackpot". Then, for each type of variation pattern, each corresponding to the presence / absence of execution of the split effect, the mode of the split effect (second display movie type), the number of executions of the pseudo-ream and the mode of the pseudo-ream (pseudo-ream type). There is a variation pattern.

The fluctuation pattern type of "normal reach jackpot" is that after the fluctuation display is started and the reach state is established, the fluctuation display result is finally "big hit" without executing the super reach effect (battle effect) described later. This is a type of fluctuation pattern in which the combination of decorative symbols indicating that the pattern is fixed and stopped.

The fluctuation pattern type of "Super Reach A jackpot" is whether or not the jackpot is won by a battle between the ally character and the enemy character A as a super reach effect after the fluctuation display is started and the reach state is established. The battle effect A is executed to notify the player, the effect that the ally character wins the enemy character A is executed, and the combination of the decorative symbols indicating that the variable display result is finally a "big hit" is confirmed and stopped. This is the type of fluctuation pattern.

The fluctuation pattern type of "Super Reach B jackpot" is whether or not the jackpot is won by a battle between the ally character and the enemy character B as a super reach effect after the fluctuation display is started and the reach state is established. The battle effect B is executed to notify the player, the effect that the ally character wins the enemy character B is executed, and the combination of the decorative symbols indicating that the variable display result is finally a "big hit" is confirmed and stopped. This is the type of fluctuation pattern.

In this way, in the fluctuation pattern accompanied by super reach (“super reach A off” and “super reach B off”, and “super reach A jackpot” and “super reach B jackpot”), after the reach state is established, As a super reach effect, a battle effect is executed to notify whether or not a ally character and an enemy character have won a big hit by performing a battle. Then, when the final display result is "big hit" (when the big hit symbol is fixed and stopped), the effect that the ally character wins the enemy character is executed, and when the final display result is "missing" (missing symbol). When is definitely stopped), the effect that the ally character is defeated by the enemy character is executed.

In the deviation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 10-3, the variation pattern type of "non-reach outlier", the variation pattern type of "normal reach outlier", the variation pattern type of "super reach A outlier", and "super reach B". Judgment values for determining the fluctuation pattern whose display result is "missing" are assigned to each fluctuation pattern corresponding to each fluctuation pattern type of "missing".

In the fluctuation pattern determination table for jackpots shown in FIG. 10-4, each variation of the fluctuation pattern type of "normal reach jackpot", the fluctuation pattern type of "super reach A jackpot", and the fluctuation pattern type of "super reach B jackpot". Judgment values for determining the fluctuation pattern for which the display result is a "big hit" are assigned to each fluctuation pattern corresponding to the pattern type.

(Pseudo-ren)
In the present embodiment, for each variation pattern, whether or not the pseudo-ream is executed and the number of executions when the pseudo-ream is executed are set. When the variation pattern for executing the pseudo-ream is determined one or more times, the effect control CPU 120 that has received the variation pattern designation command for specifying the variation pattern displays the variation of the decorative pattern based on the variation pattern on the image display device 5. The pseudo-ream will be executed one or more times during the period.

Pseudo-ream is a decoration in each display area of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol within the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol to the time when the decorative symbol is fixed and stopped and the display result is derived and displayed. This is an effect in which the design is temporarily stopped and then changed and displayed again. By executing the pseudo-ream, it is as if the variation display of the special symbol is executed once, that is, within the variation display period of the decorative symbol based on the variation pattern specification command of 1 corresponding to the hold storage of 1. It is possible to make it appear as if the variable display of the decorative pattern is executed multiple times.

In the pseudo-ream shown in the present embodiment, the decorative symbol consisting of numbers is temporarily stopped in the display area of the left symbol and the display area of the right symbol, and then the display area of the middle symbol is composed of the characters "NEXT". After the pseudo-continuous symbols (pseudo-continuous symbols 27TM300 shown in FIGS. 10-9 (A2) and (B2) described later) are temporarily stopped, the decorative symbols in the left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol display areas are temporarily stopped. The fluctuation display of is resumed (so-called re-variation is performed). Here, the "state in which the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped" is a state in which the decorative symbol does not stop completely and moves slightly up and down, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative symbol is swinging. The decorative symbol may be repeatedly enlarged and reduced, or the decorative symbol may be in a different form (deformed) from the final stop (when the symbol is confirmed).

Further, in the present embodiment, as will be described later, as a type of pseudo-ream, there are a pseudo-ream of type X having a low expectation of being a big hit and a pseudo-ream of type Y having a high expectation of being a big hit.

(Outside fluctuation pattern)
As a variation pattern type of "non-reach off", there is only a variation pattern of "non-reach off [no division effect, no pseudo-ream]" in which the division effect is not executed and the pseudo-ream is not executed.

When the display result is "off", the variation pattern of "non-reach off [no division effect, no pseudo-ream]" is selected at a rate of 60%.

As the fluctuation pattern type of "normal reach loss", the split effect is not executed and the pseudo-ream is not executed. The fluctuation pattern of "normal reach loss [no split effect, no pseudo-ream]" and the split effect are not executed, and the degree of expectation is high. There is a variation pattern of "normal reach loss [no division effect, one pseudo-ream (type X)]" in which a pseudo-ream of low type X is executed once.

If the display result is "off", the variation pattern of "normal reach off [no split effect, no pseudo-ream]" is selected at a rate of 7%, and "normal reach is off [no split effect, pseudo-ream once" ( The fluctuation pattern of "Type X)]" is selected at a rate of 5.5%.

As the variation pattern type of "Super Reach A Off", the division effect is not executed and the pseudo-ream is not executed. The variation pattern of "Super Reach A Off [No division effect, no pseudo-ream]" and the division effect are not executed. , The fluctuation pattern of "Super Reach A off [No split effect, 1 pseudo-ream (Type X)]" in which the pseudo-ream of type X with low expectation is executed once, and the expectation level because the division effect is not executed. The variation pattern of "Super Reach A off [No split effect, Pseudo-ream 2 times (Type X)]" in which the pseudo-ream of type X with low is executed twice, and the type with high expectation because the split-effect is not executed There is a variation pattern of "super reach A off [no division effect, pseudo-ream twice (type Y)]" in which the pseudo-ream of Y is executed twice.

If the display result is "off", the fluctuation pattern of "super reach A off [no split effect, no pseudo-ream]" is selected at a rate of 3.5%, and "super reach A off [no split effect]" is selected. , Pseudo-ream 1 time (type X)] ”variation pattern is selected at a rate of 3%, and“ Super Reach A off [no division effect, pseudo-ream 2 times (type X)] ”variation pattern is 2.5 It is selected at a rate of%, and the fluctuation pattern of "Super Reach A off [No division effect, pseudo-continuous 2 times (type Y)]" is selected at a rate of 2%.

As the variation pattern type of "Super Reach A off", the effect control of the first pattern in which the first effect image is displayed on the right side of the screen and the second effect image is displayed on the left side of the screen is executed, and the type of movie A is executed. Of these, the split effect in which the movie A (short) of the type with the short playback period is played is executed, and the pseudo-ream of the type Y with high expectation is executed twice. Movie A (short)), pseudo-continuous 2 times (type Y)] ”and the first pattern effect in which the first effect image is displayed on the right side of the screen and the second effect image is displayed on the left side of the screen. Along with the execution of control, a split effect is executed in which the movie A (long) of the movie A type having a long playback period is played, and the pseudo-ream of the type Y with high expectation is executed twice. There is a variation pattern of "1st pattern division effect (movie A (long), pseudo-ream 2 times (type Y)]" that is out of reach A.

As the variation pattern type of "Super Reach A off", the effect control of the second pattern in which the first effect image is displayed on the left side of the screen and the second effect image is displayed on the right side of the screen is executed, and the type of movie A is executed. Of these, the split effect in which the movie A (short) of the type with the short playback period is played is executed, and the pseudo-ream of the type Y with high expectation is executed twice. Movie A (short)), pseudo-ream 2 times (type Y)] ”and the second pattern of the first effect image displayed on the left side of the screen and the second effect image displayed on the right side of the screen. Along with the execution of control, a split effect is executed in which the movie A (long) of the movie A type having a long playback period is played, and the pseudo-ream of the type Y with high expectation is executed twice. There is a variation pattern of reach A off [second pattern division effect (movie A (long)), pseudo-ream twice (type Y)].

If the display result is "off", the fluctuation pattern of "super reach A off [first pattern division effect (movie A (short)), pseudo-continuous 2 times (type Y)]" is 1.5%. The variation pattern of "Super Reach A off [1st pattern division production (movie A (long), pseudo-ream 2 times (type Y)]" is selected at a rate of 1%, and "Super Reach A" is selected. The variation pattern of "missing [second pattern division effect (movie A (short)), pseudo-ream 2 times (type Y)]" is selected at a rate of 1.5%, and "super reach A loss [second pattern division effect] is selected. (Movie A (long)), pseudo-continuous 2 times (type Y)] ”variation pattern is selected at a rate of 1%.

As the variation pattern type of "Super Reach B Off", the division effect is not executed and the pseudo-ream is not executed. The variation pattern of "Super Reach B-out [No division effect, no pseudo-ream]" and the division effect are not executed. , The fluctuation pattern of "Super Reach B off [No split effect, 1 pseudo-ream (Type X)]" in which the pseudo-ream of type X with low expectation is executed once, and the expectation level because the split-effect is not executed The variation pattern of "Super Reach B off [No split effect, 1 pseudo-ream (Type Y)]" in which the pseudo-ream of type Y with a high value is executed once, and the type in which the split effect is not executed and the degree of expectation is low The fluctuation pattern of "Super Reach B off [No split effect, Pseudo-ream 2 times (Type X)]" in which the pseudo-ream of X is executed twice, and the pseudo-ream of type Y with high expectation because the split effect is not executed. There is a variation pattern of "super reach B off [no division effect, pseudo-ream 2 times (type Y)]" in which the ream is executed twice.

If the display result is "off", the fluctuation pattern of "super reach B off [no split effect, no pseudo-ream]" is selected at a rate of 2.5%, and "super reach B off [no split effect]" is selected. , Pseudo-ream 1 time (type X)] ”variation pattern is selected at a rate of 2%, and“ Super Reach B off [no division effect, pseudo-ream 1 time (type Y)] ”variation pattern is 1.5 The variation pattern of "Super Reach B is out [No split effect, Pseudo-ream 2 times (Type X)]" is selected at a rate of 1.5%, and "Super Reach B is out [No split effect]" is selected. , Pseudo-ream 2 times (type Y)] ”variation pattern is selected at a rate of 1%.

As the variation pattern type of "Super Reach B off", the effect control of the first pattern in which the first effect image is displayed on the right side of the screen and the second effect image is displayed on the left side of the screen is executed, and the type of movie B is executed. Of these, the split effect in which the movie B (short) of the type with the short playback period is played is executed, and the pseudo-ream of the type Y with high expectation is executed twice. Movie B (short)), pseudo-continuous 2 times (type Y)] ”and the first pattern effect in which the first effect image is displayed on the right side of the screen and the second effect image is displayed on the left side of the screen. Along with the execution of control, a split effect is executed in which the movie B (long) of the movie B type having a long playback period is played, and the pseudo-ream of the type Y with high expectation is executed twice. There is a variation pattern of "1st pattern division effect (movie B (long), pseudo-ream 2 times (type Y)]" that is out of reach B.

As the variation pattern type of "Super Reach B off", the effect control of the second pattern in which the first effect image is displayed on the left side of the screen and the second effect image is displayed on the right side of the screen is executed, and the type of movie B is executed. Of these, the split effect in which the movie B (short) of the type with the short playback period is played is executed, and the pseudo-ream of the type Y with high expectation is executed twice. Movie B (short)), pseudo-ream 2 times (type Y)] ”and the second pattern of the first effect image displayed on the left side of the screen and the second effect image displayed on the right side of the screen. Along with the execution of control, a split effect is executed in which the movie B (long) of the movie B type having a long playback period is played, and the pseudo-ream of the type Y with high expectation is executed twice. There is a variation pattern of reach B off [second pattern division effect (movie B (long)), pseudo-continuous 2 times (type Y)].

If the display result is "off", the fluctuation pattern of "super reach B off [first pattern division effect (movie B (short)), pseudo-ream 2 times (type Y)]" is at a rate of 1%. The variation pattern of "Super Reach B off [1st pattern division effect (movie B (long), pseudo-ream 2 times (type Y)]" is selected at a rate of 0.5%, and "Super Reach B" is selected. The variation pattern of "missing [second pattern splitting effect (movie B (short)), pseudo-ream 2 times (type Y)]" is selected at a rate of 1%, and "super reach B missed [second pattern splitting effect (movie)" is selected. B (long)), pseudo-continuous 2 times (type Y)] ”variation pattern is selected at a rate of 0.5%.

(Big hit fluctuation pattern)
As the fluctuation pattern type of "normal reach jackpot", the split effect is not executed and the pseudo-ream is not executed. The fluctuation pattern of "normal reach jackpot [no split effect, no pseudo-ream]" and the split effect are not executed, and the degree of expectation is high. There is a variation pattern of "normal reach jackpot [no split effect, one pseudo-ream (type X)]" in which a pseudo-ream of low type X is executed once.

When the display result is "big hit", the fluctuation pattern of "normal reach jackpot [no split effect, no pseudo-ream]" is selected at a rate of 0.5%, and "normal reach jackpot [no split effect, pseudo-ream 1]" is selected. Time (type X)] ”variation pattern is selected at a rate of 1%.

As the variation pattern type of "Super Reach A jackpot", the split effect is not executed and the pseudo-ream is not executed. The variation pattern of "Super Reach A jackpot [no split effect, no pseudo-ream]" and the split effect are not executed. , The fluctuation pattern of "Super Reach A jackpot [no split effect, pseudo-ream 1 time (type X)]" in which the pseudo-ream of type X with low expectation is executed once, and the expectation level because the split effect is not executed. The variation pattern of "Super Reach A jackpot [no split effect, pseudo-ream 2 times (type X)]" in which the pseudo-ream of type X with low is executed twice, and the type with high expectation because the split effect is not executed There is a variation pattern of "Super Reach A jackpot [no split effect, pseudo-ream 2 times (type Y)]" in which the pseudo-ream of Y is executed twice.

When the display result is "big hit", the fluctuation pattern of "super reach A big hit [no split effect, no pseudo-ream]" is selected at a rate of 1.5%, and "super reach A big hit [no split effect]" is selected. , Pseudo-ream 1 time (type X)] "variation pattern is selected at a rate of 2%, and" Super Reach A jackpot [no division effect, pseudo-ream 2 times (type X)] "variation pattern is 2.5 It is selected at a rate of%, and the fluctuation pattern of "Super Reach A jackpot [no split effect, pseudo-ream 2 times (type Y)]" is selected at a rate of 5%.

As the variable pattern type of "Super Reach A jackpot", the effect control of the first pattern in which the first effect image is displayed on the right side of the screen and the second effect image is displayed on the left side of the screen is executed, and the type of movie A is executed. Of these, the split effect in which the movie A (short) of the type with the short playback period is played is executed, and the pseudo-ream of the type Y with high expectation is executed twice. Movie A (short)), pseudo-continuous 2 times (type Y)] ”and the first pattern effect in which the first effect image is displayed on the right side of the screen and the second effect image is displayed on the left side of the screen. Along with the execution of control, a split effect is executed in which the movie A (long) of the movie A type having a long playback period is played, and the pseudo-ream of the type Y with high expectation is executed twice. There is a variation pattern of reach A jackpot [first pattern division effect (movie A (long), pseudo-ream 2 times (type Y)]].

As the variable pattern type of "Super Reach A jackpot", the effect control of the second pattern in which the first effect image is displayed on the left side of the screen and the second effect image is displayed on the right side of the screen is executed, and the type of movie A is executed. Of these, the split effect in which the movie A (short) of the type with the short playback period is played is executed, and the pseudo-ream of the type Y with high expectation is executed twice. Movie A (short)), pseudo-ream 2 times (type Y)] ”and the second pattern of the first effect image displayed on the left side of the screen and the second effect image displayed on the right side of the screen. Along with the execution of control, a split effect is executed in which the movie A (long) of the movie A type having a long playback period is played, and the pseudo-ream of the type Y with high expectation is executed twice. There is a variation pattern of reach A jackpot [second pattern division effect (movie A (long)), pseudo-ream 2 times (type Y)].

If the display result is "big hit", the fluctuation pattern of "Super Reach A big hit [1st pattern division effect (movie A (short)), pseudo-ream 2 times (type Y)]" is at a rate of 6%. The variation pattern of "Super Reach A jackpot [1st pattern division effect (movie A (long), pseudo-ream 2 times (type Y)]" is selected at a rate of 7%, and "Super Reach A jackpot [" The variation pattern of "2nd pattern division effect (movie A (short)), pseudo-ream 2 times (type Y)]" is selected at a rate of 6%, and "Super Reach A jackpot [2nd pattern division effect (movie A (movie A (movie A))" is selected. The fluctuation pattern of "long)), pseudo-ream twice (type Y)]" is selected at a rate of 7%.

As the variation pattern type of "Super Reach B jackpot", the split effect is not executed and the pseudo-ream is not executed. The variation pattern of "Super Reach B jackpot [no split effect, no pseudo-ream]" and the split effect are not executed. , The fluctuation pattern of "Super Reach B jackpot [no split effect, pseudo-ream 1 time (type X)]" in which the pseudo-ream of type X with low expectation is executed once, and the expectation level because the split-effect is not executed The variation pattern of "Super Reach B jackpot [no split effect, 1 pseudo-ream (type Y)]" in which the pseudo-ream of type Y with a high value is executed once, and the type with low expectation because the split-effect is not executed. The fluctuation pattern of "Super Reach B jackpot [no split effect, pseudo-ream 2 times (type X)]" in which the pseudo-ream of X is executed twice, and the pseudo-ream of type Y, which is highly expected because the split effect is not executed. There is a variation pattern of "Super Reach B jackpot [no split effect, pseudo-ream 2 times (type Y)]" in which the ream is executed twice.

When the display result is "big hit", the fluctuation pattern of "super reach B big hit [no split effect, no pseudo-ream]" is selected at a rate of 2%, and "super reach B big hit [no split effect, pseudo-ream]" is selected. The fluctuation pattern of "1 time in a row (type X)]" is selected at a rate of 2.5%, and the fluctuation pattern of "super reach B jackpot [no split effect, 1 time in a pseudo series (type Y)]" is 3%. Selected by percentage, the fluctuation pattern of "Super Reach B jackpot [no split effect, pseudo-ream 2 times (type X)]" is selected at a rate of 3%, and "Super Reach B jackpot [no split effect, pseudo-ream 2]" is selected. Time (type Y)] ”variation pattern is selected at a rate of 7%.

As the variable pattern type of "Super Reach B jackpot", the effect control of the first pattern in which the first effect image is displayed on the right side of the screen and the second effect image is displayed on the left side of the screen is executed, and the type of movie B is executed. Of these, the split effect in which the movie B (short) of the type with the short playback period is played is executed, and the pseudo-ream of the type Y with high expectation is executed twice. Movie B (short)), pseudo-continuous 2 times (type Y)] ”and the first pattern effect in which the first effect image is displayed on the right side of the screen and the second effect image is displayed on the left side of the screen. Along with the execution of control, a split effect is executed in which the movie B (long) of the movie B type having a long playback period is played, and the pseudo-ream of the type Y with high expectation is executed twice. There is a variation pattern of reach B jackpot [first pattern division effect (movie B (long), pseudo-ream 2 times (type Y)]].

As the variable pattern type of "Super Reach B jackpot", the effect control of the second pattern in which the first effect image is displayed on the left side of the screen and the second effect image is displayed on the right side of the screen is executed, and the type of movie B is executed. Of these, the split effect in which the movie B (short) of the type with the short playback period is played is executed, and the pseudo-ream of the type Y with high expectation is executed twice. Movie B (short)), pseudo-ream 2 times (type Y)] ”and the second pattern of the first effect image displayed on the left side of the screen and the second effect image displayed on the right side of the screen. Along with the execution of control, a split effect is executed in which the movie B (long) of the movie B type having a long playback period is played, and the pseudo-ream of the type Y with high expectation is executed twice. There is a variation pattern of reach B jackpot [second pattern division effect (movie B (long), pseudo-ream 2 times (type Y)]].

If the display result is "big hit", the fluctuation pattern of "super reach B big hit [1st pattern division effect (movie B (short)), pseudo-ream 2 times (type Y)]" is at a rate of 10%. The variation pattern of "Super Reach B jackpot [1st pattern division effect (movie B (long), pseudo-ream 2 times (type Y)]" is selected at a rate of 12%, and "Super Reach B jackpot [" The variation pattern of "2nd pattern division effect (movie B (short)), pseudo-ream 2 times (type Y)]" is selected at a rate of 10%, and "Super Reach B jackpot [2nd pattern division effect (movie B (movie B (movie B))" is selected. The fluctuation pattern of "long)), pseudo-ream twice (type Y)]" is selected at a rate of 12%.

As shown in FIG. 10-3, when the display result is "off" (that is, when the display result specified by the display result specification command is "off"), the fluctuation pattern of "super reach A off" is The selected ratio is [3.5 + 3 + 2.5 + 2 + 1.5 + 1 + 1.5 + 1 = 16%], and the selected ratio of the “super reach B out of order” variation pattern is [2.5 + 2 + 1.5 + 1.5 + 1 + 1 + 0.5 + 1 + 0. 5 = 11.5%].

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-4, when the display result is a "big hit" (that is, when the display result specified by the display result specification command is a "big hit"), the fluctuation of the "super reach A big hit" The rate at which the pattern is selected is [1.5 + 2 + 2.5 + 5 + 6 + 7 + 6 + 7 = 37%], and the rate at which the variation pattern of "Super Reach B jackpot" is selected is [2 + 2.5 + 3 + 3 + 7 + 10 + 12 + 10 + 12 = 61.5%].

In this way, the rate at which the display result is "big hit" is higher when the fluctuation pattern of "Super Reach B" is selected than when the fluctuation pattern of "Super Reach A" is selected. There is.

As shown in FIG. 10-3, when the display result is "off" (that is, when the display result specified by the display result specification command is "off"), the "division effect" is performed in the fluctuation pattern accompanied by super reach. The ratio of "No execution" selected is the ratio of [Super Reach A (no division effect execution) + Super Reach B (no division effect execution)], so [(3.5 + 3 + 2.5 + 2) + ( 2.5 + 2 + 1.5 + 1.5 + 1) = 19.5%], and the rate at which the variation pattern of "with split effect execution" is selected in the variation pattern with super reach is [Super Reach A (with split effect execution). Since the ratio is [+ Super Reach B (with division effect execution)], it is [(1.5 + 1 + 1.5 + 1) + (1 + 0.5 + 1 + 0.5) = 8%].

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-4, when the display result is "big hit" (that is, when the display result specified by the display result specification command is "big hit"), the fluctuation pattern accompanied by super reach is "big hit". The rate at which the variation pattern of "no split effect execution" is selected is the ratio of [Super Reach A (no split effect execution) + Super Reach B (no split effect execution)], so [(1.5 + 2 + 2.5 + 5) + (2 + 2.5 + 3 + 3 + 7) = 28.5%], and the ratio of the variation pattern of "with split effect execution" selected in the variation pattern with super reach is [Super Reach A (with split effect execution) + super Since it is the ratio of reach B (with division effect execution)], it is [(6 + 7 + 6 + 7) + (10 + 12 + 10 + 12) = 70%].

In this way, the rate at which the display result is "big hit" is higher when the fluctuation pattern of "with split effect execution" is selected than when the variation pattern of "without split effect execution" is selected. It has become.

As shown in FIG. 10-3, when the display result is "off" (that is, when the display result specified by the display result specification command is "off"), "pseudo-repeated number 0 times (none)". The rate at which the fluctuation pattern of is selected is as follows: [Non-reach loss (pseudo-ream number 0 times (none)) + normal reach loss (pseudo-ream number 0 times (none)) + super reach A loss (pseudo-ream number 0 times (none)) )) + Super Reach B is off (pseudo-ream count 0 times (none))], so it is [60 + 7 + 3.5 + 2.5 = 73%], and the fluctuation pattern of "pseudo-ream count 1" is selected. Since the ratio is [normal reach loss (pseudo-ream number 1 time) + super reach A loss (pseudo-ream number 1 time) + super reach B loss (pseudo-ream number 1 time)], [5.5 + 3 + (pseudo-reach number 1) 2 + 1.5) = 12%], and the rate at which the variation pattern of "pseudo-ream number 2 times" is selected is [super reach A off (pseudo-ream number 2 times) + super reach B off (pseudo-ream number 2). Since it is the ratio of [times)], it is [(2.5 + 2 + 1.5 + 1 + 1.5 + 1) + (1.5 + 1 + 1 + 0.5 + 1 + 0.5) = 15%].

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-4, when the display result is "big hit" (that is, when the display result specified by the display result specification command is "big hit"), "the number of pseudo-reams is 0 (none). The rate at which the variation pattern of ")" is selected is as follows: [Normal reach jackpot (pseudo-reach number 0 (none)) + Super reach A jackpot (pseudo-reach 0 (none)) + Super reach B jackpot (pseudo-reach 0) Since it is the ratio of [times (none))], it is [0.5 + 1.5 + 2 = 4%], and the ratio of selecting the variation pattern of "pseudo-ream number 1" is [normal reach jackpot (pseudo-ream number 1). (Times) + Super Reach A jackpot (1 pseudo-ream) + Super Reach B jackpot (1 pseudo-ream)], so [1 + 2 + (2.5 + 3) = 8.5%] The rate at which the variation pattern of "pseudo-ream number 2 times" is selected is the ratio of [super reach A jackpot (pseudo-ream number 2 times) + super reach B jackpot (pseudo-ream number 2 times)], so [(2) .5 + 5 + 6 + 7 + 6 + 7) + (3 + 7 + 10 + 12 + 10 + 12) = 87.5%].

In this way, the display result shows the relationship between the fluctuation pattern of "pseudo-ream number 0 times (none)", the fluctuation pattern of "pseudo-ream number 1 time", and the fluctuation pattern of "pseudo-ream count 2 times". The ratio of "big hits" increases in the order of "pseudo-ream count 0 times (none)" <"pseudo-ream count 1" <"pseudo-ream count 2". Therefore, the player expects that many pseudo-reams are executed.

As shown in FIG. 10-3, when the display result is "off" (that is, when the display result specified by the display result specification command is "off"), the pseudo-ream is executed, and the pseudo-ream is executed. The rate at which type X is selected as the type is [5.5 + 3 + 2.5 + 2 + 1.5 = 14.5%], and the rate at which the pseudo-ream is executed and the type Y is selected as the type of the pseudo-ream is [ 2 + 1.5 + 1 + 1.5 + 1 + 1.5 + 1 + 1 + 0.5 + 1 + 0.5 = 12.5%].

As shown in Fig. 10-4, when the display result is "big hit" (that is, when the display result specified by the display result specification command is "big hit"), the pseudo-ream is executed, and the pseudo-ream is executed. The ratio of type X selected as the type is [1 + 2 + 2.5 + 2.5 + 3 = 11%], the pseudo-ream is executed, and the ratio of type Y selected as the type of the pseudo-ream is [5 + 6 + 7 + 6 + 7 + 3 + 7 + 10 + 12 + 10 + 12 = 85%. ].

As described above, the rate of the display result being "big hit" is higher in the variation pattern in which the pseudo-ream of type Y is executed than in the variation pattern in which the pseudo-ream of type X is executed.

(Production decision processing at the time of starting prize)
FIG. 10-5 is a flowchart showing an effect determination process executed at the time of starting winning. The effect control CPU 120 executes the start winning effect determination process shown in FIG. 10-5 in the pre-reading advance notice setting process (step S161) of the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7.

In the effect determination process at the time of start winning, the effect control CPU 120 first receives a set of commands at the time of start winning based on the occurrence of a start winning to the first start winning opening (for example, a symbol designation command, a variable category command, etc.). And it is confirmed whether or not the first hold storage number addition designation command) is newly received (step S27TM1000).

The symbol designation command is an effect control command that indicates whether or not a jackpot will be achieved among the winning determination results, and the determination result of the type of jackpot. The CPU 103 determines whether or not a jackpot will be achieved and the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot based on the jackpot determination random number and the jackpot type determination random number extracted at the time of starting winning, and a symbol for designating the determination result. Output the specified command. Further, the variation category command is an effect control command that indicates the determination result of the variation pattern among the determination results at the time of winning. The CPU 103 determines whether or not the normal reach is achieved, whether or not the super reach is achieved, and whether or not the division effect is executed, based on the random number for determining the fluctuation pattern extracted at the time of winning the start, and the like. Outputs a variable category command that specifies the judgment result. Further, the first hold storage number addition designation command is an effect control command for designating that the first hold storage number has been increased by 1.

In the present embodiment, the CPU 103 displays the variation corresponding to the start winning based on the random number for determining the variation pattern extracted at the time of winning the start and the table for determining the variation pattern shown in FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4. It is possible to determine the corresponding variation pattern before executing the variation display corresponding to the start winning, and transmit the variation category command based on the determination result to the effect control CPU 120. Therefore, the effect control CPU 120 can confirm whether or not the split effect is executed based on the determination result at the time of starting winning before receiving the variation pattern designation command.

Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 newly stores one set of start winning commands (symbol designation command, variable category command, and first hold storage number addition designation command) in the start winning command storage area. Determine if it is. If a new command for starting a set of winning prizes has not been received (NO in step S27TM1000), the process ends as it is.

If a new command for starting a set of winning prizes has been received (YES in step S27TM1000), whether or not the effect control CPU 120 is determined to execute the split effect based on the variable category command received from the CPU 103. Is confirmed (step S27TM1010).

If it is not determined that the division effect is to be executed (NO in step S27TM1010), the effect control CPU 120 proceeds to the process in step S27TM1030. If it is determined that the division effect is to be executed (YES in step S27TM1010), the effect control CPU 120 sets the change prohibition flag (step S27TM1020), and proceeds to step S27TM1030. The change prohibition flag is set (turned on) in step S27TM1020, and is reset (turned off) at the timing when the variation display corresponding to the received command at the time of the start winning is completed.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the change prohibition flag is set (step S27TM1030). If the change prohibition flag is set (YES in step S27TM1030), the process ends as it is. If the change prohibition flag is not set (NO in step S27TM1030), the final display mode of the active display is determined based on the final display mode determination table of the active display (see FIG. 9-3 (A)) (step). S16TM1010).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines the change pattern of the active display, the execution presence / absence of the first change effect, and the number of executions based on the change pattern determination table of the active display (see FIG. 9-3 (B)). (Step S16TM1020).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines the change pattern of the hold display based on the change pattern determination table of the hold display (see FIG. 9-4) (step S16TM1030), and ends the process as it is.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 10-2 (1) to (4), regardless of whether or not the division effect is executed, the first hold display 27TM010 is the first effect image 27TM100 and the second effect. The active display 27TM030 is displayed in the first hold display area 27TM011, which is an area different from any of the images 27TM200, and the active display 27TM030 is displayed in the active display area 27TM031 which is an area different from both the first effect image 27TM100 and the second effect image 27TM200. Has been done.

Then, as shown in FIG. 10-5, when the change prohibition flag is not set (NO in step S27TM1030), the effect control CPU 120 executes the process of step S16TM101-10 to step S16TM1030 to display the active display or the hold display. It is possible to execute the first change effect by determining whether or not to execute the first change effect that changes the mode. On the other hand, when the change prohibition flag is set (YES in step S27TM1030), the process of step S16TM101-10 to step S16TM1030 is skipped and the process is terminated as it is, so that the first change effect cannot be executed. ..

In this way, when it is determined that the division effect is to be executed in the judgment at the time of the start winning, the period from the time of the start winning until the end of the variable display which is the judgment target at the time of the start winning, the hold display and the active By not changing the display mode of the display, the player's attention can be directed to "whether or not the division effect is executed". Further, by not changing the display modes of the hold display and the active display when the split effect is being executed, the player can pay attention to the split effect.

If it is determined by the judgment at the time of the start winning that the division effect is to be executed, the period from the time of the starting winning to the start of the variable display that is the judgment target at the time of the starting winning is the hold display or active. Although it is permissible to change the display mode of the display (although the first change effect can be executed), the hold display and the active display are displayed while the variable display accompanied by the split effect is being executed (or the split effect is being executed). The display mode may not be changed (the first change effect cannot be executed).

Assuming that the display mode of the active display is changed while the split effect is being executed, the mode of the first effect image 27TM100 and the second effect image 27TM200 and the timing at which the display mode of the active display is changed may change. Since there is a possibility that the player can easily grasp which of the left and right images is the first effect image 27TM100 (that is, whether it is a true image for the player), at least the split effect is executed. It is preferable not to execute the action effect for the active display during the period.

On the other hand, while the variable display accompanied by the split effect is being executed (or the split effect is being executed), the display mode of the hold display may not be changed, but the display mode of the active display may be changed. .. For example, by making it possible to change the display mode of the active display, which is the corresponding information corresponding to the variable display accompanied by the split effect, the active display changes to what mode the active display is executed. The player can be interested in what to do.

In the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 may have an effect configuration capable of executing an action effect acting on the hold display or the active display. For example, the display mode of the hold display or the active display hit by the ball may change as the action effect of the ball thrown by the character hitting the hold display or the active display is executed.

Then, when it is determined by the judgment at the time of the start winning that the division effect is to be executed, the action effect is not executed during the period from the time of the start winning until the end of the variation display that is the judgment target at the time of the start winning. You may do it.

If it is determined by the judgment at the time of the start winning that the division effect is to be executed, the action effect is executed during the period from the time of the start winning to the start of the variable display that is the judgment target at the time of the start winning. Although it is possible, the action effect may not be executed during the execution of the variable display accompanied by the division effect (or the execution of the division effect).

In addition, when it is determined by the judgment at the time of the start winning that the division effect is to be executed, the period from the time of the starting winning until the end of the variable display that is the judgment target at the time of the starting winning, the hold display and the active display are displayed. While the display mode is not changed (the first change effect cannot be executed), the action effect may be feasible. For example, although the action effect in which the ball thrown by the character hits the hold display or the active display is executed, as a result, the display mode of the hold display or the active display hit by the ball may not change.

As shown above, in the present embodiment, the period during which the split effect is executed during the variable display is the display of the hold display or the active display than the period during which the split effect is not executed during the variable display. The execution rate of the effect that changes the mode (the effect that acts on the hold display or the active display) becomes low.

(Specific example of production video)
Next, a specific example of the production moving image will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-6 and 10-7. FIG. 10-6 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of [Movie A] which is an example of the second effect image 27TM200 displayed in the second effect image display area 27TM200A when the division effect is executed. -7 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of [Movie B] which is an example of the second effect image 27TM200 displayed in the second effect image display area 27TM200A when the division effect is executed.

As described above, when the division effect is executed in the present embodiment, the image of a predetermined movie corresponding to the variation pattern is displayed as the second effect image 27TM200. Then, the setting suggestion effect is not executed in the second effect image display area 27TM200A.

(Specific example of movie A)
As shown in FIG. 10-6 (1), when the division effect is executed by the effect control CPU 120, the variation display of the second decorative symbol is displayed in the second symbol display area 5L2, 5C2, 5R2 of the second effect image 27TM200. Is started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-6 (2), the effect control CPU 120 is set in the second symbol display area 5L2 and the second symbol display area 5R2 in the second decorative symbol of "2" and in the second symbol display area 5C2. The pseudo-continuous symbol 27TM300 is temporarily stopped, and the white effect image 27TM400A is displayed in the second symbol display areas 5L2, 5C2, and 5R2, respectively. The second decorative symbol at this time is displayed with a higher priority than the effect image (a mode in which the display layer is higher than the effect image and is superimposed so that the player can see it in the foreground). That is, the display priority of the second decorative symbol, the effect image, and the background image is higher in the order of background image <effect image <second decorative symbol.

In the example in which the movie A is played as the second effect image 27TM200, the pseudo-ream effect image 27TM300A, which will be described later, is not displayed when the pseudo-ream symbol 27TM300 is temporarily stopped, and the type X (expected) of the pseudo-ream types. (Low degree) pseudo-ream is being executed. Further, in the example in which the movie A is reproduced as the second effect image 27TM200, the effect image 27TM400A is not in the mode (blue or red) of suggesting the set value as in the fourth setting suggestion effect described later.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-6 (3), the effect control CPU 120 displays the first revariation of the second decorative symbol in the second symbol display areas 5L2, 5C2, and 5R2 of the second effect image 27TM200. Let it run.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-6 (4), the effect control CPU 120 stops the second decorative symbol of "2" in the second symbol display area 5L2 and the second symbol display area 5R2 of the second effect image 27TM200. By displaying it, the reach state is set, and the characters "reach !!" are displayed on the upper part of the second production image 27TM200.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 operates the operation promotion display 27TM350 and the push button 31B at the center of the second effect image 27TM200 to urge the player to operate the push button 31B while continuing the reach state. Display a time bar 27TM360 for notifying the remaining period during which is valid. Since the operation promotion display 27TM350 and the time bar 27TM360 are images having a higher display priority than the background image and the decorative symbol (the display layer is higher), they are displayed in front of the background image and the decorative symbol by the player. Looks like it is.

In the present embodiment, the time bar 27TM360 is displayed with 100% remaining time at the initial timing when it is displayed, the ratio of the remaining time gradually decreases with the passage of time, and the operation promotion display 27TM350 is displayed. At the end timing, the remaining time is displayed as 0%.

However, when the operation promotion display 27TM350 and the time bar 27TM360 are displayed as the second effect image 27TM200, the operation promotion display 27TM350 and the time bar 27TM360 are merely objects in the movie corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Actually, the operation of the push button 31B is not effective even during the display period of the operation promotion display 27TM350 and the time bar 27TM360, and the operation is not detected by the operation detecting means of the push sensor 35B.

In the present embodiment, when the time bar 27TM360 is displayed as the second effect image 27TM200, the player operates the push button 31B at the timing when the remaining time of the time bar 27TM360 is displayed at 20%, as will be described later. Regardless of whether or not it was actually performed, an effect image imitating the mode of the cut-in notice effect described later will be displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-6 (5), the display of the time bar 27TM360 is updated to the remaining 25% by the effect control CPU 120 in accordance with the elapse of a predetermined period after the time bar 27TM360 is displayed. ing.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-6 (6), at the timing when the display of the time bar 27TM360 was updated to the remaining 20%, did the effect control CPU 120 actually operate the push button 31B by the player? Regardless of whether or not, the cut-in image 27TM370A in which the characters "chance?" Is displayed is displayed as the second production image 27TM200. However, the cut-in image displayed as the second effect image 27TM200 is merely an object in the movie corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. The cut-in image 27TM370A is displayed in a display mode having a higher priority than other effects being executed.

In this way, at the timing when the remaining operation valid period suggested by the time bar 27TM360 displayed as the second effect image 27TM200 becomes a predetermined period (remaining 20%), the cut-in image regardless of the presence or absence of the actual operation. Will be displayed. That is, when the operation of the push button 31B is valid, the operation of the push button 31B is actually performed, and the same effect as when the operation is detected by the motion detection means of the push sensor 35B is executed. Become.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-6 (7), in the effect control CPU 120, the character "battle" is displayed as the second effect image 27TM200, and the ally character 27TM500 and the enemy character A (27TM510A) are displayed. Display the image of the battle effect to perform the battle. Two star-shaped object images 27TM550 are displayed in the lower center of the image of the battle effect together with the characters "expectation", and the number of object images 27TM550 suggests the expectation of a big hit. There is. However, the object image 27TM550 displayed as the second effect image 27TM200 is merely an object in the movie corresponding to the fluctuation pattern.

(Specific example of movie B)
As shown in FIG. 10-7 (1), when the division effect is executed by the effect control CPU 120, the variation display of the second decorative symbol is displayed in the second symbol display area 5L2, 5C2, 5R2 of the second effect image 27TM200. Is started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-7 (2), the effect control CPU 120 is set in the second symbol display area 5L2 and the second symbol display area 5R2 in the second decorative symbol of "2" and in the second symbol display area 5C2. The pseudo-continuous symbol 27TM300 is temporarily stopped, and the white effect image 27TM400A is displayed in the second symbol display areas 5L2, 5C2, and 5R2, respectively. The second decorative symbol at this time is displayed with a higher priority than the effect image (a mode in which the display layer is higher than the effect image and is superimposed so that the player can see it in the foreground). That is, the display priority of the second decorative symbol, the effect image, and the background image is higher in the order of background image <effect image <second decorative symbol.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-7 (3), the effect control CPU 120 displays the pseudo-continuous effect image 27TM300A as the second effect image 27TM200.

In the example in which the movie B is reproduced as the second effect image 27TM200, the pseudo-ream effect image 27TM300A is displayed when the pseudo-ream symbol 27TM300 is temporarily stopped, and the type Y (high expectation) of the pseudo-ream types is displayed. Pseudo-ream is being executed. Further, in the example in which the movie B is reproduced as the second effect image 27TM200, the effect image 27TM400A is not in the mode (blue or red) of suggesting the set value as in the fourth setting suggestion effect described later.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-7 (4), the effect control CPU 120 displays the first revariation of the second decorative symbol in the second symbol display areas 5L2, 5C2, and 5R2 of the second effect image 27TM200. Let it run.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-7 (5), the effect control CPU 120 stops the second decorative symbol of "5" in the second symbol display area 5L2 and the second symbol display area 5R2 of the second effect image 27TM200. By displaying it, the reach state is set, and the characters "reach !!" are displayed on the upper part of the second production image 27TM200.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 operates the operation promotion display 27TM350 and the push button 31B at the center of the second effect image 27TM200 to urge the player to operate the push button 31B while continuing the reach state. Display a time bar 27TM360 for notifying the remaining period during which is valid. Since the operation promotion display 27TM350 and the time bar 27TM360 are images having a higher display priority than the background image and the decorative symbol (the display layer is higher), they are displayed in front of the background image and the decorative symbol by the player. Looks like it is.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-7 (6), the display of the time bar 27TM360 is updated to the remaining 25% in the effect control CPU 120 in accordance with the elapse of a predetermined period after the time bar 27TM360 is displayed. ing.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-7 (7), at the timing when the display of the time bar 27TM360 was updated to the remaining 20%, did the effect control CPU 120 actually operate the push button 31B by the player? Regardless of whether or not, as the second production image 27TM200, the cut-in image 27TM370B in which the characters "chance!" Are displayed is displayed. The cut-in image 27TM370B is displayed in a display mode having a higher priority than other effects being executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-7 (8), the effect control CPU 120 displays the characters "battle" as the second effect image 27TM200, and the friendly character 27TM500 and the enemy character A (27TM510A) are displayed. Display the image of the battle effect to perform the battle. Two star-shaped object images 27TM550 are displayed in the lower center of the image of the battle effect together with the characters "expectation", and the number of object images 27TM550 suggests the expectation of a big hit. There is.

(Playback control of production video)
In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 10-2 and 10-3, as a production movie that can be reproduced as the second production image 27TM200 corresponding to the fluctuation pattern accompanied by the division effect, [Movie A (short)] , [Movie A (long)], [Movie B (short)], and [Movie B (long)]. FIG. 10-8 is a time chart showing a reproduction period of each effect moving image when the divided effect is executed.

As shown in FIG. 10-8, when [Movie A (short)] is selected as the effect movie type, the effect control CPU 120 starts displaying the effect image of [Movie A] (timing of T0). ), After displaying the effect image of [Movie A] shown in FIGS. 10-6 (1) to (3), the display of the effect image of [Movie A] is terminated (timing of TA1). When [Movie A (Long)] is selected as the effect movie type, the effect control CPU 120 starts displaying the effect image of [Movie A] (timing of T0), and FIG. 10-6 (FIG. 10-6). After displaying the effect image of [Movie A] shown in 1) to (7), the display of the effect image of [Movie A] is terminated (TA2 timing).

Here, the production image of [Movie A (short)] (FIGS. 10-6 (1) to (3)) and the production image of the first half of [Movie A (long)] (FIGS. 10-6 (1) to (3)). 3)) is common. Therefore, the reproduction of [Movie A (short)] is sufficient by executing the control to reproduce the first half of [Movie A (long)]. Therefore, the effect data related to [movie A (long)] is stored in the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12, and the effect control CPU 120 responds to the variation pattern designation command in the first half of [movie A (long)]. Whether to execute only display control (whether to play [Movie A (short)]) or to execute display control of the entire part (full) of [Movie A (long)] ([Movie A (long)] )] Is determined, and display control is executed based on the determination, so that two patterns of movie reproduction are possible.

When [Movie B (Short)] is selected as the effect movie type, the effect control CPU 120 starts displaying the effect image of [Movie B] (timing of T0), and FIG. 10-7 (FIG. 10-7). After displaying the effect image of [Movie B] shown in 1) to (4), the display of the effect image of [Movie B] is terminated (timing of TB1). When [Movie B (Long)] is selected as the effect movie type, the effect control CPU 120 starts displaying the effect image of [Movie B] (timing of T0), and FIG. 10-7 (FIG. 10-7). After displaying the effect image of [Movie B] shown in 1) to (8), the display of the effect image of [Movie B] is terminated (timing of TB2).

Here, the effect images of [Movie B (short)] (FIGS. 10-7 (1) to (4)) and the effect images of the first half of [Movie B (long)] (FIGS. 10-7 (1) to (4)). 4)) is common. Therefore, the reproduction of [Movie B (Short)] is sufficient by executing the control to reproduce the first half of [Movie B (Long)]. Therefore, the effect data related to [movie B (long)] is stored in the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12, and the effect control CPU 120 responds to the variation pattern designation command in the first half of [movie B (long)]. Whether to execute display control of only ([Movie B (short)] is played), or display control of the entire part (full) of [Movie B (long)] is executed ([Movie B (long)]. )] Is determined, and display control is executed based on the determination, so that two patterns of movie reproduction are possible.

As shown in FIG. 10-8, by providing a plurality of end timings for one production moving image stored in the ROM 121, it is not necessary to store individual production moving images for each variation pattern accompanied by the divided production. It is possible to prevent the storage capacity of the production data from being excessively increased. Further, by making the end timing of one production video different according to the fluctuation pattern, it is possible to make the player appear as if a plurality of production videos are prepared.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4, when the display result is "off", the rate at which the fluctuation pattern of "movie A (short)" is selected is [1.5 + 1.5] = 3%, and the rate at which the fluctuation pattern of "Movie A (long)" is selected is [1 + 1] = 2%, whereas the display result is "big hit". In this case, the rate at which the variation pattern of "movie A (short)" is selected is [6 + 6] = 12%, and the rate at which the variation pattern of "movie A (long)" is selected is [7 + 7] = 14. %. Therefore, the rate of big hits is higher when the fluctuation pattern of "movie A (long)" is selected than when the fluctuation pattern of "movie A (short)" is selected.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4, when the display result is "off", the ratio of selecting the fluctuation pattern of "movie B (short)" is [1 + 1] = 2%, and the rate at which the fluctuation pattern of "Movie B (long)" is selected is [0.5 + 0.5] = 1%, whereas the display result is "big hit". In this case, the rate at which the variation pattern of "movie B (short)" is selected is [10 + 10] = 20%, and the rate at which the variation pattern of "movie B (long)" is selected is [12 + 12] = 24. %. Therefore, the rate of big hits is higher when the fluctuation pattern of "movie B (long)" is selected than when the fluctuation pattern of "movie B (short)" is selected.

Therefore, when "Movie A" is played, the longer the playing period (the later the end timing), the higher the expectation of a big hit, and even when "Movie B" is played, the playing period is long. The higher the expectation of a big hit (the later the end timing). By performing such effect control, the player can continue the divided effect for as long as possible (the movie is played for as long as possible) once the divided effect is executed (once the movie is played). You will expect that.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 10-3 and 10-4, when the display result is "off", the ratio of selecting the fluctuation pattern of "movie A" is [1.5 + 1 + 1]. .5 + 1] = 5%, and the rate at which the fluctuation pattern of "Movie B" is selected is [1 + 0.5 + 1 + 0.5] = 3%, whereas the display result is "big hit". , The rate at which the variation pattern of "movie A" is selected is [6 + 7 + 6 + 7] = 26%, and the rate at which the variation pattern of "movie B" is selected is [10 + 12 + 10 + 12] = 44%. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 10-8, the case where the movie B, which is a production movie having a relatively long playback period, is played, rather than the case where the movie A, which is a production movie having a relatively short playback period, is played. However, the rate of big hits is high.

Therefore, the player expects that the movie B is played more than the movie A when the split effect is executed, that is, the effect movie having a relatively long playback period is played.

In the present embodiment, an example is shown in which the longer the playback period of the production video is, the higher the expectation of big hit is. However, the expectation of big hit is higher as the playback period is shorter, depending on the type of the production video. May be higher. Further, the production configuration may be such that the playback period of the production video and the jackpot expectation are not related (the jackpot expectation does not change depending on the end timing of the production video).

(Specific example of pseudo-continuous production)
As the pseudo-continuous production shown in the present embodiment, as described above, the pseudo-continuous production of type X (hereinafter, also referred to as pseudo-continuous production [X: weak]) and the pseudo-continuous production of type Y (hereinafter, pseudo-continuous production [hereinafter, pseudo-continuous production] Y: also called [strong]). The rate at which the display result is a "big hit" is higher when the pseudo-continuous effect [Y: strong] is executed than when the pseudo-continuous effect [X: weak] is executed. Specific examples of the pseudo-continuous production will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-9 (A1) to (A3) and (B1) to (B4).

10-9 (A1) to (A3) are explanatory views showing an example of an effect image displayed on the image display device 5 when the pseudo continuous effect [X: weak] is executed, and FIGS. 10-9 (A1) to 10-9 (A3). (B1) to (B4) are explanatory views showing an example of an effect image displayed on the image display device 5 when the pseudo continuous effect [Y: strong] is executed.

(Specific example of pseudo-continuous production [X: weak])
As shown in FIG. 10-9 (A1), when the CUP 103 is executing the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 is set in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. The variable display of the decorative symbol (information corresponding to the first special symbol) is executed, and the first small symbol (corresponding to the first special symbol) is executed in the first small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. The variable display of the information) is executed.

Since the first reserved storage number is 3, the effect control CPU 120 displays "3" in the first reserved storage number special display area 27TM015 of the image display device 5, and the second reserved storage number is 0. Therefore, "0" is displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 27TM025 of the image display device 5. Further, the active display area 27TM031 displays the active display 27TM030 corresponding to the fluctuation display currently being executed, and the first hold display area 27TM011 displays three first hold displays 27TM010.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (A2), the effect control CPU 120 displays a decorative symbol of "2" in the symbol display area 5L and the symbol display area 5R as the pseudo continuous effect [X: weak] is executed. Each is temporarily stopped, and the pseudo-continuous symbol 27TM300 is temporarily stopped in the symbol display area 5C.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (A3), the effect control CPU 120 causes the decorative symbol to be re-variably displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5.

(Specific example of pseudo-continuous production [Y: strong])
As shown in FIG. 10-9 (B1), when the CUP 103 is executing the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 is set in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. The variable display of the decorative symbol (information corresponding to the first special symbol) is executed, and the first small symbol (corresponding to the first special symbol) is executed in the first small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. The variable display of the information) is executed.

Since the first reserved storage number is 3, the effect control CPU 120 displays "3" in the first reserved storage number special display area 27TM015 of the image display device 5, and the second reserved storage number is 0. Therefore, "0" is displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 27TM025 of the image display device 5. Further, the active display area 27TM031 displays the active display 27TM030 corresponding to the fluctuation display currently being executed, and the first hold display area 27TM011 displays three first hold displays 27TM010.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (B2), the effect control CPU 120 displays a decorative symbol of "2" in the symbol display area 5L and the symbol display area 5R as the pseudo continuous effect [Y: strong] is executed. Each is temporarily stopped, and the pseudo-continuous symbol 27TM300 is temporarily stopped in the symbol display area 5C.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (B3), the effect control CPU 120 temporarily stops the decorative symbol "2" in the symbol display area 5L and the symbol display area 5R, and the pseudo-continuous symbol 27TM300 in the symbol display area 5C. In this state, the pseudo-continuous effect image 27TM300A is displayed. At this time, the decorative symbol including the pseudo-ream pattern is displayed with a higher priority than the pseudo-ream effect image (the display layer is higher than the pseudo-ream effect image and is superimposed so that the player can see it in front). Has been done. That is, the display priority of the decorative symbol including the pseudo-ream pattern, the pseudo-ream effect image, and the background image is higher in the order of background image <pseudo-ream effect image <decorative pattern.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 executes the movable body effect in response to the execution of the pseudo continuous effect [Y: strong], and operates the movable body 27TM600 from the tilted position to the upright position. In this example, the movable body 27TM600 is positioned in front of the pseudo-continuous symbol 27TM300 because the movable body 27TM600 operates in the upright position. That is, since the pseudo-ream pattern 27TM300 related to the pseudo-ream effect and the movable body 27TM600 after operation have a corresponding positional relationship, the pseudo-ream effect image 27TM300A is an effect image corresponding to the pseudo-ream pattern 27TM300 and is in an upright position. It is also an effect image corresponding to the movable body 27TM600 in.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (B4), the effect control CPU 120 executes the revariation display of the decorative symbol in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, and displays the movable body 27TM600. By operating from the standing position to the tilted position, the movable body production is completed.

In this way, when the pseudo-ream effect [X: weak] is executed, after the pseudo-ream symbol 27TM300 is temporarily stopped, the pseudo-ream effect image 27TM300A is not displayed and the movable body effect is executed. However, the re-variation display of the decorative pattern is being executed. On the other hand, when the pseudo-ream effect [Y: strong] is executed, the pseudo-ream effect image 27TM300A is displayed after the pseudo-ream symbol 27TM300 is temporarily stopped, and the movable body 27TM600 operates from the tilted position to the upright position. .. Next, the re-variation display of the decorative pattern is executed, and the movable body 27TM600 operates from the standing position to the tilted position.

Here, in the example shown in FIG. 10-9, the pseudo continuous effect [X: weak] or the pseudo continuous effect [Y: strong] is performed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the state where the division effect is not executed. Although the example to be executed has been described, the pseudo continuous effect [X: weak] and the pseudo continuous effect [Y: strong] are the first effect image display area 27TM100A and the second effect image when the divided effect is being executed. It is feasible at least one of the display areas 27TM200A.

That is, as the division effect is executed, the variable display of the first decorative symbol as the decorative identification information is executed in the first symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 of the first effect image 27TM100, and the first Based on the decorative pattern, either the pseudo-continuous effect [X: weak] or the pseudo-continuous effect [Y: strong] may be executed. Further, as the division effect is executed, the variation display of the second decorative symbol as the decorative identification information is executed in the second symbol display area 5L2, 5C2, 5R2 of the second effect image 27TM200, and the second Based on the decorative pattern, either the pseudo-continuous effect [X: weak] or the pseudo-continuous effect [Y: strong] may be executed.

However, in the present embodiment, in the state where the split effect is not executed (example shown in FIG. 10-9), the pseudo-ream effect image 27TM300A corresponds to the execution of the pseudo-ream effect [Y: strong]. Is displayed and the movable body effect is executed, but in the state where the split effect is executed (example shown in FIG. 10-7), the pseudo continuous effect [Y: strong] is executed. Correspondingly, although the pseudo-continuous effect image 27TM300A is displayed, the movable body effect is not executed.

(Outline of setting suggestion production)
The gaming machine of the present embodiment can execute the third setting suggestion effect and the fourth setting suggestion effect as the setting suggestion effect suggesting the set value of the game machine. The gaming machine of the present embodiment is configured to be capable of executing the third setting suggestion effect and the fourth setting suggestion effect in addition to the first setting suggestion effect and the second setting suggestion effect described in [Characteristic unit 16TM]. Is also possible.

In the third setting suggestion effect and the fourth setting suggestion effect, when the split effect is not executed, the timing at which the decorative symbol stops in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (pseudo-ream in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R). By determining the mode of the effect image displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R at different ratios according to the set value in (including the timing when the symbol temporarily stops), the mode of the displayed effect image depends on the mode. This is an effect that suggests a set value.

Further, in the third setting suggestion effect and the fourth setting suggestion effect, when the division effect is being executed, the timing at which the first decorative symbol stops in the first symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1 (first symbol display area). The mode of the effect image displayed in the first symbol display area 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 is determined at a different ratio according to the set value in 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 including the timing when the pseudo-continuous symbol temporarily stops). This is an effect that suggests a set value depending on the mode of the displayed effect image.

In the present embodiment, when (i) the variation pattern is "non-reach", the third setting suggestion effect or the fourth setting suggestion effect can be executed at the timing when the decorative symbol stops. (Ii) When the fluctuation pattern is "normal reach or super reach without pseudo-ream", the timing at which the same decorative symbol stops in the symbol display areas 5L and 5R to enter the reach state (when accompanied by a split effect). Is capable of executing the third setting suggestion effect or the fourth setting suggestion effect at the timing when the same first decorative symbol stops in the first symbol display areas 5L1 and 5R1 and enters the reach state). (Iii) When the fluctuation pattern is "normal reach or super reach with pseudo-ream", the timing at which the pseudo-ream symbol first temporarily stops in the symbol display area 5C (in the case of accompanied by a division effect, the first symbol is displayed). The third setting suggestion effect or the fourth setting suggestion effect can be executed at the timing (timing at which the pseudo-continuous symbol first temporarily stops in the area 5C1).

The decorative symbol (including the pseudo-continuous symbol) when the third setting suggestion effect or the fourth setting suggestion effect is executed has a higher priority than the effect image (the display layer is higher than the effect image and is seen by the player. It is displayed in a superimposed manner so that it can be seen in the foreground. That is, the display priority of the decorative symbol (including the pseudo-continuous symbol), the effect image, and the background image when the third setting suggestion effect or the fourth setting suggestion effect is executed is as follows: background image <effect image <decorative symbol. It is getting higher in order.

The details will be described later, but when the third setting suggestion effect is executed in the present embodiment, the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R (when the split effect is executed, the first symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, When the effect image displayed in 5R1) becomes gold and the fourth setting suggestion effect is executed, the symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R (when the division effect is executed, the first symbol display area 5L1, The effect image displayed on 5C1, 5R1) is blue or red.

Further, when neither the third setting suggestion effect nor the fourth setting suggestion effect is executed in the present embodiment, the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (when the division effect is executed, the first symbol display area 5L1). The effect image displayed on, 5C1, 5R1) becomes white.

In this way, by displaying the setting suggestion information (effect image) that suggests the set value corresponding to the stop position of the decorative symbol, the player displays not only the stopped decorative symbol but also the decorative symbol. We will also pay attention to the setting suggestion information that is given.

Further, in the first embodiment, the setting suggestion is not performed by the second effect image 27TM200, and the image in the movie reproduced as the second effect image 27TM200 includes the image related to the third setting suggestion effect and the fourth. None of the images related to the setting suggestion effect are displayed. Therefore, the effect image of the decorative symbol displayed in the second symbol display area 5L2, 5C2, 5R2 is white.

(Outline of cut-in notice production)
Next, a notice effect for notifying that the game will be controlled to the jackpot game state will be described. In this example, the cut-in notice effect can be executed as the advance notice effect. The cut-in notice effect is a notice effect that suggests the degree of expectation controlled by the jackpot game state.

As shown in FIGS. 10-13 (2) to (4) described later, the effect control CPU 120 is in a reach state with the decorative symbols in the symbol display areas 5L and 5R when the division effect is not executed. At this time, in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, the operation promotion display 27TM350 for urging the player to operate the push button 31B and the remaining period during which the operation of the push button 31B is valid are notified. The time bar 27TM360 is displayed.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 executes the cut-in notice effect in response to the operation of the push button 31B by the player when the operation promotion display 27TM350 and the time bar 27TM360 are displayed in the center of the screen. .. When the cut-in notice effect is executed, the cut-in image is displayed in the entire central area in the vertical direction of the screen. This cut-in image is displayed in a display mode having a higher priority than other effect images (background image, decorative pattern, and characters of "reach !!").

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 is the first when the reach state is established in the first decorative symbols of the first symbol display areas 5L1 and 5R1 when the divided effect is executed. In the central portion of the effect image display area 27TM100A, an operation promotion display 27TM350 for urging the player to operate the push button 31B and a time bar 27TM360 for notifying the remaining period during which the operation of the push button 31B is effective are provided. Display it.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 responds to the operation of the push button 31B by the player when the operation promotion display 27TM350 and the time bar 27TM360 are displayed in the central portion of the first effect image display area 27TM100A. Perform a cut-in notice effect. When the cut-in notice effect is executed, the cut-in image is displayed in the entire vertical central area of the first effect image display area 27TM100A. This cut-in image is displayed in a display mode having a higher priority than the other effect images (background image, decorative pattern, and characters of "reach !!") of the first effect image display area 27TM100A.

(Production decision processing at the start of fluctuation)
When starting the variation display of the special symbol, the CPU 103 includes a display result specification command for specifying the display result, a variation pattern specification command for specifying the variation pattern, and a hold storage number subtraction specification command (first hold storage number subtraction designation). The command or the second hold storage number subtraction designation command) is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120.

The effect control CPU 120 is a hold storage number subtraction designation command (first hold) that specifies that the hold storage number has been subtracted when the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is started. Memory number subtraction specification command or second hold storage number subtraction specification command), display result specification command that specifies the display result (big hit or miss, big hit type when it becomes a big hit), and the variable display period and production contents of the special symbol A variation display of a special symbol is executed based on receiving a set of commands called a variation pattern specification command for specifying (reach, super reach, etc.) from the game control microcomputer 100 (CPU103). In addition, it is possible to specify the variable display period of the special symbol and the content of the effect (reach, super reach, etc.). Further, the effect control CPU 120 receives a special symbol (first special symbol) from the game control microcomputer 100 when the variable display of the special symbol is completed and the display result is confirmed. It is possible to identify that the variable display of the symbol or the second special symbol) is completed and the display result is derived.

In the present embodiment, the presence / absence of execution of the split effect, the movie type of the split effect (movie A (short), movie A (long), movie B (short), movie B (long)), and the movie type B (long) are determined by the variation pattern specification command. The number of pseudo-reams (0, 1, 2) and the pseudo-ream type (type X, type Y) are specified. Therefore, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the split effect in response to the variation display of the decorative symbol to be executed based on the received variation pattern designation command, and determines whether or not to execute the split effect. It is possible to determine the mode, and it is also possible to determine the number of pseudo-reams and the mode of the pseudo-ream when the pseudo-ream is executed.

FIG. 10-10 is a flowchart showing the effect determination process at the start of fluctuation. In this variation start effect determination process, the execution presence / absence and the effect mode of each of the third setting suggestion effect, the fourth setting suggestion effect, and the cut-in notice effect are determined.

The effect control CPU 120 executes this variation start effect determination process in the variable display start setting process (step S171) of the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7. Specifically, when the effect control CPU 120 receives the above-mentioned one set of commands (holding storage number subtraction designation command, display result designation command, and fluctuation pattern designation command) accompanying the start of the variation display of the special symbol. , An effect control pattern for executing the variation display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol based on the display result specification command and the variation pattern specification command (control for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect). A collection of data) is set, and the effect to be executed during the variation display of the decorative symbol based on the specified variation pattern is determined by the effect determination process at the start of the variation shown in FIGS. 10-10.

First, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the set value is "6" (that is, the set value specified by the set value designation command is "6") (step S27TM2000). If the set value is not "6" (that is, the set value specified by the set value specification command is not "6") (NO in step S27TM2000), the effect control CPU 120 proceeds to step S27TM2030. ..

When the set value is "6" (that is, when the set value specified by the set value specification command is "6") (YES in step S27TM2000), the effect control CPU 120 determines the third setting suggestion effect. The execution presence / absence is determined based on the execution presence / absence determination table (see FIG. 10-11 (A)) of the third setting suggestion effect, and the process proceeds to step S27TM2020.

As shown in FIG. 10-11 (A), in the execution / non-execution determination table of the third setting suggestion effect, it is determined that the third setting suggestion effect is executed only when the set setting value is "6". A value has been assigned. When the set value is "6" (that is, when the set value specified by the set value specification command is "6"), the effect control CPU 120 has a third setting suggestion effect at a rate of 99.5%. Is decided not to be executed, and it is decided to execute the third setting suggestion effect at a rate of 0.5%.

In this way, only when the set value is "6" (that is, only when the set value specified by the set value specification command is "6"), whether or not to execute the third setting suggestion effect is determined. , The third setting suggestion effect is executed based on the decision result. When the third setting suggestion effect is executed, it is determined that the set value set for the game machine is "6", so that the player executes the third setting suggestion effect. You will be very interested in whether or not, and you will expect the effect image of the decorative pattern to be displayed in gold.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it has been decided to execute the third setting suggestion effect (step S27TM2020). If it is determined to execute the third setting suggestion effect (YES in step S27TM2020), the effect control CPU 120 proceeds to step S27TM2040.

When it is not decided to execute the third setting suggestion effect (NO in step S27TM2020), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the fourth setting suggestion effect is executed and the effect mode, and whether or not the fourth setting suggestion effect is executed. The determination is made based on the table (see FIG. 10-11 (B)), and the process proceeds to step S27TM2040.

As shown in FIG. 10-11 (B), in the execution / non-execution determination table of the fourth setting suggestion effect, the determination for determining the execution / non-execution of the fourth setting suggestion effect and the effect mode according to the set setting value. A value has been assigned.

When the set value of the effect control CPU 120 is any of "1", "3", and "5" (that is, the set value specified by the set value specification command is "1", "3", "5". In any case), it was decided not to execute the 4th setting suggestion effect at a rate of 30%, and it was decided to execute the 4th setting suggestion effect in the blue aspect at a rate of 40%. It is decided to execute the fourth setting suggestion effect of the red aspect at a rate of%.

In the effect control CPU 120, when the set value is any of "2", "4", and "6" (that is, the set value specified by the set value specification command is "2", "4", "6". In any case), it was decided not to execute the 4th setting suggestion effect at a rate of 30%, and it was decided to execute the 4th setting suggestion effect in the blue aspect at a rate of 30%. It is decided to execute the fourth setting suggestion effect of the red aspect at a rate of%.

In this way, when the set value is any of "1", "3", and "5" (that is, the set value specified by the set value specification command is any of "1", "3", and "5". In this case), the ratio of the effect image of the decorative design displayed in blue is higher than the ratio of the effect image of the decorative design displayed in blue. On the other hand, when the set value is any of "2", "4", and "6" (that is, the set value specified by the set value specification command is any of "2", "4", and "6". In some cases), the proportion of the decorative symbol effect image displayed in red is higher than the proportion of the decorative symbol effect image displayed in blue.

Therefore, the fourth setting suggestion effect in which the blue effect image is displayed is an effect suggesting that the set value is an odd number (the set value is any of "1", "3", and "5"). There is. In addition, the fourth setting suggestion effect in which the red effect image is displayed is an effect suggesting that the set value is an even number (the set value is any of "2", "4", and "6"). There is. As described above, the fourth setting suggestion effect is an even-odd number suggestion effect that suggests whether the set value is an even number or an odd number.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the fluctuation pattern is "non-reach out" (step S27TM2040). When the fluctuation pattern is "non-reach out" (YES in step S27TM2040), the effect control CPU 120 ends the process as it is.

When the fluctuation pattern is not "non-reach out" (NO in step S27TM2040), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the cut-in notice effect is executed and the effect mode, and determines whether or not the cut-in notice effect is executed (FIG. 10-11). It is determined based on (see (C)) (step S27TM2050), and the process is terminated.

As shown in FIG. 10-11 (C), in the execution / non-execution determination table of the cut-in notice effect, the execution / non-execution and the effect mode of the cut-in notice effect are determined according to the display result specified by the display result specification command. Judgment value for is assigned.

When the display result is "off", the effect control CPU 120 decides not to execute the cut-in notice effect at a rate of 80%, and cut-in image 27TM370A (called "chance?") At a rate of 15%. Decided to execute a cut-in notice effect to display the cut-in image with characters displayed), and display the cut-in image 27TM370B (cut-in image with the characters "Chance!" Displayed) at a rate of 8%. Decide to execute the cut-in notice effect, and execute the cut-in notice effect that displays the cut-in image 27TM370C (the cut-in image with the characters "Great chance !!" displayed) at a rate of 2%. To decide.

When the display result is a "big hit", the effect control CPU 120 decides not to execute the cut-in notice effect at a rate of 40%, and cut-in image 27TM370A (called "chance?") At a rate of 15%. Decided to execute a cut-in notice effect to display the cut-in image with characters displayed), and display the cut-in image 27TM370B (cut-in image with the characters "Chance!" Displayed) at a rate of 20%. Decide to execute the cut-in notice effect, and execute the cut-in notice effect that displays the cut-in image 27TM370C (the cut-in image with the characters "Great chance !!" displayed) at a rate of 25%. To decide.

(Specific example of the third setting suggestion effect)
Next, a specific example of the third setting suggestion effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-12 (A1) to (A3). 10-12 (A1) to (A3) show the case where the set value is "6" (that is, the case where the set value specified by the set value specification command is "6") and the fluctuation pattern is "6". It is explanatory drawing which shows the example which the 3rd setting suggestion effect is executed at the timing (the timing of (i) mentioned above) when the decorative symbol stops in the fluctuation pattern of "non-reach off".

As shown in FIG. 10-12 (A1), when the CUP 103 is executing the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 is set in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. The variable display of the decorative symbol (information corresponding to the first special symbol) is executed, and the first small symbol (corresponding to the first special symbol) is executed in the first small symbol display area 5l, 5c, 5r of the image display device 5. The variable display of the information) is executed.

Since the first reserved storage number is 3, the effect control CPU 120 displays "3" in the first reserved storage number special display area 27TM015 of the image display device 5, and the second reserved storage number is 0. Therefore, "0" is displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 27TM025 of the image display device 5. Further, the active display area 27TM031 displays the active display 27TM030 corresponding to the fluctuation display currently being executed, and the first hold display area 27TM011 displays three first hold displays 27TM010.

As shown in FIG. 10-12 (A2), based on the fluctuation pattern being "non-reach out of reach", the effect control CPU 120 states that the display result is "out of reach" in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. The combination of non-reach decorative symbols (“247” in this example) is stopped and displayed, the third setting suggestion effect is executed, and the golden effect image 27TM400D is displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, respectively. Display it.

The decorative pattern at this time is displayed with a higher priority than the effect image (a mode in which the display layer is higher than the effect image and is superimposed so that the player can see it in the foreground). That is, the display priority of the decorative pattern, the effect image, and the background image is higher in the order of background image <effect image <decorative pattern. At this time, in response to the continuous execution of the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 is the first small symbol display area 5l, 5c, 5r of the image display device 5. The variable display of the design is continued.

Then, as shown in FIG. 10-12 (A3), the effect control CPU 120 that has received the command for designating and stopping the decorative symbol from the main board 11 is displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. By erasing the golden effect image 27TM400D, the third setting suggestion effect is terminated, and in response to the variation display result of the first special symbol being "off", the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are displayed. , The combination of decorative symbols (“247” in this example) whose display result is “off” is fixedly stopped. Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets "247" in the first small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r based on the fact that the combination of decorative symbols to be fixedly stopped in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is "247". The combination of the first small symbols of is fixedly stopped.

(Specific example of the fourth setting suggestion effect)
Next, a specific example of the fourth setting suggestion effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-12 (B1) to (B3). 10-12 (B1) to (B3) show the case where the set value is "6" (that is, the case where the set value specified by the set value specification command is "6") and the fluctuation pattern is "6". An example in which the fourth setting suggestion effect is executed at the timing when the pseudo-ream symbol temporarily stops (the timing of (iii) described above) in the fluctuation pattern of "normal reach or super reach with pseudo-ream of type X". It is explanatory drawing which shows.

As shown in FIG. 10-12 (B1), when the CUP 103 is executing the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 is set in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. The variable display of the decorative symbol (information corresponding to the first special symbol) is executed, and the first small symbol (corresponding to the first special symbol) is executed in the first small symbol display area 5l, 5c, 5r of the image display device 5. The variable display of the information) is executed.

Since the first reserved storage number is 3, the effect control CPU 120 displays "3" in the first reserved storage number special display area 27TM015 of the image display device 5, and the second reserved storage number is 0. Therefore, "0" is displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 27TM025 of the image display device 5. Further, the active display area 27TM031 displays the active display 27TM030 corresponding to the fluctuation display currently being executed, and the first hold display area 27TM011 displays three first hold displays 27TM010.

As shown in FIG. 10-12 (B2), based on the fluctuation pattern being "normal reach or super reach with pseudo-ream of type X", the effect control CPU 120 has a pseudo-ream effect [X: weak]. Along with the execution, the decorative symbol of "2" is temporarily stopped in the symbol display area 5L and the symbol display area 5R, the pseudo-continuous symbol 27TM300 is temporarily stopped in the symbol display area 5C, and the fourth setting suggestion effect is executed.

In the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 displays the red effect image 27TM400C in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, respectively, based on the determination to execute the fourth setting suggestion effect of the red aspect. Let me.

The decorative pattern at this time is displayed with a higher priority than the effect image (a mode in which the display layer is higher than the effect image and is superimposed so that the player can see it in the foreground). That is, the display priority of the decorative pattern, the effect image, and the background image is higher in the order of background image <effect image <decorative pattern. At this time, in response to the continuous execution of the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 is the first small symbol display area 5l, 5c, 5r of the image display device 5. The variable display of the design is continued.

Then, as shown in FIG. 10-12 (B3), the effect control CPU 120 that has received the command for designating and stopping the decorative symbol from the main board 11 is displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. By erasing the red effect image 27TM400C, the fourth setting suggestion effect is terminated, and the decorative symbol is re-variably displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. At this time, in response to the continuous execution of the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 is the first small symbol display area 5l, 5c, 5r of the image display device 5. The variable display of the design is continued.

(Specific example of cut-in notice production)
Next, a specific example of the cut-in notice effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-13. 10-13 (1) to (4) are explanatory views showing an example of an effect image displayed on the image display device 5 when the cut-in notice effect is executed.

Further, in FIG. 10-13, the mode of the push button 31B is shown in the lower right of the effect diagram in correspondence with the effect diagram. The push button mode includes a blinking mode suggesting that the operation of the push button 31B is valid, and a normal mode (turning off mode) suggesting that the operation of the push button 31B is not valid. ..

As shown in FIG. 10-13 (1), when the CUP 103 is executing the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 is set in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. The variable display of the decorative symbol (information corresponding to the first special symbol) is executed, and the first small symbol (corresponding to the first special symbol) is executed in the first small symbol display area 5l, 5c, 5r of the image display device 5. The variable display of the information) is executed.

Since the first reserved storage number is 3, the effect control CPU 120 displays "3" in the first reserved storage number special display area 27TM015 of the image display device 5, and the second reserved storage number is 0. Therefore, "0" is displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 27TM025 of the image display device 5. Further, the active display area 27TM031 displays the active display 27TM030 corresponding to the fluctuation display currently being executed, and the first hold display area 27TM011 displays three first hold displays 27TM010.

When the effect image shown in FIG. 10-13 (1) is displayed on the image display device 5, the operation promotion display 27TM350 and the time bar 27TM360 are not displayed, and the operation of the push button 31B is valid. The push button 31B is in a normal mode (light-off mode) in response to the fact that the push button 31B is not turned on.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-13 (2), the effect control CPU 120 puts the decorative symbol of "7" into a reach state by stopping and displaying the decorative symbol of "7" in the symbol display area 5L and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5. , The characters "reach !!" are displayed at the upper part of the screen of the image display device 5. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 operates the operation promotion display 27TM350 and the push button 31B in the center of the screen of the image display device 5 to urge the player to operate the push button 31B while continuing the reach state. Display a time bar 27TM360 for notifying the remaining period during which is valid. Since the operation promotion display 27TM350 and the time bar 27TM360 are images having a higher display priority than the background image and the decorative symbol (the display layer is higher), they are displayed in front of the background image and the decorative symbol by the player. Looks like it is.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the operation promotion display 27TM350 and the time bar 27TM360, and corresponds to the fact that the operation of the push button 31B is enabled (corresponding to the start of the operation valid period). The push button 31B is switched from the normal mode (light-off mode) to the blinking mode.

In the operation standby state in which the operation of the push button 31B is valid (although it is within the operation valid period), but the operation of the push button 31B is not yet detected by the push sensor 35B, the operation promotion display 27TM350 and the time bar 27TM360 Is displayed continuously. The time bar 27TM360 displays 100% of the remaining time at the initial timing when it is displayed, and the ratio of the remaining time gradually decreases as the time elapses in the operation standby state. In this operation standby state, the push button 31B is in a blinking mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-13 (3), the display of the time bar 27TM360 is updated to the remaining 25% as a predetermined period elapses in the operation standby state. Then, the push button 31B is continuously blinking in response to the operation standby state.

Next, it is assumed that the push button 31B is operated by the player within the operation valid period before the display of the time bar 27TM360 becomes 0% remaining. At this time, the operation of the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B, so that the operation standby state ends. The effect control CPU 120 hides (erases) the operation promotion display 27TM350 and the time bar 27TM360 in response to the end of the operation standby state, and blinks the push button 31B from the blinking mode to the normal mode (turning off mode). Switch to. Further, as shown in FIG. 10-13 (4), the cut-in notice effect is executed based on the fact that the operation of the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B within the operation valid period.

In the example of the cut-in notice effect shown in FIG. 10-13 (4), the cut-in image 27TM370B in which the characters "chance!" Are displayed is displayed in the entire central region of the image display device 5 in the vertical direction of the screen. .. The cut-in image 27TM370B is displayed in a display mode having a higher priority than other effect images (background image, decorative pattern, and characters “reach !!”). Further, when the cut-in image is displayed, the push button 31B corresponds to the fact that the operation of the push button 31B is not enabled (corresponding to the operation completed within the operation valid period). It is in the normal mode (light-off mode).

From the player's point of view, when an image related to another effect is displayed, suddenly, a display mode having a higher priority than the image related to the other effect (the display layer is higher and is related to the other effect). Since the cut-in image (which appears to be displayed on the front side of the image) is displayed, it is attracted to the screen change when the cut-in notice effect is executed. Further, since there are a plurality of cut-in images as in the present embodiment, there is an interest in which cut-in image is displayed.

(Setting suggestion effect during split effect)
As described above, in the gaming machine of the first embodiment, when the division effect is being executed, the setting suggestion effect can be executed in the first effect image display area 27TM100A, while the second effect image display area 27TM200A can be executed. The setting suggestion effect is not executed in. An example of the effect in this case will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-14 to 12-19.

10-14 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect when the divided effect is executed, and FIGS. 10-15 to 10-19 are effect images of each effect when the divided effect is executed. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example.

In this example, at the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol, the effect control of the first pattern is executed in which the variation pattern is displayed on the right side of the screen and the second effect image is displayed on the left side of the screen. At the same time, a split effect is executed in which the movie B (long) of the movie B type having a long playback period is played, and the pseudo-ream of the type Y with high expectation is executed twice. 1 pattern division effect (movie B (long), pseudo-ream 2 times (type Y)] ”has been decided.

The effect control CPU 120 has a decorative pattern based on a variation pattern command in which the variation pattern of "super reach B jackpot [first pattern division effect (movie B (long), pseudo-ream 2 times (type Y)]" is specified. Perform a variable display of. In this fluctuation pattern, during the period in which the split effect is executed, after the pseudo continuous effect [Y: strong] is executed twice in the first effect image display area 27TM100A on the right side of the screen, the ally is used as a super reach effect. A battle effect B is executed to notify whether or not the character and the enemy character B have won a big hit by performing a battle, and the second effect image display area 27TM200A on the left side of the screen is based on the movie B (long). The production image will be displayed.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute the fourth setting suggestion effect of the red aspect in the effect determination process at the start of fluctuation (step S27TM2030), and the cut-in with the characters "Great chance !!" is displayed. It is assumed that it is decided to execute the cut-in notice effect for displaying the image 27TM370C (step S27TM2050).

In FIGS. 10-15 to 10-19, the mode of the push button 31B is shown in the lower right of the effect diagram in correspondence with the effect diagram. The push button mode includes a blinking mode suggesting that the operation of the push button 31B is valid, and a normal mode (turning off mode) suggesting that the operation of the push button 31B is not valid. ..

As shown in FIG. 10-15 (1), when the CUP 103 is executing the variable display of the first special symbol started at the timing of T1 shown in FIG. 10-14, the effect control CPU 120 is an image display device. In the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of 5, the variable display of decorative symbols (information corresponding to the first special symbol) is executed, and in the first small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. , The variable display of the first small symbol (information corresponding to the first special symbol) is executed.

Since the first reserved storage number is 3, the effect control CPU 120 displays "3" in the first reserved storage number special display area 27TM015 of the image display device 5, and the second reserved storage number is 0. Therefore, "0" is displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 27TM025 of the image display device 5. Further, the active display area 27TM031 displays the active display 27TM030 corresponding to the fluctuation display currently being executed, and the first hold display area 27TM011 displays three first hold displays 27TM010.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-15 (1), in the state where the division effect is not executed and the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the cut-in notice effect is produced. The push button 31B is in the normal mode (light-off mode) in response to the fact that it is not the timing to execute (the timing is not the timing at which the operation promotion display 27TM350 and the time bar 27TM360 should be displayed).

As shown in FIG. 10-15 (2), the effect control CPU 120 starts the split effect at the timing when a predetermined period elapses from the start of the variation of the decorative symbol (the timing of T2 shown in FIG. 10-14). In this example, the first effect image 27TM100 is displayed in the first effect image display area 27TM100A set on the right side of the effect display area 27TM005A based on the execution of the effect control of the first pattern, and the effect display is performed. The second effect image 27TM200 is displayed in the second effect image display area 27TM200A set on the left side of the area 27TM005A.

Here, the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display of the first decorative symbol in the first symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1 of the first effect image display area 27TM100A with the start of the divided effect. Further, the effect control CPU 120 reproduces [Movie B] in the second effect image display area 27TM200A with the start of the split effect. Therefore, as the second effect image 27TM200, an effect image based on [Movie B] is displayed. At this time, based on the reproduced [Movie B], the variable display of the second decorative symbol is executed in the second symbol display areas 5L2, 5C2, and 5R2.

Further, in response to the continuous execution of the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 uses the first small symbol in the first small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5. The variable display of is continued.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-15 (2) and later, in the state where the split effect is executed, regardless of whether or not it is the timing to execute the cut-in notice effect (operation promotion display 27TM350 and time bar 27TM360). (Regardless of whether or not it is the timing to display), the push button 31B is in the normal mode (light-off mode).

As shown in FIG. 10-15 (3), the effect control CPU 120 has the first symbol display area 5L1 and the first symbol display area 5R1 at a predetermined timing for executing the first pseudo continuous effect [Y: strong]. The first decorative symbol of "3" is temporarily stopped (the timing of T3 shown in FIGS. 10-14). Then, the pseudo-continuous symbol 27TM300 is temporarily stopped in the first symbol display area 5C1 and the fourth setting suggestion effect of the red aspect is executed (timing of T4 shown in FIGS. 10-14). That is, the red effect image 27TM400C is displayed in the first symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1, respectively.

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 has a second decorative symbol of "2" in the second symbol display area 5L2 and the second symbol display area 5R2 at a predetermined timing when the first pseudo continuous effect is executed by the first decorative symbol. Are temporarily stopped (timing of T3 shown in FIG. 10-14). Then, the pseudo-continuous symbol 27TM300 is temporarily stopped in the second symbol display area 5C2, and the white effect image 27TM400A is displayed in the second symbol display area 5L2, 5C2, and 5R2, respectively (timing of T4 shown in FIGS. 10-14). ).

In this way, when it is decided that neither the third setting suggestion effect nor the fourth setting suggestion effect is executed as the second effect image 27TM200 based on the [movie B] reproduced in the second effect image display area 27TM200A. A production image that imitates the production will be displayed.

As shown in FIG. 10-16 (4), the effect control CPU 120 continuously displays the red effect image 27TM400C in the first symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1 in a pseudo-continuous effect [Y]. : Strong] is executed, and the pseudo-continuous effect image 27TM300A is displayed in the first effect image display area 27TM100A (timing of T5 shown in FIGS. 10-14). At this time, the pseudo-continuous effect image 27TM300A is displayed with a higher priority than the effect image 27TM400C (a mode in which the display layer is higher than the effect image and is superimposed so as to be seen by the player).

Further, the effect control CPU 120 displays the pseudo-continuous effect image 27TM300A in the second effect image display area 27TM200A in a state where the white effect image 27TM400A is continuously displayed in the second symbol display areas 5L2, 5C2, and 5R2. (Timing of T5 shown in FIG. 10-14).

In this way, as the second effect image 27TM200 based on the [movie B] reproduced in the second effect image display area 27TM200A, the effect image imitating the pseudo continuous effect [Y: strong] is displayed.

Here, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (B3), when the split effect is not executed, the pseudo-ream effect image 27TM300A is displayed in response to the pseudo-ream effect [Y: strong] being executed. At the same time, the movable body effect in which the movable body 27TM600 operates was executed. However, as shown in FIG. 10-16 (4), when the split effect is executed, the pseudo continuous effect [Y: strong] is executed. Correspondingly, the pseudo-ream effect image 27TM300A is displayed, but the movable body effect is not executed.

In the pseudo-ream effect when the split effect is not executed, the pseudo-ream symbol 27TM300 temporarily stopped in the symbol display area 5C and the movable body 27TM600 that is operating and in the standing position are in a corresponding positional relationship. The person can easily grasp that the movable body effect is executed in response to the pseudo continuous effect [Y: strong].

On the other hand, if the movable body effect is executed along with the pseudo continuous effect while the divided effect is being executed, the operation of the movable body 27TM600 is either the first effect image 27TM100 or the second effect image 27TM200. It is difficult for the player to recognize whether the image corresponds to the above. Further, the movable body 27TM600 in the upright position further reduces the visibility of the effect image displayed in the first effect image display area 27TM100A and the second effect image display area 27TM200A, which are smaller than the effect display area 27TM005A. Further, it is necessary to set which of the first effect image 27TM100 and the second effect image 27TM200 is associated with the movable body control command for controlling the operation of the movable body 27TM600, which complicates the effect control. To do.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the division effect is being executed, the pseudo-continuous effect image 27TM300A is displayed, but the movable body effect is not executed. Here, since the pseudo-ream effect image 27TM300A is displayed in the same manner as when the split effect is not executed due to the execution of the pseudo-ream effect [Y: strong], "pseudo-ream effect [Y: strong] is displayed. : Strong] is executed, but the movable body 27TM600 does not operate. ”It is possible to reduce the discomfort of the player.

As shown in FIG. 10-16 (5), the effect control CPU 120 executes the revariation display of the first decorative symbol in the first symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 (T6 shown in FIG. 10-14). timing). Further, the effect control CPU 120 executes revariation display of the second decorative symbol in the second symbol display areas 5L2, 5C2, and 5R2 based on [Movie B] (timing of T6 shown in FIGS. 10-14). ..

As shown in FIG. 10-16 (6), the effect control CPU 120 has the first symbol display area 5L1 and the first symbol display area 5R1 at a predetermined timing for executing the second pseudo continuous effect [Y: strong]. The first decorative symbol of "3" is temporarily stopped (the timing of T7 shown in FIGS. 10-14). Then, the pseudo-continuous symbol 27TM300 is temporarily stopped in the first symbol display area 5C1 (timing of T8 shown in FIGS. 10-14).

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 displays an image in the reach state in the second effect image display area 27TM200A based on [Movie B]. In this example, the second decorative symbol of "2" is stopped and displayed in the second symbol display area 5L2 and the second symbol display area 5R2 to enter the reach state, and the "reach! The characters "!" Are displayed, and the operation promotion display 27TM350 and the time bar 27TM360 are displayed in the center of the second effect image display area 27TM200A (timing of T7 shown in FIGS. 10-14).

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-16 (6) to 10-17 (8), the operation promotion display 27TM350 and the time bar 27TM360 are displayed regardless of whether or not the operation promotion display 27TM350 and the time bar 27TM360 are displayed in the state where the division effect is executed. , The push button 31B is in a normal mode (light-off mode). Here, in FIG. 10-16 (6), the operation promotion display 27TM350 and the time bar 27TM360 are displayed in the second effect image display area 27TM200A, and these are only displayed as images in the movie. Absent. Therefore, the operation is not actually valid, and even if the player operates the push button 31B, the execution control of the cut-in notice effect is not performed in response to the operation.

As shown in FIG. 10-17 (7), the effect control CPU 120 displays the pseudo-ream effect image 27TM300A in the first effect image display area 27TM100A in response to the execution of the pseudo-ream effect [Y: strong]. Display (timing of T9 shown in FIGS. 10-14). At this time, in the second effect image display area 27TM200A, the display of the time bar 27TM360, which is an effect image based on [Movie B], is updated to the remaining 50%.

As shown in FIG. 10-17 (8), the effect control CPU 120 executes the revariation display of the first decorative symbol in the first symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 (T10 shown in FIG. 10-14). timing). At this time, in the second effect image display area 27TM200A, the display of the time bar 27TM360, which is an effect image based on [Movie B], is updated to the remaining 25%.

As shown in FIG. 10-17 (9), the effect control CPU 120 displays the first decorative symbol of "3" in the first symbol display area 5L1 and the first symbol display area 5R1 in the first effect image display area 27TM100A. Each is stopped and displayed to enter the reach state, and the characters "reach !!" are displayed on the upper part of the first effect image display area 27TM100A, and the operation promotion display 27TM350 and the time bar 27TM360 are displayed in the center of the first effect image display area 27TM100A. Is displayed (timing of T11 shown in FIG. 10-14).

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 has a "chance" regardless of whether or not the push button 31B is operated at the timing when the display of the time bar 27TM360 in the second effect image display area 27TM200A is updated to the remaining 20%. The cut-in image 27TM370B on which the characters "!" Are displayed is displayed in the center of the second effect image display area 27TM200A in a display mode having a higher priority than the other effect images being displayed (Fig. 10-14). Timing of T11 shown). At this time, in the second effect image display area 27TM200A, the cut-in image 27TM370B is displayed as the effect image based on [Movie B].

At the timing of T11 shown in FIGS. 10-14, the operation promotion display 27TM350 and the time bar 27TM360 are displayed based on the determination that the cut-in notice effect corresponding to the first effect image display area 27TM100A is executed. At the same time, the operation is valid. By operating the push button 31B during the operation valid period, the cut-in image is displayed in the first effect image display area 27TM100A. However, in the state where the division effect is being executed, the push button 31B is in the normal mode (light-off mode) regardless of whether or not the operation promotion display 27TM350 and the time bar 27TM360 are displayed. In the example shown in 17 (9), the push button 31B remains in the normal mode (light-off mode) despite the operation validity period.

In the present embodiment, when the division effect is not executed, the push button 31B changes from the normal mode (light-off mode) to the blinking mode in response to the display of the operation promotion display 27TM350 and the time bar 27TM360. At the same time, it shifts to the operation validity period. Then, a cut-in image is displayed in the center of the effect display area 27TM005A in response to the operation of the push button 31B within the operation valid period (see FIG. 10-13).

On the other hand, when the split effect is executed, when the operation promotion display 27TM350 and the time bar 27TM360 are displayed on the first effect image display area 27TM100A side, the push button 31B blinks from the normal mode (light-off mode). The push button 31B shifts to the operation valid period in the normal mode (light-off mode) without changing to (see FIG. 10-17 (9)). Then, the cut-in image is displayed in the first effect image display area 27TM100A in response to the operation of the push button 31B within the operation valid period (see FIG. 10-18 (10) described later).

Further, when the split effect is executed, when the operation promotion display 27TM350 and the time bar 27TM360 are displayed on the second effect image display area 27TM200A side, the push button 31B blinks from the normal mode (light-off mode). Does not change to, and does not shift to the operation valid period (see FIG. 10-16 (6)). Then, the cut-in image is displayed in the second effect image display area 27TM200A at a predetermined timing regardless of whether or not the push button 31B is operated.

That is, during the period during which the division effect is being executed, regardless of whether or not the operation promotion display 27TM350 and the time bar 27TM360 are displayed, and whether or not the operation of the push button 31B is valid. By leaving the push button 31B in the normal mode (light-off mode) instead of the lighting mode, the player can easily grasp which of the left and right images is the first effect image 27TM100 (whether it is the true effect). It is not possible.

In the present embodiment, during the execution of the divided effect, the operation promotion display 27TM350 and the time bar 27TM360 are displayed in both the first effect image display area 27TM100A and the second effect image display area 27TM200A. Although an example that can be executed is shown, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and while the operation promotion effect can be executed in the first effect image display area 27TM100A during the execution of the divided effect, the second effect image display area 27TM200A can be executed. Then, the operation promotion effect may not be executed.

Further, unlike the above example, the operation promotion effect may not be executed in any of the first effect image display area 27TM100A and the second effect image display area 27TM200A during the execution of the divided effect. For example, in the effect control CPU 120, when the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command is a variation pattern accompanied by a division effect, the effect control CPU 120 selects a notice effect accompanied by an operation promotion effect in the effect determination process at the start of the variation. Instead, other types of advance notice effects may be selected. That is, the type of advance notice effect that can be executed when the divided effect is not executed includes the advance notice effect accompanied by the operation promotion effect, but the type of advance notice effect that can be executed when the divided effect is executed is selected. May not include the advance notice effect accompanied by the operation promotion effect.

Here, in the present embodiment, when the division effect is not executed, the push button 31B switches from the normal mode (light-off mode) to the lighting mode when the operation promotion display 27TM350 and the time bar 27TM360 are displayed. When the division effect is executed, the push button 31B remains in the normal mode (light-off mode) when the operation promotion display 27TM350 and the time bar 27TM360 are displayed. Therefore, the light emitting device for changing the mode of the push button 31B (for example, the LED installed inside the housing of the push button 31B and emitting light during the operation effective period) corresponds to the period during which the division effect is not executed. It can be called a device.

As described above, the effect device corresponding to the period during which the divided effect is not executed may not be operated during the variation display period of the variation pattern accompanied by the divided effect. For example, the effect control CPU 120 is a device that changes the mode of the push button 31B in the effect determination process at the start of variation when the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command is a variation pattern that does not accompany the division effect. However, when the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is a variation pattern accompanied by a division effect, the mode of the push button 31B in the effect determination process at the start of variation It is impossible to determine the execution of the effect using the device that changes the.

In this way, by not operating the predetermined effect device during the execution period of the divided effect (or during the variable display of the variation pattern accompanied by the divided effect), it is possible to determine which of the left and right images is the first effect image 27TM100. It becomes difficult for the player to grasp the image, and the interest of the divided production can be improved.

Here, if the light emission control of the frame LED 9 and the decorative LED is executed in correspondence with each of the first effect image 27TM100 and the second effect image 27TM200 when the division effect is being executed, the LED The commands (illumination signals) to the control board 14 interfere with each other, which causes a problem that proper LED control becomes difficult. In the present embodiment, such a problem occurs by not causing the LED installed inside the housing of the push button 31B to emit light during the execution period of the division effect (or during the variation display of the variation pattern accompanied by the division effect). I try not to.

Further, an effect device (for example, a decorative LED) that can be operated only when the division effect is being executed (or when the variation display of the variation pattern accompanied by the division effect is being executed) may be provided. For example, the first decorative LED that does not emit light when the divided effect is not executed and emits light corresponding to the effect of the first effect image display area 27TM100A when the divided effect is executed, and the divided effect are executed. A second decorative LED may be provided which does not emit light when it is not used and emits light corresponding to the effect of the second effect image display area 27TM200A when the divided effect is being executed. In this way, by providing the effect device dedicated to the split effect, it is possible to prevent the above-mentioned problems from occurring.

As shown in FIG. 10-18 (10), the effect control CPU 120 is pushed by the player within the operation valid period in which the operation promotion display 27TM350 and the time bar 27TM360 are displayed in the first effect image display area 27TM100A. At the timing when the operation of 31B is performed and the operation is detected by the push sensor 35B (at the timing of T12 shown in FIG. 10-14), the cut-in image 27TM370C in which the characters "Great chance !!" are displayed is displayed. The cut-in notice effect to be displayed in the first effect image display area 27TM100A is executed.

At this time, in the second effect image display area 27TM200A, the cut-in image 27TM370B is continuously displayed as the effect image based on [Movie B].

As shown in FIG. 10-18 (11), the effect control CPU 120 continuously displays the cut-in image 27TM370C in which the characters "Great chance !!" are displayed in the first effect image display area 27TM100A. (Timing of T13 shown in FIG. 10-14).

At this time, the effect control CPU 120 ends the display of the cut-in image 27TM370B in which the characters "chance!" Are displayed based on the [movie B] being played in the second effect image display area 27TM200A. 2 In the effect image display area 27TM200A, the ally character 27TM500 and the enemy character A (27TM510A) are displayed together with the characters "battle" (timing of T13 shown in FIGS. 10-14). Further, at this time, two star-shaped object images 27TM550 are displayed at the lower part of the second effect image display area 27TM200A together with the characters "expectation".

As described above, as the production image based on [Movie B] being reproduced in the second production image display area 27TM200A, the image related to the battle production of Super Reach A (the image of the ally character 27TM500 and the enemy character A (27TM510A), and 2 The star-shaped object image 27TM550) is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 10-18 (12), the effect control CPU 120 ends the display of the cut-in image 27TM370C in which the characters "Great chance !!" are displayed in the first effect image display area 27TM100A. In the first effect image display area 27TM100A, the ally character 27TM500 and the enemy character B (27TM510B) are displayed together with the characters "battle" (timing of T14 shown in FIGS. 10-14). Further, at this time, four star-shaped object images 27TM550 are displayed at the lower part of the first effect image display area 27TM100A together with the characters "expectation".

As described above, in the first effect image display area 27TM100A, the images of the ally character 27TM500 and the enemy character B (27TM510B), and the image of the enemy character B (27TM510B), as the effect image corresponding to the battle effect of the super reach B designated by the variation pattern designation command, and Four star-shaped object images 27TM550 are displayed.

In response to the development of the super reach effect in the first effect image display area 27TM100A, the effect control CPU 120 enlarges and displays the first effect image 27TM100. The effect control CPU 120 gradually enlarges and displays the first effect image 27TM100 without enlarging the second effect image 27TM200 during the enlarged display period of T14 to T15 shown in FIGS. 10-14. In this enlarged display period, the first effect image 27TM100 has a higher priority than the second effect image 27TM200 (the display layer is higher than the second effect image 27TM200 and is superimposed so that it can be seen by the player. Aspect) is displayed.

That is, the display priority of the first effect image 27TM100 and the second effect image 27TM200 in the enlarged display period has a relationship of the second effect image 27TM200 <the first effect image 27TM100, and the enlarged display of the first effect image 27TM100 Along with this, the displayed area of the second effect image 27TM200 is reduced (see FIG. 10-18 (12)). In this way, the first effect image 27TM100 and the second effect image 27TM200 are displayed in parallel, but the visibility of the first effect image 27TM100 is higher than the visibility of the second effect image 27TM200 during the enlarged display period. It will be enhanced. Then, the enlarged display of the first effect image 27TM100 completely covers the second effect image 27TM200, so that the second effect image 27TM200 becomes invisible (hidden).

As shown in FIG. 10-19 (13), the effect control CPU 120 is divided at the timing when the first effect image 27TM100 is expanded to substantially the same size as the effect display area 27TM005A (timing of T15 shown in FIG. 10-14). End the production. At the timing when the split effect is finished, the image of the ally character 27TM500 and the enemy character B (27TM510B) and the image of the enemy character B (27TM510B) are displayed in the effect display area 27TM005A as the effect image corresponding to the battle effect of the super reach B specified by the variation pattern specification command. Four star-shaped object images 27TM550 are displayed. Further, by blinking the four star-shaped object images 27TM550 displayed at the bottom of the screen after the division effect is completed, a plurality of expectations (two stars) shown to the player during the execution of the division effect are performed. And 4 stars), the expectation degree (4 stars) finally selected corresponding to the fluctuation display is notified.

That is, even after the end of the division effect, the effect information (images of the ally character 27TM500 and the enemy character B (27TM510B)) displayed on the first effect image 27TM100 immediately before the end of the division effect, and four star-shaped objects. Since the effect information common to the image 27TM550) is continuously displayed on the screen, the player can perform the effect corresponding to the hidden first effect image 27TM100 (super reach B battle effect). You can understand that it is continuing.

In the example shown in FIGS. 10-15 to 10-19, the division effect based on the effect control of the first pattern is executed, the first effect image 27TM100 is displayed on the right side of the screen, and the first effect image 27TM100 is displayed on the left side of the screen. The second production image 27TM200 is displayed. In the gaming machine of the first embodiment, in the first effect image display area 27TM100A, a setting suggestion effect determined based on the effect determination process at the start of variation may be executed together with the effect based on the variation pattern designation command. In the second effect image display area 27TM200A, a predetermined movie corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is played, and the setting suggestion effect is not executed.

If the setting suggestion effect is executed for the first effect image 27TM100 and the second effect image 27TM200 displayed in parallel on the left and right while the split effect is being executed, either the left or right setting is performed. There is a problem that the player is confused as to whether the set value should be estimated based on the suggestion effect. In the present embodiment, the occurrence of such a problem can be prevented by not executing the setting suggestion effect in the second effect image display area 27TM200A.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-15 to 10-19, in the first effect image 27TM100 and the second effect image, the number of times the pseudo-continuous effect is executed (2 times and 1 time) and the mode of the cut-in image ("" It is possible to make different modes of display information related to the degree of expectation of a big hit, such as "Big chance !!" and "Chance!"), And the characters (character B and character A) that appear. As a result, the interest of the divided production can be further improved.

Here, as shown in FIGS. 10-15 to 10-19, the variation pattern of "Super Reach B jackpot [1st pattern division effect (movie B (long)), pseudo-continuous 2 times (type Y)]" Based on the selection of, the first effect image 27TM100 executes the pseudo-ream twice, whereas the second effect image 27TM200 executes the pseudo-ream only once. Further, in the first production image 27TM100, the characters "big chance !!" with the highest expectation of big hits are displayed, whereas in the second production image 27TM200, the "chance" with the second highest expectation of big hits is displayed. The characters "!" Are displayed. Further, in the first production image 27TM100, the character B (27TM510B) appears as a super reach B with a high expectation of a big hit in the super reach, whereas in the second production image 27TM200, a big hit in the super reach Character A (27TM510A) appears as it develops into Super Reach A with low expectations.

As described above, the first effect image 27TM100, which has a long display period, has a higher ratio of displaying the effect information with a high expectation of big hit than the second effect image 27TM200, which has a short display period. In this example, the second production image 27TM200 shows an example in which the production image is based on the movie B (long), but any of the movie B (short), the movie A (long), and the movie A (short). In this case as well, it is assumed that the first effect image 27TM100, which has a long display period, has a higher proportion of the effect information with a high expectation of a big hit than the second effect image 27TM200, which has a short display period.

With such a production configuration, the player has a feeling of expectation that the production information having a high expectation of a big hit is the first production image 27TM100, and the interest of the divided production can be improved. it can.

(Second Embodiment)
Next, the gaming machine according to the second embodiment will be described. In the following description, the description of the parts common to the gaming machine according to the first embodiment will be omitted. Unlike the game machine according to the first embodiment, the game machine according to the second embodiment can execute the setting suggestion effect in the second effect image display area 27TM200A.

FIG. 10-20 is a flowchart showing the effect determination process at the start of fluctuation in the second embodiment. As shown in steps S27TM2000 to S27TM2030, the gaming machine of the second embodiment determines whether or not to execute the third setting suggestion effect and the effect mode of the third setting suggestion effect, similarly to the game machine of the first embodiment. Therefore, in the first effect image display area 27TM100A, the third setting suggestion effect corresponding to the first effect image 27TM100 can be executed. Further, similarly to the gaming machine of the first embodiment, the presence / absence of execution of the fourth setting suggestion effect and the effect mode of the fourth setting suggestion effect are determined, and the first effect image display area 27TM100A corresponds to the first effect image 27TM100. It is possible to execute the fourth setting suggestion effect.

Further, as shown in step S27TM2040 to step S27TM2050, the gaming machine of the second embodiment determines whether or not to execute the cut-in notice effect and the effect mode of the cut-in notice effect, as in the game machine of the first embodiment. Therefore, in the first effect image display area 27TM100A, the cut-in notice effect corresponding to the first effect image 27TM100 can be executed.

Here, in the effect determination process at the start of the variation of the second embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the variation pattern specified by the received variation pattern designation command is a variation pattern accompanied by the division effect. (Step S27TM3000). Then, in the case of a variation pattern accompanied by a divided effect (YES in step S27TM3000), whether or not to execute the fifth setting suggestion effect corresponding to the first effect image 27TM100 and the effect mode of the fifth setting suggestion effect are determined. Whether or not to execute the fifth setting suggestion effect corresponding to the second effect image 27TM200 and the effect mode of the fifth setting suggestion effect are determined (step S27TM3010).

The fifth setting suggestion effect is an effect that suggests a set value by the display color of the first effect image frame 27TM110 corresponding to the first effect image 27TM100 displayed in the first effect image display area 27TM100A. Further, the fifth setting suggestion effect is also an effect of suggesting a set value by the display color of the second effect image frame 27TM210 corresponding to the second effect image 27TM200 displayed in the second effect image display area 27TM200A.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-21 (A1), when the set value of the game machine is any of 1, 3 and 5, that is, when it is an odd number setting, it is 60%. Decided not to execute the 5th setting suggestion effect corresponding to the 1st effect image 27TM100 at a rate, and decided to execute the 5th setting suggestion effect corresponding to the 1st effect image 27TM100 at a rate of 30%. Then, it is decided to execute the fifth setting suggestion effect of the red aspect corresponding to the first effect image 27TM100 at a rate of 10%. On the other hand, when the setting value of the game machine is any of 2, 4, or 6, that is, when the setting value is an even number, the fifth setting suggestion effect corresponding to the first effect image 27TM100 is performed at a rate of 60%. Decided not to execute, decided to execute the fifth setting suggestion effect of the blue aspect corresponding to the first effect image 27TM100 at a rate of 10%, and red color corresponding to the first effect image 27TM100 at a rate of 30%. It is decided to execute the fifth setting suggestion effect of the aspect.

In the present embodiment, when it is determined not to execute the fifth setting suggestion effect corresponding to the first effect image 27TM100, the first effect image frame 27TM110 is displayed in white. Further, when it is decided to execute the fifth setting suggestion effect of the blue aspect corresponding to the first effect image 27TM100, the first effect image frame 27TM110 is displayed in blue and corresponds to the first effect image 27TM100. When it is decided to execute the fifth setting suggestion effect in the red aspect, the first effect image frame 27TM110 is displayed in red.

Therefore, the player is likely to have an odd number of settings when the first effect image frame 27TM110 is displayed in blue, and sets when the first effect image frame 27TM110 is displayed in red. I presume that the value is likely to be even. Further, when the first effect image frame 27TM110 is displayed in white, it is understood that the setting value is not suggested in the first effect image frame 27TM110.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-21 (A2), when the set value of the game machine is any of 1, 3 and 5, that is, when the setting value is an odd number, 80%. Decided not to execute the 5th setting suggestion effect corresponding to the 2nd effect image 27TM200 at a rate, and decided to execute the 5th setting suggestion effect corresponding to the 2nd effect image 27TM200 at a rate of 11%. Then, it is decided to execute the fifth setting suggestion effect of the red aspect corresponding to the second effect image 27TM200 at a rate of 9%. On the other hand, when the setting value of the game machine is any of 2, 4, or 6, that is, when the setting value is an even number, the fifth setting suggestion effect corresponding to the second effect image 27TM200 is performed at a rate of 80%. Decided not to execute, decided to execute the fifth setting suggestion effect of the blue aspect corresponding to the second effect image 27TM200 at a rate of 9%, and red corresponding to the second effect image 27TM200 at a rate of 11%. It is decided to execute the fifth setting suggestion effect of the aspect.

In the present embodiment, when it is determined not to execute the fifth setting suggestion effect corresponding to the second effect image 27TM200, the second effect image frame 27TM210 is displayed in white. Further, when it is decided to execute the fifth setting suggestion effect of the blue aspect corresponding to the second effect image 27TM200, the second effect image frame 27TM210 is displayed in blue and corresponds to the second effect image 27TM200. When it is decided to execute the fifth setting suggestion effect of the red aspect, the second effect image frame 27TM210 is displayed in red.

Therefore, the player is likely to have an odd number of settings when the second effect image frame 27TM210 is displayed in blue, and sets when the second effect image frame 27TM210 is displayed in red. I presume that the value is likely to be even. Further, when the second effect image frame 27TM210 is displayed in white, it is understood that the setting value is not suggested in the second effect image frame 27TM210.

As described above, (1) the fifth setting suggestion effect was executed as a common point between the fifth setting suggestion effect corresponding to the first effect image 27TM100 and the fifth setting suggestion effect corresponding to the second effect image 27TM200. In this case, the effect image frame is displayed in blue or red, but when the fifth setting suggestion effect is not executed, the effect image frame is displayed in white, and (2) the effect image frame is displayed in blue. If this is done, the ratio of the set values being odd is high, and if the effect image frame is displayed in red, the ratio of the set values being even is high.

On the other hand, the execution rate (40%) of the fifth setting suggestion effect corresponding to the first effect image 27TM100 is higher than the execution rate (20%) of the fifth setting suggestion effect corresponding to the second effect image 27TM200. Further, the ratio of the set value being an odd number when the first effect image frame 27TM110 is displayed in blue is higher than the ratio of the set value being an odd number when the second effect image frame 27TM210 is displayed in blue. The ratio of the set value being even when the first effect image frame 27TM110 is displayed in red is higher than the ratio of the set value being even when the second effect image frame 27TM210 is displayed in red.

As described above, the execution frequency of the fifth setting suggestion effect corresponding to the first effect image 27TM100 is higher than the execution frequency of the fifth setting suggestion effect corresponding to the second effect image 27TM200. Further, the ratio of the setting value suggested in the fifth setting suggestion effect corresponding to the first effect image 27TM100 corresponding to the set value of the actual game machine is the fifth setting suggestion corresponding to the second effect image 27TM200. The setting value suggested by the production is higher than the ratio corresponding to the setting value of the actual game machine. That is, the reliability (accuracy) of the fifth setting suggestion effect corresponding to the first effect image 27TM100 is higher than the reliability (accuracy) of the fifth setting suggestion effect corresponding to the second effect image 27TM200.

In this way, it is possible to make the mode of the fifth setting suggestion effect executed in the first effect image display area 27TM100A different from the mode of the fifth setting suggestion effect executed in the second effect image display area 27TM200A. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the setting suggestion production.

FIG. 10-22 is a diagram showing an example of an effect image when the fifth setting suggestion effect is executed with the execution of the divided effect, and is shown in FIGS. 10-2 (1) and (2) of the first embodiment. It is a corresponding figure. As shown in FIG. 10-22 (1), before the execution of the division effect, in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, the decoration identification information is synchronized with the variable display of the first special symbol. The decorative design (main production design) is displayed in a variable manner. When the CUP 103 is executing the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 determines the decorative symbol (information corresponding to the first special symbol) in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. In the first small symbol display areas 5l, 5c, and 5r of the image display device 5, the variation display of the first small symbol (information corresponding to the first special symbol) is executed.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 displays a combination of two sets of background images and decorative patterns based on the background image and decorative pattern in the information displayed in the effect display area 27TM005A as the divided effect is executed. Appear on region 27TM005A. The combination of one of them becomes the first effect information including the first effect image 27TM100, and the other becomes the second effect information including the second effect image 27TM200.

As shown in FIG. 10-22 (2), the effect control CPU 120 is set in the first effect image display area 27TM100A on the right side of the effect display area 27TM005A together with the first effect image frame 27TM110 as the divided effect is executed. The effect image 27TM100 is displayed, and the second effect image 27TM200 is displayed together with the second effect image frame 27TM210 in the second effect image display area 27TM200A on the left side of the effect display area 27TM005A. That is, in this example, based on the decision to execute the effect control of the first pattern, the first effect information is displayed on the right side of the screen, and the second effect information is displayed on the left side of the screen. ing.

Then, in the first symbol display area 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 of the first effect image 27TM100, the variation display of the first decorative symbol as the decoration identification information is performed in response to the variation display of the first special symbol, and the second In the second symbol display area 5L2, 5C2, 5R2 of the effect image 27TM200, the variation display of the second decorative symbol as the decoration identification information is performed corresponding to the variation display of the first special symbol. At this time, in response to the continuous execution of the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control CPU 120 is the first small symbol display area 5l, 5c, 5r of the image display device 5. The variable display of the design is continued.

In the example shown in FIG. 10-22 (2), the first effect image frame 27TM110 is red based on the decision to execute the fifth setting suggestion effect in the red aspect corresponding to the first effect image 27TM100. The second effect image frame 27TM210 is displayed in blue based on the decision to execute the fifth setting suggestion effect in the blue aspect corresponding to the second effect image 27TM200.

Here, in this example, when the split effect is executed, both the fifth setting suggestion effect corresponding to the first effect image 27TM100 and the fifth setting suggestion effect corresponding to the second effect image 27TM200 are executed. There is. Not limited to such an example, the fifth setting suggestion effect corresponding to the first effect image 27TM100 is executed (the first effect image frame 27TM110 is displayed in blue or red), while the second effect image 27TM200 is displayed. The corresponding fifth setting suggestion effect may not be executed (the second effect image frame 27TM210 is displayed in white). Further, the fifth setting suggestion effect corresponding to the second effect image 27TM200 is executed (the second effect image frame 27TM210 is displayed in blue or red), while the fifth setting suggestion corresponding to the first effect image 27TM100 is executed. The effect may not be executed (the first effect image frame 27TM110 is displayed in white).

Further, when the fifth setting suggestion effect corresponding to the first effect image 27TM100 and the fifth setting suggestion effect corresponding to the second effect image 27TM200 are executed in a common manner (the first effect image frame 27TM110 is blue. When the second effect image frame 27TM210 is also displayed in blue, the first effect image frame 27TM110 is displayed in red and the second effect image frame 27TM210 is also displayed in red).

FIG. 10-23 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect when the divided effect is executed by the gaming machine of the second embodiment, and is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 10-14 of the first embodiment. In the example shown in FIG. 10-23, similarly to the example shown in FIG. 10-14, when the fluctuation of the first special symbol starts, the fluctuation pattern is displayed, the first effect image is displayed on the right side of the screen, and the second effect image is displayed. The effect control of the first pattern displayed on the left side of the screen is executed, and the split effect in which the movie B (long) of the movie B type having a long playback period is played is executed, and the type with high expectation. It is determined that the pseudo-ream of Y is executed twice as "super reach B jackpot [first pattern division effect (movie B (long)), pseudo-ream twice (type Y)]".

As shown in FIGS. 10-22 and 10-23, in the second embodiment, during the period when the divided effect is executed, the fifth setting suggestion effect corresponding to the first effect image 27TM100 and the second effect image 27TM200 are displayed. The corresponding fifth setting suggestion effect can be executed in parallel. That is, in the fifth setting suggestion effect in the first effect image display area 27TM100A in which the effect having a high expectation of big hit is executed, and in the second effect image display area 27TM200A in which the effect having a low expectation is executed is high. It is possible to execute the fifth setting suggestion effect in parallel.

FIG. 10-24 is a diagram showing an example of an effect image when the division effect of the second embodiment is completed. 10-24 (12) is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 10-18 (12) of the first embodiment, and FIG. 10-24 (13) is a diagram of FIG. 10-19 (13) of the first embodiment. It is a corresponding figure.

In response to the development of the super reach effect in the first effect image display area 27TM100A, the effect control CPU 120 is the first effect image together with the first effect image frame 27TM110 in which the fifth setting suggestion effect of the red aspect is executed. 27TM100 is enlarged and displayed. The effect control CPU 120 expands the combination of the second effect image frame 27TM210 and the second effect image 27TM200 in which the fifth setting suggestion effect of the blue aspect is executed during the enlarged display period of T14 to T15 shown in FIGS. 10-14. The combination of the first effect image frame 27TM110 and the first effect image 27TM100 in which the fifth setting suggestion effect of the red aspect is executed is gradually enlarged and displayed without causing the display. In this enlarged display period, the combination of the first effect image frame 27TM110 and the first effect image 27TM100 has a higher priority than the combination of the second effect image frame 27TM210 and the second effect image 27TM200 (second effect image frame 27TM210 and second effect image 27TM200). 2 The display layer is higher than the combination of the effect image 27TM200, and is displayed in a superimposed manner so that the player can see the image in the foreground.

That is, the display priority of the first effect image frame 27TM110 and the second effect image frame 27TM210 in the enlarged display period has a relationship of the second effect image frame 27TM210 <the first effect image frame 27TM110, and the first effect image frame 27TM110. As the 27TM110 is enlarged and displayed, the display area of the second effect image frame 27TM210 is reduced (see FIG. 10-24 (12)). In this way, the first effect image frame 27TM110 and the second effect image frame 27TM210 are displayed in parallel, but the visibility of the first effect image frame 27TM110 is higher than that of the second effect image frame 27TM210 during the enlarged display period. It will be higher than the visibility. Then, the enlarged display of the first effect image frame 27TM110 completely covers the second effect image frame 27TM210, so that the second effect image frame 27TM210 becomes invisible (hidden).

As shown in FIG. 10-24 (13), in the effect control CPU 120, the timing at which the first effect image frame 27TM110 is expanded to substantially the same size as the frame of the effect display area 27TM005A (timing of T15 shown in FIG. 10-23). Then, the split production is finished.

As shown above, when the split effect is executed, the setting suggestion effect can be executed in both the first effect image display area 27TM100A and the second effect image display area 27TM200A. It is possible to improve the interest of setting suggestion production. Here, since it is possible to make the mode of the setting suggestion effect executed in the first effect image display area 27TM100A different from the mode of the setting suggestion effect executed in the second effect image display area 27TM200A, the split effect It is possible to further improve the interest of the setting suggestion effect that is being executed in parallel in.

However, as for the gaming machine of the second embodiment, similarly to the gaming machine of the first embodiment, the third setting suggestion effect suggesting that the set value is "6" in the second effect image display area 27TM200A ( Setting 6 final effect) is not executed.

Assuming that the third setting suggestion effect suggesting that the set value is high is executed in response to the second effect image 27TM200, which has a short display period and a high rate of execution of the effect with low expectation, the first effect If the third setting suggestion effect corresponding to the image 27TM100 is not executed, the second effect image 27TM200 may be hidden at an early timing, which may discourage the player. In addition, the player has doubts about the reliability of the third setting suggestion effect executed in response to the second effect image 27TM200. In the present embodiment, the fifth setting suggestion effect can be executed corresponding to the second effect image 27TM200, but the third setting suggestion effect that suggests a specific setting value with high reliability is not executed. I try not to cause such a problem.

(Modification example of feature 27TM)
Next, a modified example of the [feature unit 27TM] will be described.

(1) As shown in the feature unit 16TM described above, the setting suggestion effect may suggest a set value by the number of times the setting suggestion effect is executed. For example, the effect control CPU 120 causes the mini slot 16TM030 to be displayed in the special effect area 16TM035 provided below the active display 16TM003 at the lower center of the screen of the image display device 5, and the mini slot 16TM030 is variedly displayed. By doing so, the setting suggestion effect may be executed.

As shown in [Explanation of the feature unit 16TM], the effect control CPU 120 can execute the first setting suggestion effect as an effect suggesting the currently set setting value. In this first setting suggestion effect, in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1 of the mini-slot 16TM030, the combination of [bell], [bell], and [bell] mini-slot symbols is stopped and displayed as the same symbol combination. By doing so, it is a production that makes the role of "Bell" established. That is, based on the fact that the combination of the [bell], [bell], and [bell] mini-slot symbols is stopped and displayed in the mini-slot symbol display areas 5L1, 5C1, and 5R1 of the mini-slot 16TM030, the player sets the set value. Recognize that the first setting suggestion effect for suggesting has been executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-6 (G) described above, the execution rate of the first setting suggestion effect differs depending on the set value, and the higher the set value, the higher the rate of execution of the first setting suggestion effect. Will be done. In the present embodiment, since the effect determination process at the start of the variation is executed each time the variation display is executed, it is determined whether or not the first setting suggestion effect is executed for each variation display (step S16TM2000). That is, it is determined whether the winning combination of the first mini-slot variable display described above is set to [bell] or "off". As a result, the player becomes interested in whether or not the first setting suggestion effect is executed each time the variable display is executed, and the first relative to the number of times the variable display is executed. You will also be interested in the number of times the setting suggestion effect is executed (execution rate of the first setting suggestion effect).

As described above, the configuration capable of executing the first setting suggestion effect can be applied to the gaming machine of the first embodiment or the gaming machine of the second embodiment. However, while the first setting suggestion effect corresponding to the first effect image 27TM100 can be executed during the period when the split effect is being executed, the first setting suggestion effect corresponding to the second effect image 27TM200 is not executed. To do.

Since the first setting suggestion effect suggests the set value according to the number of executions, it is difficult for the player to guess the set value just by looking at the winning combination of the variable display of the displayed mini-slot. Is. Due to the characteristics of the first setting suggestion effect, the first mini-slot corresponding to the first effect image 27TM100 and the second mini-slot corresponding to the second effect image 27TM200 are tentatively displayed during the execution of the split effect. , If the first setting suggestion effect is executed in parallel in the first mini-slot and the second mini-slot, the player will be confused. Therefore, during the execution of the divided effect, the first setting suggestion effect corresponding to the second effect image 27TM200 is not executed.

(2) Not limited to the form shown in the above modification (1), during the fluctuation display period based on the fluctuation pattern accompanied by the division effect, the first setting suggestion effect corresponding to the first effect image 27TM100 and the second setting suggestion effect and the second. It is also possible not to execute any of the first setting suggestion effects corresponding to the effect image 27TM200.

For example, among the variation display periods based on the variation pattern accompanied by the division effect, the period during which the division effect is not executed (the period before the execution of the division effect and the period after the execution of the division effect) is the lower center of the screen of the image display device 5. A mini slot 16TM030 displayed in a special effect area 16TM035 provided below the active display 16TM003, which is an area corresponding to neither the first effect image display area 27TM100A nor the second effect image display area 27TM200A). Although one setting suggestion effect can be executed, both the first setting suggestion effect corresponding to the first effect image 27TM100 and the first setting suggestion effect corresponding to the second effect image 27TM200 are executed during the execution period of the split effect. You may not execute it.

As described above, when the mini slot 16TM030 is displayed in the special effect area 16TM035 which does not correspond to any of the first effect image display area 27TM100A and the second effect image display area 27TM200A, the execution period of the divided effect. In the mini-slot symbol display area 5L1, 5C1, 5R1 of the mini-slot 16TM030, the variation display of the mini-slot symbol may be continuously executed so that the mini-slot symbol is not stopped. By such effect control, the first setting suggestion effect may not be executed in the effect display area 27TM005A (entire screen) during the execution period of the divided effect.

(3) Further, in the first and second embodiments described above, in at least one of the first effect image display area 27TM100A and the second effect image display area 27TM200A during the execution period of the divided effect. , An example in which any type of setting suggestion effect can be executed is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a form, and during the execution period of the divided effect (or during the variation display period based on the variation pattern accompanied by the divided effect). In both the first effect image display area 27TM100A and the second effect image display area 27TM200A, the setting suggestion effect may not be executed regardless of the type.

During the execution period of the divided effect (or during the variable display period based on the variation pattern accompanied by the divided effect), the effect display area 27TM005A including the first effect image display area 27TM100A and the second effect image display area 27TM200A (entire screen). ), The setting suggestion effect may not be executed regardless of the type.

(4) In the above embodiment, an example is shown in which the display mode of the active display changes at a lower rate during the period in which the split effect is executed than in the period in which the split effect is not executed. Not limited to the form, the display mode of the active display may be changed at a higher rate during the period when the divided effect is executed than during the period when the divided effect is not executed. As a result, it is possible to be interested in how the active display changes in response to the execution of the split effect.

(5) In the above embodiment, an example in which the setting suggestion effect is an effect of suggesting the set value of the game machine has been described, but the setting suggestion effect is not limited to such a form, and the power source of the game machine is used for the setting suggestion effect. It may be an effect that suggests whether or not the set value has been changed when the setting value is input. For example, when the setting change mode for changing the set value is controlled when the power of the game machine is turned on, the setting change mode is not controlled when the power of the game machine is turned on. A predetermined setting suggestion effect may be executed at a higher rate than in the case.

(6) In the second embodiment described above, the types of setting suggestion effects (third setting suggestion effect, fourth setting suggestion effect, fifth setting suggestion effect) that can be executed in the first effect image display area 27TM100A and the second setting suggestion effect. There is a type of setting suggestion effect (fifth setting suggestion effect) that can be executed in the effect image display area 27TM200A, and a setting suggestion that can be executed in the first effect image display area 27TM100A but not in the second effect image display area 27TM200A. While there are types of effects (third setting suggestion effect, fourth setting suggestion effect), there are types of setting suggestion effects that can be executed in the second effect image display area 27TM200A but not in the first effect image display area 27TM100A. Explained an example that does not exist.

Not limited to such a form, a type of setting suggestion effect that can be executed in the second effect image display area 27TM200A but not executed in the first effect image display area 27TM100A may be provided. For example, the fifth setting suggestion effect may be executed in the second effect image display area 27TM200A, but may not be executed in the first effect image display area 27TM100A.

(7) In the above embodiment, it can be executed only in one of the first effect image display area 27TM100A and the second effect image display area 27TM200A (for example, the first effect image display area 27TM100A), and the other area. Although the effects (third setting suggestion effect, fourth setting suggestion effect, etc.) that are not executed in (for example, the second effect image display area 27TM200A) have been described, not limited to such a form, these effects are described in the other area. Is also feasible, and may be performed in the other area at a lower rate than in one area.

(8) The gaming machine shown in the above embodiment is, for example, a right-eye image (R) and a left-eye image (R) for forming a stereoscopic image, similarly to the gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-191660. A display body (for example, an image liquid crystal panel) capable of displaying L) alternately arranged in the horizontal direction and a display body provided in front of the display body are provided to prevent the player's left eye from visually recognizing the right eye image (R). In addition, it is provided with a stereoscopic image display means (for example, an image display device 5) having a parallax forming body (for example, a lenticular sheet) for preventing the player from visually recognizing the image (L) for the left eye by the right eye. You may.

Here, in the ROM of the effect control board, image data of a stereoscopic image (for stereoscopic viewing) (image data of the image for the right eye (R) and image data of the image for the left eye (L)) and a non-stereoscopic image (planar view) are stored. It is assumed that the image data of) is stored. The display control means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 or VDP) causes the display body to display the right-eye image (R) and the left-eye image (L) alternately in the horizontal direction based on the image data of the stereoscopic image. It is possible to execute one control and a second control for displaying the non-stereoscopic image on the display body based on the image data of the non-stereoscopic image.

When the display control means executes the first control, only the right eye image (R) is visually recognized from the player's right eye without the left eye image (L) being visually recognized through the parallax forming body, and the game is played. From the left eye of the person, only the left eye image (L) is visually recognized without the right eye image (R) being visually recognized through the parallax forming body. Then, due to the effect that a fusion image is generated at the intersection of the straight line connecting the player's right eye and the image for the right eye (the line of sight of the right eye) and the straight line connecting the player's left eye and the image for the left eye (the line of sight of the left eye), the left eye. Stereoscopic viewing based on the image for the right eye and the image for the right eye is possible.

On the other hand, when the display control means executes the second control, parallax is not formed between the non-stereoscopic image viewed from the player's right eye and the non-stereoscopic image viewed from the player's left eye. .. As a result, the intersection of the straight line connecting the player's right eye and the non-stereoscopic image (the line of sight of the right eye) and the straight line connecting the player's left eye and the non-stereoscopic image (the line of sight of the left eye) is the display position of the non-stereoscopic image. It becomes a plane view state in agreement with. For example, a predetermined (single) right-eye image may be used as the non-stereoscopic image, or a predetermined (single) left-eye image may be used as the non-stereoscopic image.

In the gaming machine provided with the display control means capable of switching between the state in which the first control is being executed and the state in which the second control is being executed, during the execution period of the division effect (or the division effect). During the fluctuation period based on the accompanying fluctuation pattern), the second control may be executed without executing the first control. For example, during the execution period (period from T2 to T15) of the split effect shown in FIGS. 10-14 or 10-23, the second control is executed without executing the first control, and the battle effect image after the end of the split effect. (For example, the image shown in FIG. 10-19 (13) or FIG. 10-24 (13)) is switched from the second control to the first control (in a state where stereoscopic viewing is possible). You may.

If the first control is performed while the split effect is being executed to enable stereoscopic viewing, both the first effect image 27TM100 and the second effect image 27TM200 are not given a sense of discomfort to the player. The image for the right eye (R) and the image for the left eye (L) must be prepared in advance so as to generate a fusion image having an appropriate depth in the back direction (Z-axis direction) of the screen when viewed from the player. It disappears. In the present embodiment, by not executing the first control that enables stereoscopic viewing when the divided effect is being executed, it is possible to prevent the effect data to be prepared from being excessively increased.

(Details of display control unit)
Next, the configuration for executing the division effect shown in the above-mentioned [Explanation of the feature unit 27TM] will be described in detail. FIG. 10-25 is a configuration diagram showing the display control unit 123. The drawing circuit 1510 in the VDP (Video Display Processor) 150 is used when the display control command input from the effect control CPU 120 via the CPU interface 1520 is a command to read image data from the CG ROM (Character Generator ROM) 160. Reads necessary image data from the CGROM 160 via the CG bus interface 1530 and outputs it to the decoder 1550. Image data encoded (data compressed) by the MPEG2 (Moving Picture Experts Group phase 2) method or the like is stored in the CGROM 160. The decoder 1550 decompresses the image data read from the CGROM 160, and writes the decompressed image data into the drawing material data RAM 1560.

The drawing circuit 1510 uses the image data stored in the drawing material data RAM 1560 to generate frame image data for displaying an image of one frame on the image display device 5, and creates frame image data in the drawing area of the VRAM (Video RAM) 170. Write. In this embodiment, if necessary, an object to be displayed formed by a set of polygons is arranged in a virtual three-dimensional space, texture mapping is performed on the object, and the object is converted into a virtual screen by rendering processing. Frame image data corresponding to the image obtained by projection is generated. The drive circuit 180 outputs R (red), G (green), and B (blue) image signals and synchronization signals based on the frame image data in the drawing area to the image display device 5. The image display device 5 displays, for example, a screen by a dot matrix method that drives a large number of pixels.

The VDP1500 may be a GPU (Graphics Processing Unit), a GCL (Graphics Controller LSI), or a microprocessor for image processing generally called a DSP (Digital Signal Processor). Further, the CGROM 160 may be, for example, a non-rewritable semiconductor memory, a rewritable semiconductor memory such as a flash memory, or a non-volatile recording medium such as a magnetic memory or an optical memory. It may be configured by using.

Next, a display mode of the effect image using the three-dimensional object image will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-26 to 10-30. As shown in FIGS. 10-26, when drawing an object image, the VDP1500 in the display control unit 123 sets the object OB to be displayed formed by a set of polygons in virtual three dimensions (x, y, z). When it is placed in space, texture mapping is performed on the object, and it is assumed that the object is viewed from a predetermined viewpoint EY (for example, viewpoint EY0) by rendering processing, a position separated from the viewpoint EY by a predetermined distance. The image IM obtained by projecting onto the virtual screen SC arranged in the above is obtained by arithmetic processing, and the image IM is displayed on the image display device 5 by controlling the drive circuit 180 (see FIG. 10-25). In this embodiment, the image IM projected on the virtual screen SC is drawn by perspective projection.

In the following description, the x-axis is the axis in the horizontal direction (horizontal direction of the screen), the direction from the origin (0,0,0) to the right of the screen is the positive direction, and from the origin (0,0,0). It is assumed that the direction to the left of the screen is the negative direction. Further, the y-axis is an axis in the vertical direction (vertical direction of the screen), the direction from the origin (0,0,0) toward the top of the screen is the positive direction, and the direction from the origin (0,0,0) to the bottom of the screen. It is assumed that the direction of travel is negative. Further, the z-axis is an axis in the vertical direction (screen depth direction) orthogonal to the screen, and the direction from the origin (0,0,0) toward the back of the screen is the positive direction, and the origin (0,0,0). It is assumed that the direction from to the front of the screen is the negative direction.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 10-27, the VDP1500 of the display control unit 123 is based on the effect image EG (an example of an image imitating the effect display area 27TM005A) in which the variable display of the effect symbol is executed. Then, by performing texture mapping on the xy plane of the rectangular parallelepiped object OB arranged in the virtual three-dimensional (x, y, z) space (Fig. 10-27 (1)), the xy plane of the object OB can be obtained. The effect image EG is synthesized (mapped). As a result, the xy plane of the object OB and the effect image EG are integrated in the virtual three-dimensional (x, y, z) space (FIG. 10-27 (2)). By executing the rendering process for the object OB, the same rendering process is executed for the effect image EG.

The drawing of the object image when executing the variable display of the effect symbol is executed when the display control unit 123 is controlled according to the contents of the process data. The effect control CPU 120 outputs a display control command to the display control unit 123 according to the content of the process data. The display control unit 123 includes information for designating the data of the object OB to be displayed at that timing. The drawing circuit 1510 in the VDP 1500 of the display control unit 123 selects the data of the CGROM 160 or the object OB to be displayed according to the display control command input from the effect control CPU 120 via the CPU interface 1520. Here, the data of the object OB includes the position information of the object OB in the virtual three-dimensional space, the coordinate information of the polygons forming the object OB, the coordinate information of the texture, and the like. The data of the selected object OB to be displayed is stored in the drawing material data RAM 1560. Then, information (effect designation information) indicating which effect the data of the object OB corresponds to is added to the data of the selected object OB to be displayed. Based on this effect designation information, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the image data of the selected display target object OB is an object for the effect image, an object for other backgrounds, and the like, and draws a circuit. Drawing of the object OB is performed using 1510.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 10-27, a set of decorative symbols on the left, middle, and right is variably displayed in the effect image EG synthesized on the xy plane of the object OB. Then, by changing (transforming or moving) the object OB in the virtual three-dimensional space, the effect image EG in which the variable display of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols is executed is also changed (transformed or moved). Will be done. As a result, the aspect of the drawn object image (for example, the length and angle of the displayed straight line) changes, and the aspect of the displayed decorative pattern (for example, the size and vertical and horizontal directions of the displayed decorative pattern) changes accordingly. Ratio, etc.) also changes.

FIG. 10-28 shows an example in which the position of the object OB in the virtual three-dimensional space is changed by rotating the object OB in the virtual three-dimensional space with the y-axis as the rotation axis. FIG. 10-28 (A) is a diagram showing an initial state when a rectangular parallelepiped object OB having an xy plane is combined with an effect image EG in a virtual three-dimensional space. Further, FIG. 10-28 (B1) is a diagram showing a state when the object OB in the initial state after the synthesis process is rotated by 45 degrees in the positive direction of the z-axis with the y-axis as the rotation axis. Further, FIG. 10-28 (B2) is a diagram showing a state when the object OB in the initial state after the synthesis process is rotated by 45 degrees in the negative direction of the z-axis with the y-axis as the rotation axis.

Here, as shown in FIGS. 10-29, when drawing the object image, the viewpoint corresponding to the object OB (for example, the viewpoint EY0) is set. The viewpoint EY0 in this example is set at a position relative to the xy plane in the virtual three-dimensional (x, y, z) space, and the line of sight is set so as to be parallel to the z-axis. That is, a viewpoint EY0 similar to the viewpoint when the player views the screen of the image display device 5 is set.

The viewpoint EY0 shown in the example of FIG. 10-29 is the midpoint (p, q is a real number] when the coordinates of the object OB in the initial state shown in FIG. 28 (A) with respect to the xy plane are (p, q) [p, q are real numbers]. It is located at o / 2, p / 2), and is located at a predetermined distance | r | [r is a real number, r <0] from the z-axis. That is, the viewpoint EY0 corresponding to the object OB in this example is located at a fixed point (p, q, r) in the virtual three-dimensional (x, y, z) space.

The object OB is drawn as an image obtained by perspective projection on the virtual screen SC when it is assumed that the object OB is viewed from the viewpoint EY0. Therefore, when the object OB after the compositing process is in the initial state, as shown in FIG. 28 (A), an image in which the left, middle, and right decorative symbols have the same size is displayed. Further, when the synthesized object OG is rotated 45 degrees in the positive direction of the z-axis with the y-axis as the rotation axis, as shown in FIG. 28 (B1), the left decorative pattern has the largest size and medium size. The image in which the decorative pattern is the second largest size and the right decorative pattern is the smallest size is displayed. Further, when the synthesized object OG is rotated by 45 degrees in the negative direction of the z-axis with the y-axis as the rotation axis, the right decorative pattern has the largest size and middle as shown in FIG. 28 (B2). The image in which the decorative pattern is the second largest size and the left decorative pattern is the smallest size is displayed.

In this way, the VDP1500 in the display control unit 123 performs texture mapping based on the effect image EG on the object OB arranged in the virtual three-dimensional space as a synthesis process, and performs the texture mapping on the object OB. By changing (transforming or moving), an image when the three-dimensional object OB after the change (after deformation or movement) is viewed from the viewpoint EY0 is drawn by perspective projection to generate an image IM. As a result, the generated image IM naturally reflects the display mode after the change (deformation or movement) of the effect image EG mapped to the object OB. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the display control unit 123 as compared with the case where the display mode of the effect image EG is sequentially calculated based only on the data of the effect image EG that is not associated with the data of the object OB. It becomes.

In the example of FIGS. 10-29, the viewpoint EY0 is a fixed point (p, q, r) in the virtual three-dimensional space. Not limited to such a form, the position of the viewpoint to be set may be different according to the game state, the fluctuation pattern, the advance notice effect, the jackpot expectation, and the like. Further, when arranging a plurality of object OBs in the virtual three-dimensional space, a corresponding viewpoint may be set for each object OB. For example, as shown below, when two objects OB1 and OB2 are arranged in the virtual three-dimensional space, the viewpoint EY1 corresponding to the object OB1 and the viewpoint EY2 corresponding to the object OB2 are set, and the object OB1 is set. For, the image obtained when viewed from the viewpoint EY1 may be drawn, and for the object OB2, the image obtained when viewed from the viewpoint EY2 may be drawn.

For example, when the above-mentioned division effect is executed, the VDP1500 displays the effect image EG1 on which the first decorative symbol is displayed on the xy plane of the rectangular parallelepiped object OB1 arranged in the virtual three-dimensional (x, y, z) space. The first synthesis process for synthesizing is executed. Then, the object OB1 on which the first synthesis process is executed is rotated by 45 degrees in the negative direction of the z-axis with the y-axis as the rotation axis (see FIG. 28 (B2)), and the rotated object OB1 is viewed as the viewpoint EY1. The image viewed from the front is drawn by fluoroscopic projection to generate the image IM1 (the image corresponding to the first effect image 27TM100). Further, the VDP1500 executes a second composition process of synthesizing the effect image EG2 on which the second decorative pattern is displayed on the xy plane of the rectangular parallelepiped object OB2 arranged in the virtual three-dimensional (x, y, z) space. .. Then, the object OB2 on which the second synthesis process is executed is rotated by 45 degrees in the positive direction of the z-axis with the y-axis as the rotation axis (see FIG. 28 (B1)), and the rotated object OB2 is viewed as the viewpoint EY2. An image IM2 (an image corresponding to the second production image 27TM200) is generated by drawing an image when viewed from above by fluoroscopic projection.

Then, the VDP1500 executes display control in which the image IM1 is superimposed and displayed on the right portion of the background image and the image IM2 is superimposed and displayed on the left portion of the background image, so that, for example, as shown in FIG. 10-30, the background The composite image including the first effect image 27TM100 and the second effect image 27TM200 superimposed on the image is displayed as the effect image of the divided effect.

Here, when the image of the changed (after rotation) object OB1 viewed from the viewpoint EY1 is drawn by perspective projection to generate the image IM1, the viewpoint EY1 is created in virtual three dimensions (x, y, z). Fixed points in space (p1, q1, r1) [p1, q1, r1 are real numbers, r1 <0, and by locating them at | r | <| r1 |], when viewed from a position farther than the viewpoint EY0. The image of is drawn by perspective projection to generate the image IM1 (∵ | r | <| r1 |). As a result, the image IM1 (the image corresponding to the first effect image 27TM100) is displayed in the first effect image display area 27TM100A, which is a smaller area than the effect display area 27TM005A.

Similarly, when the image of the changed (after rotation) object OB2 viewed from the viewpoint EY2 is drawn by perspective projection to generate the image IM2, the viewpoint EY2 is virtual three-dimensionally (x, y, z). Fixed points in space (p2, q2, r2) [p2, q2, r2 are real numbers, r2 <0, and by locating them at | r | <| r2 |], when viewed from a position farther than the viewpoint EY0. The image of is drawn by perspective projection to generate the image IM2 (∵ | r | <| r2 |). As a result, the image IM2 (the image corresponding to the second effect image 27TM200) is displayed in the second effect image display area 27TM200A, which is an area smaller than the entire screen of the image display device 5.

In the above example of the division effect, a plurality of viewpoints (in this example, two objects OB1 and OB2) corresponding to each of a plurality of objects (in this example, two objects OB1 and OB2) are arranged and drawn in a virtual three-dimensional space. In this example, a drawing mode of a multi-viewpoint drawing mode for drawing an image obtained when viewed from two viewpoints EY1 and EY2) is adopted, but a plurality of objects (in this example, two objects OB1 and OB2) are adopted. ) May be adopted as a drawing mode of a one-viewpoint drawing mode in which an image obtained when viewed from a common viewpoint EY1'is drawn.

In the present embodiment, the effect image EG corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol is xy on the z-axis negative direction side (front side of the screen) of the object OB arranged in the virtual three-dimensional (x, y, z) space. When the compositing process (texture mapping) for compositing on a plane is executed, the object OB for which the compositing process is executed is changed (transformed or moved), and the object OB after the change (deformed or moved) is viewed from the viewpoint EY0. An example is shown in which the image of is drawn by perspective projection to generate an image IM, but the background image is not limited to such a form, and an object OB arranged in a virtual three-dimensional (x, y, z) space is shown. Performs a composition process (texture mapping) to synthesize to the xy plane on the positive direction side of the z-axis (back side of the screen), changes (transforms or moves) the object OB on which the composition process is executed, and after the change (transformation or movement). The image IM3 may be generated by drawing an image of the object OB (after movement) viewed from the viewpoint EY3 by perspective projection.

In this way, by changing (transforming or moving) the object OB in the state where the background image is combined with the object OB, the aspect of the background image displayed on the entire screen of the effect display area 27TM005A of the image display device 5 can be obtained. It becomes possible to execute a changing shake vision effect. The shake vision effect described above has not only the effect of changing the mode of the background image synthesized on the object OB, but also the effect of changing the mode of the effect image EG synthesized on the same object OB. This shake vision effect may be executed as an effect suggesting that the effect being executed ends, or may be executed as an effect when the execution period of the effect being executed is longer than a predetermined period, and is a big hit. It may be executed as a chance-up effect suggesting that the degree of expectation is high.

In the above embodiment, the VDP1500 of the display control unit 123 of the effect control CPU 120 that has received the variation pattern designation command serves as the second effect image 27TM200 as a predetermined movie (movie A (short)) corresponding to the designated variation pattern. , Movie A (long), movie B (short), movie B (long)) will be played. Here, with respect to the second effect image 27TM200, unlike the first effect image 27TM100, the original image (for example, the above IM2) for forming the second effect image 27TM200 is created in a virtual three-dimensional (x, y, z) space. It may be possible to display the image without performing the composition process of synthesizing it with the three-dimensional object OB2 arranged in.

For example, the first movie in which the right decorative symbol is displayed in the largest size, the middle decorative symbol in the second largest size, and the left decorative symbol in the smallest size, and the left decorative symbol in the largest size and the middle decorative symbol in the second size. A second movie in which a large size and a right decorative pattern are displayed in the smallest size is prepared in advance (stored in the ROM of the effect control board in association with the fluctuation pattern). Then, when the divided effect based on the effect control of the first pattern is executed, the second effect image frame 27TM210 having a predetermined shape is superimposed and displayed on the right portion of the background image, and the second effect image frame 27TM210 is displayed. When the first movie is played within the range and the divided effect based on the effect control of the second pattern is executed, the second effect image frame 27TM210 having a predetermined shape is superimposed and displayed on the left portion of the background image. The second movie is reproduced within the range of the second production image frame 27TM210.

In this way, the second production image 27TM200 is displayed by superimposing a predetermined movie on the background image without generating an image based on the object OB arranged in the virtual three-dimensional (x, y, z) space. It may be displayable. Further, the first effect image 27TM100 can also be displayed by superimposing a predetermined movie on the background image without generating an image based on the object OB arranged in the virtual three-dimensional (x, y, z) space. May be. In addition, within the variable display period accompanied by the split effect (or within the split effect period), the period during which the display control for generating an image based on the object OB arranged in the virtual three-dimensional (x, y, z) space is executed is executed. , A predetermined effect image EG (for example, a movie image corresponding to a fluctuation pattern) is superimposed and displayed on a background image without generating an image based on an object OB arranged in a virtual three-dimensional (x, y, z) space. The period during which the display control is executed may be switched.

In addition to moving (rotating) the object OB arranged in the virtual three-dimensional space (x, y, z), the object OB may be deformed. For example, the rectangular parallelepiped object may be transformed into a cube by changing the coordinates of the vertices of the rectangular parallelepiped object OB arranged in the virtual three-dimensional space (x, y, z). Further, the rectangular parallelepiped object OB is divided into two rectangular parallelepiped objects OB, and an image corresponding to the first effect image frame 27T110 is synthesized in one rectangular parallelepiped object OB after the division, and the other rectangular parallelepiped after the division is combined. An image corresponding to the second effect image frame 27TM210 may be combined with the object OB.

Further, all or a part of the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modification, and the configurations shown in the following embodiment and each modification may be arbitrarily combined.

It should be noted that the above-described embodiment and the following-described embodiment disclosed this time are exemplary in all respects and are not considered to be restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown by the scope of claims rather than the above description and the description below, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

The gaming machine of the present invention can also be set to any one of a plurality of set values having different advantages (setting values 1 to 6 having different ranges of random numbers for jackpot determination) and a game. It is a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) provided with an image display device (image display device 5) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the person and can display an effect image (image IM). hand,
A suggestion effect control means (CPU 120 for effect control) capable of executing a suggestion effect (third setting suggestion effect, fourth setting suggestion effect) for suggesting settings, and
A three-dimensional object (object OB) is placed in a virtual space (virtual three-dimensional (x, y, z) space), and an image when the three-dimensional object (object OB) is viewed from a specific viewpoint is perspectively projected. An image generation means (VDP1500 of the display control unit 123) for generating an effect image (image IM) by drawing with the image is provided.
The image generation means (VDP1500 of the display control unit 123) is
A special image (effect image EG, which may be referred to as a predetermined image in the examples) that imitates the effect display area (effect display area 27TM005A) of the image display device (image display device 5), and a virtual space (virtual three-dimensional). Performs a predetermined process (synthesis process) for associating a three-dimensional object (object OB) arranged in the original (x, y, z) space).
An image when the three-dimensional object (object OB) subjected to the predetermined processing (synthesis processing) is changed (transformed or moved) and the three-dimensional object after the change is viewed from a specific viewpoint (viewpoint EY0) is displayed. Draw by perspective projection to generate a production image (image IM),
further,
A process including super reach A to C in step 097IWS104 in the effect control CPU 120, which can execute a specific effect (for example, super reach A to C) suggesting whether or not it is controlled in an advantageous state. A part in which a table is selected and steps 097IWS106 and S305 are executed), a specific image (for example, a chance-up image) and a predetermined image (for example, character image 097IW11, character image 097IW21) different from the specific image during execution of the specific effect. ) Is provided (for example, a portion in which the process table including the super reach A to C and the chance-up effect is selected in step 097IWS104 in the effect control CPU 120 and steps 097IWS106 and S305 are executed). The specific effect executing means can execute a plurality of types of specific effects (for example, super reach A to C) including at least a first specific effect (for example, super reach A) and a second specific effect (for example, super reach B). Yes, the image display means can display at least the first specific image (for example, image A1, image A2, image A3, image A4) as the specific image during the execution of the first specific effect, and the second specific effect. The second specific image (for example, image B1, image B2, image B3) can be displayed during the execution of the above, and the specific image in the normal mode (for example, white) and the expectation that the specific image is controlled in a more advantageous state than the normal mode. It is possible to display a specific image in a special mode (for example, blue, green, red, iridescent) suggesting a high degree, and the predetermined image is a display mode not related to the expectation degree controlled in an advantageous state. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 15-9 to 15-16, the display mode of the character image 097IW11 and the character image 097IW21 does not change), the image display means is the first special when displaying a specific image according to the special mode. It is possible to display a specific image by adding an effect element (for example, an effect image of display colors of blue, green, red, and rainbow colors), which is different from the first special effect element when displaying a specific image in a normal mode. A game machine capable of displaying a specific image by adding a second special effect element (for example, an effect image having a white display color) (see FIGS. 15-9 to 15-16) can be mentioned.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the effect of changing the display mode of the effect display area. Further, it is possible to make the player recognize that the specific image is a preview image, and it is possible to draw the player's attention to the specific image.

That is, by changing the three-dimensional object that has undergone the predetermined processing and drawing an image of the changed three-dimensional object when viewed from a specific viewpoint by perspective projection to generate an effect image, the effect is produced. The first special effect element is used when displaying a specific image in a special mode that suggests that the effect of changing the display mode of the display area is improved and that the expectation of being controlled in an advantageous state is higher than that of the normal mode. By additionally displaying the specific image, it becomes easy to recognize that the specific image is a preview image. That is, it is possible to provide a game machine that is easy to understand when the expectation is high and is rich in interest.

Further, the specific effect may be displayed three-dimensionally. For example, if two-dimensional display data and three-dimensional display data are provided as data for a specific effect and are controlled by a big hit, three-dimensional display may be performed based on the three-dimensional display data. By doing so, the player can guess the jackpot expectation depending on the display mode of the specific effect, and the interest is improved.

Further, when the special effect element is added, the special effect element may be displayed three-dimensionally when an advantageous privilege such as a big hit or a probability fluctuation is given by the player. By doing so, it can be expected that benefits will be given by the three-dimensional display, and the interest will be improved.

Further, as another example of a gaming machine capable of improving the interest, a gaming machine capable of playing a game and being controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and is controlled to the advantageous state. A process table including super reach A to C is selected in step 097IWS104 in the effect control CPU 120 to execute a specific effect executing means (for example, super reach A to C) that suggests whether or not to be performed. Step 097IWS106, S305 is executed), a specific image (for example, a chance-up image) and a predetermined image different from the specific image (for example, character image 097IW11, character image 097IW21) are displayed during execution of the specific effect. A specific effect executing means including a possible image display means (for example, a portion in which the process table including the super reach A to C and the chance-up effect is selected in step 097IWS104 in the effect control CPU 120 and steps 097IWS106 and S305 are executed). Can execute a plurality of types of specific effects (for example, Super Reach A to C) including at least a first specific effect (for example, Super Reach A) and a second specific effect (for example, Super Reach B), and display an image. The means can display at least the first specific image (for example, image A1, image A2, image A3, image A4) as the specific image during the execution of the first specific effect, and during the execution of the second specific effect. The second specific image (for example, image B1, image B2, image B3) can be displayed, and the specific image in the normal mode (for example, white) and the expectation that the specific image is controlled in a more advantageous state than the normal mode are high. It is possible to display a specific image in a special mode (for example, blue, green, red, iridescent) suggesting that the predetermined image is a display mode that is not related to the degree of expectation controlled in an advantageous state (for example, FIG. As shown in 15-9 to 15-16, the display mode of the character image 097IW11 and the character image 097IW21 does not change), and the image display means has a first special effect element (for example, when displaying a specific image according to the special mode). , Blue, green, red, rainbow color display color effect image) can be added to display a specific image, and when displaying a specific image in a normal mode, a second special effect different from the first special effect element A game machine capable of displaying a specific image by adding an element (for example, an effect image of a white display color) (see FIGS. 15-9 to 15-16) can be mentioned. Is done. A form example of this game machine will be described below as another form example.

(Example of other forms)

First, with reference to FIGS. 14 to 16, among the basic configurations and controls of the pachinko gaming machine 1 described later, the differences from the above-mentioned FIGS. 2, 4, and 5 will be described. Except for these differences, the basic configuration and control are basically the same as the configuration and control of the above-mentioned pachinko gaming machine 1 described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 7.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning opening that is changed between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 11). The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and the movable wing pieces are in a vertical position when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, so that the tip of the movable wing pieces is in a vertical position. Is close to the winning ball device 6A and is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening is closed). On the other hand, the variable-sweep wing device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening because the movable wing piece is in the tilted position when the solenoid 81 is on (second start). It is also said that the winning opening is open.) When a game ball enters the second start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls can be paid out and the second special figure game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any as long as it changes between the closed state and the open state, and is not limited to the one provided with the electric tulip type accessory.

A general winning opening 10 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four positions on the lower left and right sides of the game area), which is always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when entering any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 11), and has a large winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state depending on the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for special electric accessory) is off, the big winning door closes the big winning door and the game ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is on, the large winning opening door opens the large winning opening, and the game ball can easily enter the large winning opening. Become.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball. When a game ball enters the large winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters, for example, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening 10.

The entry of a game ball into each winning opening including the general winning opening 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning a prize at the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as a starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the left side of the game area). As an example, the ordinary symbol display 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of the ordinary symbol as a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from the special symbol. The ordinary symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The normal symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of a normal pattern is also called a normal figure game.

A passing gate 41 through which a game ball can pass is provided on the left side of the image display device 5. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41, the normal drawing game is executed.

A normal symbol display 25C is provided above the normal symbol display 20. The normal figure hold display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal figure hold storages, which is the number of normal figure games whose execution is held, by the number of LEDs lit.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an out opening for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the game machine frame 3, and game effect lamps 909 for game effects are further provided around the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 909 is configured to include an LED.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (not shown in FIG. 1), a movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided.

At the lower right position of the game machine frame 3, a ball striking operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to launch the game ball toward the game area by the striking ball launching device is provided.

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, the game balls paid out as prize balls and the game balls rented by the predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be able to be supplied to the hitting ball launching device. ) A hit ball supply plate (upper plate) is provided. Below the upper plate, a hit ball supply plate (lower plate) is provided, in which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be gripped and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed and operated by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 11).

A push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area so that the player can perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. The operation on the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 11).

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting the movement (operation, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Outline of the progress of the game)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the rotation operation of the ball striking operation handle 30 included in the pachinko game machine 1 by the player. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display 20 is started. If the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during which the previous normal map game is being executed (when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 but the normal map game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately) , The game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal symbol game, if a specific normal symbol (design per normal symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "per normal symbol". On the other hand, if the normal symbol other than the normal symbol (the normal symbol lost symbol) is stopped and displayed as the confirmed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "normal symbol lost". When it becomes "per normal drawing", the opening control is performed so that the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period (the second starting winning opening is opened).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special figure game is being executed or during the period controlled by the big hit game state or the small hit game state described later (the start prize has occurred). If the special figure game based on the start winning cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special figure game based on the approach is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes a "big hit" and a jackpot symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol, for example, "2") different from the above is stopped and displayed, it becomes "small hit". Further, if a special symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "missing".

After the display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", it is controlled to the big hit game state as an advantageous state advantageous for the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes "small hit", it is controlled to the small hit game state.

In the big hit game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined mode. The open state includes the elapsed timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the large winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until the earlier timing. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the large winning opening can be opened in one round, and is also hereinafter referred to as an opening upper limit period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is open in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until the maximum number of times (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the big hit game state, the player can obtain the prize ball by letting the game ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the opening upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

A jackpot type is set for "big hit". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and opening upper limit period) of the big winning opening and game states after the big hit game state (normal state, time saving state, probability change state, etc., which will be described later) are prepared, and the big hit is made according to these. The type is set. As the jackpot type, a jackpot type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained or a jackpot type in which a small number of prize balls or almost no prize balls can be obtained may be provided.

In the small hit game state, the large winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small hit game state, the same opening mode as the big hit game state in some big hit types (the number of times the big winning opening is opened is the same as the number of rounds, and the closing timing of the big winning opening is also the same. Etc.), the big winning opening is opened. As with the big hit type, the small hit type may be provided for the "small hit".

After the jackpot game state is completed, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a probability change state according to the jackpot type.

In the time saving state, control (time saving control) is executed in which the average special figure fluctuation time (period in which the special figure is changed) is shortened as compared with the normal state. In the time saving state, the average fluctuation time of the normal map (the period during which the normal map is changed) is shortened from the normal state, and the probability of becoming a "normal map hit" in the normal map game is improved from the normal state. Controls (high opening control, high base control) that make it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening are also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol) is improved, which is advantageous for the player.

In the probability variation state (probability fluctuation state), in addition to the time saving control, the probability variation control in which the probability that the display result becomes a "big hit" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The probabilistic state is a state that is more advantageous for the player because it is a state in which a “big hit” is likely to occur in addition to improving the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol.

The time saving state and the probability change state continue until any one of the end conditions such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next big hit game state are satisfied first. A game whose end condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also referred to as a number-cutting (time-cutting time reduction, number-cutting probability change, etc.).

The normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a big hit gaming state, a time saving state, and a probability change state, which is advantageous for the player, and the display result in the normal drawing game is "normal drawing hit". The pachinko game machine 1 such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game becomes a "big hit" returns to a predetermined state after the power is turned on (for example, when a system reset is performed). It is in the same controlled state as (when the process is not executed).

The state in which the probability change control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which the probability change control is not executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which the time saving control is executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which the time saving control is not executed is also called a low base state. By combining these, it is also called a low-accuracy high-base state in the time-saving state, a high-accuracy high-base state in the probability variation state, and a low-accuracy low-base state in the normal state. The high-accuracy state and low-base state are also called the high-accuracy low-base state.

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state is continuously controlled to the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small hit" (however, "small hit" occurs. If the special figure game at the time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above number of times cut, the game state is naturally changed). It should be noted that there may be no "small hit" as the display result of the special figure game.

The game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big winning opening) during the big hit game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to a probabilistic state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects of notifying the progress of the game and enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, and in addition to or instead of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and / or the game effect lamp 909 It may be performed by the point or the like, turning off the light, or the operation of the movable body 32.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" provided in the image display device 5, the first special figure game or the first special figure game or the first 2 In response to the start of the special figure game, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as the finalized special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, the final decorative symbol (combination of three decorative symbols) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. ) Is also displayed (derived) as a stop.

In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display of a decorative symbol that has not yet been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination described later. It is a mode in which is continuing.

In addition, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative symbol. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (display result of the special figure game or variable display of the decorative symbol) to be "big hit" (also called big hit reliability or big hit expectation) is determined according to the production mode. Multiple different types of reach effects are performed. Reach production includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has a higher hit reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a fixed decorative symbol that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration). The display result of the variable display of the symbol is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". ..

In the case of a "probability change jackpot" that is controlled to a probability change state after the end of the jackpot game state, an odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and displayed as a stop, and the probability change state is entered after the end of the jackpot game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", an even number of decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be aligned and displayed as a stop. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a probabilistic symbol, and the even-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a non-probable variable symbol (normal symbol). After the non-probability change symbol becomes the reach mode, the promotion effect that finally becomes the "probability change jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", a fixed decorative symbol (for example, "for example," "is a predetermined small hit combination as a display result of variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5. 1 3 5 ”etc.) Is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a“ small hit ”). As an example, the decorative symbols constituting the chance eyes are stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit type of the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state), and when it becomes "small hit". , A common fixed decorative symbol may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "missing", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode, and the variable display result of the decorative symbol is a fixed decorative symbol of a non-reach combination ("" (Also referred to as "non-reach loss") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "missing", after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a predetermined reach combination ("reach loss") that is not a jackpot combination. The fixed decorative symbol (also referred to as) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be "reach loss").

The effect that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute includes displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution and a look-ahead notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display (variable display in which execution is suspended) before execution. As the look-ahead notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the usual mode may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 5, one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays by temporarily stopping the decorative symbol during the variable display of the decorative symbol and then restarting the variable display. The pseudo-continuous production may be executed.

Even during the big hit game state, the big hit middle effect that notifies the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit middle effect, an effect of notifying the number of rounds and a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit gaming state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small hit game state, the small hit medium effect for notifying the small hit game state is executed. It should be noted that the big hit game during the small hit game state and in some big hit types (the big hit type in the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state, for example, the big hit type in which the subsequent game state is a highly accurate state). By executing a common effect depending on the state, the player may not know whether the player is currently in the small hit game state or the big hit game state. In such a case, by executing a common effect after the end of the small hit game state and after the end of the big hit game state, it is not possible to distinguish between the high accuracy state and the low accuracy state. You may.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with, for example, a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13, a lamp control board 9014, a relay board 15, and the like as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of a special figure game (including management of hold), execution of a normal figure game (including management of hold), and a big hit. It has a function to control a game state, a small hit game state, a game state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105 are provided.

The CPU 103 performs a process of controlling the progress of the game (a process of realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing the program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (data such as a fluctuation pattern described later, an effect control command described later, and various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. .. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are stored for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The game random number may be one that is updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (one that is updated by software).

The I / O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display 20, first hold). It is configured to include an output port for transmitting (a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the normal figure hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 is a detection signal (a game ball passes or is passed) from various switches for detecting a game ball (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23). (A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering) is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. By transmitting the detection signal, the passage or approach of the game ball is detected.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for an ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for a prize-winning door. To transmit.

The main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control) issues an effect control command (command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game) according to the progress of the game as a part of controlling the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of a special figure game (including a jackpot type)) and a variation pattern used when executing a special figure game (details will be described later). )), The game status (for example, the start and end of the variable display, the opening status of the large winning opening, the occurrence of winning, the number of stored memories, the game status), the command for specifying the occurrence of an error, and the like are included.

The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and produces an effect (various effects according to the progress of the game) based on the received effect control command. It has a function of executing various notifications (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery).

The effect control board 12 is equipped with an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 is a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 by executing the program stored in the ROM 121 (a process for realizing the above-mentioned function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed). (Including the decision, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal output when an operation by the player is detected and an appropriate signal indicating the operation content). It may also instruct the control unit 123.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CG ROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes the effect based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 supplies the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120, thereby causing the image display device 5 to display the effect image. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal for designating the output sound) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the game effect lamp 909. Or, a lamp signal (a signal for designating a lamp lighting / extinguishing mode) is supplied to the lamp control board 9014. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 32.

The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let me.

The lamp control board 9014 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 909, drives the game effect lamp 909 based on the lamp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 909 in a mode specified by the lamp signal. To do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting / extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes audio output, lamp lighting / extinguishing control (sound designation signal, lamp signal supply, etc.), and movable body 32 control (signal supply for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 updatablely counts numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used to execute various effects. The effect random number may be one that is updated (updated by software) when the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 is for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal) and an input port for taking in the effect control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 11. It is configured to include the output port of.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 9014, are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 12 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to perform the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port via the switch circuit 110. It is determined whether or not detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S9021). Subsequently, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S9022). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of times jackpots have occurred) and start information (starting) supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1. Data such as information indicating the number of times of winning (information indicating the number of times of winning, etc.) and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times of probability change state, etc.) are output (step S9023).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S9024). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process (step S9025). By executing the special symbol process process for each timer interrupt by the CPU 103, it is possible to manage the execution and hold of the special symbol game, control the big hit game state and the small hit game state, control the game state, and the like (for details, refer to the details. See below).

Following the special symbol process processing, the normal symbol process processing is executed (step S9026). By executing the normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, the CPU 103 manages the execution and hold of the normal figure game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passing of the game ball through the passing gate 41). It enables opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "per-figure hit". The execution of the normal figure game is performed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of normal figure reservations is displayed by turning on the normal figure hold display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process process, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when a power failure occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes the command control process (step S9027). The CPU 103 may send and set an effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to a control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S9025 shown in FIG. 12 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S90101).

In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the hold storage number is executed. When the start winning is generated, the display result (including the jackpot type) and the random value for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted and stored as hold information. Further, a process of pre-reading and determining a display result or a fluctuation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After the hold information and the number of hold storages are stored, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for designating the determination result such as the occurrence of the start winning prize, the number of hold storages, and the look-ahead determination is made on the effect control board 12. .. The effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S9027 shown in FIG. 12 after the special symbol process process is completed. Is transmitted to.

After executing the start winning determination process in step S90101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal processing in step S90110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special figure game or the second special figure game based on the presence or absence of the pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is set to "big hit" or "small hit" based on the random value for determining the display result, and the big hit type when the display result is set to "big hit". Is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a confirmed special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. The special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 11 priority digestion). Further, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be memorized, and the starting condition of the special figure game may be satisfied in the winning order (also referred to as winning order digestion).

When making various determinations based on the random number value, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (a table in which the determination value to be compared with the random number value is assigned to the determination result) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S90111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this fluctuation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is set using a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on a preliminary determination result of whether or not the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". The process of deciding on is included. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The fluctuation pattern includes the execution time of the special symbol game (special symbol fluctuation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol (presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative symbol. It specifies the content of the effect (type of reach effect, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S90112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. In this special symbol change processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are set to change the special symbol, and the elapsed time from the start of the change of the special symbol. It includes processing to measure. In addition, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S90113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, and stop display (derive) the confirmed special symbol that is the display result of the special symbol. Contains the process of making settings for. Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". If the display result is "missing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "miss", the game state is also updated when the time saving state or the probability change state is controlled and the end of the number of cuts is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot release preprocessing in step S90114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This big hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting to start the execution of the round in the big hit game state and open the big winning opening based on the display result being "big hit". It has been. When the large winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, the upper limit period for opening the big winning opening and the upper limit number of executions for the round are set according to which type of jackpot is used. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing ends.

The process of opening the jackpot in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. In this big hit opening process, the big winning opening is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. It includes a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the device from the open state to the closed state. Then, when the large winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6" after executing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door. End the processing while the jackpot is open.

The post-processing after opening the jackpot in step S90116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this post-opening process of the jackpot, a process of determining whether or not the number of executions of the round that opens the jackpot has reached the set maximum number of executions, and a jackpot game state when the maximum number of executions is reached. It includes processing to make settings to terminate. Then, when the number of round executions has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of round executions reaches the upper limit, the special figure process flag is set. The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the post-launch processing is completed.

The jackpot end processing of step S90117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In this jackpot end process, there is a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending effect as an effect action for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing to make various settings to start control and time reduction control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end processing ends.

The small hit release preprocessing in step S90118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. This small hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting the large winning opening to be in the open state in the small hit game state based on the display result being "small hit". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit release preprocessing ends.

The small hit opening process in step S90119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. In this small hit opening process, it is the timing to measure the elapsed time from the opening state of the big winning opening and to return the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing to determine whether or not it is. When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small hit game state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the processing during the small hit opening process ends.

The small hit end process of step S90120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. The small hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit game state is executed has elapsed. Here, when the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small hit end process ends.

(Main operation of the effect control board 12)
Next, the main operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. When the effect control board 12 receives the power supply voltage from the power source board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 6 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71) to clear the RAM 122, set various initial values, and press the effect control board 12. Set the registers of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). Further, the initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on the register setting of the CTC, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and waits.

Further, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt disabled, but if a CPU that is not automatically interrupt disabled is used, an interrupt occurs. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, among the input ports included in the I / O 125, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in, for example, the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122. After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt enable, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and the command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are used. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read effect control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that which effect control command is received and the content specified by the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process process or the like. Turn on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display the background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitting body such as a game effect lamp 909 and a decorative LED, and a movable body 32. Controls are performed to operate various production devices such as the driving operation of the LED. Further, regarding the control content of the effect operation using various effect devices, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed according to the effect control command or the like transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the effect control process process in step S76, the effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by the software. After that, the process returns to the process of step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes the read-ahead notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, a determination, determination, and setting for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold storages specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command or the like for designating the start of the variable display is received from the main board 11. Etc. are included. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 is to be started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (fixed decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the reach effect, and various types are based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command. It is determined whether or not various effects such as a notice effect are executed, their modes, and the execution start timing. Then, an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result and the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of the decorative symbol, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is completed. The display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 in response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , Driving the movable body 32, outputting voice and sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting the command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and commanding the lamp control board 9014 (illumination signal). Various effect controls are executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on / off / blinking the game effect lamp 909 and the decorative LED according to the output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or a command is received from the main board 11 to specify that the fixed decorative symbol is to be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, the final decorative symbol, which is the display result of the decorative symbol, is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the effect process during variable display ends.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command that specifies to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when the effect control command for specifying the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received, if the command specifies the start of the big hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is set to "6". Update to. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small hit medium effect process. In addition, when the reception waiting time of the command elapses without receiving the command specifying to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "missing". Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the waiting process for hitting the special figure ends.

The small hit medium effect process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “4”. In this small hit medium effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect content in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the set content. .. Further, in the small hit middle effect processing, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify that the small hit game state is terminated, the value of the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small hit end effect. Update to a certain "5" and end the small hit medium production process.

The small hit end effect process in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “5”. In this small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to, for example, the end of the small hit game state, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the set contents. To execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end effect process is terminated.

The jackpot effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this big hit middle effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect content in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the set content. Further, in the big hit middle effect processing, for example, the value of the effect control process flag is set to the value corresponding to the ending effect process in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify the end of the big hit game state. Update to 7 ”and end the production process during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, and various effect controls of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents Run. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending effect process ends.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic explanation is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize, but the game medium is enclosed and a score is given based on the occurrence of a prize. It may be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko game machine 1 is shown as a game machine, but a medal is inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the player When a symbol is stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by, if the combination of stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus) The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed and provided by the detachable recording medium to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the computer device and the like in advance. It may take the form of being distributed by installing it in the storage device of the. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on the network connected via the communication line or the like by providing the communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The game can be executed not only by attaching a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the programs and data downloaded via the communication line or the like in the internal memory or the like. It may be a form of direct execution using hardware resources on the other device side on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Further, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, one of the expressions for comparison of various ratios such as the execution ratio of the production (expressions such as "high", "low", and "differentiate") is "0%". It may be included. For example, one may have a proportion of "0%" and the other may have a proportion of "100%" or less than "100%".

(Explanation of Feature 103SG of This Embodiment)
Next, the feature unit 103SG of this embodiment will be described. In the description of each step of the flowchart in this embodiment, for example, the part described as "step S1" may be abbreviated as "S1" or "103SGS1", or "normal reach" may be abbreviated as "N reach". "Super reach" may be abbreviated as "S reach" or "SP reach". Further, for a configuration similar to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the basic description or having a different form, arrangement position, etc. but having the same function, detailed description will be omitted by adding the same reference numerals. In the following, the front side of FIG. 1 is the front (front, front) side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the back side is the back (rear) side, and the vertical and horizontal directions when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is viewed from the front side. It will be explained as a standard. The front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment is a facing surface facing the player playing the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

Next, the gaming machine according to the first embodiment in the feature unit 103SG of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 14-1 to 14-19.

First, FIG. 14-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 103SG of this embodiment, showing the layout of the main members. As shown in FIGS. 14-1 and 14-3, the pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly classified into an outer frame 103SG001a formed in a vertically long square frame shape and a gaming board (gauge) constituting the game board surface. It is composed of a board) 2 and a game machine frame (underframe) 103SG003 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined ball launching device and is driven into the game area. Further, in the game machine frame 103SG003, between the door opening position where the glass door frame 103SG003a having a glass window opens the front surface of the game machine frame 103SG003 centering on the left side and the door closing position which closes the front surface. It is rotatably provided, and the game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 103SG003a, and when the glass door frame 103SG003a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

Further, the game machine frame 103SG003 can be opened by inserting the door key owned by the game machine clerk or the like into a lock (not shown) and unlocking it, and the game machine frame 103SG003 and the glass can be opened by players other than the clerk. The door frame 103SG003a cannot be opened.

The left game area 103SG002L is a game area in which a (left-handed) game ball launched relatively weakly by the operation of the ball striking operation handle 30 flows down, and the right game area 103SG002R is a left game area 103SG002L by the operation of the ball striking operation handle 30. This is a game area in which a (right-handed) game ball launched more strongly than the game ball flowing down passes through the upper path 103SG002C of the image display device 5 and flows down.

Further, a general winning opening 10 is arranged in the left game area 103SG002L, and in the right game area 103SG002R, a passing gate 41, a variable winning ball device 6B, and a general winning ball device 6B are arranged from the upstream side to the downstream side of the right game area 103SG002R. A winning opening 10 and a special variable winning ball device 7 are arranged. That is, the game ball flowing down the left game area 103SG002L can win a prize in the first starting winning opening formed by the general winning opening 10 and the winning ball device 6A, and the game ball flowing down the right game area 103SG002R is variable. It is possible to win a prize in the second starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6B, the general winning opening 10 and the large winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7, and it is possible to pass through the passing gate 41.

As shown in FIG. 14-1, a plurality of obstacle nails 103SGK1 are arranged between the winning ball device 6A, the variable winning ball device 6B, and the special variable winning ball device 7. Therefore, the game ball flowing down the left game area 103SG002L cannot win the second start winning opening or the large winning opening, and the game ball flowing down the right game area 103SG002R cannot win the first starting winning opening. It has become.

As shown in FIGS. 14-2 and 14-3, the main substrate 11 in the feature portion 103SG of this embodiment is housed in the substrate case 103SG201 which is configured to be openable by the first member and the second member. It is mounted on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the state. Further, on the main board 11, a lock switch 103SG051 for switching the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to a changeable set value change state, a jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) described later in the set value change state, and the like are used. A setting changeover switch 103SG052 that functions as a setting switch for changing a set value, and an open sensor 103SG090 that detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 103SG003 are provided. Although the details will be described later, the set value change state in the feature unit 103SG of this embodiment is a state in which a clerk of the game hall or the like can confirm the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (set value confirmation state). ).

The setting switching main body unit provided with the operation unit that can be operated by the player such as the lock switch 103SG051 and the setting changeover switch 103SG052 is housed in the board case 103SG201 together with the main board 11, and the lock switch 103SG051 and the setting changeover switch 103SG052 Is exposed to the back side through an opening formed in the back surface of the board case 103SG201 so that it can be operated without opening the board case 103SG201.

Since the board case 103SG201 having the lock switch 103SG051 and the setting changeover switch 103SG052 is provided on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is extremely difficult to operate the gaming machine frame 103SG003 when the gaming machine frame 103SG003 is closed. It can be operated by opening the gaming machine frame 103SG003. Further, since the lock switch 103SG051 requires the operation of the setting key owned by the clerk of the amusement park or the like, only the clerk who possesses the setting key can operate the lock switch 103SG051. Further, the lock switch 103SG051 is also a switch capable of executing an ON / OFF switching operation described later by a setting key. Although the feature unit 103SG of this embodiment illustrates a mode in which the door key and the setting key are separate keys, one key may be used in combination.

Further, in the board case 103SG201, a display monitor 103SG029 capable of displaying a set value and a base value described later is arranged. The display monitor 103SG029 is connected to the main board 11 and is arranged on the upper part of the board case 103SG201. That is, the display monitor 103SG029 is arranged in front of the board case 103SG201 when the main board 11 is visually recognized. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized when the gaming machine frame 103SG003 is not opened, the front surface when the main board 11 is visually recognized is the back surface side of the gaming board 2 when the gaming machine frame 103SG003 is opened. This is the front when visually recognizing, and is different from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the front surface when the main board 11 is visually recognized and the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be common.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 14-1 and 14-2, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a predetermined position (for example, a lower left position of the gaming area) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 103SG of this embodiment. 1 First special symbol display device 103SG004A capable of executing variable display of 1 special symbol, 2nd special symbol display device 103SG004B capable of executing variable display of 2nd special symbol, 1st reserved display capable of displaying 1st reserved storage number Device 103SG025A, 2nd hold display 103SG025B capable of displaying the second hold storage number, normal symbol display 103SG020 capable of executing variable display of normal symbol, normal figure hold display 103SG025C capable of displaying the normal symbol hold storage number, In the game state where the round display 103SG131 that can display the number of rounds (big hit type) of the big hit game during the big hit game, and the game ball such as the high base state (time saving state) or the big hit game state is launched toward the right game area 103SG002R. A game information display unit 103SG200 is provided in which a right-handed lamp 103SG132 that lights up, a probability variation lamp 103SG133 that lights up in the probability variation state, and a time reduction lamp 103SG134 that lights up in the high base state (time reduction state) are collectively arranged.

The first special symbol display device 103SG004A and the second special symbol display device 103SG004B are each composed of 8-segment LEDs. Further, in the first special symbol display device 103SG004A and the second special symbol display device 103SG004B, when the variable display result of the special symbol is out of place or a small hit, the variable display result can be derived and displayed by a common combination. ing.

In the case where the variable display result is a big hit in the variable display of the first special symbol, the first special symbol display device 103SG004A has a variable display result with two types of big hit symbols (combination of lit LEDs) for each big hit type. Derived display is possible. Further, in the case where the variable display result is a big hit in the variable display of the second special symbol, the second special symbol display device 103SG004B is variably displayed by two kinds of big hit symbols (combination of lit LEDs) for each big hit type. The result and derivation can be displayed.

In the feature unit 103SG of this embodiment, the jackpot symbols that can be derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 103SG004A and the second special symbol display device 103SG004B are all different, but the first special symbol display device 103SG004A At least a part of the jackpot symbol that can be derived and displayed in the above and the jackpot symbol that can be derived and displayed by the second special symbol display device 103SG004B may overlap.

In the first hold indicator 103SG025A and the second hold indicator 103SG025B, LEDs of four segments are arranged in parallel in the left-right direction. In these first hold display 103SG025A and second hold display 103SG025B, if the number of hold storage is one, only the LED at the left end is lit, and each time the number of hold storage increases, it is the second from the left. The third LED from the left and the fourth LED from the left light up in sequence. Then, each time the variable display is executed, the LED on the hold display corresponding to the variable display is set in a predetermined shift direction (characteristic of this embodiment) in response to the decrease (consumption) of the hold memory. In the unit 103SG, the lights are turned off toward the left).

In the feature unit 103SG of this embodiment, when both the first special figure holding memory and the second special figure holding storage exist, the variable display based on the second special figure holding storage is preferentially executed. It has become like. Therefore, for example, when one first special figure hold memory exists and two second special figure hold memories exist (only the LED at the left end of the first hold indicator 103SG025A is lit and the second hold is held. (When the two LEDs on the left of the display 103SG25B are lit), the first special figure hold is held after the second special figure hold memory becomes 0 by executing the variable display based on the second special figure hold memory. Variable display based on memory is executed.

Further, the round display 103SG131 is composed of five segments (LEDs). As the jackpot types in the feature unit 103SG of this embodiment, a total of three jackpot types are provided: a jackpot A which is a 5-round jackpot, a jackpot B which is a 10-round jackpot, and a jackpot C which is a 15-round jackpot. Therefore, which segment of the segments constituting the round display 103SG131 is lit differs depending on the jackpot type.

The control signal transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control commands include, for example, a display control command used to control the image display operation in the image display device 5, a voice control command used to control the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 909. And LED control commands used to control the lighting operation of decorative LEDs and the like are included.

The effect control board 12 in the feature unit 103SG of this embodiment includes a first movable body 103SG321 and a second movable body 103SG322 that can operate between the origin position and the effect position during variable display and the like. The origin detection sensor 103SG331 capable of detecting that the 1 movable body 103SG321 is located at the origin position of the first movable body 103SG321 and the second movable body 103SG322 are located at the origin position of the second movable body 103SG322. The origin detection sensor 103SG332 capable of detecting this is connected to the origin detection sensor 103SG332.

FIG. 14-4 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in the feature unit 103SG in this embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte structure, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always set to "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is set to "0". The command form shown in FIG. 14-4 (A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one or a plurality of three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 14-4 (A), the command 8001H is a first variable display start command for designating the start of variable display in the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 103SG004A. .. The command 8002H is a second variable display start command for designating the start of the variable display in the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 103SG004B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. This is a fluctuation pattern specification command that specifies a fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) such as a symbol. Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the content of instruction by the effect control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data is set according to the variation pattern to be specified.

The command 8CXXXH is a variable display result notification command, and is an effect control command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 14-4 (B), the determination result (predetermined result) of whether the variable display result is "missing", "big hit", or "small hit". ) Or, different EXT data are set according to the determination result (big hit type determination result) of which of the plurality of types the jackpot type is to be used when the variable display result is "big hit".

In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 14-4 (B), the command 8C00H is the first variable display result designation command indicating a predetermined result indicating that the variable display result is “missing”. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit A" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit B" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit C" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command for notifying a preliminary determination result that the variable display result is a "small hit".

The command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command for designating the change stop (confirmation) of the decorative symbol in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a game state designation command for designating the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game state designation command, different EXT data are set according to, for example, the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. As a specific example, the command 9500H is the first game state specification command corresponding to the game state (low base state, normal state) in which the time reduction control is not performed, and the command 9501H is the game state (high base state) in which the time reduction control is performed. , Time saving state) is used as the second game state specification command.

The command 96XXH is an error (abnormal) designation command that specifies the occurrence of an error (abnormality) and the type of the error (abnormality) that has occurred in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the error (abnormality) designation command, for example, by setting the EXT data corresponding to each error (abnormality), it is specified which error (abnormality) has been determined on the effect control board 12 side. The occurrence of the specified error (abnormality) can be notified by the error notification process described later.

The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as a "fanfare command") for designating the display of an effect image indicating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state. The command A1XXH is a notification command during the opening of the big winning opening that notifies that the big winning opening is in the open state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after opening the big winning opening that notifies that the big winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating the display of the effect image at the end of the big hit game state or the small hit game state.

In the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determination result and the jackpot type determination result, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result notification command. .. Alternatively, in the hit start designation command or the hit end designation command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence in the variable display result notification command. .. In the notification command while the big winning opening is open and the notification command after opening the big winning opening, different EXT data is set according to the number of round executions (for example, "1" to "15") in the big hit game state or the small hit game state. Will be done.

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and the starting winning (first starting winning) is generated. This is a first start opening winning designation command for notifying that the first start condition for executing the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 103SG004A has been satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) is generated. , The second start opening winning designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 103SG004B has been satisfied.

The command C1XXH is a first hold storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure hold storage number in order to display the special figure hold storage number identifiable on the image display device 5 or the like. The command C2XXH is a second hold storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure hold storage number in order to display the special figure hold storage number identifiable on the image display device 5 or the like. The first hold memory number notification command is, for example, when the first start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The second hold memory number notification command is, for example, when the second start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Further, the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command are used in the special figure game when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the hold storage number decreases). It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

Instead of the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command, the total hold storage number notification command for notifying the total hold storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total hold storage number notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) of the total hold storage number.

The command D0XXH is a setting value designation command for designating the newly set setting value from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120). The command E101H is a hot start notification command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started without clearing the contents of the RAM 102 (recovery of power failure, also referred to as hot start). The command E102H is a cold start notification command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has cleared the contents of the RAM 102 and started (cold start).

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which is a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing game control programs, fixed data, and the like, and a game control work. The RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides the area, the CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that executes the game control program to perform the control operation, and the numerical data indicating the random value are updated independently of the CPU 103. It is configured to include a random number circuit 104 to perform, an I / O (Input / Output port) 105, and a real-time clock (RTC) 106 capable of outputting time information.

As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed by executing the program read from the ROM 101 by the CPU 103. At this time, a fixed data read operation in which the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101, a variable data writing operation in which the CPU 103 writes various variable data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores them, and various variable data temporarily stored in the RAM 102 by the CPU 103. The variable data read operation, the CPU 103 receives input of various signals from the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105, and the CPU 103 goes to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105. A transmission operation that outputs various signals is also performed.

FIG. 14-5 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a random number value counted on the side of the main board 11. As shown in FIG. 14-5, in the feature unit 103SG of this embodiment, on the side of the main board 11, in addition to the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the fluctuation pattern. Numerical data indicating each of the random value MR3 for determination, the random value MR4 for determining the display result of the general map, and the random value MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 are controlled so as to be countable. In addition, a random number value other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. These random number values MR1 to MR5 may be counted by software update using different random counters in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

In this embodiment, each random value MR1 to MR5 is used as a value in the range shown in FIG. 14-5, but the present invention is not limited to this, and each random value is not limited to this. The range of MR1 to MR5 may be different depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

FIG. 14-6 shows the variation pattern in this embodiment. In this embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result is "off", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" and "reach", respectively, and is variable. A plurality of fluctuation patterns are prepared in advance in response to a case where the display result is a "big hit". In addition, one variation pattern is prepared in advance in response to a case where the variable display result is a "small hit". The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off" and the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern"). The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "out of reach" and the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "out of reach variation pattern"). Further, the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern are included in the missed fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “off”. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "big hit" is called a big hit fluctuation pattern. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "small hit" is called a small hit fluctuation pattern.

The jackpot fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which a super reach reach effect such as super reach α and super reach β is executed. In this embodiment, only one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and like the super reach, the normal reach α, the normal reach β, ... A plurality of normal reach fluctuation patterns may be provided. Further, as for the super reach fluctuation pattern, three or more super reach fluctuation patterns such as super reach γ may be provided in addition to the super reach α and the super reach β.

As shown in FIG. 14-6, regarding the special figure fluctuation time of the normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach is executed in the feature unit 103SG of this embodiment, the super reach fluctuation patterns Super Reach α and Super Reach β Is set shorter than. Further, regarding the special figure variation time of the super reach fluctuation pattern in which the super reach effect such as super reach α and super reach β is executed in this embodiment, the variation pattern in which the super reach effect of super reach β is executed is In this case, the special figure fluctuation time is set longer than the fluctuation pattern in which the super reach effect of the super reach α is executed.

In this embodiment, as described above, the variable display result is set to be "big hit" in the order of super reach β, super reach α, and normal reach. Therefore, since the big hit expectation is set to be high, the normal reach fluctuation pattern and the normal reach fluctuation pattern and In the super reach fluctuation pattern, the longer the fluctuation time, the higher the expectation of a big hit.

In addition, in the feature unit 103SG of this embodiment, as will be described later, these fluctuation patterns are classified into, for example, a non-reach type, a normal reach type, a super reach type, and the like. Rather than determining the variation pattern to be executed from the variation patterns belonging to the variation pattern belonging to the determined type after determining first, only the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is determined without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern type is provided to determine these fluctuations. The type of the variation pattern may be determined first from the random value for determining the pattern type, and then the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the variation pattern belonging to the determined type.

Further, as shown in FIG. 14-6, the feature unit 103SG of this embodiment exemplifies a mode in which the fluctuation content (effect content) is predetermined for each fluctuation pattern, and the present invention illustrates this. The variation content (effect content) may be different depending on the set value, even if the variation pattern is the same. For example, in the case of the fluctuation pattern PA2-1 that is out of normal reach, if the set value is 1, the fluctuation pattern is out of normal reach, and if the set value is 2, a pseudo-continuous effect is performed. As a fluctuation pattern that is executed twice and becomes non-reach out of reach, when the set value is 3, the pseudo-continuous effect may be executed three times to make a fluctuation pattern that is out of super reach.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101, and by using the RAM 102 as a work area, various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are executed. Further, the CPU 103 can generate all of the various random numbers used on the side of the main board 11 by executing the random number generation program.

The ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data and the like used for controlling the progress of the game in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data that constitutes a plurality of determination tables shown in FIGS. 14-7 to 14-11, which are prepared by the CPU 103 for performing various determinations and determinations. Further, the ROM 101 contains table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main board 11, and a variation mode of each symbol in a variable display such as a special symbol or a normal symbol. A fluctuation pattern table or the like that stores a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is stored.

The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes, for example, the first special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 14-7 (A), the second special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 14-7 (B), and FIG. In addition to the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) shown in -8 (A) and the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG. 14-8 (B), the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table and the small hit A fluctuation pattern determination table, an outlier variation pattern determination table, a general map display result determination table (not shown), a general map variation pattern determination table (not shown), and the like are included.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature unit 103SG of this embodiment is configured such that the jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) changes according to the set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing described later, the jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) is changed by using the display result judgment table (winning probability) according to the set value. .. The set value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest payout rate, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 the lower the payout rate. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and the smaller the value in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is, the lower the advantage is. In other words, as for the set value, 6 which is the largest value is the most disadvantageous value for the amusement park side, and the smaller the value in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is the more advantageous value for the amusement park side. Become.

14-7 (A) and 14-7 (B) are explanatory views showing a display result determination table. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with MR1 is set for each set value. In the feature unit 103SG of this embodiment, the display result determination table is used separately for the first special figure and the second special figure, but the present invention is not limited to this. , The display result determination table common to the first special figure and the second special figure may be used.

As shown in FIG. 14-7 (A), when the set value is 1 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, the range is 0 to 65535 when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33094 are "small". It is assigned to "hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 14-7 (B), when the set value is 1 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, the range is 0 to 65535 when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of the hit judgment values compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit", and 32767 to 33421 are "small". It is assigned to "hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 14-7 (A), when the set value is 2 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, the range is 0 to 65535 when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020 to 1253 are assigned to "big hit", and 32767 to 33094 are "small". It is assigned to "hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020-1383 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 14-7 (B), when the set value is 2 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, the range is 0 to 65535 when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020 to 1253 are assigned to "big hit", and 32767 to 33421 are "small". It is assigned to "hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020-1383 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 14-7 (A), when the set value is 3 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, the range is 0 to 65535 when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020-1272 is assigned to "big hit", and 32767 to 33094 are "small". It is assigned to "hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1429 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 14-7 (B), when the set value is 3 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, the range is 0 to 65535 when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of the hit judgment values compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020-1272 is assigned to "big hit", and 32767 to 33421 are "small". It is assigned to "hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1429 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 14-7 (A), when the set value is 4 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, the range is 0 to 65535 when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020 to 1292 are assigned to "big hit", and 32767 to 33094 are "small". It is assigned to "hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1487 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 14-7 (B), when the set value is 4 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, the range is 0 to 65535 when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020 to 1292 are assigned to "big hit", and 32767 to 33421 are "small". It is assigned to "hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1487 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 14-7 (A), when the set value is 5 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, the range is 0 to 65535 when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of the hit judgment values compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020-1317 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33094 are "small". It is assigned to "hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1556 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 14-7 (B), when the set value is 5 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, the range is 0 to 65535 when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of the hit judgment values compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020-1317 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33421 are "small". It is assigned to "hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1556 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 14-7 (A), when the set value is 6 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, the range is 0 to 65535 when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of the hit judgment values compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33094 are "small". It is assigned to "hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1674 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 14-7 (B), when the set value is 6 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, the range is 0 to 65535 when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit", and 32767 to 33421 are "small". It is assigned to "hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1674 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As described above, in each display result judgment table, when the game state is the probability change state (high probability state), more judgment values are set than when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). It is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit". As a result, in the probability change state (high probability state) in which the probability change control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the special figure display result is set as a "big hit" and controlled to the big hit game state in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). Probability to be determined (in the feature unit 103SG of this embodiment, 1/300 when the set value is 1, 1/280 when the set value is 2, 1/260 when the set value is 3, and set. Compared to 1/240 when the value is 4, 1/220 when the set value is 5, and 1/200 when the set value is 6, the special figure display result is set as "big hit" and controlled to the big hit gaming state. Then, the probability of being determined becomes high (in the feature unit 103SG of this embodiment, 1/200 when the set value is 1, 1/180 when the set value is 2, and 1 / when the set value is 3). 160, 1/140 when the set value is 4, 1/120 when the set value is 5, 1/100 when the set value is 6). That is, in each display result determination table, the probability that when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the probabilistic state (high probability state), it is determined to be controlled to the jackpot gaming state as compared with the case of the normal state or the time saving state. Is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state so that the determination value becomes high.

In the feature unit 103SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 14-7, the multiplying factor of the jackpot probability in the probability variation state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state and the time saving state is different (for example, setting). If the value is 1, the multiplication factor of the jackpot probability in the probability variation state to the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time saving state is 1.5 times, and if the setting value is 2, the jackpot probability in the probability variation state to the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time saving state is The magnification is about 1.56 times, and if the set value is 3, the magnification of the jackpot probability in the probability variation state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time saving state is 1.625 times). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the multiplication factor of the jackpot probability in the probability variation state to the jackpot probability in the normal state and the time saving state at each set value is set to be constant (for example, 5 times). May be good.

Further, in each of the first special figure display result determination tables, the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "small hit" to the small hit game state is the same regardless of the game state or the set value. Judgment values are assigned as follows. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14-7 (A), in the first special figure display result determination table, the special figure display result is set as a "small hit" regardless of the game state or the set value. The probability of being determined to control the gaming state is set to 1/200.

On the other hand, in each display result determination table for the second special figure, the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "small hit" to the small hit game state is the first special regardless of the game state or the set value. Judgment values are assigned so that the values are the same as those in the display result judgment table for figures. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14-7 (B), in the display result determination table for the second special figure, the special figure display result is set as a "small hit" regardless of the game state or the set value. The probability of being determined to control the game state is set to 1/100.

It should be noted that the feature unit 103SG of this embodiment exemplifies a mode in which the probability of being determined to control the small hit game state with the special figure display result as "small hit" is the same regardless of the set value. The present invention is not limited to this, and the probability of being determined to control the small hit game state with the special figure display result as a "small hit" may be different depending on the set value. Further, the feature unit 103SG of this embodiment exemplifies a mode in which the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "small hit" and the small hit gaming state is different according to the variable special map. The invention is not limited to this, and the probability of being determined to control the small hit gaming state with the special figure display result as a "small hit" may be the same probability regardless of the variable special figure.

Here, focusing on the numerical range of the hit judgment values assigned to the "big hit" and "small hit" in each display result judgment table, the display result for the first special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state. In the determination table, the range from 1024 to 1237 of the hit determination values is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot determination values for determining the jackpot regardless of the set value.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit"), while the set value 2 In the case of ~ set value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is a range of 1238 to 1253 for the set value 2, a range of 1238 to 1272 for the set value 3, a range of 1238 to 1292 for the set value 4, and a range of 1238 to 1317 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

That is, in the feature unit 103SG of this embodiment, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the value is in the range of 0 to 65535 when the set value is 1. Of the hit judgment values that can be taken, only the values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "big hit", while when the set value is 2 or more, the common numerical value among the big hit judgment values is common. Numerical values within the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the numerical range are assigned to "big hits". Further, the non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1238 as the value of the set value increases.

Therefore, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (big hit reference value). I will go.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values is to determine the small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value of. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, the hit judgment values from 102 to 1346 are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value as described above, while they are small. The hit judgment value is 32767 to 33094 with 32767 as the reference value (small hit reference value) of the small hit judgment value in a numerical range different from the range of the big hit judgment value (1020 to 1346) in the case of the set value 6. Since it is set in the range, it is prevented that the numerical range of the small hit determination value overlaps with the range of the big hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

Next, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the game state is the probability change state, the range from 102 to 1346 of the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining the jackpot regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to the "big hit"), while the set value 2 In the case of ~ set value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the set value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the set value 3, the range of 1347 to 1487 for the set value 4, and the range of 1347 to 1556 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively.

That is, in the feature unit 103SG of this embodiment, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the gaming state is the probabilistic state, the value can be taken in the range of 0 to 65535 when the set value is 1. Of the hit judgment values, only the values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to the "big hit", while when the set value is 2 or more, the common numerical range of the big hit judgment values is set. Numerical values within the range including the non-common numerical range are assigned to "big hits". Further, the non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1347 as the value of the set value increases.

Therefore, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (big hit reference value). I will go.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure when the game state is the probabilistic state, the hit determination value is the same as the display result determination table for the first special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of these, the range from 32767 to 33094 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for determining the small hit regardless of the set value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, 1020 to 1674 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value as described above, while they are small. The hit judgment value is in a numerical range different from the range of the big hit judgment value (1020 to 1674) in the case of the set value 6, and 32767 is set as the reference value of the small hit judgment value (small hit reference value) of 32767 to 33094. Since it is set in the range, it is prevented that the numerical range of the small hit determination value overlaps with the range of the big hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

In the display result judgment table for the second special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit judgment values is the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit"), while the set value 2 In the case of ~ set value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is a range of 1238 to 1253 for the set value 2, a range of 1238 to 1272 for the set value 3, a range of 1238 to 1292 for the set value 4, and a range of 1238 to 1317 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

That is, in the feature unit 103SG of this embodiment, in the display result determination table for the second special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the value is in the range of 0 to 65535 when the set value is 1. Of the hit judgment values that can be taken, only the values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "big hit", while when the set value is 2 or more, the common numerical value among the big hit judgment values is common. Numerical values within the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the numerical range are assigned to "big hits". Further, the non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1238 as the value of the set value increases.

Therefore, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (big hit reference value). I will go.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values is to determine the small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value of. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, the hit judgment values from 102 to 1346 are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value as described above, while they are small. The hit judgment value is 32767 to 33421 with 32767 as the reference value (small hit reference value) of the small hit judgment value in a numerical range different from the range of the big hit judgment value (1020 to 1346) in the case of the set value 6. Since it is set in the range, it is prevented that the numerical range of the small hit determination value overlaps with the range of the big hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

Next, in the display result determination table for the second special figure when the game state is the probability change state, the range from 102 to 1346 of the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining the jackpot regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to the "big hit"), while the set value 2 In the case of ~ set value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the set value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the set value 3, the range of 1347 to 1487 for the set value 4, and the range of 1347 to 1556 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively.

That is, in the feature unit 103SG of this embodiment, in the display result determination table for FIG. 2 when the gaming state is the probabilistic state, when the set value is 1, the value can be taken in the range of 0 to 65535. Of the judgment values, only the values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to the "big hit", while when the set value is 2 or more, the big hit judgment values are not included in the common numerical range. Numerical values within the range including the common numerical range are assigned to "big hits". Further, the non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1347 as the value of the set value increases.

Therefore, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (big hit reference value). I will go.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure when the game state is the probabilistic state, the hit determination value is the same as the display result determination table for the second special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of these, the range from 32767 to 33421 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for determining the small hit regardless of the set value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, 1020 to 1674 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value as described above, while the small The hit judgment value is 32767 to 33421 with 32767 as the reference value (small hit reference value) of the small hit judgment value in a numerical range different from the range of the big hit judgment value (1020 to 1674) in the case of the set value 6. Since it is set in the range, it is prevented that the numerical range of the small hit determination value overlaps with the range of the big hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

As described above, in the feature unit 103SG of this embodiment, in each display result determination table, regardless of the game state and the set value, the common numerical range or the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are set based on the hit determination value 1020. The judgment value included in the continuous numerical range of 1 is set as the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, and the continuous numerical range of 1 is based on the hit judgment value of 32767 regardless of the game state and the set value (common). The variable display result is judged by using the judgment value included in the numerical range) as the numerical range of the small hit judgment value.

Further, in each of these display result judgment tables, when the fluctuation special figures are the same, the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is the same regardless of the game state (the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is the same. Same). Further, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value differs depending on whether the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure (small in the display result judgment table for the first special figure). While the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the hit judgment value is 328, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value in the display result judgment table for the second special figure is about 655. On the other hand, the numerical range of the small hit determination value itself is set with 32767 as the reference value (small hit reference value).

Further, as described above, in each gaming state, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, there is a probability that it is determined that the special figure display result is controlled to the jackpot gaming state as the "big hit". Judgment values are assigned so that the lower the value of the set value and the larger the value of the set value, the higher the probability that the special figure display result will be determined to be controlled to the jackpot gaming state as "big hit" (big hit probability: set value 6> set value). 5> Set value 4> Set value 3> Set value 2> Set value 1).

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and when the value of MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the jackpot, the CPU 103 hits the jackpot (big hit) with respect to the special symbol. It is decided to be A to jackpot C). Further, when MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hit, it is determined that the special symbol is a small hit. That is, the winning of the big hit and the small hit is decided with the probability according to the set value. The "probability" shown in FIG. 14-7 indicates the probability of a big hit (ratio) and the probability of a small hit (ratio). Further, determining whether or not to make a jackpot means determining whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display device 103SG004A or the second special symbol display device 103SG004B is determined. It also means deciding whether or not to make a big hit design. Further, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to control the small hit gaming state, but the stop in the first special symbol display device 103SG004A or the second special symbol display device 103SG004B. It also means deciding whether or not to make the symbol a small hit symbol.

In this embodiment, a total of 6 setting values, 1 to 6, are provided as setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine is not limited to this. The set value that can be set to 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more.

14-8 (A) and 14-8 (B) are explanatory views showing a jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) and a jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) stored in the ROM 101. Is. Of these, FIG. 14-8 (A) determines the jackpot type using the hold memory based on the game ball winning the first start winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed). It is a table when you do. Further, FIG. 14-8 (B) determines the jackpot type using the hold memory based on the game ball winning the second start winning opening (that is, when the second special symbol is variably displayed). It is a table of cases.

In the jackpot type determination table, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol, the jackpot type is selected from jackpot A to jackpot C based on the random number (MR2) for determining the jackpot type. The table referenced to determine.

Here, the jackpot type in the feature unit 103SG of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 14-9. In the feature unit 103SG of this embodiment, as the jackpot type, the jackpot A (also referred to as non-probability variable jackpot) in which only the time saving control is executed after the end of the jackpot game state and the state shifts to the low probability high base state, and the jackpot game After the end, the high-accuracy control and the time-saving control are executed, and the jackpot B and the jackpot C (also referred to as the probabilistic jackpot) that shift to the high-accuracy high-base state are set.

The jackpot game state by "big hit A" is a normally open jackpot that is repeatedly executed five times (so-called five rounds) that change the special variable winning ball device 7 into the first state that is advantageous to the player, and is a "big hit". The jackpot game state by "B" is a normal open jackpot in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 into the first state which is advantageous for the player. Further, the big hit game state by the "big hit C" is a normal open big hit in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed 15 times (so-called 15 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 into the first state which is advantageous for the player.

The time saving control executed after the end of the big hit game state by the "big hit A" is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in the feature unit 103SG of this embodiment), or the special figure game of the predetermined number of times is executed. Figure Ends when the game is in a jackpot game state before the game is executed.

On the other hand, the high-accuracy control and the time saving control executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state of the jackpot B or the jackpot C are continuously executed until the jackpot occurs again after the end of the jackpot gaming state. Therefore, when the big hit that occurs again is the big hit B or the big hit C, the high accuracy control and the time saving control are executed again after the end of the big hit game state, so that the big hit game state is continuous without going through the normal state. It becomes a so-called consecutive villa state that occurs in.

In addition, in the feature part 103SG of this embodiment, the embodiment in which three types of jackpot A to jackpot C are provided as jackpot types is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot type is 2. There may be less than one type, or four or more types.

Further, as shown in FIG. 14-8 (A), in the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol), when the set value is "1", the MR2 determination value ranges from 0 to 299. , 0 to 99 are assigned to jackpot A, 100 to 249 are assigned to jackpot B, and 250 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "2", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 229 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 200-299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "3", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 209 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 150-299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "4", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 189 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 190-299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "5", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 169 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 170-299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "6", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 149 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 150-299 are assigned to jackpot C.

In this way, when a big hit occurs in the special figure game of the first special symbol, the ratio of determining the big hit A in which only the time saving control is executed after the big hit game ends is the same, while the time saving control after the big hit game ends. Of the jackpot B and jackpot C for which both the probability variation control and the probability variation control are executed, the ratio of determining the jackpot C decreases in the order of the set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. That is, when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, the ball output rate is highest when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, and the set values are 5, 4, 3, 2, and so on. The smaller the number in the order of 1, the lower the ball output rate.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 14-8 (B), in the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol), when the set value is "1", the MR2 determination value range 0 to 299 Of these, 0 to 99 are assigned to jackpot A, 100 to 199 are assigned to jackpot B, and 200 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "2", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 179 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 180-299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "3", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 159 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 160-299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "4", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 139 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 140 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "5", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 119 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 120-299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "6", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. (A judgment value is not assigned to the jackpot B).

In this way, when a big hit occurs in the special figure game of the second special symbol, the ratio of determining the big hit A in which only the time saving control is executed after the big hit game ends is the same, while the time saving control after the big hit game ends. Of the jackpot B and jackpot C for which both the probability variation control and the probability variation control are executed, the ratio of determining the jackpot C decreases in the order of the set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. That is, when the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, the ball output rate is highest when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, and the set values are 5, 4, 3, 2, and so on. The smaller the number in the order of 1, the lower the ball output rate.

In the feature unit 103SG of this embodiment, when the variable special figure is the second special figure and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, the big hit type is determined to be big hit B. In other words, if the determination rate of the jackpot type differs depending on the set value, it means that one of the jackpot types is not determined (the determination rate is 0%). Although it is included, there may be a case where the jackpot type is determined to be jackpot B even when the variable special chart is the second special chart and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6. ..

As described above, in the feature unit 103SG of this embodiment, the determination ratio of the jackpot type when the variable display result is a jackpot differs according to the set value, so that the game entertainment can be improved. It has become.

In the feature unit 103SG of this embodiment, the jackpot type is determined by using MR2 which is a random value for determining the jackpot type, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot type is not limited to this. It may be determined using MR1 which is a random value for determining the special figure display result.

Further, in the feature unit 103SG of this embodiment, the larger the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player (the jackpot probability increases and the jackpot C as the jackpot type is more likely to be determined). The present invention is not limited to this, and the smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous the player may be.

Further, the feature unit 103SG of this embodiment illustrates a mode in which the jackpot probability changes according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the game playability itself does not change. The game playability is not limited to this, and the game playability may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

For example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variation state is 65%, which is the game property (so-called probability variation loop type). When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the gaming ball is set in the special variable winning ball device 7 during the jackpot game. While controlling the game state after the end of the big hit game to a probabilistic state based on passing through, the game property (so-called V) in which the ratio of the game ball passing through the predetermined switch during the big hit game is different according to the fluctuation special figure. Probability variation type), and when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the jackpot probability is 1/320 and the small hit probability is 1/50, and the game is played during high base (during time reduction control). It may be a game property (so-called 1 type 2 type mixed type) in which the ball is controlled to a big hit gaming state based on passing through a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7. Further, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 1 to 3, the game playability is the same, but the jackpot probability and the jackpot probability are higher than when these set values are any of 1 to 3. A setting may be provided in which the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the big hit game is small while the small hit probability is high (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6). ..

Further, when the game playability is changed according to the set value in this way, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, in the above example, when the set value is 1 to 3, the predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is switched to the effect switch (every time the game ball passes through the predetermined area). It is used as a switch for executing a predetermined effect, and when the set value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch is used as a game switch (a game state is changed based on the game ball passing through the predetermined switch). It may be used as a switch for controlling the jackpot game state).

Further, the ROM 101 also stores a variation pattern determination table for determining the variation pattern based on the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and the variation pattern can be selected from the plurality of types described above according to the predetermined determination result. Determine to one of the fluctuation patterns of.

Specifically, as the fluctuation pattern judgment table, the fluctuation pattern judgment table for big hits used when it is predetermined to set the variable display result to "big hit" and the variable display result to be "small hit". A fluctuation pattern judgment table for big hits used when it is pre-determined, and a fluctuation pattern judgment table for misses used when it is pre-determined to make the variable display result "off" are prepared in advance. ing.

In the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table, the fluctuation patterns of the normal reach jackpot (PB1-1), the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3) are used. On the other hand, a predetermined random number value is assigned as the determination value in the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take.

As shown in FIGS. 14-10 (A) and 14-10 (B), the jackpot variation pattern determination table is a jackpot variation pattern determination table (big hit A) used when the jackpot type is jackpot A. (For big hit) and the big hit fluctuation pattern judgment table (for big hit B and big hit C) used when the big hit type is for big hit B and big hit C are prepared in advance, and these big hit fluctuation pattern judgment tables (for big hit C) are prepared in advance. The fluctuation pattern judgment table for (for A) and jackpot (for jackpot B and jackpot C) shows the fluctuation pattern of normal reach jackpot (PB1-1), the fluctuation pattern of super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and the fluctuation pattern of super reach β jackpot. For each fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3), a predetermined random number value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take is assigned as a determination value.

As shown in FIG. 14-10 (A), in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table (for jackpot A), when the set value is "1", 1 of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3. ~ 400 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-1), 401 to 850 are assigned to the super reach α jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-2), and 851 to 997 are assigned to the super reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-2). It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is "2", out of the range of MR3 judgment values 1 to 997, 1 to 380 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-1), and 381 to 835. Is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 836 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is "3", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 360 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and up to 361 to 820. Is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 821 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is "4", out of the range of MR3 judgment values 1 to 997, 1 to 340 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-1), and up to 341 to 805. Is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 806 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is "5", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 320 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and up to 321 to 790. Is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 791 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is "6", 1 to 300 of the MR3 judgment value ranges 1 to 997 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-1), and the range is 301 to 775. Is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 776 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3).

As shown in FIG. 14-10 (B), in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table (for jackpot B and jackpot C), when the set value is "1", the range of the determination values of MR3 is 1 to 997. , 1 to 200 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach jackpot (PB1-1), and 2001 to 550 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 551 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-2). It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β jackpot. When the set value is "2", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 180 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 181 to 510 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 511 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is "3", out of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997, 1 to 160 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-1), and 161 to 470 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 471 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is "4", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 140 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 141 to 430 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 431 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is "5", out of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997, 1 to 120 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-1), and 121 to 290 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-1). It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 391 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is "6", 1 to 100 of the MR3 determination value ranges 1 to 997 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-1), and 101 to 350 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-1). It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 351 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3).

In this way, when the jackpot A is won in the special figure game, the ratio of determining the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2) determines the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). It is higher than the above, and the set values are lower in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1. Further, when the jackpot B or the jackpot C is won in the special figure game, the ratio of determining the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3) determines the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2). It is higher than the ratio and lowers in the order of the set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1.

That is, in this embodiment, when these determination values are that the type of jackpot is "big hit B" or "big hit C", the super reach β is easily determined, and the type of jackpot is "big hit A". In this case, the player is assigned so that the super reach α can be easily determined, so that when the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β is executed, the player may be “big hit B” or “big hit C”. Can raise the expectation of.

Further, in the small hit variation pattern determination table, a predetermined random number value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take is the determination value for the variation pattern of the small hit variation pattern (PC1-1). Is assigned as. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14-10 (C), in the small hit variation pattern determination table, the range of the determination value of MR3 is 0 to 997 regardless of the set value of 1 to 6. Of these, 0 to 997 are assigned to the small hit fluctuation pattern (PC1-1). Although only PC1-1 is provided as the variation pattern of the small hit in the present invention, the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more variation patterns are provided as the variation pattern of the small hit. The fluctuation pattern of the small hit may be determined from a plurality of fluctuation patterns at different ratios with the set values 1 to 6.

Further, the deviation pattern determination table includes the deviation pattern determination table A used when the number of reserved storages is 1 or less in the low base state in which the game state is not subjected to the time reduction control, and the low base. The deviation pattern determination table B used when the total number of reserved storages is 2 to 4 in the state, and the deviation variation used when the total number of reserved storages is 5 to 8 in the low base state. A pattern determination table C and a variation pattern determination table D for deviation used when the game state is a high base state in which time reduction control is performed are prepared in advance.

In the deviation pattern determination table A, the non-reach deviation variation pattern without shortening (PA1-1), the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), the super reach α deviation variation pattern (PA2-2), and the super A predetermined random number value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take is assigned as the determination value to the variation pattern (PA2-3) out of reach β.

As shown in FIG. 14-11 (A), in the deviation pattern determination table A (for low-base medium total hold storage number of 1 or less), when the set value is "1", the determination value of MR3 is determined. Of the ranges 1 to 997, 1 to 450 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern (PA1-1), and 451 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach out-of-reach variation pattern (PA2-1). 701 to 900 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-2) out of super reach α, and 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) out of super reach β. When the set value is "2", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 430 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and up to 431 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). Further, when the set value is "3", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 410 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and up to 411 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). When the set value is "4", out of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997, 1 to 390 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and up to 391 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). When the set value is "5", out of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997, 1 to 370 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and the range is 371 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). When the set value is "6", out of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997, 1 to 350 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and up to 351 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3).

Further, in the deviation pattern determination table B, the shortened non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-2), the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super A predetermined random number value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can be assigned to the variation pattern (PA2-2) out of reach α and the variation pattern (PA2-3) out of reach β is assigned as the determination value. Has been done.

As shown in FIG. 14-11 (B), in the deviation pattern determination table B (for 2 to 4 total pending storage numbers in low base), when the set value is "1", the determination value of MR3. Of the range 1 to 997, 1 to 500 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), and 501 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA2-1). , 701 to 900 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-2) out of super reach α, and 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) out of super reach β. When the set value is "2", out of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997, 1 to 480 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), and the range is 481 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). When the set value is "3", out of the range 0 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 460 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), and up to 461 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). When the set value is "4", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 440 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), and up to 441 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). When the set value is "5", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 420 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), and up to 421 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). When the set value is "6", out of the range of MR3 judgment values 1 to 997, 1 to 400 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), and up to 401 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3).

Further, in the deviation pattern determination table C, the shortened non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-3), the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super A predetermined random number value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can be assigned to the variation pattern (PA2-2) out of reach α and the variation pattern (PA2-3) out of reach β is assigned as the determination value. Has been done.

As shown in FIG. 14-11 (C), in the deviation pattern determination table C (for low-base medium total hold storage number of 5 or more), when the set value is "1", the determination value of MR3 is determined. Of the ranges 1 to 997, 1 to 550 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern (PA1-3), and 551 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach out-of-reach variation pattern (PA2-1). 701 to 900 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-2) out of super reach α, and 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) out of super reach β. When the set value is "2", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 530 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), and up to 531 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). Further, when the set value is "3", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 510 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), and up to 511 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). Further, when the set value is "4", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 490 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), and up to 491 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). When the set value is "5", out of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997, 1 to 470 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), and up to 471 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). When the set value is "6", out of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997, 1 to 450 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), and up to 451 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3).

Further, in the deviation pattern determination table D, the shortening non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-4), the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super reach α deviation variation pattern corresponding to the time reduction control are performed. (PA2-2), a predetermined random number value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take is assigned as the determination value to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) out of the super reach β.

As shown in FIG. 14-11 (D), in the deviation pattern determination table D (for high base and medium), when the set value is "1", the range of the determination values of MR3 is 1 to 997. 1 to 550 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-4), 551 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), and 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach. α is assigned to the deviation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β deviation (PA2-3). When the set value is "2", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 530 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-4), and up to 531 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). When the set value is "3", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 510 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-4), and up to 511 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). When the set value is "4", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 490 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-4), and up to 491 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). When the set value is "5", out of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997, 1 to 470 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-4), and up to 471 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). When the set value is "6", out of the range of MR3 judgment values 1 to 997, 1 to 450 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-4), and up to 451 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3).

As described above, when the deviation pattern determination tables A to D are used, the ratio of determining the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the normal reach fluctuation pattern is higher than the ratio of determining the super reach fluctuation pattern, and the ratio of determining the normal reach fluctuation pattern is determined. Is set to decrease in the order of the set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. When the deviation pattern determination tables A to D are used, 701 to 900 of the determination values are the fluctuation patterns of the super reach α deviation, and 901 to 997 are the deviation patterns of the super reach β, regardless of the fluctuation pattern determination table. If each variation pattern is assigned, that is, if the variable display result is out of alignment, the super reach variation pattern is determined at a common determination rate regardless of the set value, so the super reach variation pattern It is possible to prevent the effect from being lowered due to the fact that the variable display is not executed.

In the feature unit 103SG of this embodiment, the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α deviation and the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the deviation of the super reach β are completely the same between the set values as the deviation pattern. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α outlier and the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the outlier of super reach β are between each set value. May differ by a small margin (for example, about 1%).

In addition, in the feature unit 103SG of this embodiment, when the variable display result is out of alignment, the embodiment in which the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach is the same regardless of the set value is illustrated. , The present invention is not limited to this, and when the variable display result is out of alignment, the determination ratio of all the fluctuation patterns of non-reach, normal reach, and super reach is the same regardless of the set value. It may be present, or only the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern of either the non-reach or the normal reach may be the same.

Further, in the feature unit 103SG of this embodiment, when the variable display result is out of alignment, the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern of the outlier of Super Reach α and the fluctuation pattern of the outlier of Super Reach β are determined regardless of the set value. Although the embodiment in which both of the determination ratios are the same regardless of the set value is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the variable display result is out of order, the super reach α is illustrated. The determination rate of only one of the deviation pattern determination rate and the super reach β deviation variation pattern may be the same regardless of the set value.

Further, in the feature unit 103SG of this embodiment, when the variable display result is out of alignment, the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern of the outlier of Super Reach α and the fluctuation pattern of the outlier of Super Reach β are determined regardless of the set value. Although the embodiment in which both of the determination ratios are the same regardless of the set value is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and is set even when the variable display result is a big hit. Regardless of the set value, the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach jackpot may be the same regardless of the set value.

In the feature unit 103SG of this embodiment, when the variable display result is out of alignment, a mode in which the determination ratio of the non-reach or normal reach fluctuation pattern differs depending on the set value is illustrated. , Depending on the set value, there may be one or a plurality of undetermined fluctuation patterns among the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the normal reach fluctuation pattern. That is, if the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern differs depending on the set value, one of the fluctuation patterns should not be determined (the determination ratio is 0%), or the specific fluctuation pattern is 100%. It is also included to decide by the ratio of.

The non-reach non-reach variation pattern (PA1-2) has a shorter variation time than the non-reach non-reach variation pattern (PA1-1) without shortening, and the non-reach variation pattern (PA1-2) is shorter than the non-reach variation pattern (PA1-2). The deviation pattern (PA1-3) has a shorter fluctuation time (see FIG. 14-6). Therefore, when the number of reserved memories increases, the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation time is determined, so that the reserved memories are easily digested, and the number of reserved memories reaches the upper limit of 4. By winning a start prize while the player is in the game, it becomes difficult for a useless start prize that is not stored on hold to occur, and when the number of stored memories decreases, the fluctuation time is long and the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation is not shortened. By determining the pattern (PA1-1), the variable display time becomes longer, so that it is possible to prevent the game from being less interesting due to the variable display not being executed.

Further, in the feature unit 103SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 14-11 (A) to 14-11 (C), variations are made using a variation pattern determination table for deviation, which differs depending on the total number of reserved storages. Although the form of determining the pattern is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of reserved memories in the special symbol to be changed (for example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the first is the first. The variation pattern may be determined using a variation pattern determination table for deviation, which differs depending on the number of reserved memory of the special symbol and the number of reserved memory of the second special symbol when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed.

Further, in each of the deviation pattern determination tables of the feature unit 103SG of this embodiment, even if the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 1 to 6, the fluctuation of the super reach deviation The range of random numbers assigned to the patterns (PA2-2 and PA2-3) is the same. However, since the jackpot probability and the loss probability differ depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the rate at which the variable display is actually executed in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach loss (super reach loss). The appearance rate of the fluctuation pattern) differs depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It should be noted that the feature unit 103SG of this embodiment exemplifies a mode in which the rate at which the variable display is executed in the fluctuation pattern out of the super reach differs depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. , The present invention is not limited to this, and in consideration of the jackpot probability and the loss probability for each set value, the variable display is out of super reach at the same rate regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It may be executed according to the fluctuation pattern of.

Further, in the feature unit 103SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 14-10 and 14-11, the variation pattern is determined at a different ratio for each set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Although illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the fluctuation pattern may be determined at the same ratio regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

Further, the feature unit 103SG of this embodiment exemplifies a mode in which there is a one-to-one correspondence between whether or not to execute the reach effect and which reach effect is to be executed for each determined fluctuation pattern. The present invention is not limited to this, and whether or not the effect control CPU 120 executes the reach effect based on the special figure variation time of the variation pattern, the variable display result, etc., and which reach effect is executed. You may decide whether to do it by lottery.

The RAM 102 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 14-1 may be a backup RAM in which a part or all of the RAM 102 is backed up by a backup power source created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 are stored for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot be supplied with power). To. In particular, at least the data corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means (such as the special figure process flag) and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data according to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for recovering the control state before the occurrence of the power failure or the like based on the data when the data is restored after the power failure or the like occurs. Further, the data corresponding to the control state and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as the data indicating the progress state of the game.

Next, the display of the display monitor 103SG029 in the feature unit 103SG of this embodiment will be described.

As shown in FIG. 14-12 (A), the display monitor 103SG029 includes a first display unit 103SG029A, a second display unit 103SG029B, a third display unit 103SG029C, and a fourth display unit 103SG029D. The first display unit 103SG029A to the fifth display unit 103SG29E are each composed of seven segments composed of seven segments drawing the character "8" and dots arranged on the lower right side of the seven segments. The first display unit 103SG029A to the fifth display unit 103SG29E can be lit and blinked in various colors such as red, blue, green, yellow, and white, respectively. It is also possible to display these colors in different colors or so-called rainbows while changing them in a very short cycle.

The display control of the display monitor 103SG029 in the feature unit 103SG of this embodiment is executed by using the non-test target area in the entire area of the ROM 101 and the RAM 102 at the time of the test of the pachinko gaming machine 1. ..

As shown in FIGS. 14-12 (B) and 14-12 (C), the display monitor 103SG029 has a base value calculated in a normal state (low accuracy and low base state) for each out 6000 balls in all game states. Base L (real-time value during measurement), base 1 which is a base value calculated in the normal state (low probability low base state) for each out 6000 balls in the first out 6000 ball in all game states, and base 1 in all game states. Base 2 which is the base value calculated in the normal state (low probability low base state) for each of the second out 6000 balls, and the normal state (low probability low base state) for each of the third out 6000 balls in the all-game state. It is possible to display the base 3 which is the base value calculated in. The base L, the base 1, the base 2, and the base 3 are displayed on the display monitor 103SG029 as a percentage.

When the base L is actually displayed on the display monitor 103SG029, "b" is displayed on the first display unit 103SG029A and "L." is displayed on the second display unit 103SG029B in order to display the abbreviation "bL." Is displayed, and the upper two digits of the calculated value (values of "00" to "99") are displayed on the third display unit 103SG029C and the fourth display unit 103SG029D. When the base 1 is displayed on the display monitor 103SG029, "b" is displayed on the first display unit 103SG029A and "1." is displayed on the second display unit 103SG029B in order to display the abbreviation "b1." Is displayed, and the upper two digits of the calculated value (values of "00" to "99") are displayed on the third display unit 103SG029C and the fourth display unit 103SG029D. When the base 2 is displayed on the display monitor 103SG029, "b" is displayed on the first display unit 103SG029A and "2." is displayed on the second display unit 103SG029B in order to display the abbreviation "b2." Is displayed, and the upper two digits of the calculated value (values of "00" to "99") are displayed on the third display unit 103SG029C and the fourth display unit 103SG029D. When the base 3 is displayed on the display monitor 103SG029, "b" is displayed on the first display unit 103SG029A and "3." is displayed on the second display unit 103SG029B in order to display the abbreviation "b3." Is displayed, and the upper two digits of the calculated value (values of "00" to "99") are displayed on the third display unit 103SG029C and the fourth display unit 103SG029D.

In the display monitor 103SG029 of this embodiment, the control of sequentially displaying the base L, the base 1, the base 2, and the base 3 is executed by controlling the main board 11 (CPU 103). For example, the main board 11 executes a control for switching the display of the display monitor 103SG029 in the order of base L → base 1 → base 2 → base 3 at 5-second intervals. The display color of each base value on the display monitor 103SG029 is different depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Specifically, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "1", each base value on the display monitor 103SG029 is displayed in white, and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set. When it is "2", each base value on the display monitor 103SG029 is displayed in blue, and when the set value set on the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "3", each base value on the display monitor 103SG029 is displayed in yellow. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "4", each base value on the display monitor 103SG029 is displayed in green, and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "4". If it is "5", each base value on the display monitor 103SG029 is displayed in red, and if the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "6", each base value on the display monitor 103SG029 is displayed in purple. indicate. Therefore, the clerk of the game hall can identify the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 only by checking the display color of the display monitor 103SG029 without the CPU 103 executing the setting value changing process described later. ing.

Next, the game control main processing in the feature unit 103SG of this embodiment will be described. FIG. 14-13 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103. In the game control main process, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (103SGSa001). Subsequently, the necessary initial settings are performed (103SGSa002). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output ports, etc.), settings for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (107SGSa003) and whether or not the RAM 102 (backup RAM) is normal (107SGSa004). If the backup data is not stored (103SGSa003; N) or the RAM 102 is not normal (103SGSa004; N), the process proceeds to 103SGSa017, and if the backup data is stored and the RAM 102 is normal (103SGSa003; Y, 103SGSa004; Y) further determines whether the set value stored in the RAM 102 is any of 1 to 6, that is, whether the set value of a normal value is stored in the RAM 102 (103SGSa005).

If the set value stored in the RAM 102 is not any of 1 to 6 (103SGSa005; N), the process proceeds to 103SGsa017, and if the set value stored in the RAM 102 is any of 1 to 6 (103SGsa005; N). Y) indicates whether or not the setting value changing flag indicating that the setting value changing process described later was being executed before the power failure (the power failure occurred during the execution of the setting value changing process) is set. (103SGSa006). If the setting value changing flag is set (103SGSa006; Y), the process proceeds to 103SGSa017, and if the setting value changing flag is not set, the RAM clear flag indicating that the RAM clear processing described later has been executed is set. If it is set, the RAM clear flag is cleared (103SGSa007), and it is determined whether or not the clear switch is ON, that is, whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated while the clear switch is being operated. (103SGSa008).

When the clear switch is ON (103SGSa008; Y), the RAM clear flag is set to proceed to 103SGSa011 (103SGSa010), and when the clear switch is OFF (103SGSa008; N), 103SGSa010 is not executed and 103SGSa010 is set. move on.

In 103SGsa011, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the lock switch 103SG051 is ON (103SGSa011). When the lock switch 103SG051 is ON (103SGSa011; Y), it is further determined whether or not the release sensor 103SG090 is ON (103SGSa012). When the release sensor 103SG090 is ON, that is, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started with the lock switch 103SG051 ON and the game machine frame 103SG003 open (103SGSa012; Y), the RAM clear flag is set. It is determined whether or not it is (103SGSa013a).

When the RAM clear flag is set (103SGSa013a; Y), the set value change process (103SGsa013b) for changing the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed to proceed to 103SGSa013d, and the RAM clear flag is set. If is not set (103SGSa013a; N), the set value confirmation process (103SGsa013c) for confirming the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed, and the process proceeds to 103SGSa013d.

In the set value change process (103SGSa013b), the CPU 103 first displays the set value currently set on the display monitor 103SG029. Next, every time the setting changeover switch 103SG052 is operated, the setting value is updated and displayed on the display monitor 103SG029. Then, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 103SG029 is updated and stored in the RAM 102 based on the fact that the lock switch 103SG051 is turned off, and the setting value newly updated and stored in the RAM 102 can be specified. The command is output to the effect control CPU 120.

Further, in the set value confirmation process (103SGsa013c), the CPU 103 displays the set value currently set on the display monitor 103SG029. Then, the display of the set value on the display monitor 103SG029 may be terminated based on the fact that the lock switch 103SG051 is turned off.

If the lock switch 103SG051 is OFF (103SGSa011; N) or the release sensor is OFF (103SGSa012; N) in 103SGSa011, the process proceeds to 103SGSa013d without executing the process of 103SGSa013a-103SGSa013c.

In 103SGSa013d, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the RAM clear flag is set, that is, whether or not the RAM 102 is cleared when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started this time (whether or not the RAM clear process (103SGSa009) is executed) ( 103SGSa013d). When the RAM clear flag is set (103SGSa013d; Y), the RAM clear process (103SGsa013e) is executed and then the process proceeds to 103SGsa014. When the RAM clear flag is not set (103SGsa013d; N), the RAM clear process (103SGsa013e) is performed. Proceed to 103SGsa014 without executing.

In the RAM clear process (103SGSa013e), the CPU 103 executes a process of setting "00H" to all addresses except the address where the set value is stored and the address where the RAM clear flag is stored (set). .. That is, in the feature unit 103SG of this embodiment, as shown in 103SGSa001 to 103SGSa013e and 103SGSa017-103SGSa021 described later, if there is no abnormality in the RAM 102, the address in which the set value is stored and the RAM clear flag are stored. It is designed to clear the contents of all addresses except the dress you are wearing.

In 103SGSa014, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the RAM clear flag is set again (103SGSa014). When the RAM clear flag is set (103SGSa014; Y), the process proceeds to 103SGSa022, and when the RAM clear flag is not set (103SGSa014; N), the internal state of the main board 11 is stopped (power cut). Performs recovery processing to return to the state of (103SGSa015).

In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents (contents of the backed up data) of the RAM 102. As a result, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped, and if the special symbol is changing, the change of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be. Then, assuming that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has recovered (started by hot start) in the state before the power failure, the CPU 103 transmits a recovery command including a hot start notification command to the effect control board 12, and proceeds to 103SGSa028. (103SGSa016).

Further, in 103SGSa017, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the clear switch is ON, that is, whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated while the clear switch is being operated (103SGSa017). When the clear switch is ON (103SGsa017; Y), it is further determined whether or not the lock switch 103SG051 is ON (103SGSa018) and whether or not the release sensor 103SG090 is ON (103SGSa019).

When the lock switch 103SG051 is ON (103SGSa018; Y) and the release sensor 103SG090 is ON, that is, there is no backup data in the RAM 102, the RAM 102 is not normal, or a normal setting value is not set. However, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a formal procedure by the operation of an employee of the game hall (the game machine frame 103SG003 is opened and the lock switch 103SG051 is turned on, the pachinko game is operated while operating the clear switch. When the machine 1 is started), the set value stored in the RAM 102 is cleared (103SGSa020), and if the set value changing flag is set, the set value changing flag is cleared (103SGSa021). Then, the process of 103SGSa009-103SGSa016 described above is executed.

If the clear switch is OFF (103SGSa017; N), the lock switch 103SG051 is OFF (103SGSa018; N), and the release sensor 103SG090 is OFF (103SGSa019; N), the process proceeds to 103SGSa031.

Further, in 2078SGSa022, the CPU 103 transmits a recovery command including a cold start notification command to the effect control board 12 on the assumption that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start (103SGSa022). Then, a cold start notification timer is set according to the period for notifying the cold start of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (103SGsa023), and the cold start notification is started by starting blinking of all the segments constituting the display monitor 103SG029. (103SGSa024).

After executing 103SGsa024, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the cold start notification timer by -1 (103SGsa025), and determines whether or not the cold start notification timer has timed out (103SGSa026). When the cold start notification timer is not timer-out (103SGsa026; N), the processes of 103SGsa025 and 103SGsa026 are repeatedly executed, and when the cold start notification timer is timer-out (103SGsa026; Y), all segments on the display monitor 103SG029. Ends blinking (103SGsa027) and proceeds to 103SGsa028.

In the feature unit 103SG of this embodiment, all the segments constituting the display monitor 103SG029 are blinked over the period of the cold start notification timer (for example, 5 seconds) at the time of calling and starting the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and only a part of all the segments constituting the display monitor 103SG029 may be blinked at the time of calling and starting the pachinko gaming machine 1. Alternatively, at least a part of all the segments constituting the display monitor 103SG029 may be turned on.

Then, in 103SGsa028, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process (103SGSa028) that initially sets the random number circuit 104, and causes the game control microcomputer 100 to periodically interrupt the timer at predetermined time (for example, 2 ms). Set the built-in CTC register (103SGSa029) and allow interrupts (103SGSa030). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

Further, in 103SGSa031, the CPU 103 refers to the effect control board 12 based on the fact that an abnormal setting value is stored in the RAM 102 (setting value abnormality error) and that the CPU 103 recovers from the power failure during the setting change described later. And sends an error specification command according to the abnormality of the set value (103SGSa031). Further, an error notification execution waiting timer is set (103SGSa032). Then, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the error notification execution waiting timer by -1 (103SGSa033), and determines whether or not the error notification execution waiting timer has timed out (103SGSa034). When the error notification execution waiting timer is not timered out (103SGSa034; N), the processes of 103SGsa033 and 103SGsa034 are repeatedly executed, and when the error notification execution waiting timer is timered out (103SGSa034; Y), a set value error error occurs. 1st display unit 103SG029A, 2nd display unit 103SG029B, 3rd display unit 103SG029C, 4th display unit 103SG029D "E." is displayed in each of the above (103SGSa035).

Further, the CPU 103 blinks all the LEDs constituting the first special symbol display device 103SG004A and the second special symbol display device 103SG004B (103SGsa036), and plays a game via a terminal board (not shown) provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1. A security signal is output to a management device such as a field management computer, and the process proceeds to 103SGSa032 (103SGSa037). After that, the CPU 103 repeatedly executes the processes of 103SGsa032-103SGSa037 until the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off (until the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off by the operation of a clerk at the game hall), thereby displaying the display monitor 103SG029. , The first special symbol display device 103SG004A and the second special symbol display device 103SG004B execute notification of the occurrence of an error.

As described above, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 103SG of this embodiment recovers from an abnormal set value being set or a power failure during the change of the set value, the display monitor 103SG029, the first Since the special symbol display device 103SG004A and the second special symbol display device 103SG004B are used to notify the occurrence of an error, the clerk of the amusement park or the like can generate an error or set a value from both the front side and the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. It is possible to recognize that the power failure during the change has been restored. In addition, the occurrence of an error in the pachinko game machine 1 and the recovery from the power failure while changing the set value can be recognized by the management device of the game hall, so that the security of the pachinko game machine 1 can be improved. It has become.

In the game control main process of the feature unit 103SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 14-13, when it is determined that the clear switch is ON in 103SGSa008 (103SGSa008; Y) or the set value is being changed in 103SGSa021. Although the embodiment in which the RAM clear process (103SGSa009) is executed after clearing the flag is illustrated, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the present invention is not limited thereto, and the RAM clear process is not limited thereto. Is not when it is determined that the clear switch is ON in 103SGSa008 (103SGSa008; Y) or after clearing the setting value changing flag in 103SGSa021, but when it is determined that the RAM clear flag is set in 103SGSa014 (103SGSa014). It may be executed in Y).

14-14 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (S171) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variable start command reception flag is set (103SGS271). When the first variable start command reception flag is set (103SGS271; Y), it corresponds to the buffer numbers "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special figure hold storage in the start winning command buffer 103SG194A. The various command data and various flags that are attached and stored are shifted upward by one buffer number (103SGS272). The contents of the buffer number "1-0" are deleted because they cannot be shifted because there is no shift destination.

Specifically, the shift is made so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-1" of the first special figure hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "1-0". Then, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-2" of the first special figure hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-1". 1 Special figure The first special figure is shifted so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-3" of the hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "1-2". The various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-4" of the hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-3".

If the first fluctuation start command reception flag is not set in 103SGS271 (103SGS271; N), it is determined whether or not the second fluctuation start command reception flag is set (103SGS273). If the second fluctuation start command reception flag is not set (103SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is terminated, and if the second fluctuation start command reception flag is set (103SGS273; Y), the start is started. Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special figure hold storage in the receiving command buffer (not shown) at the time of winning are stored in one buffer number. It shifts upward by the minute (103SGS274). The contents of the buffer number "2-0" are deleted because they cannot be shifted because there is no shift destination.

Specifically, the shift is made so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-1" of the second special figure hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "2-0". Then, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-2" of the second special figure hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-1". 2 Special figure The second special figure is shifted so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-3" of the hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "2-2". The various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-4" of the hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-3".

After executing 103SGS272 or 103SGS274, the effect control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (103SGS275).

Next, the display result (stop symbol) of the decorative symbol is determined according to the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (that is, the received display result designation command) (103SGS276). In this case, the effect control CPU 120 determines the stop symbol of the decorative symbol according to the display result specified by the display result specification command, and stores the data indicating the determined stop symbol of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display result storage area. To do.

In the feature unit 103SG, when the received variable display result specification command is the second variable display result specification command corresponding to the non-probability change jackpot A, the effect control CPU 120 has, for example, an even number of three symbols as stop symbols. Determine the combination of decorative symbols (big hit symbols) that are aligned with the symbols. Further, when the received variable display result specification command is the third variable display result specification command corresponding to the probability variation jackpot B, a plurality of combinations of odd numbers other than "7" (for example, "111") are used as stop symbols. It is determined from the combination of decorative patterns such as "333", "555", and "999"). In addition, when the received variable display result specification command is the 4th variable display result specification command corresponding to the probability variation jackpot C, a combination of decorative symbols (big hit symbols) in which 3 symbols are aligned with "7" is used as the stop symbol. decide. Further, when the received variable display result specification command is the fifth variable display result specification command corresponding to the probability variation jackpot C, the stop symbols are "334" and "778", which are the same chances as the small hit. Decide from the inside. Further, when the received variable display result specification command is the fifth variable display result specification command corresponding to a small hit, the stop symbol is "334" or "778", which is the same chance as the probability variation big hit C. Decide from the inside. Further, when the received variable display result specification command is the first variable display result specification command corresponding to the deviation, it is a decorative symbol in which the three symbols are not uniform as the stop symbol, and a combination other than the above-mentioned chance eyes. (Out of design) is decided.

In determining these stop symbols, the effect control CPU 120 extracts, for example, a random number for determining the stop symbol, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating a combination of decorative symbols and a numerical value are associated with each other. Then, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol may be determined. That is, the stop symbol may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the numerical value corresponding to the extracted random number.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect determination process shown in FIGS. 14-15 to determine whether or not to execute the variable display effect in the variable display (103SGS277).

(Variable display)
As the effect during the variable display, the effect suggests the advantageous state suggestion result that suggests that the game is controlled to the big hit game state, and the setting suggestion result that suggests the setting value that the CPU 103 performs in the set value change process. It is a production (predetermined production) that can be any of the above. In the feature unit 103SG, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a reach notice (notice effect) suggesting that the variable display mode may become a reach and become a big hit as an effect in which the effect result is an advantageous state suggestion result. is there. Further, as an effect in which the effect result is a setting suggestion result, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion that suggests which of the set values 1 to 6 the set value is. Further, the effect control CPU 120 executes a variable display effect when the effect result can be both an advantageous state suggestion result and a setting suggestion result, that is, both reach notice and setting suggestion can be executed. When it is possible, the reach notice in which the effect result is the advantageous state suggestion result can be executed in preference to the setting suggestion in which the effect result is the setting suggestion result.

As shown in FIGS. 14-16, the variable display effect has a plurality of types of effect patterns (effect modes) of patterns PT-1 to PT-9, and the effect control CPU 120 is a variable display effect. When the execution is decided, which of the patterns PT-1 to PT-9 is used to execute the variable display effect, that is, which of the patterns PT-1 to PT-9 is used. It is decided by lottery whether to execute the effect during variable display based on.

As shown in FIGS. 14-18 (A) to 14-18, the effect during variable display starts at the timing when a predetermined period elapses after the variable display of the symbol is started (the timing before the variable display mode reaches reach). Then, a plurality of (for example, eight) images Z1 showing the paraglider on which the passenger rides fade in from the left side of the display area of the image display device 5 and move toward the right side of the display area. By fading out to the right side of the display area, the variable display effect ends. Further, an image Z2 indicating that a predetermined number of gliders are destroyed and dropped while the plurality of images Z1 are moving toward the right side may be displayed, and a set value is set depending on the number of the dropped paragliders. Or reach is suggested.

Specifically, in the case of pattern PT-1, one body is destroyed and falls, in the case of pattern PT-2, two bodies are destroyed and fall, and in the case of pattern PT-3, three bodies are destroyed and fall. In the case of pattern PT-4, 4 bodies are destroyed and fall, in the case of pattern PT-5, 5 bodies are destroyed and fall, and in the case of pattern PT-6, 6 bodies are destroyed and fall. In the case of pattern PT-7, 7 bodies are destroyed and fall, and in the case of pattern PT-8 and pattern PT-9, 8 bodies are destroyed and fall.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 14-18 (B) and 14-19 (A), in the patterns PT-1 to PT-8, the timing at which the paraglider is destroyed is the same, and each pattern PT-1 to PT-1 to 1 to 8 is destroyed. The number of paragliders corresponding to PT-8 is destroyed all at once (or a predetermined number may be used). On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 14-19 (B), the pattern PT-9 is a pattern in which a total of eight paragliders fall like the pattern PT-8, but the mode in which the paragliders are destroyed is the pattern PT-. It is different from 8. Specifically, seven paragliders are destroyed at the same timing as pattern PT-7, but the remaining one is destroyed at the second timing after the first timing when the other seven are destroyed. ..

Which of the patterns PT-1 to PT-9 is used to execute the effect period of such a variable display effect, that is, the reach notice or the effect result in which the effect result is an advantageous state suggestion result is the setting suggestion result. Regardless of which of the setting suggestions, the effect of the common mode (for example, the effect of the aspect in which the image Z1 fades in from the left side of the display area of the image display device 5 and moves toward the right side of the display area). Is executed, and a non-common mode of effect (for example, a number of images Z2 corresponding to the effect pattern is an image display device) that can specify whether the effect result is an advantageous state suggestion result or a setting suggestion result. It is composed of a non-common effect period in which the effect of moving downward in the display area of 5) is executed.

In the background where the images Z1 and Z2 are displayed as the effect during the variable display, the decorative symbols are variably displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, but the decorative symbols are displayed in a smaller size than usual. The small symbol may be variably displayed at a predetermined place. Further, during the execution period of the variable display effect, another notice effect or the like different from the variable display effect may be executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 14-16, among the patterns PT-1 to PT-9, the set value is 1 for the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 in which the number of paragliders destroyed is 1 to 7. Regarding the patterns PT-8 and PT-9, which are set as a specific pattern (specific mode) corresponding to the setting suggestion suggesting which of the 6 to 6 is set, and the number of paragliders destroyed is eight. It is said to be a special pattern (special mode) corresponding to the reach notice suggesting the possibility of reaching. That is, the effect during variable display has the same effect mode in the common effect period, but the suggestion target differs depending on the difference in the effect mode in the non-common effect period (the number of paragliders destroyed), and 1 to 7 paragliders. If it is destroyed, it will be a setting suggestion, and if 8 bodies are destroyed, it will be a reach notice.

Specifically, the patterns PT-1 and PT-3 suggest that the set values may be odd (for example, 1, 3, 5), and the patterns PT-2 and PT-4 have even set values. (For example, 2, 4, 6), the pattern PT-5 suggests that the set value may be equal to or higher than the intermediate setting (for example, 3 or 5), and the pattern PT-5. 6 suggests that the set value may be greater than or equal to the even-numbered intermediate setting (eg, 4 or 6), and pattern PT-7 suggests that the set value may be the highest setting (eg, 6). ..

The patterns PT-1 to PT-4 are determined at a high rate when the set value is any of 1 to 4 (low setting), so that any of the set values 5 and 6 (high setting) can be obtained. It is regarded as the first specific pattern {setting suggestion (low), first specific mode} with low expectation that it is, and for patterns PT-5 to PT-6, the set value is any of 5 and 6. In some cases, it is determined at a high rate, so that it is a second specific pattern {setting suggestion (high), second specific mode} with a high degree of expectation that the set values are 5 and 6.

In the feature unit 103SG, the set values 1 to 4 are set as low settings and the set values 5 and 6 are set as high settings, but the set values 1 to 3 may be set as low settings and the set values 4 to 6 may be set as high settings. Then, the execution ratio of the effect pattern may be set with the set values 1 and 2 being the low setting, the setting values 3 and 4 being the intermediate setting, and the setting values 5 and 6 being the high setting.

On the other hand, the pattern PT-8 suggests that the variable display of the symbol may be more than reach (for example, normal reach or super reach), and the pattern PT-9 suggests that the variable display of the symbol may be super reach. Suggest.

Regarding the pattern PT-8, the variable display mode of the symbol is determined at a high rate when it becomes the normal reach, so that the expectation of becoming the super reach is low. The first special pattern {reach notice (low), the first Regarding the pattern PT-9, the second special pattern {reach, which is highly expected to become super reach, is determined at a high rate when the variable display mode of the symbol becomes super reach. Notice (high), second special mode}.

As described above, the effect control CPU 120 has a special mode (for example, patterns PT-8 and PT-9) that suggests that the jackpot game state is controlled, and a specific mode (for example, pattern PT-) that suggests the setting. It is possible to execute a variable display effect based on any one of a plurality of types of effect modes including 1 to PT-7), and a reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 (predetermined effect of a special mode). When any of the setting suggestion (predetermined effect of a specific embodiment) based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 can be executed, the reach notice can be executed in preference to the setting suggestion.

In the first embodiment, the pattern PT-8 and the pattern PT-9 are determined when the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach regardless of whether or not the variable display result is a big hit. Since the fluctuation pattern is determined at a higher rate when the variable display result is out of alignment than when it is a big hit, the pattern PT-8 becomes a super reach, that is, the jackpot expectation is a pattern. While the pattern is lower than PT-9, the pattern PT-9 is determined because the super reach fluctuation pattern is determined at a higher rate when the variable display result is a big hit than when it is out of order. , Super reach, that is, a pattern in which the jackpot expectation is higher than the pattern PT-8.

Further, in the first embodiment, in the variable display effect, a mode suggesting the possibility of a big hit or which set value is set depending on the number of paragliders destroyed has been illustrated. It is not limited, and the appearance of a predetermined number (for example, 8) or more paragliders without destroying the paragliders may suggest a big hit or a high setting. Furthermore, if it is possible to suggest the possibility of a big hit and which setting value is set, the effect mode can be changed in various ways, for example, the number of characters appearing, the type of character appearing, and the like. It may be something that can suggest a big hit or a set value.

In addition, in the setting suggestion (high) based on any of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 and the reach notice (high) based on pattern PT-9, the last paraglider among the number corresponding to each pattern is destroyed. By outputting a specific sound or emitting a game effect lamp 909 or the like when falling, it may be possible to notify that the pattern has a high expectation of a big hit or a high setting.

As shown in FIGS. 14-15, in the effect determination process during variable display, the effect control CPU 120 first identifies the variable display result and the variation pattern (103SGS291). The variable display result is a variable display result specification command for specifying the variable display result (off, non-probability change big hit A, probability change big hit B, probability change big hit C, small hit) transmitted from the main board 11 at the start of variable display. Variable display result specification command for storing the variable display result specification command stored in the storage area. Further, as described above, the fluctuation pattern can be specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command stored in the fluctuation pattern designation command storage area.

Then, the random numbers for determining the reach notice type are extracted, and the effect (reach notice) type determination table A shown in FIG. 14-17 (A) is used to determine whether or not the reach notice is executed in the variable display effect. A lottery is conducted to determine the type of reach notice in the case of (103SGS292).

In the effect (reach notice) type determination table A shown in FIG. 14-17 (A), when the fluctuation pattern is super reach, 20 judgment values are assigned to non-execution, and 20 is assigned to pattern PT-8. A number of determination values are assigned, and 60 determination values are assigned to the pattern PT-9. That is, when the fluctuation pattern is super reach, the PT-9 is won at a higher rate than when the fluctuation pattern is other than super reach.

When the fluctuation pattern is normal reach, 20 judgment values are assigned to non-execution, 60 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-8, and 20 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-9. There is. That is, when the fluctuation pattern is normal reach, the PT-8 is won at a higher rate than when the fluctuation pattern is other than normal reach.

When the fluctuation pattern is a non-reach or small hit fluctuation pattern, 100 determination values are assigned to the non-execution, and the determination values are not assigned to the patterns PT-8 and PT-9. That is, if the fluctuation pattern is a non-reach or small hit fluctuation pattern, the reach notice is not won.

By setting the judgment value in this way, when the fluctuation pattern is normal reach, it is easier to win the pattern PT-8 at a higher rate than when the fluctuation pattern is other than the normal reach fluctuation pattern, and when the fluctuation pattern is super reach, it is easy to win. Pattern PT-9 is easier to win at a higher rate than in cases other than the super reach fluctuation pattern.

Therefore, when an effect based on pattern PT-8 appears, it is more likely to be a normal reach variation pattern than a super reach variation pattern, and when an effect based on pattern PT-9 appears, it is super than a normal reach variation pattern. It is likely to be a reach variation pattern. In other words, pattern PT-8 is determined to be a reach fluctuation pattern, but there is a high possibility that it will be a normal reach, so it is considered as a reach notice (low) with a low jackpot expectation, and pattern PT-9 is a super reach fluctuation pattern. Since there is a high possibility that it will be, it is considered to be a reach notice (high) pattern with high expectation for big hits.

Returning to FIG. 14-15, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} has been won as a result of performing the execution of the reach notice and the lottery of the type in 103SGS292. (103SGS293). When it is determined that the pattern PT-9 has been won, the execution of the reach notice based on the pattern PT-9 is determined in preference to the setting suggestion based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 (103SGS294). Proceed to 103SGS304.

If it is determined in 103SGS292 that the pattern PT-9 has not been won, that is, if the reach notice is not executed or the pattern PT-8 is won, the reach notice is not executed or the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low). } Is won, the set value stored in the RAM 102 is read out, and the current set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is specified (103SGS295). Next, the random numbers for determining the setting suggestion type are extracted, and the effect (setting suggestion) type determination table B corresponding to the set value specified in 103SGS295 is used to determine whether or not the setting suggestion is executed in the variable display effect. A lottery is performed to determine the type of setting suggestion to be executed (103SGS296).

In the effect (setting suggestion) type determination table B shown in FIG. 14-17 (B), when the set value is 1, 30 judgment values are assigned to non-execution, and 25 judgment values are assigned to the pattern PT-1. Is assigned, 10 judgment values are assigned to the pattern PT-2, 25 judgment values are assigned to the pattern PT-3, 5 judgment values are assigned to the pattern PT-4, and the pattern is assigned. Four determination values are assigned to the PT-5, one determination value is assigned to the pattern PT-6, and one determination value is not assigned to the pattern PT-7. When the set value is 2, 30 judgment values are assigned to non-execution, 10 judgment values are assigned to the pattern PT-1, and 25 judgment values are assigned to the pattern PT-2. Five judgment values are assigned to the pattern PT-3, 25 judgment values are assigned to the pattern PT-4, one judgment value is assigned to the pattern PT-5, and four judgment values are assigned to the pattern PT-6. A judgment value is assigned, and one judgment value is not assigned to the pattern PT-7. When the set value is 3, 30 judgment values are assigned to non-execution, 20 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-1, and 5 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-2. 20 judgment values are assigned to the pattern PT-3, 5 judgment values are assigned to the pattern PT-4, 15 judgment values are assigned to the pattern PT-5, and 5 judgment values are assigned to the pattern PT-6. A judgment value is assigned, and one judgment value is not assigned to the pattern PT-7. When the set value is 4, 30 judgment values are assigned to non-execution, 5 judgment values are assigned to the pattern PT-1, and 20 judgment values are assigned to the pattern PT-2. Pattern PT-3 is assigned 5 judgment values, pattern PT-4 is assigned 20 judgment values, pattern PT-5 is assigned 5 judgment values, and pattern PT-6 is assigned 15 judgment values. A judgment value is assigned, and one judgment value is not assigned to the pattern PT-7. When the set value is 5, 30 judgment values are assigned to non-execution, 5 judgment values are assigned to the pattern PT-1, and 10 judgment values are assigned to the pattern PT-2. Pattern PT-3 is assigned 5 judgment values, pattern PT-4 is assigned 10 judgment values, pattern PT-5 is assigned 25 judgment values, and pattern PT-6 is assigned 15 judgment values. A judgment value is assigned, and one judgment value is not assigned to the pattern PT-7. When the set value is 6, 30 judgment values are assigned to non-execution, 10 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-1, and 5 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-2. Pattern PT-3 is assigned 10 judgment values, pattern PT-4 is assigned 5 judgment values, pattern PT-5 is assigned 10 judgment values, and pattern PT-6 is assigned 25 judgment values. Judgment values are assigned, and five judgment values are assigned to the pattern PT-7.

By setting the judgment value in this way, when the set value is an odd number 1 or 3, the patterns PT-1 and PT-3 are won at a higher rate than when the set value is other than 1 or 3. When the set value is 2 or 4, it is easy to win, and the patterns PT-2 and PT-4 are easily won at a higher rate than when the set value is other than 2 or 4, and the set value is 5. Is easier to win the pattern PT-5 at a higher rate than when the set value is other than 5, and when the set value is 6, the pattern PT-6 is won at a higher rate than when the set value is other than 6. It's easier to do. Further, since the pattern PT-7 may be won only when the set value is 6, it is confirmed that the set value is 6 when a setting suggestion based on the pattern PT-7 appears.

Therefore, if an effect based on patterns PT-1 to PT-4 in which the number of paragliders destroyed is 4 or less is likely to appear, it is highly possible that the set value is one of 1 to 4, and the paraglider is destroyed. If the effect based on the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 with 5 or more bodies is likely to appear, it is highly possible that the set value is any of 5 and 6. That is, patterns PT-1 to PT-4 are considered to be setting suggestions (low) that are unlikely to have a high setting (set value 5 or 6), and patterns PT-5 to PT-7 are set to a high setting (set value 5 or 6). It is said that the setting suggestion (high) is likely to be 6).

In the first embodiment, the reach advance notice type determination random number and the setting suggestion type determination random number are random numbers in the range of 1 to 100, and any value in the range of 1 to 100 is extracted. That is, the number of judgment values of each determination random number is set to 100 in the range of 1 to 100, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the range of each determination random number and the like should be appropriately determined. Just do it. Further, each determination random number counter for generating each of these determination random numbers is set in the RAM 122, and each determination random number counter is updated for each timer interrupt in the random number update process.

Returning to FIG. 14-15, the effect control CPU 120 performed a lottery for the presence / absence of execution of the setting suggestion and the type in 103SGS296, and as a result, any one of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} was obtained. It is determined whether or not the player has won (103SGS297). If it is determined that any of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 has been won, and if the non-execution of the reach notice is won in 103SGS293, one of the winning patterns PT-5 to PT-7 is selected. When the execution of the setting suggestion (high) based on the setting is uniquely determined and the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is won in 103SGS293, any one of the winning patterns PT-5 to PT-7 is won. The execution of the setting suggestion (high) based on the above is determined in preference to the reach notice (low) based on the pattern PT-8 (103SGS298), and the process proceeds to 103SGS304.

In 103SGS297, if any of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} was not won, that is, if the setting suggestion was not executed or any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 was won. , 103SGS297 determines whether or not pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is won in 103SGS293 based on non-execution of setting suggestion or winning of any of patterns PT-1 to PT-4. (103SGS300).

If it is determined that the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} has been won in the 103SGS300, and if the non-execution of the setting suggestion is won in the 103SGS297, the reach notice (low) based on the pattern PT-8 is executed. If any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} is won in 103SGS297, the reach notice (low) based on the winning pattern PT-8 is Execution is determined in preference to the setting suggestion (low) based on patterns PT-1 to PT-4 (103SGS301), and the process proceeds to 103SGS304.

If it is determined in the 103SGS300 that the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} has not been won, it is determined whether or not any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} has been won. If any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 is won, the execution of the setting suggestion (low) based on the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 is determined, and the process proceeds to 103SGS304. Further, when none of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 is won, that is, when the non-execution of both the reach notice and the setting suggestion is won, the variable display is being performed without deciding the execution of the effect. The production determination process ends.

In 103SGS304, the effect type (any of patterns PT-1 to PT-9) determined in any of 103SGS294, 103SGS298, 103SGS301, and 103SGS303 is stored in a predetermined area of RAM 122 (103SGS304), and the effect during variable display is executed. The variable display effect execution decision flag indicating that has been determined is set (103SGS305), and the variable display effect determination process is terminated.

Returning to FIG. 14-14, after the variable display effect determination process of 103SGS277, the effect control CPU 120 in 103SGS278 determines whether or not the variable display effect execution decision flag is set, that is, the variable display effect determination of 103SGS277. It is determined whether or not the execution of the variable display effect of any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-9 is determined in the process.

If the variable display effect execution decision flag is set, the process proceeds to 103SGS279, and the period until the variable display effect start is set in the variable display effect start waiting timer (103SGS279), and the variable display effect execution is executed. Clear the decision flag (103SGS280) and proceed to 103SGS281. On the other hand, if the effect execution decision flag during variable display is not set, the process proceeds to 103SGS281 without going through 103SGS279 and 103SGS280.

As for the period until the start of the variable display effect, in this feature unit 103SG, the timing at which the paraglider appears is set as the start timing of the variable display effect, and the process table of the variable display effect executed from the start of the variable display effect. Since the variable display effect is started based on the above, an example is shown in which the period until the start timing of the variable display effect is set in the variable display effect start waiting timer. The present invention is not limited to this. For example, an effect (not shown) showing a precursor is performed before the timing at which the variable display effect is started, and the timing at which the precursor is started is set as the variable display effect. When the start timing is set, a period shorter than the period until the variable display effect is started may be set in the variable display effect start wait timer.

In 103SGS281, the effect control CPU 120 selects an effect control pattern (process table) according to the variation pattern designation command. Then, the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table is started (103SGS282).

In the process table, display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R are controlled. The sound control execution data, the operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A, and the like are arranged in order in chronological order in association with each process data n (1 to N). There is.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 displays the effect device (image display as an effect component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). The device 5, various lamps as production parts, speakers 8L, 8R as production parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) are controlled (103SGS283). For example, the image display device 5 outputs a command to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image according to the fluctuation pattern. Further, in order to control the lighting / extinguishing of various lamps, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 9014. Further, in order to output the voice from the speakers 8L and 8R, the control signal (sound number data) is output to the voice control board 13.

In the first embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 controls the variation pattern designation command so that the decorative pattern is variably displayed according to the variation pattern corresponding to one-to-one. However, the effect control CPU 120 controls the variation pattern. The fluctuation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns corresponding to the specified command.

Then, a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variable pattern designation command is set in the variable display time timer (103SGS284). Further, a predetermined time is set in the variable display control timer (103SGS285). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms. Every time the predetermined time elapses, the effect control CPU 120 writes the image data indicating the display state of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols to the VRAM, and the display control unit 123 writes the image data to the VRAM. The variable display (variation) of the decorative pattern is realized by outputting the signal corresponding to the image data to the image display device 5 and displaying the image according to the signal by the image display device 5. Next, the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the effect processing (S172) during variable display (103SGS286).

As described above, in the first embodiment, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display of the symbol based on the reach variation pattern, the predetermined variable display mode is determined after the variable display is started and before the variable display mode becomes the reach mode. At the effect timing, either reach notice or setting suggestion can be executed as the variable display effect, and when deciding whether or not to execute the variable display effect, the effect result becomes an advantageous state suggestion result. It is possible to execute (the effect of a special aspect) with priority over the setting suggestion (the effect of a specific aspect) in which the effect result is the setting suggestion result.

Specifically, as shown in the effect determination process during variable display of FIG. 14-15, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the reach notice is executed and the type of lottery, and whether or not the setting suggestion is executed and the type of lottery. Give priority to.

That is, in the reach notice lottery, when the fluctuation pattern is super reach, the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution of the reach notice (high) based on the pattern PT-9 at a rate of 60% (103SGS294). The notice (high) will be executed at a higher rate (priority) than the setting suggestion. On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern is normal reach, the execution of the reach notice (high) based on the pattern PT-9 is determined only at a rate of 20%, but the reach notice (low) based on the pattern PT-8 is determined at a rate of 60%. Even if the lottery of setting suggestion is executed in 103SGS296 based on the winning of the reach notice (low), the setting suggestion based on the pattern PT-5 to PT-7 is executed in 103SGS297 (high). ) Is not won, 103SGS301 will decide to execute the reach notice (low) based on the pattern PT-8, so the reach notice will be executed at a higher rate (priority) than the setting suggestion. Become.

Further, the reach notice includes a reach notice (low) and a reach notice (high) suggesting that the rate of being controlled by a jackpot is higher than that of the reach notice (low). When both the reach notice (high) based on −9 and the setting suggestion based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-7 are feasible, the reach notice (high) based on pattern PT-9 is set to pattern PT-. It is executed with priority over the setting suggestion based on any of 1 to PT-7 (103SGS294). On the other hand, when both the reach notice (low) based on the pattern PT-8 and the setting suggestion based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 are feasible, the pattern PT-5 to PT-7 is selected. It is possible to execute the setting suggestion (high) based on the setting suggestion (high) in preference to the reach notice (low) based on the pattern PT-8 (103SGS298). By doing so, it is possible to prevent the entertainment of the effect during the variable display from being lowered due to the excessive priority given to the reach notice and the restriction on the execution of the setting suggestion.

Further, the setting suggestion includes a setting suggestion (low) and a setting suggestion (high) suggesting that the setting is more likely to be higher than the setting suggestion (low). When both the setting suggestion (high) based on any of -5 to PT-7 and the reach notice based on any of patterns PT-8 to PT-9 are feasible, the pattern PT-5 to PT-7 is used. The setting suggestion (high) based on is executed in preference to the reach notice (low) based on the pattern PT-8 (103SGS298). On the other hand, when both the setting suggestion (low) based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-4 and the reach notice based on any of patterns PT-8 to PT-9 are feasible, the pattern PT-8 is set. Based reach notice (low) can be executed in preference to setting suggestion (low) based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-4 (103SGS301). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the setting suggestion from being excessively prioritized and the execution of the reach notice being restricted, so that the interest of the effect during the variable display is lowered.

In this way, the effect control CPU 120 executes the reach notice with priority over the setting suggestion. For details, the reach notice (high) is executed with priority over the setting suggestion (high), the setting suggestion (high) is executed with priority over the reach notice (low), and the reach notice (low) is set and suggested (low). Priority is given to execution over low). That is, the priority of execution of each effect pattern is set to have a relationship of "reach notice (high)> setting suggestion (high)> reach notice (low)> setting suggestion (low)".

In the feature unit 103SG, the execution ratio of the reach notice may be set to be higher than the execution ratio of the setting suggestion. That is, the variable display effect is an effect executed during the variable display period of the symbol, and the reach notice suggests that the variable display result may be a big hit, whereas the setting suggestion is at least. It suggests which setting value is not changed during the business period. Further, it is not preferable for the amusement park that the setting suggestion frequently occurs and the player can easily guess which of the set values is. Therefore, when the variable display effect is executed when the setting value is high and the super reach fluctuation pattern is used, it is preferable for the player to suggest any of them, but the setting value is also suggested at another timing. On the other hand, since the jackpot suggestion can be made only during the variable display, it is preferable for the player that the reach notice appears at a higher rate than the setting suggestion.

In addition, since the variable display effect is an effect that is executed only during the variable display period of the super reach fluctuation pattern or the symbol based on the normal reach fluctuation pattern, which has a higher expectation of big hit than the non-reach fluctuation pattern, the variable display mode is the reach. In this case, the player's expectation for a big hit is higher than in the case of not reaching. Therefore, if the setting suggestion is executed with priority over the reach notice, especially in the case of the jackpot reach fluctuation pattern, the player's expectation for the jackpot is lowered and the production becomes inappropriate, so that the reach is inappropriate. By giving priority to the setting suggestion to be executed, it is possible to prevent the production from becoming inappropriate.

Further, in the first embodiment, if the reach notice is executed with priority over the setting suggestion as a tendency of the effect during variable display, for example, it is a non-reach or normal reach fluctuation pattern and is high. In some situations, such as when the setting is made, the execution ratio may be set so that the setting suggestion is executed in preference to the reach notice.

Further, in the first embodiment, the lottery for the reach notice and the lottery for the setting suggestion are executed separately, and the lottery for the reach notice is executed prior to the lottery for the setting suggestion (priority). Although illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and if the execution rate of the reach notice is higher than the execution rate of the setting suggestion, the lottery of the setting suggestion may be performed before the lottery of the reach notice. , The order is arbitrary. Further, the number of judgment values in the effect type determination tables A and B is shown in FIGS. 14-17 (A) and 14-17 (B) if the execution ratio of the reach notice is set to be higher than the execution ratio of the setting suggestion. It is not limited to what is described.

In the first embodiment, as an effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display, a mode in which a setting suggestion suggesting a set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be executed has been illustrated. Is not limited to this, and as a setting suggestion, it may be suggested whether or not the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 has changed since the pachinko gaming machine 1 was started last time.

(First invention)
As described above, this embodiment includes the first invention shown below. That is, conventionally, in a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, the variable display result becomes a big hit by changing the set value, for example, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. There were some that could change the probability of becoming (the probability of being controlled in an advantageous state). In the gaming machine described in the above patent gazette, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests a set value depending on the type of animal displayed. When either of the setting suggestion effects can be executed, no consideration is given to which effect is prioritized, and the setting suggestion effect to be set as the set value when controlled in an advantageous state is executed. Then, there was a problem that the production became inappropriate. Therefore, for the purpose of providing a game machine that can prevent the production from becoming inappropriate,
The gaming machine of means 1 of the first invention is
It can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and is set to one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 6) having different advantages for the player. A possible gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1)
A predetermined effect executing means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can perform a predetermined effect according to any one of a plurality of types of effect modes) as an effect during variable display, in any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7. It has a setting suggestion based on it, or a part that can execute reach notice based on patterns PT-8 and PT-9).
The effect mode of the predetermined effect is a special mode (for example, a reach notice based on the special pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9) that suggests that the predetermined effect is controlled, and a suggestion regarding the setting. Includes specific aspects (eg, setting suggestions based on any of the specific patterns PT-1 to PT-7).
When both the predetermined effect of the special aspect and the predetermined effect of the specific aspect can be executed by the predetermined effect executing means (for example, the timing at which a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the variable display of the symbol (variable display mode). (Timing before reaching)), the predetermined effect of the special aspect can be executed in preference to the predetermined effect of the specific aspect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 may be used in FIG. 14- of the first embodiment). In the variable display effect determination process shown in 15, when the pattern PT-9 is won in the reach notice lottery, the execution of the reach notice (high) based on the pattern PT-9 is determined in 103SGS294 with priority over the setting suggestion. Even if the lottery of the setting suggestion is executed in the part or 103SGS296, if the setting suggestion (high) based on the pattern PT-5 to PT-7 is not won, the reach notice (low) based on the pattern PT-8 in 103SGS301 is not won. ) Is determined with priority over the setting suggestion (low) based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4. / The effect control CPU 120 determines the reach notice (high)> the setting suggestion (high). > Reach notice (low)> Setting suggestion (low) A part that determines the execution of an effect based on any of patterns PT1 to PT-9 at a ratio (see FIG. 14-20 of variant 1))
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, when the control is performed in an advantageous state, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect of a specific mode from being executed and the effect from becoming inappropriate.
Specifically, even when the variable display that makes the variable display result a big hit is executed, the setting suggestion that can be suggested at the timing other than the variable display is executed with priority over the reach notice. , It becomes impossible to raise the player's expectation for the big hit, and it is possible to prevent the production from becoming inappropriate.

The gaming machine of the means 2 of the first invention is the gaming machine according to the means 1.
The special aspect is a first special aspect (for example, reach notice (low)) and a second special aspect (for example, reach notice) that suggests that the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than that of the first special aspect. (High)), including
The predetermined effect executing means is
When both the predetermined effect of the second special aspect and the predetermined effect of the specific aspect can be executed, the predetermined effect of the second special aspect is executed with priority over the predetermined effect of the specific aspect (for example). When the effect control CPU 120 wins the pattern PT-9 in the reach advance notice lottery in the variable display effect determination process shown in FIG. 14-15 of the first embodiment, the reach advance notice based on the pattern PT-9 in the 103SGS294 ( High) execution is determined in preference to setting suggestions based on any of patterns PT-1 to pattern PT-7),
When both the predetermined effect of the first special aspect and the predetermined effect of the specific aspect can be executed, the predetermined effect of the specific aspect can be executed with priority over the predetermined effect of the first special aspect. (For example, when the effect control CPU 120 wins any of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 in the setting suggestion lottery in the variable display effect determination process shown in FIG. 14-15 of the first embodiment, the 103SGS298. The part that prioritizes the execution of the setting suggestion (high) based on any of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 over the reach notice (low) based on pattern PT-8)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the enjoyment of the predetermined effect from being lowered by excessively restricting the execution of the predetermined effect of the specific mode.

The gaming machine of means 3 of the first invention is the gaming machine according to means 1 or 2.
The specific aspect is a first specific aspect (for example, setting suggestion (low)) and a second specific aspect (for example, setting suggestion (high)) that suggests setting of a setting value having a higher advantage than the first specific aspect. )) Including
The predetermined effect executing means is
When both the predetermined effect of the second specific aspect and the predetermined effect of the special aspect can be executed, the predetermined effect of the second specific aspect is executed with priority over the predetermined effect of the special aspect (for example). When any one of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 is won in the setting suggestion lottery in the variable display effect determination process shown in FIG. 14-15 of the first embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 wins the pattern PT in the 103SGS298. The part that determines the execution of the setting suggestion (high) based on any of -5 to PT-7 in preference to the reach notice (low) based on the pattern PT-8),
When both the predetermined effect of the first specific aspect and the predetermined effect of the special aspect can be executed, the predetermined effect of the special aspect can be executed with priority over the predetermined effect of the first specific aspect. (For example, when the effect control CPU 120 wins the pattern PT-8 in the reach notice lottery in the variable display effect determination process shown in FIG. 14-15 of the first embodiment, the pattern PT-8 is changed to the pattern PT-8 in the 103SGS301. The part that prioritizes the execution of the reach notice (low) based on the setting suggestion (low) based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-4)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the enjoyment of the predetermined effect from being lowered by excessively restricting the execution of the predetermined effect of the special aspect.

The gaming machine of means 4 of the first invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3.
An operation promotion notification means capable of executing an operation promotion notification for prompting the player to execute an operation (for example, the effect control CPU 120 performs an operation promotion effect for prompting the player to operate the push button 31B during the operation valid period of the push button 31B. Executable part.) And
An operation detection means (for example, a push sensor 35B) capable of detecting a specific operation (for example, an operation for operating the push button 31B) by the player regardless of whether or not the operation promotion notification by the operation promotion notification means is executed. When,
With
The predetermined effect executing means can execute a predetermined effect based on the detection of the specific operation by the motion detecting means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 presses the push button 31B during the operation valid period of the push button 31B. When a specific operation to be operated is detected by the push sensor 35B, the image Z1 is displayed in response to the operation of the push button 31B regardless of whether or not the operation promotion image prompting the player to operate the push button 31B is displayed. A part that can perform the effect of changing to image Z2 (destroying the paraglider and dropping it). Modification example)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, a player who knows a specific motion can execute a predetermined effect at a desired timing by performing the specific motion, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

The gaming machine of means 5 of the first invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 4.
The predetermined effect is a common effect period (for example, a reach notice or a setting suggestion) in which a common effect is executed regardless of whether the predetermined effect of the special aspect or the predetermined effect of the specific aspect is executed. Regardless of the presence or absence, the effect of the mode in which the image Z1 fades in from the left side of the display area of the image display device 5 and moves toward the right side of the display area is executed) and the predetermined aspect of the special aspect. A non-common production period (for example, whether it is a reach notice or a setting suggestion) that can specify whether the effect is the effect or the predetermined effect of the specific mode can be specified, that is, the number of images Z2 corresponding to the effect pattern Is a non-common effect period in which the effect of moving downward from the display area of the image display device 5 is executed) (see FIGS. 14-18).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, by having a common effect period, it is possible to effectively increase the player's expectation as to which of the predetermined effect of the special aspect and the predetermined effect of the specific aspect is executed. You can improve your interest.

The gaming machine of means 6 of the first invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 5.
The predetermined effect executing means can execute a predetermined effect of a special aspect which is a suggestion of being controlled to the advantageous state and also a suggestion regarding a setting (for example, both a reach notice and a setting suggestion can be executed). Occasionally, a specific image suggesting both a jackpot and a maximum setting (setting value 6) (for example, an image in which a paraglider in which a character appears moves while displaying the image Z1 of the paraglider) is displayed. Part etc.)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to effectively increase the player's expectation that the predetermined effect of the special mode or the special mode different from the specific mode is executed, so that the game interest can be improved.

In the first embodiment, the case where both the reach notice (predetermined effect of the special mode) and the setting suggestion (predetermined effect of the specific mode) can be executed is, for example, a suggestion about the display result of one variable display. As long as it is possible to suggest the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, various timings may be used. Specifically, if the reach notice suggests the display result of the variable display, the reach notice can be executed at any timing during the execution period of the variable display, and the variable display corresponding to the hold memory can be executed. If it is suggested about the display result of, the reach notice can be executed at any timing in the period spanning a plurality of variable displays until the variable display corresponding to the hold storage is executed and the execution period of the variable display. .. Further, since the setting suggestion is not changed during the business period, the setting suggestion can be executed at any timing during one business period.

Further, when both the reach notice (predetermined effect of the special mode) and the setting suggestion (predetermined effect of the specific mode) can be executed, the reach notice can be executed with priority over the setting suggestion. Priority is given to the lottery of the setting suggestion, and the reach notice based on the patterns PT-8 and PT-9 is executed before the setting suggestion based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7. Includes determining, and performing reach notices based on patterns PT-8 and PT-9 at a higher rate than setting suggestions based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-7. Note that executing the reach notice at a rate higher than the setting suggestion includes a case where the reach notice is executed at a rate of 100% and the setting suggestion is not executed, that is, the reach notice is executed at a rate of 100%.

Further, in the first embodiment, the possibility of a big hit or a set value is suggested by the number of destroyed paragliders, that is, the variable display effect that is executed when both the reach notice and the setting suggestion are feasible. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and is executed when both the reach notice and the setting suggestion are feasible. As the effect during variable display, both the advantageous state suggestion result and the setting suggestion result may be included as the effect result.

That is, in the first embodiment, the variable display effect has a common effect period for the reach notice and the setting suggestion, but the effect mode is different between the reach notice and the setting suggestion (in the common effect period). It may be a separate production (which does not have a corresponding period) (specifically, the reach notice is a suggestion using a character, the setting suggestion is a suggestion by a paraglider, etc.). Then, even when the reach notice and the setting suggestion having different production modes are executed together in the same period (same timing), the reach notice may be executed with priority over the setting suggestion.

(Modification example 1)
Next, a modification 1 of the first embodiment of the feature unit 103SG will be described with reference to FIGS. 14-20. 14-20 is a flowchart showing the effect determination process during variable display as the first modification, and FIG. 14-20 is a diagram showing the execution ratio of the reach notice and the setting suggestion.

In the first embodiment, the reach notice is executed with priority over the setting suggestion by prioritizing the execution of the reach notice and the lottery of the type over the lottery of the execution of the setting suggestion and the type. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a lottery for reach notice and setting suggestion may be performed using one effect type determination table C (not shown).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14-20 (A), in the effect determination process during variable display, the effect control CPU 120 first identifies the variable display result and the variation pattern (103SGS311). Next, while extracting the random number for determining the effect type, using the effect (reach notice / setting suggestion) type determination table C (not shown), whether or not the variable display effect (reach notice / setting suggestion) is executed is determined. A lottery is performed to determine the type of reach notice or setting suggestion when the execution is performed (103SGS312).

The effect (reach notice / setting suggestion) type determination table C (not shown) is not particularly shown, but the determination ratio of the effect patterns PT-1 to PT-9 is set according to the type of the variation pattern and the number of set values. ing. That is, although the determination ratios of the effect patterns PT-1 to PT-9 differ depending on the type of the fluctuation pattern and the set values 1 to 6, the execution ratios of the reach notice and the setting suggestion shown in FIG. 14-20 (B) are different. As shown in the trend chart, as a whole, the reach notice is determined (priority) at a higher rate than the setting suggestion, that is, the decision rate is set to be higher in the order of reach notice, setting suggestion, and non-execution. (For example, reach notice is determined by 50%, setting suggestion is determined by 40%, and non-execution is determined by 10%).

Further, for example, when the fluctuation pattern is super reach, the reach notice (high) is higher than the reach notice (low) (for example, the reach notice (high) is 40% and the reach notice (low) is 10%). It is preferable to determine with. When the set values are high setting values 5 and 6, the ratio of the setting suggestion (high) to the setting suggestion (low) is higher than the setting suggestion (low) (for example, the setting suggestion (high) is 35% and the setting suggestion (low) is 5). %) Is preferable. That is, the effect control CPU 120 is produced based on any of the patterns PT1 to PT-9 at a ratio of reach notice (high)> setting suggestion (high)> reach notice (low)> setting suggestion (low). You just have to decide what to do.

Further, in the first embodiment and the first modification, the embodiment in which the execution ratio of the reach notice and the setting suggestion is determined based on the fluctuation pattern and the set value is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited thereto. The execution ratio of the reach notice and the setting suggestion may be different depending on the fluctuation pattern, the set value, and the variable display result. Specifically, regardless of whether the fluctuation pattern is a super reach or a normal reach fluctuation pattern, when a big hit occurs, the reach notice should be executed at a higher rate than when it is missed, prioritizing the setting suggestion. Is preferable.

Further, in the first embodiment and the first modification, when both the advantageous state suggestion result and the setting suggestion result can be executed as the effect result, either the reach notice or the setting suggestion is executed as the variable display effect. Although the possible forms have been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and when both the advantageous state suggestion result and the setting suggestion result are feasible as the effect result, the effect result of the variable display effect is displayed. It may be possible to execute a specific effect that is a specific result that is both an advantageous state suggestion result and a setting suggestion result.

As a specific effect, for example, when a specific image suggesting both a jackpot and a maximum setting (setting value 6) (for example, as shown in FIGS. 14-18, a paraglider image Z1 is displayed, a character is displayed. Display an image of the paraglider in which the item appears (for example, display an image of the paraglider moving), or display an image in which the display mode of the paraglider (for example, color, size, movement speed, trajectory, etc.) is different from the normal mode. It may be displayed, the background color may be different, or an effect image may be displayed. Alternatively, a special sound effect may be output according to the image display of the paraglider, or the illuminant may be made to emit light in a special light emitting mode.

Further, in the first embodiment and the first modification, when either the advantageous state suggestion result or the setting suggestion result is obtained as the effect result, that is, either the reach notice or the setting suggestion can be executed as the variable display effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is possible to execute either the reach notice or the setting suggestion in the variable display effect, while the reach notice and the setting suggestion are variable. It may be possible to execute each independently at an effect timing different from the effect being displayed.

Specifically, for example, it is possible to execute a reach notice (for example, a character notice in which a character appears) in a mode different from the reach notice shown in FIGS. 14-18 at a different effect timing from the variable display effect. On the other hand, the setting suggestion in a mode different from the setting suggestion shown in FIGS. 14-18 (for example, the ending image of the big hit) is given at a timing different from the effect during variable display (for example, after the end of the big hit). It may be feasible.

In Example 1 of the feature unit 103SG of the above-described embodiment, an embodiment in which the effect during variable display can be executed only once during one variable display is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and one The effect during variable display may be executed a plurality of times during the variable display of.

For example, as shown in FIG. 14-21 (A) as the second embodiment, a first period between the start timing of the variable display and the start timing of the reach effect of the normal reach for the fluctuation patterns of the normal reach and the super reach. And in the second period after the first period, the variable display effect can be executed.

Since the variable display time is short for the non-reach and small hit fluctuation patterns to execute the variable display effect twice or more, in the second embodiment, the variable display effect is executed as the normal reach and super reach variation patterns. Although it is limited to, non-reach and small hit fluctuation patterns may be included as execution targets of the effect during variable display.

Further, in the second embodiment, in the above-described variable display effect determination process, the presence or absence of the variable display effect execution determination table shown in FIG. 14-21 (B) is used according to the variation pattern. Determined at different rates. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14-21 (B), when the fluctuation pattern is normal reach, 40 out of 100 random numbers for determining the effect during variable display are displayed in the variable display effect execution decision table. Is assigned to the execution of the variable display effect, and 60 are assigned to the non-execution of the variable display effect. When the fluctuation pattern is super reach, 60 out of 100 random numbers for determining the execution of the variable display effect are assigned to the execution of the variable display effect in the variable display effect execution decision table. Individuals are assigned to non-execution of the effect during variable display.

When the execution of the variable display effect is determined in the second embodiment, the variable display effect is executed in both the first period and the second period shown in FIG. 14-21 (A).

When it is decided to execute the effect during variable display when the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach, it is executed in the first period as shown in FIGS. 14-22 (A) and 14-22 (B). The execution of the setting suggestion and the reach notice is determined at different ratios between the variable display effect to be performed and the variable display effect to be executed in the second period. In the same period, the execution ratios of the setting suggestion and the reach notice are set to be the same regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 14-23, when the execution of the variable display effect is determined when the fluctuation pattern is normal reach, the effect type (effect) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period. The pattern) is determined to be either pattern PT-1 to PT-7 (setting suggestion (low) or setting suggestion (high)) at a rate of 60% regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. , 40% to determine pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 (expected (low) or expected (high)). Further, as shown in FIGS. 14-24, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is patterned at a rate of 40% regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Determined to be either PT-1 to PT-7 (setting suggestion (low) or setting suggestion (high)), and at a rate of 60%, pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 (expectation (low) or expectation). (High)) is decided.

Here, as shown in FIGS. 14-23 and 14-24, paying attention to the case where the fluctuation pattern is normal reach, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the first period The effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 59%, and the pattern PT- at a rate of 1%. Any of 5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} was decided at a rate of 35%, and pattern PT-9 {reach was decided at a rate of 5%. Notice (high)} will be decided. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 38%, and is 2%. The ratio was determined to be one of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)}, the ratio was determined to be the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)}, and the ratio was 5%. The pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to 58.8% of the patterns PT-1 to PT. Determined to be any {setting suggestion (low)} of -4, and determined to be any {setting suggestion (high)} of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 at a rate of 1.2%, and at a rate of 35%. The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 5%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 37.8%. At a rate of 2.2%, one of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 was decided as {setting suggestion (high)}, and at a rate of 55%, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} was decided, and 5 The pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined at a rate of%.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to 58.5% of the patterns PT-1 to PT. Determined to be any {setting suggestion (low)} of -4, and determined to be any {setting suggestion (high)} of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 at a rate of 1.5%, and at a rate of 35%. The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 5%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 37.5%. At a rate of 2.5%, one of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 was decided as {setting suggestion (high)}, and at a rate of 55%, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} was decided, and 5 The pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined at a rate of%.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to the pattern PT-1 to PT-4 at a rate of 58%. It was decided to be one of {setting suggestion (low)}, and it was decided to be any of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 2%, and pattern PT-8 at a rate of 35%. The {reach notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 5%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 37%, and is 3%. The ratio was determined to be one of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)}, the ratio was determined to be the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)}, and the ratio was 5%. The pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 5, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to the pattern PT-1 to PT at a rate of 56.5%. Determined to be any {setting suggestion (low)} of -4, and determined to be any {setting suggestion (high)} of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 at a rate of 3.5%, and at a rate of 35%. The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 5%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 35.5%. One of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided at a rate of 4.5%, and pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} was decided at a rate of 55%, and 5 The pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined at a rate of%.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to the pattern PT-1 to PT-4 at a rate of 55%. Any one of {setting suggestion (low)} was decided, and one of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 was decided at a rate of 5% {setting suggestion (high)}, and pattern PT-8 was decided at a rate of 35%. The {reach notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 5%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 34%, and is 6%. The ratio was determined to be one of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)}, the ratio was determined to be the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)}, and the ratio was 5%. The pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 14-25 and 14-26, paying attention to the case where the fluctuation pattern is super reach, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, it is executed in the first period. The effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display is determined to be one of patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 59%, and pattern PT-5 at a rate of 1%. ~ PT-7 is decided as {setting suggestion (high)}, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is decided at a rate of 15%, and pattern PT-9 {reach notice is decided at a rate of 25%. (High)} is decided. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 38%, and is 2%. The ratio was determined to be one of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)}, the ratio was determined to be the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)}, and the ratio was 55%. The pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to 58.8% of the patterns PT-1 to PT. Determined to be any {setting suggestion (low)} of -4, and determined to be any {setting suggestion (high)} of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 at a rate of 1.2%, and at a rate of 15%. The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 25%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 37.8%. At a rate of 2.2%, one of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 was decided as {setting suggestion (high)}, and at a rate of 5%, it was decided on pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)}, 55. The pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined at a rate of%.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to 58.5% of the patterns PT-1 to PT. Determined to be any {setting suggestion (low)} of -4, and determined to be any {setting suggestion (high)} of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 at a rate of 1.5%, and at a rate of 15%. The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 25%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 37.5%. One of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided at a rate of 2.5%, and pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} was decided at a rate of 5%, 55 The pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined at a rate of%.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to the pattern PT-1 to PT-4 at a rate of 58%. It was decided to be one of {setting suggestion (low)}, and it was decided to be any of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 2%, and pattern PT-8 at a rate of 15%. The {reach notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 25%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 37%, and is 3%. The ratio was determined to be one of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)}, the ratio was determined to be the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)}, and the ratio was 55%. The pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 5, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to 56.5% of the patterns PT-1 to PT. Determined to be one of -4 {setting suggestion (low)}, and determined to be any of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 3.5%, and at a rate of 15% The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 25%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 35.5%. One of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided at a rate of 4.5%, and pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} was decided at a rate of 5%, 55 The pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined at a rate of%.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to the pattern PT-1 to PT-4 at a rate of 55%. It was decided to be one of {setting suggestion (low)}, and it was decided to be any of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 5%, and pattern PT-8 at a rate of 15%. The {reach notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 25%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 34%, and is 6%. The ratio was determined to be one of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)}, the ratio was determined to be the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)}, and the ratio was 55%. The pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided.

As described above, in the second embodiment, when the execution of the variable display effect is decided, the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 {reach is used as the effect type of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period. The rate (60%) at which the execution of the notice (low) or reach notice (high)} is determined is the pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 {reach as the effect type of the variable display during the first period. It is set higher than the rate (40%) at which the execution of the notice (low) or reach notice (high)} is decided.

Therefore, as the effect during variable display is repeatedly executed, the reach notice that becomes the advantageous state suggestion result becomes easier to be executed, so that one game result, that is, a timing close to the timing at which the variable display result of the variable display is derived. Expectations for big hits can be increased.

In particular, as shown in FIGS. 14-23 to 14-26, regarding the effect type of the effect during variable display executed in the first period, any one of patterns PT-1 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (low)). Alternatively, the rate at which the setting suggestion (high)} is determined is set higher than the rate at which the execution of the pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 {reach notice (low) or reach notice (high)} is determined. As for the effect type of the variable display effect that is executed in the second period, the rate at which the execution of pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 {reach notice (low) or reach notice (high)} is determined is the pattern. Any of PT-1 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (low) or setting suggestion (high)} is set higher than the determined ratio.

That is, the patterns PT-8 and the pattern PT-9 corresponding to the reach notice are determined at a higher rate in the second period than in the first period, and the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 corresponding to the setting suggestion are the second. By determining the period at a lower rate than the first period, the setting suggestion is executed at a higher rate than the reach notice in the first period, and the reach notice is executed at a higher rate than the reach notice in the second period. ..

Therefore, for example, after the reach notice (high) is executed as the variable display effect in the first period, the reach notice (low) is executed as the variable display effect in the second period, that is, the variable display is in progress. The variable display is caused by the fact that the reach notice is executed so that the expectation of the reach notice decreases as the effect is repeatedly executed (so-called downfall), or the reach notice (high) is executed in the first time. By allowing the player to predict that is likely to be super reach before the reach notice is executed twice, the player's expectation that the variable display is super reach is reduced. It is possible to prevent it from being stored.

Further, in the second embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 14-23 to 14-26, the variable display effect performed in the second period is more effective than the variable display effect executed in the first period. However, the rate at which any of patterns PT-5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} is determined as the effect type is set high. That is, as the variable display effect is executed, the variable display effect is more likely to be executed in the pattern PT-9, so that the game against the variable display effect being executed in the patterns PT-5 to PT-8. The expectation of the person can be maintained.

In the second embodiment, when it is decided to execute the variable display effect, the variable display effect is executed twice in the first period and the second period, but the present invention illustrates this. When it is decided to execute the variable display effect, the variable display effect may be executed three or more times. When the variable display effect is executed three or more times in this way, the effect type determination ratio is set so that the pattern PT-9 can be easily determined each time the variable display effect is executed. It may be possible to maintain the expectation of the engineer for a longer period of time.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 14-23 to 14-26, the variable display effect performed in the first period and the variable display effect executed in the second period have the pattern PT- as an effect type. Since the ratios of 1 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (low) or setting suggestion (high)} are different, the variable display effect executed in the first period and the setting suggestion (high) are executed in the second period. It is difficult to continuously execute the setting suggestion with the effect during variable display. That is, in both of these two variable display effects, it is possible to prevent the game enjoyment from being lowered due to the variable display effect becoming monotonous due to the execution of the setting suggestion.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 14-23 to 14-26, the variable display effect performed in the first period and the variable display effect executed in the second period have the pattern PT- as an effect type. Since the ratio of 8 and PT-9 {reach notice (low) or reach notice (high)} is different, it is executed in the variable display during the first period and in the second period. It is difficult for the reach notice to be executed continuously due to the effect during variable display. That is, in both of these two variable display effects, it is possible to prevent the game enjoyment from being lowered due to the variable display effect becoming monotonous due to the execution of the reach notice.

Further, in the second embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 14-23 to 14-26, the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the first period and the variable display effect in the second period. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect control CPU 120 is used in the first period. The rate at which the reach notice is executed as the variable display effect may be the same between the case where the variable display effect is executed and the case where the variable display effect is executed in the second period. By doing so, when the variable display effect is executed in the first period and the second period, the reach notice is executed as the variable display effect, and the first period and the second period are used. You can expect the player in the same way.

In the second embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 14-23 to 14-26, if the variable display advance notice effect is executed during the same period, regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Although the embodiment in which the execution of the reach notice is determined is the same as the variable display notice effect, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display notice effect executed in the same period is not limited to this. , The rate at which the execution of the reach notice is determined as the effect during variable display may differ depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. By doing so, the rate at which the reach notice is executed as the variable display effect in the first period or the second period changes according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, so that the variable display It is possible to prevent the medium production from becoming monotonous.

Further, in the second embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 14-22 to 14-26, focusing on the effect during variable display executed in the first period, the ratio (pattern PT-1 to 1) that determines the execution of the setting suggestion. The ratio for determining the execution of any of the patterns PT-7) is set to 60%, which is the same ratio regardless of the set value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the ratio for determining the reach notice (pattern). The ratio for determining the execution of the PT-8 or the pattern PT9) is set to 40%, which is the same ratio regardless of the set value set for the pachinko gaming machine. Similarly, focusing on the variable display effect to be executed in the second period, the ratio of determining the execution of the setting suggestion (the ratio of determining the execution of any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7) is the pachinko gaming machine 1. Regardless of the set value, it is set to 40%, which is the same ratio, and the ratio for determining the reach notice (the ratio for determining the execution of pattern PT-8 or pattern PT9) is set for the pachinko gaming machine. It is set to 60%, which is the same ratio regardless of the set value.

Therefore, even if the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 1 to 6, the variable display effect (the first variable display effect) executed in the first period is always performed. The setting suggestion is executed at a rate of 60%, the reach notice is executed at a rate of 40%, and the variable display during the second period (the second variable display during the effect) is always set at a rate of 40%. Since the suggestion is executed and the reach notice is executed at a rate of 60%, the player can be expected to execute the setting suggestion in the same way.

Further, in the second embodiment, since the effect during variable display can be executed a plurality of times in one variable display, the chances of providing reach notice and setting suggestion in one variable display increase, so that the interest is improved. ..

More specifically, when only the reach notice can be executed independently in relation to the display result of one variable display, the setting suggestion is performed at a timing other than the variable display (for example, the ending or variable display of the jackpot game state). It is possible to execute it independently (when it is not executed), but when the player is playing a game, the most noticeable thing is during the execution period of the variable display. Therefore, in the variable display in-process effect in which both the reach notice and the setting suggestion can be executed, not only the setting suggestion can be executed during the execution period of the variable display that the player pays most attention to, but also the setting suggestion can be executed in the second embodiment. As described above, by making it possible to execute the variable display effect multiple times in one variable display, not only can the chance of executing the setting suggestion be increased, but also the second period in the first period as described above. If it is executed at a higher rate, it is possible to execute the setting suggestion and the reach notice in a well-balanced manner without hindering the execution of the reach notice even in the fluctuation pattern of the jackpot.

Further, in the second embodiment, when it is decided to execute the effect during variable display, either the reach notice or the setting suggestion is executed in both the first period and the second period. The invention is not limited to this, and in at least one of the first period and the second period, a non-execution that neither the reach notice nor the setting suggestion is executed may be determined.

When non-execution can be determined in this way, even if the execution rate of the setting suggestion is set to be the same in the first period and the second period, if the execution rate of the reach notice is different between the first period and the second period. Can be made. Further, even if the execution rate of the reach notice is set to be the same in the first period and the second period, the execution rate of the setting suggestion can be made different between the first period and the second period.

(Second invention)
As described above, this embodiment includes the second invention shown below. That is, conventionally, in a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, the variable display result becomes a big hit by changing the set value, for example, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. There were some that could change the probability of becoming (the probability of being controlled in an advantageous state). In the gaming machine described in the above patent gazette, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests a set value depending on the type of animal displayed. When either of the setting suggestion effects can be executed, no consideration is given to which effect is prioritized, and the setting suggestion effect to be set as the set value when controlled in an advantageous state is executed. Then, there was a problem that the production became inappropriate. Therefore, for the purpose of providing a game machine that can prevent the production from becoming inappropriate,
The gaming machine of means 1 of the second invention is
It can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and is set to one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 6) having different advantages for the player. A possible gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1)
A predetermined effect executing means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 has one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 as the effect during variable display) capable of executing the predetermined effect by any one of a plurality of types of effect modes. It is equipped with a setting suggestion based on, or a part where reach notice based on patterns PT-8 and PT-9 can be executed).
The effect mode of the predetermined effect is a special mode (for example, a reach notice based on the special pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9) that suggests that the predetermined effect is controlled, and a suggestion regarding the setting. Includes specific aspects (eg, setting suggestions based on any of the specific patterns PT-1 to PT-7).
When the predetermined effect executing means can execute both the predetermined effect of the special aspect and the predetermined effect of the specific aspect when the predetermined effect is executed a plurality of times (for example, in FIG. 14-21 as the second embodiment). As shown, during the variable display of normal reach and super reach), in the second number of times after the first number of times, than when the predetermined effect is executed in the first number of times. When the predetermined effect is executed, the predetermined effect of the special aspect can be executed at a higher rate (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-22 as the second embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 is in the first period. Reach based on the special pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 when the variable display effect is executed in the second period after the first period than when the variable display effect is executed. The part that executes the notice at a high rate)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, as the predetermined effect is repeatedly executed, the predetermined effect of the special aspect is easily executed, so that the expectation for the advantageous state can be increased at a timing close to one game result.
More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 14-22, the variable display effect executed in the second period is easier to execute the reach notice than the variable display effect executed in the first period. It is possible to increase the expectation that the jackpot game state will be controlled during the second period, which is closer to the timing when the variable display ends than the first period.

The gaming machine of the means 2 of the second invention is the gaming machine according to the means 1.
When the predetermined effect is executed in the second number of times, the predetermined effect executing means can execute the predetermined effect of the specific aspect at a rate lower than the ratio of executing the predetermined effect of the specific aspect in the first number of times. (For example, as shown in FIG. 14-22 as the second embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 performs the variable display during the effect in the first period in the second period after the first period. The part that executes the setting suggestion based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7, which is a specific pattern, at a lower rate when the effect during variable display is executed)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to suppress a decrease in expectation for an advantageous state because a predetermined effect of a specific mode is easily executed at a timing close to one game result.
Specifically, even if it is not possible to determine non-execution as a variable display effect, it is possible to determine the reach notice at a higher rate in the second period than in the first period.

The gaming machine of means 3 of the second invention is the gaming machine according to means 1 or 2.
The predetermined effect executing means is
When the predetermined effect is executed in the first number of times, the predetermined effect of the specific aspect can be executed at a higher rate than the predetermined effect of the special aspect (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-22 as Example 2). In addition, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the first period, the setting suggestion based on any of the specific patterns PT-1 to PT-7 is a special pattern pattern PT-. 8 or the part to be executed at a higher rate than the reach notice based on pattern PT-9),
When the predetermined effect is executed in the second number of times, the predetermined effect of the special aspect can be executed at a higher rate than the predetermined effect of the specific aspect (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-22 as Example 2). In addition, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the second period, the reach notice based on the special pattern pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 is given as the specific pattern pattern PT-1 to 1. The part to be executed at a higher rate than the setting suggestion based on any of PT-7)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, as the predetermined effect is repeatedly executed, it becomes easier to execute the predetermined effect of the special aspect, but it becomes difficult to execute the predetermined effect of the specific aspect. Expectations can be suitably increased.

The gaming machine of means 4 of the second invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3.
The gaming machine is capable of variable display (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes variable display of a special symbol by executing a special symbol variation process as shown in FIG. 13, and effect control as shown in FIG. 7. The part that executes the variable display of the decorative pattern by executing the effect processing during the variable display of the CPU 120),
The predetermined effect executing means can execute the predetermined effect a plurality of times in one variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-21 as the second embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 is more than the start of the normal reach effect. The part where the effect can be executed during variable display in the first period and the second period, which are the previous periods)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, there are more opportunities to provide a predetermined effect of a special mode or a specific mode in one variable display, so that the interest is improved.

In the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 14-21, a mode in which the variable display effect can be executed in the first period and the second period before the start of the reach effect is illustrated. The present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display effect may be executed even during the reach effect.

The gaming machine of means 5 of the second invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 4.
The gaming machine is capable of variable display (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes variable display of a special symbol by executing a special symbol variation process as shown in FIG. 13, and effect control as shown in FIG. 7. The part that executes the variable display of the decorative pattern by executing the effect processing during the variable display of the CPU 120),
The predetermined effect executing means can execute the predetermined effect a plurality of times over a plurality of variable displays (for example, the effect control CPU 120 has a variable display (target variation) based on the hold memory that is the target of the look-ahead notice. The part that executes reach notice or setting suggestion as a look-ahead notice for target fluctuation over multiple variable displays until it starts)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the predetermined effect of the special aspect and the predetermined effect of the specific aspect can be executed even before the variable display that is one game result is started, the interest is improved.

The gaming machine of means 6 of the second invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 5.
The predetermined effect executing means can execute a predetermined effect of a special mode which is a suggestion of being controlled to the advantageous state and also a suggestion of setting (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can perform a reach notice and a setting suggestion). When both are feasible, the paraglider in which the character appears moves when displaying a specific image (for example, paraglider image Z1) that suggests both a jackpot and a maximum setting (setting value 6). The part that displays images, etc.)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to effectively increase the player's expectation that the predetermined effect of the special mode or the special mode different from the specific mode is executed, so that the game interest can be improved.

(Third invention)
As described above, this embodiment includes the following third invention. That is, conventionally, in a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, the variable display result becomes a big hit by changing the set value, for example, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. There were some that could change the probability of becoming (the probability of being controlled in an advantageous state). In the gaming machine described in the above patent gazette, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests a setting value depending on the type of animal displayed. For example, when such a setting suggestion effect can be repeatedly executed a plurality of times. , There is a problem that the production may be inappropriate because no consideration is given to how to execute the setting suggestion effect in the first and second times of the multiple times. .. Therefore, for the purpose of providing a game machine that can prevent the production from becoming inappropriate,
The gaming machine of means 1 of the third invention is
It can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and is set to one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 6) having different advantages for the player. A possible gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1)
A predetermined effect executing means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 can execute an effect during variable display) is provided so that a predetermined effect can be executed by any one of a plurality of types of effect modes.
The production mode of the predetermined effect includes a first suggestion mode (for example, a setting suggestion (low) based on patterns PT-1 to PT-4) that suggests a setting, and a setting and a type suggested by the first suggestion mode. Includes a second suggestion embodiment (eg, setting suggestion (high) based on pattern PT-5 to pattern PT-7) that makes suggestions for different settings.
When the predetermined effect executing means can execute both the predetermined effect of the first suggestion mode and the predetermined effect of the second suggestion mode when the predetermined effect is executed a plurality of times (for example, FIG. As shown in 14-21, during the variable display of the normal reach and the super reach), the predetermined effect is executed in the first number of the plurality of times, and after the first number of the plurality of times. It is possible to execute the predetermined effect of the second suggestion mode at a higher rate when the predetermined effect is executed in the second number of times (for example, FIGS. 14-23 to 14-26 and 14-28 to 14). As shown in −31, when the effect control CPU 120 can execute the variable display effect in the first period and the second period during the variable display of the normal reach and the super reach as the second and third embodiments, The part that executes the setting suggestion (strong) at a higher rate when executing the variable display effect in the second period than when executing the variable display effect in the first period)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, as the predetermined effect of the second suggestion mode is repeatedly executed, the predetermined effect of the second suggestion mode is easily executed, so that the player's expectation that the predetermined effect of the second suggestion mode is executed is maintained. Can be done.
Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 14-23 to 14-26, the variable display effect performed during the second period suggests a setting (stronger) than the variable display effect executed during the first period. Is easy to execute, so that the player's expectation that the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a high set value such as 4 to 6 can be maintained.

In the second embodiment, the setting suggestion (low) based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4, which is the first suggestion mode for suggesting the setting, suggests an odd number setting or an even number setting, and the first suggestion. The setting suggestion (high) based on any of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7, which is the second suggestion mode in which the setting suggested in the mode and the setting of a different type are suggested, is a form suggesting an intermediate setting or higher or the highest setting. Although exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the second suggestion mode may be any one as long as it suggests a setting different from the setting suggested in the first suggestion mode, for example, the first suggestion. The set value suggested in the embodiment and the set value suggested in the second suggested embodiment may all be different set values (for example, the first suggested embodiment suggests the set value 1 and the second suggested embodiment is set). When the value 6 is suggested, or when the first suggestion mode suggests odd setting values 1, 3, 5 and the second suggestion mode suggests even number settings 2, 4, 6), the first suggestion mode suggests. A common setting value may be included in both the setting value to be set and the setting value suggested in the second suggestion mode (for example, the first suggestion mode suggests the setting values 1 to 4 and the second suggestion mode is Even if one of the first suggestion mode and the second suggestion mode is a suggestion about a setting change and the other is a suggestion about a set value that is set. Good. That is, not only the setting values suggested by the first suggestion mode and the second suggestion mode are different, but also the setting to be suggested when there are a plurality of setting values suggested by the first suggestion mode and the second suggestion mode. Includes those with different numbers and ranges of values, or those with different suggestions.

The gaming machine of the means 2 of the third invention is the gaming machine according to the means 1.
The predetermined effect executing means is specified including the first suggestion mode and the second suggestion mode when the predetermined effect is executed in the first number of times and when the predetermined effect is executed in the second number of times. The predetermined effect of the embodiment can be executed at the same ratio (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-27 as the third embodiment, the case where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect during the first period and the case where the effect is executed. The part where the setting suggestion based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 is executed at the same ratio in the case where the variable display effect is executed in the second period after the first period)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, regardless of whether the predetermined effect of the specific mode is executed at the first time or the second number of times, the execution of the predetermined effect of the specific mode can be expected in the same manner.
Specifically, after setting the execution rate of the entire setting suggestion to be the same (or a lower rate in the second period than in the first period) in the first period and the second period, the effect during variable display in the first period By executing the setting suggestion (strong) at a higher rate when executing the variable display effect in the second period than when executing, it is possible to prevent the setting suggestion from being executed excessively. At the same time, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the high set value.

The gaming machine of means 3 of the third invention is the gaming machine according to means 1 or 2.
The predetermined effect executing means is
It is possible to execute a predetermined effect of a special aspect (for example, a reach notice based on the special pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9) that suggests that the advantageous state is controlled.
When the predetermined effect is executed in the second number of times, the predetermined effect of the special aspect can be executed at a higher rate than the ratio of executing the predetermined effect of the special aspect in the first number of times (for example, Example 2). As shown in FIG. 14-22, the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the second period after the first period, as compared with the case where the variable display effect is executed in the first period. The part where the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9, which is a special pattern, is executed at a higher rate)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, as the predetermined effect of the special mode is repeatedly executed, the ratio of the predetermined effect of the special aspect is executed increases, so that the expectation for the advantageous state can be increased at a timing close to one game result.
In Example 2, if the execution rate of the entire setting suggestion is the same in the first period and the second period, the setting suggestion (strong) can be executed at a higher rate in the second period than in the first period. However, the reach notice can be executed at a higher rate in the second period than in the first period.

The gaming machine of means 4 of the third invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3.
The gaming machine is capable of variable display (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes variable display of a special symbol by executing a special symbol variation process as shown in FIG. 13, and effect control as shown in FIG. 7. The part that executes the variable display of the decorative pattern by executing the effect processing during the variable display of the CPU 120),
The predetermined effect executing means can execute the predetermined effect a plurality of times in one variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-21 as the second embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 is more than the start of the normal reach effect. The part where the effect can be executed during variable display in the first period and the second period, which are the previous periods)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, there are more opportunities to provide a predetermined effect of a special mode or a specific mode in one variable display, so that the interest is improved.

The gaming machine of means 5 of the third invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 4.
The gaming machine is capable of variable display (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes variable display of a special symbol by executing a special symbol variation process as shown in FIG. 13, and effect control as shown in FIG. 7. The part that executes the variable display of the decorative pattern by executing the effect processing during the variable display of the CPU 120),
The predetermined effect executing means can execute the predetermined effect a plurality of times over a plurality of variable displays (for example, the effect control CPU 120 has a variable display (target variation) based on the hold memory that is the target of the look-ahead notice. The part that executes reach notice or setting suggestion as a look-ahead notice for target fluctuation over multiple variable displays until it starts)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the predetermined effect of the special aspect and the predetermined effect of the specific aspect can be executed even before the variable display that is one game result is started, the interest is improved.

The gaming machine of means 6 of the third invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 5.
The predetermined effect executing means can execute a predetermined effect of a special mode which is a suggestion of being controlled to the advantageous state and also a suggestion of setting (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can perform a reach notice and a setting suggestion). When both are feasible, the paraglider in which the character appears moves when displaying a specific image (for example, paraglider image Z1) that suggests both a jackpot and a maximum setting (setting value 6). The part that displays images, etc.)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to effectively increase the player's expectation that the predetermined effect of the special mode or the special mode different from the specific mode is executed, so that the game interest can be improved.

(Fourth Invention)
As described above, this embodiment includes the fourth invention shown below. That is, conventionally, in a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, the variable display result becomes a big hit by changing the set value, for example, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. There were some that could change the probability of becoming (the probability of being controlled in an advantageous state). In the gaming machine described in the above patent gazette, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests a setting value depending on the type of animal displayed. For example, when such a setting suggestion effect can be repeatedly executed a plurality of times. , There is a problem that the production may be inappropriate because no consideration is given to how to execute the setting suggestion effect in the first and second times of the multiple times. .. Therefore, for the purpose of providing a game machine that can prevent the production from becoming inappropriate,
The gaming machine of means 1 of the fourth invention is
It can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and is set to one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 6) having different advantages for the player. A possible gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1)
A predetermined effect executing means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can perform a predetermined effect according to any one of a plurality of types of effect modes) as an effect during variable display, in any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7. It has a setting suggestion based on it, or a part that can execute reach notice based on patterns PT-8 and PT-9).
The effect mode of the predetermined effect is a special mode (for example, a reach notice based on the special pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9) that suggests that the predetermined effect is controlled, and a suggestion regarding the setting. Includes specific aspects (eg, setting suggestions based on any of the specific patterns PT-1 to PT-7).
The predetermined effect executing means is
The predetermined effect can be executed a plurality of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-21 as the second embodiment, the variable display effect can be executed in the first period and the second period before the reach effect is started. part),
The predetermined effect of the specific aspect is performed when the predetermined effect is executed in the first number of the plurality of times and when the predetermined effect is executed in the second number of times after the first number of the plurality of times. It can be executed at different ratios (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-22 as Example 2, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display during effect in the first period and after the first period. The part where the ratio of executing the setting suggestion based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 is different from the case of executing the effect during variable display in the second period of
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the easiness of appearance of the predetermined effect of the specific mode differs between the first number of times and the second number of times, it is possible to suppress the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.
Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 14-22, in the first period, the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution of the setting suggestion as the variable display effect at a higher rate than the execution of the reach notice, while the second period. In, by determining the execution of the setting suggestion as the effect during the variable display at a lower rate than the execution of the reach notice, not only is it difficult to execute the setting suggestion in the second period, which is a timing close to the variable display result, but also Since the reach notice is easily executed, the player's expectation for the big hit can be increased. In the first period, the execution of the setting suggestion may be determined at a lower rate than the execution of the reach notice, while in the second period, the execution of the setting suggestion may be determined at a higher rate than the execution of the reach notice. ..

The gaming machine of the means 2 of the fourth invention is the gaming machine according to the means 1.
The predetermined effect executing means can execute the predetermined effect of the special aspect at the same ratio when the predetermined effect is executed in the first number of times and when the predetermined effect is executed in the second number of times. For example, in the case where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the first period and the case where the variable display effect is executed in the second period after the first period, the pattern PT-8 Or the part that executes the reach notice based on the pattern PT-9 at the same rate)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, regardless of whether the predetermined effect of the special aspect is executed at the first time or the second number of times, the execution of the predetermined effect of the special aspect can be similarly expected.
In the second embodiment, if the non-execution can be determined, the execution ratio of the reach notice can be made the same while the execution ratio of the setting suggestion is different between the first period and the second period.

The gaming machine of means 3 of the fourth invention is the gaming machine according to means 1.
The predetermined effect executing means can execute the predetermined effect of the special aspect at different ratios when the predetermined effect is executed in the first number of times and when the predetermined effect is executed in the second number of times (for example). As shown in FIG. 14-22 as the second embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 is performing the variable display during the first period and during the variable display in the second period after the first period. The part where the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 is executed at the same ratio in the case of executing the production)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the appearance status of the predetermined effect of the special mode changes depending on the first number of times and the second number of times, it is possible to suppress the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.
Specifically, in the first period, the execution of the setting suggestion is determined at a higher rate than the execution of the reach notice, while in the second period, the execution of the setting suggestion is determined at a lower rate than the execution of the reach notice. In the second period, which is close to the variable display result, not only is it difficult to execute the setting suggestion, but also the reach notice is easily executed, so that the player's expectation for the big hit can be increased.

The gaming machine of means 4 of the fourth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3.
When the predetermined effect execution means executes the predetermined effect at the predetermined number of times among the plurality of times, the first set value is set among the plurality of set values, and the first set value is different from the first set value. When the two set values are set, the predetermined effect of the special aspect can be executed at the same ratio (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-22 as the second embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 is the first. When executing the effect during variable display during the period, the part that executes the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 at the same ratio regardless of the set value, and the effect control CPU 120 When executing the variable display effect in the second period, the part that executes the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 at the same ratio regardless of the set value)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the appearance status of the predetermined effect of the special mode does not change regardless of the set value at the predetermined number of times, the same can be expected for the execution of the predetermined effect of the special mode.

The gaming machine of means 5 of the fourth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3.
When the predetermined effect execution means executes the predetermined effect at the predetermined number of times among the plurality of times, the second set value is different from the case where the first set value is set among the plurality of set values. It is possible to execute the predetermined effect of the special aspect at a different ratio than when the set value is set (for example, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect during the first period). It is set when the part that executes the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 at different ratios according to the set value and when the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the second period. The part that executes the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 at different rates depending on the set value)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the appearance state of the predetermined effect of the special mode at the predetermined number of times changes according to the set value, it is possible to suppress the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.

(Fifth invention)
As described above, this embodiment includes the fifth invention shown below. That is, conventionally, in a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, the variable display result becomes a big hit by changing the set value, for example, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. There were some that could change the probability of becoming (the probability of being controlled in an advantageous state). In the gaming machine described in the above patent gazette, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests a setting value depending on the type of animal displayed. For example, when such a setting suggestion effect can be repeatedly executed a plurality of times. , There is a problem that the production may be inappropriate because no consideration is given to how to execute the setting suggestion effect in the first and second times of the multiple times. .. Therefore, for the purpose of providing a game machine that can prevent the production from becoming inappropriate,
The gaming machine of means 1 of the fifth invention is
It can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and is set to one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 6) having different advantages for the player. A possible gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1)
A predetermined effect executing means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can perform a predetermined effect according to any one of a plurality of types of effect modes) as an effect during variable display, in any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7. It has a setting suggestion based on it, or a part that can execute reach notice based on patterns PT-8 and PT-9).
The effect mode of the predetermined effect is a special mode (for example, a reach notice based on the special pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9) that suggests that the predetermined effect is controlled, and a suggestion regarding the setting. Includes specific aspects (eg, setting suggestions based on any of the specific patterns PT-1 to PT-7).
The predetermined effect executing means is
The predetermined effect can be executed a plurality of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-21 as the second embodiment, the variable display effect can be executed in the first period and the second period before the reach effect is started. part),
A plurality of times when the first set value is set among the plurality of set values and when the second set value different from the first set value is set among the plurality of set values. Among them, the predetermined effect of the specific mode can be executed at the same ratio in the predetermined number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-22 as the second embodiment, the pachinko game is performed for the variable display effect to be executed in the first period. The setting suggestion is executed at a rate of 60% regardless of the set value set in the machine 1, and the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is set regardless of the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1. The part where the suggestion is executed at a rate of 40%)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, regardless of which of the first set value and the second set value is set, the appearance status of the predetermined effect of the specific mode does not change at the predetermined number of times, so that the predetermined effect of the specific mode can be executed. On the other hand, we can expect the same.
Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 14-22 to 14-26, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed in the first period regardless of which of the values 1 to 6 is set as the set value. The rate at which the setting suggestion is executed as the variable display effect (appearance status) and the rate at which the setting suggestion is executed as the variable display effect (appearance status) executed in the second period are the same, that is, the set value is Since the appearance status of the setting suggestion is the same regardless of whether the low setting value or the high setting value is set, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the setting value depending on the appearance status of the setting suggestion.

In the second embodiment, even if any of 1 to 6 is set as the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the setting suggestion is executed as the variable display effect executed in the first period. Although the mode in which the ratio (appearance status) to be performed and the ratio (appearance status) in which the setting suggestion is executed as the variable display effect executed in the second period do not change is illustrated, the present invention is limited to this. Rather, the ratio (appearance status) in which the setting suggestion is executed as the variable display effect executed in the first period for at least two setting values (for example, 1 and 2) out of the plurality of setting values 1 to 6. If the ratio (appearance status) of the setting suggestion being executed as the variable display effect executed in the second period is the same, the setting values (for example, 3 to 6) other than the above two setting values are the second. The rate (appearance status) at which the setting suggestion is executed may not be the same in the first period and the second period.

Furthermore, only in the variable display effect of either the variable display effect executed in the first period or the variable display effect executed in the second period, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has 1 to 6 set values. Regardless of which value is set, the rate at which the setting suggestion is executed as the variable display effect executed in the first period (appearance status) and the variable display effect executed in the second period The rate at which the setting suggestion is executed (appearance status) may not be different.

The gaming machine of the means 2 of the fifth invention is the gaming machine according to the means 1.
The predetermined effect executing means is the special effect when the predetermined effect is executed in the first number of times out of a plurality of times and when the predetermined effect is executed in the second number of times after the first number of times. It is possible to execute the predetermined effect of the embodiment at the same ratio (for example, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the first period and the variable display effect in the second period). Then, the part that executes the reach notice based on the patterns PT-8 and PT-9 at the same rate)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, regardless of whether the predetermined effect of the special aspect is executed at the first time or the second number of times, the execution of the predetermined effect of the special aspect can be similarly expected.

The gaming machine of means 3 of the fifth invention is the gaming machine according to means 1.
The predetermined effect executing means is the special effect when the predetermined effect is executed in the first number of times out of a plurality of times and when the predetermined effect is executed in the second number of times after the first number of times. The predetermined effect of the embodiment can be executed at different ratios (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-22 as the second embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect during the first period and the first. The part where the reach notice based on the patterns PT-8 and PT-9 is executed at different ratios depending on the case where the variable display effect is executed in the second period after the first period)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the appearance status of the predetermined effect of the special mode changes depending on the first number of times and the second number of times, it is possible to suppress the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.

The gaming machine of means 4 of the fifth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3.
When the predetermined effect execution means executes the predetermined effect at the predetermined number of times among the plurality of times, the first set value is set among the plurality of set values, and the first set value is different from the first set value. It is possible to execute the predetermined effect of the special aspect at the same ratio as when the two set values are set (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-22 as the second embodiment, the variable execution is performed in the first period. For the display effect, the reach notice is executed at a rate of 40% regardless of the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1, and the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is set in the pachinko game machine 1. The part that executes reach notice at a rate of 60% regardless of the set value)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the appearance status of the predetermined effect of the special mode does not change regardless of the set value at the predetermined number of times, the same can be expected for the execution of the predetermined effect of the special mode.
Specifically, since the appearance status of the reach notice is the same regardless of which of the set values 1 to 6 is set, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the set value depending on the appearance status of the reach notice.

The gaming machine of means 5 of the fifth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3.
When the predetermined effect execution means executes the predetermined effect at the predetermined number of times among the plurality of times, the second set value is different from the case where the first set value is set among the plurality of set values. It is possible to execute the predetermined effect of the special aspect at a different ratio than when the set value is set (for example, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect during the first period, it is set. It is set when the part that executes the reach notice based on the patterns PT-8 and PT-9 at different ratios according to the set value and when the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the second period. The part that executes the reach notice based on the patterns PT-8 and PT-9 at different rates according to the set value)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the appearance state of the predetermined effect of the special mode at the predetermined number of times changes according to the set value, it is possible to suppress the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.

Further, in the second embodiment, the first period and the second period are set between the start timing of the variable display and the start timing of the reach effect of the normal reach, but the present invention is limited thereto. It is possible to set a period other than the above as long as it is a period from the start to the end of the variable display until the variable display result is displayed. For example, the first period is from the start to the end of normal reach, the second period is from the start to the end of super reach, the first period is from the start of normal reach or super reach, and the second period is normal reach. Or until the end of Super Reach, or when the variable pattern temporarily stops the decorative symbol during the variable display of the decorative symbol and then restarts the variable display, one variable display can be simulated multiple times. In the case of a pseudo-continuous fluctuation pattern accompanied by a pseudo-continuous effect that looks like the variable display of, the first period is set as the start timing of the first re-variable display, the second period is set as the start timing of the second re-variable display, and the like. , May correspond to the revariable display period.

In the second embodiment, the variable display effect can be executed twice during one variable display, and the same number of variable display effects can be reached regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. An example is shown in which the execution of the notice and the execution of the setting suggestion are determined at the same ratio. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIGS. 14-27 (A) and 14-27 (B) as Example 3, the effect during variable display is 2 during one variable display. When it is possible to execute the game times, the execution of the reach notice and the execution of the setting suggestion are determined at different ratios according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 even if the effect is being variablely displayed the same number of times. You may.

When it is decided to execute the variable display effect, the variable display effect and the second period to be executed in the first period are shown in FIGS. 14-27 (A) and 14-27 (B). It is decided to execute the setting suggestion and the reach notice at the same ratio for the variable display in-process effect to be executed in.

Here, as shown in FIGS. 14-28 and 14-29, paying attention to the case where the fluctuation pattern is the normal reach, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the first period The effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed is determined to be pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 64%, and pattern PT5 to pattern PT at a rate of 1%. Determined to be -8 {setting suggestion (high)}, determined to pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} at a rate of 30%, and to pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} at a rate of 5%. decide. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 63%, and a rate of 2%. In, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} was decided at a rate of 30%, and pattern PT-9 {reach was decided at a rate of 5%. Notice (high)} will be decided.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to 58.8% of the patterns PT-1 to 1 pattern. Determined to be PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)}, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 1.2%, and pattern PT-8 {reach at a rate of 35%. The notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 5%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 57.8%. Pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided at a rate of 2%, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} was decided at a rate of 35%, and pattern PT was decided at a rate of 5%. -9 {Reach notice (high)} is decided.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to the pattern PT-1 to pattern at a rate of 53.5%. Determined to be PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)}, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 1.5%, and pattern PT-8 {reach at a rate of 40%. The notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 5%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 52.5%. Pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided at a rate of 5%, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} was decided at a rate of 40%, and pattern PT was decided at a rate of 5%. -9 {Reach notice (high)} will be decided.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to pattern PT-1 to pattern PT- at a rate of 48%. 4 {Setting suggestion (low)} was decided, and pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided at a rate of 2%, and pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low) was decided at a rate of 45%. }, And the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 5%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a ratio of 47%, and a ratio of 3%. In, the pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was determined, and the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} was determined at a rate of 45%, and the pattern PT-9 {reach was determined at a rate of 5%. Notice (high)} will be decided.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 5, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to the pattern PT-1 to pattern at a rate of 41.5%. Determined to be PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)}, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 3.5%, and pattern PT-8 {reach at a rate of 50%. The notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 5%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 41.5%. Pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided at a rate of 5%, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} was decided at a rate of 50%, and pattern PT was decided at a rate of 5%. -9 {Reach notice (high)} will be decided.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to pattern PT-1 to pattern PT- at a rate of 35%. 4 {Setting suggestion (low)} was decided, and pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided at a rate of 5%, and pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low) was decided at a rate of 55%. }, And the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 5%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 34%, and a rate of 6%. In, the pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was determined, and the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} was determined at a rate of 55%, and the pattern PT-9 {reach was determined at a rate of 5%. Notice (high)} will be decided.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 14-30 and 14-31, paying attention to the case where the fluctuation pattern is super reach, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the first period The effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed is determined to be one of pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 64%, and pattern PT5 at a rate of 1%. ~ Pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} was decided at a rate of 17.5%, and pattern PT was decided at a rate of 17.5%. -9 {Reach notice (high)} is decided. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 63%, and 2 Pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided at a rate of%, and pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} was decided at a rate of 5%, and at a rate of 30%. The pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to 58.8% of the patterns PT-1 to 1 pattern. Determined to be one of PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)}, determined to be one of pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 1.2%, and determined at a rate of 20%. The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 20%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 57.8%. 2. Determined to be one of pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 2.2%, and determined to pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} at a rate of 5%, 35 The pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined at a rate of%.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to the pattern PT-1 to pattern at a rate of 53.5%. Determined to be one of PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)}, and determined to be one of pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 1.5%, and 22.5%. The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is decided by the ratio, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at the ratio of 22.5%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 52.5%. , Pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 2.5%, and pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} at a rate of 5%, 40 The pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined at a rate of%.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to pattern PT-1 to pattern PT- at a rate of 48%. 4 Determined to be one of {setting suggestion (low)}, pattern PT5 to one of pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 2%, and pattern PT-8 at a rate of 25%. The {reach notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 25%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 47%, and 3 Pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided at a rate of%, and pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} was decided at a rate of 5%, and at a rate of 45%. The pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 5, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to the pattern PT-1 to pattern at a rate of 41.5%. Determined to be one of PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)}, and determined to be one of pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 3.5%, 27.5% The ratio determines the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)}, and the ratio determines the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)}. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 40.5%. , 4.5% of pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)}, 5% of pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)}, 50 The pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined at a rate of%.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to pattern PT-1 to pattern PT- at a rate of 35%. 4 Determined to be one of {setting suggestion (low)}, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 at a rate of 5%, determined to be one of pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)}, and pattern PT-8 at a rate of 30%. The {reach notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 30%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 34%, and 6 Pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided at a rate of%, and pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} was decided at a rate of 5%, and a rate of 55% The pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided.

As described above, in the third embodiment, when it is decided to execute the effect during variable display, regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 to any of 1 to 6, in the first period. The rate at which patterns PT-1 to PT-7 {set value suggestion (low) or setting suggestion (high)} is determined as the effect type of the effect during variable display executed in the second period and the variable display executed in the second period The ratio at which patterns PT-1 to PT-7 {set value suggestion (low) or setting suggestion (high)} is determined is set to be the same as the effect type of the medium effect. Therefore, regardless of whether the setting suggestion is executed in the first period or the second period, the player can expect the setting suggestion result in the same way.

Furthermore, in the second period, the rate at which pattern PT-8 and pattern PT-9 {reach notice (low) and reach notice (high)} are determined as the effect type of the variable display effect executed in the first period. The ratio at which the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (low) or reach notice (high)} is determined is set to be the same as the effect type of the effect during variable display to be executed. Therefore, regardless of whether the reach notice is executed in the first period or the second period, the player can expect the advantageous state suggestion result in the same way.

On the other hand, when the variable display effect is executed in the first period or the second period, the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the first set value (for example, the set value 1) and the second. The rate at which patterns PT-1 to PT-7 {set value suggestion (low) or set value suggestion (high)} are determined as the effect type differs between when the set value (for example, set value 6) is used. , Since the appearance status of the setting suggestion in the first period or the second period changes depending on which of the first set value and the second set value is set, it is possible to suppress the effect during variable display from becoming monotonous.

Further, in the variable display during effect executed in the first period and the variable display during effect executed in the second period, a pattern is set as an effect type each time the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 increases. The rate at which PT-1 to PT-7 {set value suggestion (low) or set value suggestion (high)} is determined decreases, and pattern PT-8 and pattern PT-9 {reach notice (low) and reach notice ( High)} is determined more often. Therefore, when a high setting value (for example, 5, 6) is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the setting is suggested as compared with a case where a low setting value (for example, 1 to 4) is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Is difficult to execute, so that it is difficult for the player who recognizes the effect during variable display to specify the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

Further, as in the second embodiment, in the third embodiment, the variable display effect executed in the second period is the effect type of the pattern PT-9 rather than the variable display effect executed in the first period. The rate at which {setting suggestion (high)} is determined is set high. That is, as the variable display effect is repeatedly executed, the reach notice based on the pattern PT-9 becomes easier to be executed, so that the player's expectation that the variable display effect is executed in the pattern PT-9 is maintained. Can be made to.

In the third embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 14-27, regardless of whether the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 1 to 6, the variable display executed in the first period is in progress. The ratio of patterns PT-1 to PT-7 {set value suggestion (low) or set value suggestion (high)} is the same between the effect and the variable display effect executed in the second period, and the ratio is the same. Although the embodiment in which the rate at which the pattern PT-8 and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (low) and reach notice (high)} are determined is the same is illustrated, the present invention is not limited thereto. , Even if the set values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are the same, the pattern PT-1 is obtained between the variable display effect executed in the first period and the variable display effect executed in the second period. ~ PT-7 {set value suggestion (low) or set value suggestion (high)} may be determined at different rates, and pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 {reach notice (low) or reach notice The rate at which (high)} is determined may be different.

In the third embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the first period and the variable display effect in the second period, which are the same as the variable display effect. Although the mode of executing the setting suggestion by the ratio is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the case where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display during the effect in the first period and the case where the effect is executed in the second period The setting suggestion may be executed at different ratios as these variable display effects depending on the case of executing the variable display effect. By doing so, the rate (appearance rate) at which the setting suggestion is executed changes depending on whether the variable display effect is executed in the first period or the variable display effect is executed in the second period. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the effect from becoming monotonous during variable display.

Further, in the third embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 14-27, the variable display effect (the first variable display effect) executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the first period and the variable display executed in the second period. When executing the reach notice as the middle effect (the second variable display during effect), an example is provided in which the reach notice is executed at different ratios according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 at the same number of times. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display effect (the first variable display effect) executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the first period and the variable display effect executed in the second period. When executing the reach notice as (the second variable display effect), if the same number of variable display effects are performed, the reach notice is given at the same ratio regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. You may do it. By doing so, if the effect is during variable display the same number of times, the rate at which the reach notice is executed (appearance status) does not change according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. , The player can still expect the reach notice to be executed by the variable display during effect executed in the first period and the variable display during effect executed in the second period.

(Sixth Invention)
As described above, this embodiment includes the sixth invention shown below. That is, conventionally, in a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, the variable display result becomes a big hit by changing the set value, for example, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. There were some that could change the probability of becoming (the probability of being controlled in an advantageous state). In the gaming machine described in the above patent gazette, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests a setting value depending on the type of animal displayed. For example, when such a setting suggestion effect can be repeatedly executed a plurality of times. , There is a problem that the production may be inappropriate because no consideration is given to how to execute the setting suggestion effect in the first and second times of the multiple times. .. Therefore, for the purpose of providing a game machine that can prevent the production from becoming inappropriate,
The gaming machine of means 1 of the sixth invention is
It can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and is set to one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 6) having different advantages for the player. A possible gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1)
A predetermined effect executing means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can perform a predetermined effect according to any one of a plurality of types of effect modes) as an effect during variable display, in any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7. It has a setting suggestion based on it, or a part that can execute reach notice based on patterns PT-8 and PT-9).
The effect mode of the predetermined effect is a special mode (for example, a reach notice based on the special pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9) that suggests that the predetermined effect is controlled, and a suggestion regarding the setting. Includes specific aspects (eg, setting suggestions based on any of the specific patterns PT-1 to PT-7).
The predetermined effect executing means is
The predetermined effect can be executed a plurality of times (for example, as shown in the third embodiment, a portion in which the effect during variable display can be executed in the first period and the second period before the start of the reach effect).
The predetermined effect of the specific aspect is performed when the predetermined effect is executed in the first number of the plurality of times and when the predetermined effect is executed in the second number of times after the first number of the plurality of times. It can be executed at the same ratio (for example, as shown in FIGS. 14-27 as Example 3, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display during the effect in the first period, and more than in the first period. The part where the setting suggestion is executed at the same ratio as when the variable display effect is executed in the second period later)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, regardless of whether the predetermined effect of the specific mode is executed at the first time or the second number of times, the execution of the predetermined effect of the specific mode can be expected in the same manner.
More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 14-27, the variable display is displayed depending on whether the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the first period or the variable display effect in the second period. Since the setting suggestion is executed at the same ratio (65% in the example shown in FIGS. 14-27) as the middle effect, it is set between the variable display effect to be executed in the first period and the variable display effect to be executed in the second period. The player can be expected to do the same for the suggestion to be executed.

The gaming machine of means 2 of the sixth invention is the gaming machine according to means 1.
The predetermined effect executing means can execute the predetermined effect of the special aspect at the same ratio when the predetermined effect is executed in the first number of times and when the predetermined effect is executed in the second number of times. For example, as shown in FIG. 14-27 as the third embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during variable display in the first period and the variable display in the second period after the first period. The part where the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 is executed at the same ratio as in the case of executing the middle effect)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, regardless of whether the predetermined effect of the special aspect is executed at the first time or the second number of times, the execution of the predetermined effect of the special aspect can be similarly expected.

The gaming machine of means 3 of the sixth invention is the gaming machine according to means 1.
The predetermined effect executing means can execute the predetermined effect of the special aspect at different ratios when the predetermined effect is executed in the first number of times and when the predetermined effect is executed in the second number of times (for example). , The pattern in which the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the second period after the first period is a special pattern than the variable display effect in the first period. The part that executes reach notice based on PT-8 or pattern PT-9 at a high rate)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the appearance status of the predetermined effect of the special mode changes depending on the first number of times and the second number of times, it is possible to suppress the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.
In Example 3, if the non-execution can be determined, the execution ratio of the reach notice can be made different while the execution ratio of the setting suggestion is the same in the first period and the second period.

The gaming machine of means 4 of the sixth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3.
When the predetermined effect execution means executes the predetermined effect at the predetermined number of times among the plurality of times, the first set value is set among the plurality of set values, and the first set value is different from the first set value. When the two set values are set, the predetermined effect of the special aspect can be executed at the same ratio (for example, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect during the first period). When the part that executes the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 at the same ratio regardless of the set value and the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the second period. In addition, the part that executes the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 at the same ratio regardless of the set value)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the appearance status of the predetermined effect of the special mode does not change regardless of the set value at the predetermined number of times, the same can be expected for the execution of the predetermined effect of the special mode.
Specifically, since the appearance status of the reach notice is the same regardless of which of the set values 1 to 6 is set, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the set value depending on the appearance status of the reach notice.

The gaming machine of means 5 of the sixth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3.
When the predetermined effect execution means executes the predetermined effect at the predetermined number of times among the plurality of times, the second set value is different from the case where the first set value is set among the plurality of set values. The predetermined effect of the special aspect can be executed at a different ratio than when the set value is set (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-27 as the third embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 is in the first period. When executing the effect during variable display, the part that executes the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 at different ratios according to the set value, and the effect control CPU 120 are in the second period. When executing the effect during variable display in, the part that executes the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 at different ratios according to the set value)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the appearance state of the predetermined effect of the special mode at the predetermined number of times changes according to the set value, it is possible to suppress the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.

(7th invention)
As described above, this embodiment includes the seventh invention shown below. That is, conventionally, in a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, the variable display result becomes a big hit by changing the set value, for example, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. There were some that could change the probability of becoming (the probability of being controlled in an advantageous state). In the gaming machine described in the above patent gazette, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests a setting value depending on the type of animal displayed. For example, when such a setting suggestion effect can be repeatedly executed a plurality of times. , There is a problem that the production may be inappropriate because no consideration is given to how to execute the setting suggestion effect in the first and second times of the multiple times. .. Therefore, for the purpose of providing a game machine that can prevent the production from becoming inappropriate,
The gaming machine of means 1 of the seventh invention is
It is possible to control an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and set one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 6) having different advantages for the player. A possible gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1)
A predetermined effect executing means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can perform a predetermined effect according to any one of a plurality of types of effect modes) as an effect during variable display, in any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7. It has a setting suggestion based on it, or a part that can execute reach notice based on patterns PT-8 and PT-9).
The effect mode of the predetermined effect is a special mode (for example, a reach notice based on the special pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9) that suggests that the predetermined effect is controlled, and a suggestion regarding the setting. Includes specific aspects (eg, setting suggestions based on any of the specific patterns PT-1 to PT-7).
The predetermined effect executing means is
The predetermined effect can be executed a plurality of times (for example, a portion in which the effect during variable display can be executed in the first period and the second period before the reach effect is started).
A plurality of times when the first set value is set among the plurality of set values and when the second set value different from the first set value is set among the plurality of set values. Among them, the predetermined effect of the specific mode can be executed at different ratios at a predetermined number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-27 as the third embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 performs the effect during variable display in the first period. When executing, the part where the setting suggestion based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 can be executed at different ratios according to the set value)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the appearance status of the predetermined effect of the specific mode at the predetermined number of times changes depending on which of the first set value and the second set value is set, it is possible to suppress the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous. ..
Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 14-27 to 14-31, the effect control CPU 120 is variably displayed in the first period depending on which of 1 to 6 is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Since the execution rate (appearance status) of the setting suggestion changes depending on whether the medium effect is executed or the variable display during the second period is executed, the player can perform not only the result of the setting suggestion but also the predetermined number of times. It is possible to predict the set value depending on the appearance status of the setting suggestion in.

The gaming machine of means 2 of the seventh invention is the gaming machine according to means 1.
The predetermined effect executing means is the special effect when the predetermined effect is executed in the first number of times out of a plurality of times and when the predetermined effect is executed in the second number of times after the first number of times. The predetermined effect of the embodiment can be executed at the same ratio (for example, as shown in FIGS. 14-27 as the third embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect during the first period and the second. The part where the reach notice based on the patterns PT-8 and PT-9 can be executed at the same ratio as when the effect during variable display is executed during the period)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, regardless of whether the predetermined effect of the special aspect is executed at the first time or the second number of times, the execution of the predetermined effect of the special aspect can be similarly expected.

The gaming machine of means 3 of the seventh invention is the gaming machine according to means 1.
The predetermined effect executing means is the special effect when the predetermined effect is executed in the first number of times out of a plurality of times and when the predetermined effect is executed in the second number of times after the first number of times. It is possible to execute the predetermined effect of the mode at different ratios (for example, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the first period and when the variable display effect is executed in the second period. Reach notice based on patterns PT-8 and PT-9 at different rates)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the appearance status of the predetermined effect of the special mode changes depending on the first number of times and the second number of times, it is possible to suppress the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.

The gaming machine of means 4 of the seventh invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3.
When the predetermined effect execution means executes the predetermined effect at the predetermined number of times among the plurality of times, the first set value is set among the plurality of set values, and the first set value is different from the first set value. When the two set values are set, the predetermined effect of the special aspect can be executed at the same ratio (for example, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect during the first period). When the part that executes the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 at the same ratio regardless of the set value and the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the second period. In addition, the part that executes the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 at the same ratio regardless of the set value)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the appearance status of the predetermined effect of the special mode does not change regardless of the set value at the predetermined number of times, the same can be expected for the execution of the predetermined effect of the special mode.
Specifically, since the appearance status of the reach notice is the same regardless of which of the set values 1 to 6 is set, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the set value depending on the appearance status of the reach notice.

The gaming machine of means 5 of the seventh invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3.
When the predetermined effect execution means executes the predetermined effect at the predetermined number of times among the plurality of times, the second set value is different from the case where the first set value is set among the plurality of set values. The predetermined effect of the special aspect can be executed at a different ratio than when the set value is set (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-27 as the third embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 is in the first period. When executing the effect during variable display, the part that executes the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 at different ratios according to the set value, and the effect control CPU 120 are in the second period. When executing the effect during variable display in, the part that executes the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 at different ratios according to the set value)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the appearance state of the predetermined effect of the special mode at the predetermined number of times changes according to the set value, it is possible to suppress the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.

In the second and third embodiments of the feature unit 103SG of the above-described embodiment, the variable display effect can be executed twice during one variable display, and when the execution of the variable display effect is determined, the first period In each of the second period and the second period, the embodiment of determining whether to execute the reach notice or the setting suggestion based on the fluctuation pattern and the set value has been illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first period is not limited to this. Determines whether to execute the reach notice or the setting suggestion based on the set value regardless of the fluctuation pattern, while for the second period, the reach notice and the setting suggestion are based on the fluctuation pattern and the set value. It may be decided which to be executed, that is, whether to execute the effect to be executed in the first period or the second period according to different judgment criteria.

For example, as shown in FIG. 14-32 as Example 4, the first period and the first period between the start timing of the variable display and the start timing of the reach effect of the normal reach are targeted for the fluctuation patterns of the normal reach and the super reach. The variable display effect can be executed in the second period after the first period. Since the variable display time is short to execute the variable display effect twice or more for the non-reach and small hit variation patterns, in the fourth embodiment, the variable display effect is executed as the normal reach and super reach variation patterns. Limited to.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, in the variable display effect determination process described above, when the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach, the type of the variable display effect is determined based on the set value for the first period. In the second period, a process of determining the type of effect during variable display is executed based on the fluctuation pattern. In the following, the variable display effect determination process in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 14-33.

As shown in FIGS. 14-33, in the effect determination process during variable display, the effect control CPU 120 first identifies the variation pattern (103SGS311). As described above, the variation pattern can be specified by the variation pattern specification command stored in the variation pattern specification command storage area. Then, it is determined whether the specified fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach (103SGS312), and if it is normal reach or super reach, it proceeds to 103SG313, and if it is other than normal reach or super reach, that is, a non-reach or small hit fluctuation pattern. In this case, since it is not the target of the variable display effect, the variable display effect determination process is terminated.

When the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach in 103SGS312, the set value stored in the RAM 102 is read out to specify the current set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (103SGS313). Next, based on the set value specified by 103SGS313, whether or not the variable display effect is executed in the first period and the effect type (effect pattern) when the variable display effect is executed are determined by a variable display effect execution determination table (not shown). It is determined using (common to normal reach and super reach) (103SGS314).

As shown in FIG. 14-34 (A), in 103SGS314, the effect control CPU 120 uses a variable display during effect execution determination table whose fluctuation pattern is common to normal reach or super reach, and reaches notice, setting suggestion, and non-execution. Decide on one of. Specifically, when the setting value is 1, the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution of the reach notice (low) at a rate of 40%, the setting suggestion at a rate of 40%, and the non-execution at a rate of 10%. Determined by percentage. Further, in the case of the set value 6, the execution of the reach notice (low) is determined at a rate of 40%, the setting suggestion is determined at a rate of 55%, and the non-execution is determined at a rate of 5%. Although the execution ratio corresponding to the set values 2 to 5 is omitted here, the reach notice is determined by the common execution ratio regardless of the set value 1 to 6, and the setting suggestion is set. The larger the value, the higher the execution rate of the setting suggestion and the execution rate of the setting suggestion (high).

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 14-35, paying attention to the effect type determination ratio during variable display in the first period, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the first period The effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed is determined to be non-execution at a rate of 20%, and pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 39%. Then, the pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} is determined at a rate of 1%, and the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined at a rate of 40%.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, it is determined that the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is not executed at a rate of 18%. Pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} was decided at a rate of 8%, and pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided at a rate of 1.2%. The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined at a rate of 40%.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, it is determined that the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is not executed at a rate of 15%. Pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} was decided at a rate of 5%, and pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided at a rate of 1.5%. The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined at a rate of 40%.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is determined to be non-execution at a rate of 12.5%. Pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} was decided at a rate of 45.5%, and pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided at a rate of 2%. The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined at a rate of 40%.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 5, it is determined that the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is not executed at a rate of 10%. Pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} was decided at a rate of 5%, and pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided at a rate of 3.5%. The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined at a rate of 40%.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is determined to be non-execution at a rate of 5%, and 50%. Pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} was determined, and pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was determined at a ratio of 5%, and a ratio of 40%. To determine the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)}.

Returning to FIG. 14-33, it is determined in 103SGS314 whether or not the execution of the variable display effect in the first period is determined (103SGS315), and if the execution is determined, the determined effect type (patterns PT-1 to PT). -9) is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (103SGS316), and a variable display effect execution decision flag indicating that the execution of the variable display effect in the first period is determined is set (103SGS317). Proceed to 103SGS318. If the execution is not decided in 103SGS315, that is, if the non-execution is decided, the process proceeds to 103SGS318.

Next, in 103SGS318, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the fluctuation pattern is normal reach (103SGS318), and if it is determined to be normal reach, the second is based on the specified fluctuation pattern and set value. Whether or not the variable display effect is executed during the period and the effect type (effect pattern) when the effect is executed are determined using a variable display effect execution determination table (for normal reach) (not shown) (103SGS319).

As shown in FIG. 14-34 (B), in 103SGS319, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether to reach notice, setting suggestion, or non-execution using the variable display during effect execution determination table for normal reach. Specifically, when the setting value is 1, the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution of the reach notice (low) at a rate of 60%, the setting suggestion at a rate of 35%, and the non-execution at a rate of 5%. Determined by percentage. Further, in the case of the set value 6, the execution of the reach notice (low) is determined at a rate of 60%, the setting suggestion is determined at a rate of 35%, and the non-execution is determined at a rate of 5%. Although the execution ratio corresponding to the set values 2 to 5 is omitted here, the reach notice and the setting suggestion are determined by the common execution ratio regardless of the set value 1 to 6, and the setting suggestion ( For high), the execution rate is set to increase as the set value increases.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 14-36, paying attention to the case of normal reach regarding the variable display advance notice effect type determination ratio in the second period, the case where the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1. Determines the non-execution of the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period at a rate of 5%, and patterns PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (setting suggestion) at a rate of 33%. Low)}, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 2%, and pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} at a rate of 55%. The pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined at a rate of 5%.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is determined to be non-execution at a rate of 5%, and 32. Pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} was decided at a rate of 8%, and pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided at a rate of 2.2%. The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is decided at a rate of 55%, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 5%.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is determined to be non-execution at a rate of 5%, and 32. Pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} was decided at a rate of 5%, and pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided at a rate of 2.5%. The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is decided at a rate of 55%, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 5%.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is determined to be non-execution at a rate of 5%, and 32%. Pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} was decided at the ratio of 3%, and pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided at the ratio of 3%, and the ratio was 55%. In, the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 5%.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 5, it is determined that the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is not executed at a rate of 5%. Pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} was decided at a rate of 5%, and pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided at a rate of 4.5%. The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is decided at a rate of 55%, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 5%.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is determined to be non-execution at a rate of 5%, and 29%. Pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} was decided, and pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided at a ratio of 6%, and a ratio of 55%. In, the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 5%.

Further, when it is determined in 103SGS318 that the fluctuation pattern is not the normal reach, that is, it is the super reach, whether or not the variable display during the second period is executed and the execution are performed based on the specified fluctuation pattern and the set value. The effect type (effect pattern) to be performed is determined using a variable display effect execution determination table (for super reach) (not shown) (103SGS320).

As shown in FIG. 14-34 (C), in the 103SGS320, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether to reach notice, setting suggestion, or non-execution by using the effect execution determination table during variable display for super reach. .. Specifically, in the case of the setting value 1 and the setting value 6, the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution of the reach notice (low) at a rate of 60%, determines the setting suggestion at a rate of 40%, and does not execute. Do not decide. Although the execution ratio corresponding to the set values 2 to 5 is omitted here, the reach notice and the setting suggestion are determined by the common execution ratio regardless of the set value 1 to 6, and the setting suggestion ( For high), the execution rate is set to increase as the set value increases.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 14-36, paying attention to the case of super reach regarding the variable display advance notice effect type determination ratio in the second period, the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1. In this case, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is determined to be pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 36%, and 4%. The ratio was determined to be pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)}, the ratio was determined to be pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)}, and the ratio was 55% to determine pattern PT-9 { Reach notice (high)} will be decided.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to the pattern PT-1 to pattern at a rate of 35.8%. Determined to be PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)}, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 4.2%, and pattern PT-8 {reach at a rate of 5%. The notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 55%.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to the pattern PT-1 to pattern at a rate of 35.5%. Determined to be PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)}, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 4.5%, and pattern PT-8 {reach at a rate of 5%. The notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 55%.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to pattern PT-1 to pattern PT- at a rate of 35%. 4 {Setting suggestion (low)} was decided, and pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided at a rate of 5%, and pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low) was decided at a rate of 5%. }, And the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 55%.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 5, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to the pattern PT-1 to pattern at a rate of 33.5%. Determined to be PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)}, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 6.5%, and pattern PT-8 {reach at a rate of 5%. The notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 55%.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to pattern PT-1 to pattern PT- at a rate of 32%. 4 {Setting suggestion (low)} was decided, and pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided at a rate of 8%, and pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low) was decided at a rate of 5%. }, And the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 55%.

Returning to FIG. 14-33, it is determined in 103SGS319 or 103SGS320 whether or not the execution of the variable display effect in the second period is determined (103SGS321), and if the execution is determined, the determined effect type (pattern PT-1). (Any of ~ PT-9) is stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 122 (103SGS322), and the variable display effect execution decision flag indicating that the execution of the variable display effect in the second period is determined is set (103SGS323). ), Ends the effect during variable display. If the execution is not decided in 103SGS321, that is, if the non-execution is decided, the variable display during effect ends.

As described above, in the fourth embodiment, when the variable display effect is executed in the first period of the plurality of times, the installation value is 1 to 1 regardless of whether the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach. When deciding whether or not to execute the setting suggestion based on which of 6 is executed, and when the variable display in-process effect is executed in the second period, it depends on whether the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach. Reach notice or setting suggestion is determined based on a separate judgment table. That is, since the judgment criteria for whether to execute the reach notice or the setting suggestion is different between the first period and the second period, it is possible to suppress the effect during variable display from becoming monotonous.

Further, since the execution rate of the setting suggestion in the first period is higher than the execution rate of the setting suggestion in the second period, the setting suggestion is easily executed in the first period, whereas the reach notice is given in the second period. Is easier to execute, so even though it becomes normal reach or super reach in the second period, the setting suggestion does not become easier to execute in both the first period and the second period, and , Since the reach notice is executed in the first period and the setting suggestion is not easily executed in the second period, the setting suggestion and the reach notice can be executed in a well-balanced manner.

Further, since the execution rate of the reach notice in the second period is higher than the execution rate of the reach notice in the first period, it is variablely displayed by executing the reach notice in both the first period and the second period. It is possible to prevent the medium production from becoming monotonous. However, as shown in FIGS. 14-35 to 14-37, paying attention to each set value, when the variable display effect is executed in the first period, the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not included. When the execution of the reach notice is decided at the same ratio (40%) and the variable display effect is executed in the second period, the reach notice is executed regardless of the set value set in the pachinko machine 1. It is decided at the same ratio (60%). Therefore, in the variable display during effect executed in the first period and the variable display in effect executed in the second period, regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the reach notice is executed. The player can be noticed in the same way.

In addition, even if the set value is set high (for example, set values 5 and 6), in the case of normal reach or super reach, not only is the reach notice easier to execute than the setting suggestion in the second period, but also the super reach In this case, the reach notice (high) is likely to be executed, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's expectation for a big hit.

Furthermore, even if the execution of the setting suggestion is decided in the second period, the setting suggestion (high) is more likely to be executed than in the case where the execution of the setting suggestion is decided in the first period. Even when is executed, the player's expectation for the high setting can be increased.

Further, in the first period, when the set value is 1, the execution of the reach notice and the setting suggestion is determined at the same ratio, whereas when the set value is 6, that is, the set values are 1, 2, The higher the setting is in the order of 3, 4, 5, and 6, the higher the execution of the setting suggestion is determined than the reach notice. Therefore, the higher the setting, the easier it is for the setting suggestion to appear. It will be easier to predict.

In the fourth embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 14-34, the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect (first variable display effect) in the first period and in the second period. The present invention is not limited to this, although the embodiment in which the execution of the reach notice is determined at different ratios is illustrated depending on the case where the variable display effect (the second variable display effect) is executed. , The execution of the reach notice may be determined at the same ratio depending on whether the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the first period or the variable display effect in the second period. .. By doing so, it is possible to make the player similarly expect the execution of the reach notice in the first variable display effect and the second variable display effect.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 14-34, if the effect is during the variable display of the same number of times, the reach notice is executed at the same ratio regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Although the form to be determined is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the production during variable display of the same number of times, the reach notice is executed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. May be determined at different rates. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the execution of the same effect type from being determined between the first variable display effect and the second variable display effect, so that the variable display effect becomes monotonous. It can be suppressed.

(8th invention)
As described above, this embodiment includes the eighth invention shown below. That is, conventionally, in a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, the variable display result becomes a big hit by changing the set value, for example, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. There were some that could change the probability of becoming (the probability of being controlled in an advantageous state). In the gaming machine described in the above patent gazette, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests a setting value depending on the type of animal displayed. For example, when such a setting suggestion effect can be repeatedly executed a plurality of times. , There is a problem that the production may be inappropriate because no consideration is given to how to execute the setting suggestion effect in the first and second times of the multiple times. .. Therefore, for the purpose of providing a game machine that can prevent the production from becoming inappropriate,
The gaming machine of means 1 of the eighth invention is
It can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and is set to one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 6) having different advantages for the player. A possible gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1)
Whether the variable display pattern determining means capable of determining one variable display pattern from the plurality of variable display patterns (for example, the CPU 103 sets the display result as "big hit" or "small hit" in the variable pattern setting process of S111. The part that determines the fluctuation pattern to one of multiple types using the random value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on the pre-determination result of whether or not)
A variable display means capable of executing variable display by a determined variable display pattern (for example, the effect control CPU 120 performs a variable display during effect process, and a decorative pattern is displayed based on a display result or a variable pattern specified by an effect control command. The part that executes variable display) and
Predetermined effect determining means for determining one of a plurality of types of the effect mode of the predetermined effect (for example, in the variable display effect determination process, the effect pattern of the variable display effect is among the patterns PT-1 to PT-9. The part that decides one from) and
Based on the determination result of the predetermined effect determining means, the predetermined effect executing means capable of executing the predetermined effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 as the effect during variable display. Setting suggestion or reach notice based on patterns PT-8 and PT-9) and
With
The effect mode of the predetermined effect is a special mode (for example, a reach notice based on the special pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9) that suggests that the predetermined effect is controlled, and a suggestion regarding the setting. Includes specific aspects (eg, setting suggestions based on any of the specific patterns PT-1 to PT-7).
The predetermined effect executing means is
The predetermined effect can be executed a plurality of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-32 as the fourth embodiment, a portion in which the variable display effect can be executed in the first period and the second period before the reach effect is started. ),
Based on at least the set value, the effect mode of the predetermined effect to be executed in the first of a plurality of times is determined (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-33 as the fourth embodiment, the effect control is performed. The part in which the CPU 120 determines the effect type of the variable display effect based on the set value in the variable display effect in the first period),
At least based on the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining means, the effect mode of the predetermined effect to be executed in the second number of times after the first number of times is determined (for example, an embodiment). As shown in FIG. 14-33 as No. 4, the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect type of the variable display effect based on the set value and the fluctuation pattern set in the variable display effect in the second period. )
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the determination criteria for determining the effect mode of the predetermined effect differ between the first and second times, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.
Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 14-33, when determining the effect type of the variable display effect (first variable display effect) in the first period, the variable display is being performed based on the variable display variation pattern. Determine the production type of the production * Isn't it the set value? (Refer to 103SGS314) On the other hand, when determining the effect type of the variable display effect (second variable display effect) in the second period, the variation pattern of the variable display and the setting set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 The effect type of the variable display effect is determined based on the value (see 103SGS319 and 103SGS320). In other words, since the judgment criteria for determining the effect type are different between the first variable display effect and the second variable display effect, the first variable display effect and the second variable display effect It is possible to prevent the execution of the same effect type from being decided by, and it is possible to suppress that the effect during variable display becomes monotonous.

The gaming machine of means 2 of the eighth invention is the gaming machine according to means 1.
The predetermined effect executing means can execute the predetermined effect of the special aspect at the same ratio when the predetermined effect is executed in the first number of times and when the predetermined effect is executed in the second number of times. For example, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the first period and the variable display effect in the second period, the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 is given. Part to be executed at the same rate)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, regardless of whether the predetermined effect of the special aspect is executed at the first time or the second number of times, the execution of the predetermined effect of the special aspect can be similarly expected.

The gaming machine of means 3 of the eighth invention is the gaming machine according to means 1.
The predetermined effect executing means can execute the predetermined effect of the special aspect at different ratios when the predetermined effect is executed in the first number of times and when the predetermined effect is executed in the second number of times (for example). As shown in FIG. 14-34 as the fourth embodiment, the pattern PT is obtained when the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the first period and the variable display effect in the second period. -8 or the part that executes reach notice based on pattern PT-9 at different rates)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the appearance status of the predetermined effect of the special mode changes depending on the first number of times and the second number of times, it is possible to suppress the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.

The gaming machine of means 4 of the eighth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3.
When the predetermined effect execution means executes the predetermined effect at the predetermined number of times among the plurality of times, the first set value is set among the plurality of set values, and the first set value is different from the first set value. 2 The predetermined effect of the special aspect can be executed at the same ratio as when the set value is set (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-34 as the fourth embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 is the first. When executing the variable display effect during the period, the part that executes the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 at the same ratio regardless of the set value, and the effect control CPU 120 are the first. A part in which the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 is executed at the same ratio regardless of the set value when the variable display effect is executed in two periods)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the appearance status of the predetermined effect of the special mode does not change regardless of the set value at the predetermined number of times, the same can be expected for the execution of the predetermined effect of the special mode.

The gaming machine of means 5 of the eighth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3.
When the predetermined effect execution means executes the predetermined effect at the predetermined number of times among the plurality of times, the second set value is different from the case where the first set value is set among the plurality of set values. It is possible to execute the predetermined effect of the special aspect at a different ratio than when the set value is set (for example, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect during the first period, it is set. It is set when the part that executes the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 at different ratios according to the set value and the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the second period. The part that executes the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 at different rates depending on the set value)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the appearance state of the predetermined effect of the special mode at the predetermined number of times changes according to the set value, it is possible to suppress the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.

In the fourth embodiment, regardless of whether the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach, the embodiment of determining whether to execute the setting suggestion or the reach notice according to the set value is illustrated in the first period. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the first period, regardless of the fluctuation pattern, it is decided whether to execute the setting suggestion or the reach notice according only to the set value. You may.

Further, in the second period, an example is exemplified in which the execution of the reach notice is determined in preference to the setting suggestion according to the fluctuation pattern being normal reach or super reach, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, in the second period, the reach notice and the setting suggestion may be determined at the same ratio depending on whether the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, in the second period, a mode of determining whether to execute the reach notice or the setting suggestion depending on whether the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach is illustrated, but the present invention illustrates the embodiment. Not limited to this, in the second period, not only when the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach, but also when it is non-reach or small hit, either reach notice or setting suggestion is executed. You may decide whether or not.

(Modification 2)
In Examples 2 to 4 of the feature unit 103SG of the above-described embodiment, the effect during variable display can be executed twice during one variable display, and the variable display is started for the fluctuation patterns of normal reach and super reach. The present invention exemplifies a mode in which the variable display effect can be executed in the first period between the timing and the start timing of the reach effect of the normal reach and the second period after the first period. The effect is not limited to the above, and the effect during variable display may be executed three times or more during one variable display. In addition, by temporarily stopping the decorative symbol during the variable display of the decorative symbol and then restarting the variable display, the variable display of one variable display is simulated multiple times. It may be executed at the timing corresponding to the re-variation of the decorative pattern in the variation pattern accompanied by the pseudo-continuous effect shown as.

For example, as shown in FIG. 14-38 as a modification 2, from the start timing of the variable display to the start timing of the reach effect of the normal reach for all the fluctuation patterns of non-reach / small hit, normal reach, and super reach. Therefore, the first period before the temporary stop of the first decorative symbol, the second period after the first period and corresponding to the revariable display period after the first temporary stop of the decorative symbol, and It is possible to execute the effect during variable display in the third period, which is after the second period and corresponds to the revariable display period after the third temporary stop of the decorative symbol.

In the second modification, the first period is exemplified before the temporary stop of the first decorative symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first period is the first time. The second period is executed according to the revariable display in the temporary stop of the decorative symbol, the second period is executed in response to the revariable display in the temporary stop of the second decorative symbol, and the third period is executed in response to the revariable display in the temporary stop of the decorative symbol. It may be executed according to the revariable display.

In the second modification, in the above-described variable display effect determination process, any of the set values 1 to 6 set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set for the first period regardless of which fluctuation pattern is used. Variable display is being performed according to whether it is set to. For the second and third periods, variable display is being performed based on the set value only when the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach. Executes the process of determining the type of effect.

Specifically, in the first period, the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution of the setting suggestion at a rate of 100% regardless of the fluctuation pattern (the execution of the reach notice is not determined). It should be noted that the larger the set value is in the order of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6, the higher the execution rate of the setting suggestion (high) is set. In the second period, only when the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach, the execution of the reach notice is determined at a rate of 40%, and the execution of the setting suggestion is determined at a rate of 60%. It should be noted that the larger the set value is in the order of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6, the higher the execution rate of the setting suggestion (high) is set. In the third period, only when the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach, the execution of the reach notice is determined at a rate of 100%, and the execution of the setting suggestion is not determined. It should be noted that the larger the set value is in the order of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6, the higher the execution rate of the setting suggestion (high) is set.

In addition, while the ratio of determining the setting suggestion in the second period and the third period is set to be lower than the ratio of determining the setting suggestion in the first period, the reach notice is determined in the first period. By setting the ratio for determining the reach notice in the second period and the third period to be higher than the ratio, the reach notice is more likely to be executed than the setting suggestion as the effect during variable display is repeatedly executed. Become.

As described above, in the present modification 2, when the variable display effect is executed in the first period, one of the effect patterns PT-1 to PT-7 corresponding to the setting suggestion is determined, and the second period and the second period and the second. When the variable display effect is executed in the three periods, one of the effect patterns PT-1 to PT-9 is determined based on at least the variation pattern. That is, since the determination criteria when the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect mode of the predetermined effect differs between the first period and the second period or the third period, it is possible to prevent the effect during variable display from becoming monotonous.

More specifically, the fluctuation pattern accompanied by the pseudo-continuous effect is a fluctuation pattern in which the expectation of a big hit increases as the number of revariable displays increases in the order of 1, 2, 3, ... Therefore, in the first period corresponding to the first revariable display, there is a high possibility that the fluctuation pattern is not super reach, so the setting suggestion is executed with priority over the reach notice, and the second revariable display is performed. In the second period corresponding to the display, there is a high possibility that the fluctuation pattern is not non-reach, but there is a possibility of normal reach, so the setting suggestion is executed prior to the reach notice, and the third revariation is performed. In the third period corresponding to the display, since the fluctuation pattern has a high possibility of super reach, the reach notice is executed with priority over the setting suggestion.

By doing so, it is possible to suggest the setting while suppressing the frequent occurrence of reach notice and the decrease in the reliability of the reach notice in the case of a fluctuation pattern accompanied by one or two pseudo-continuous productions. On the other hand, it is possible to prevent the player's expectation for a big hit from being lowered due to frequent setting suggestions in the case of a fluctuation pattern accompanied by three pseudo-continuous effects.

Further, in the present modification 2, in the first period when the jackpot reliability is the lowest, the setting suggestion is preferred because the execution of the setting suggestion is prioritized over the reach notice according to the set value regardless of the fluctuation pattern. On the other hand, in the second period and the third period when the jackpot reliability is higher than the first period, the execution of the reach notice is set according to the fluctuation pattern of normal reach or super reach than the suggestion. Since the decision is given priority, the player's expectation for the big hit can be suitably increased.

In the second modification, the execution of the setting suggestion is determined at a rate of 100% in the first period, but the execution of the setting suggestion is determined at a higher rate than the reach notice in the first period. If so, it does not have to determine the execution of the setting suggestion at a rate of 100%. Further, in the second period, the mode in which the execution of the setting suggestion is determined at a higher rate than the reach notice is illustrated, but the execution of the reach notice may be decided at a higher rate than the setting suggestion. Further, in the third period, the form in which the execution of the reach notice is determined at a rate of 100% is illustrated, but in the third period, if the execution of the reach notice is determined at a rate higher than the setting suggestion, the reach notice is announced. The execution does not have to be determined at a 100% rate.

Further, in the present modification 2, in the first period, the execution of the setting suggestion is prioritized over the reach notice according to the set value regardless of the fluctuation pattern, and in the second period and the third period, the fluctuation pattern is determined. Although the embodiment in which the execution of the reach notice is determined in preference to the setting suggestion according to the normal reach or the super reach is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first period and the second period are not limited thereto. Then, regardless of the fluctuation pattern, the execution of the setting suggestion is prioritized over the reach notice according to the set value, and in the third period, the reach notice is executed according to the fluctuation pattern being normal reach or super reach. May be prioritized over the setting suggestion.

Further, in the present modification 2, the embodiment in which the execution of the setting suggestion is determined prior to the reach notice according to the set value is illustrated in the first period, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of the present inventions are not limited to this. In the first number of times (for example, the first period or the second period), if at least the setting suggestion or reach notice is determined according to the set value, the setting suggestion or the setting suggestion or the change pattern is determined according to the set value and the fluctuation pattern. The reach notice may be decided.

Further, in the second modification, in the second period and the third period, the embodiment in which the execution of the reach notice is determined prior to the setting suggestion according to the set value and the fluctuation pattern is illustrated. It is not limited, and in the second number (for example, the second period or the third period) after the first number among the plurality of times, the setting suggestion or the reach notice is determined at least according to the fluctuation pattern. If there is, the setting suggestion or reach notice may be determined according to the set value and the fluctuation pattern.

Further, in Examples 2 to 4, as the variable display effect to be executed in the first period, the setting suggestion is made by making the ratio at which the execution of the setting suggestion is determined higher than the ratio at which the reach notice is determined. Although the embodiment in which the execution is prioritized and determined is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. 14-15 as the first embodiment, the variable display executed in the first period is in progress. As the effect, the execution of the setting suggestion may be prioritized and determined according to the order of the processes for determining the effect type.

Further, in the second to fourth embodiments, as the variable display effect to be executed in the second period, the reach notice is announced by making the ratio at which the execution of the reach notice is determined higher than the ratio at which the setting suggestion is determined. Although the embodiment in which the execution is prioritized and determined is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. 14-15 as the first embodiment, the variable display to be executed in the second period is in progress. As the effect, the execution of the reach notice may be prioritized and determined according to the order of the processes for determining the effect type.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and the present invention may be changed or added without departing from the gist of the present invention. include.

For example, in the above-described embodiment, an embodiment in which the effect during variable display can be executed a plurality of times in one variable display is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of reach notices and setting suggestions are provided. It may be feasible over variable display (see means 5 of the second invention).

Specifically, the CPU 103 holds and stores information about the variable display whose execution is suspended when the start winning prize occurs (for example, a display result (including a jackpot type) or a random number value for determining a fluctuation pattern). The display result and the fluctuation pattern are pre-read and determined based on the extracted random number value, and the determination result is transmitted to the effect control board 12 as an effect control command at the time of starting winning, so that the effect control CPU 120 can perform the effect control CPU 120. When the look-ahead notice effect that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display in which execution is suspended) can be executed, the variable display (target fluctuation) based on the hold memory that is the target of the look-ahead notice A reach notice or a setting suggestion as a look-ahead notice for a target change may be executed over a plurality of variable displays until the start.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 displays a plurality of images Z1 indicating the paraglider displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 in the variable display effect in a variable display of the 103SG277 at a predetermined timing. An example of a mode in which a process of executing a process of destroying and changing the number of images Z1 corresponding to the effect patterns PT-1 to PT-9 determined in the medium effect determination process into images Z2 indicating that the images Z1 are dropped has been illustrated. Is not limited to this, and when the operation of the push button 31B (or the stick controller 31A may be used) by the player is detected by the push sensor 35B, the image Z2 is changed at the timing corresponding to the operation. You may let it.

Further, when the effect control CPU 120 changes the image Z2 to the image Z2 at the timing corresponding to the operation by the player as described above in the variable display effect, the player operates the push button 31B during the operation valid period of the push button 31B. As the operation promotion effect for prompting, an operation promotion image (for example, a character image or a button image of "continuous hitting!") May be displayed in the display area of the image display device 5.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 displays an operation promotion image prompting the player to operate the push button 31B when the push sensor 35B detects a specific operation of operating the push button 31B during the operation valid period of the push button 31B. Regardless of whether or not the push button 31B is operated, the effect of changing the image Z1 to the image Z2 (destroying the paraglider and dropping it) can be executed according to the operation of the push button 31B, and the operation of the push button 31B is not detected. In that case, the paraglider may be faded out without being destroyed, that is, the effect during variable display may be terminated without giving a reach notice or setting suggestion.

By doing so, the player who knows the specific motion can execute the effect of changing the image Z1 to the image Z2 at a desired timing by performing the specific motion, so that the game entertainment can be improved. ..

As an operation promoting effect for encouraging the player to operate the push button 31B during the operation valid period of the push button 31B, an operation promoting image for encouraging the player to operate the push button 31B is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the variable display effect is executed without displaying the operation promotion image in the display area of the image display device 5 on which the variable display effect is executed. Even if the operation promotion effect is executed by emitting light from a light emitting unit built in or around the push button 31B provided at a position different from the display area of the image display device 5 that the player pays attention to. Good. By doing so, only the player who knows the specific movement or the player who notices the light emission can see the reach notice and the setting suggestion, so that the interest of the game is improved.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, as a predetermined effect in which the effect result is an advantageous state suggestion result, a form in which a reach notice suggesting the possibility of reaching is applied has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited thereto. The predetermined effect, which is the result of suggesting an advantageous state, is a stop symbol notice that suggests at which symbol the variable display symbol stops, a character notice in which the character appears, and a step in which the notice image changes stepwise. Various advance notices can be applied as long as they are suggestive effects that suggest the possibility of a big hit, such as up notices and group notices in which a group of predetermined characters crosses the display area.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the variable display effect has a common effect period for the reach notice and the setting suggestion, but the effect mode is different between the reach notice and the setting suggestion (corresponding to the common effect period). It may be a separate production (specifically, the reach notice is a suggestion using a character, the setting suggestion is a suggestion by a paraglider, etc.). Then, even when the reach notice and the setting suggestion having different production modes are executed together in the same period (same timing), the reach notice may be executed with priority over the setting suggestion.

For example, the first effect image corresponding to the reach notice and the second effect image corresponding to the setting suggestion unlike the first effect image are displayed together in the display area of the image display device 5 for the same period (same timing). In this case, for example, the visibility of the first effect image is made larger than the display area of the second effect image, or the display mode such as emission color, brightness, and contrast is different. Is made higher than the visibility of the second effect image, so that the reach notice can be executed with priority over the setting suggestion.

When the effect control CPU 120 can draw an image on a plurality of drawing layers, for example, the first effect image corresponding to the reach notice is drawn on the first drawing layer among the plurality of drawing layers and is set. When drawing the second effect image corresponding to the suggestion in the second drawing layer lower than the first drawing layer, the image display device 5 draws the image drawn in the first drawing layer and the second drawing layer. When the images are combined and displayed in duplicate, the visibility of the first effect image becomes higher than the visibility of the second effect image because the first effect image is duplicated in the second effect image. Therefore, it is possible to execute the reach notice in preference to the setting suggestion. Further, when the second effect image is drawn on the upper first drawing layer and the first effect image is drawn on the lower second drawing layer, the opacity of the second effect image is higher than the opacity of the first effect image. By lowering the transmittance (making the transmittance of the second effect image higher than the transmittance of the first effect image), it is possible to execute the reach notice with priority over the setting suggestion.

Further, by making the sound effects such as the volume and sound quality of the sound effects output from the speakers 8L and 8R different between the reach notice and the setting suggestion, the audibility of the sound effect corresponding to the reach notice corresponds to the setting suggestion. It may be higher than the audibility of, that is, the sound effect corresponding to the reach notice may be easier to hear than the sound effect corresponding to the setting suggestion. As a method of increasing the audibility of the sound effect corresponding to the reach notice, for example, not only the volume of the sound effect is increased, but also the volume of other sounds such as BGM is decreased to enhance the audibility. May be good. It should be noted that the sound effect corresponding to the reach notice is output, but the sound effect corresponding to the setting suggestion is not output.

Further, when the effect control CPU 120 has a plurality of reproduction channels (for example, reproduction channels 0 to 31) and can execute control to output the effect sound from the speakers 8L and 8R using any of the reproduction channels. In, for example, the first effect sound corresponding to the reach notice can be reproduced on the first reproduction channel, and the second effect sound corresponding to the setting suggestion can be reproduced on the second reproduction channel different from the first reproduction channel. At the same time, when the first effect sound and the second effect sound are reproduced from different reproduction channels (first reproduction channel and second reproduction channel) at the same timing, the first effect sound reproduced in the first reproduction channel By making the volume and sound quality different (improving) from the volume and sound quality of the second production sound reproduced on the second playback channel, the audibility of the first production sound is made higher than the audibility of the second production sound. It is also possible to prioritize the reach notice over the setting suggestion.

Further, by making the light emitting mode such as the light emitting color, the lighting mode, and the brightness of the game effect lamp 909 different between the reach notice and the setting suggestion, the visibility of the light emitting mode corresponding to the reach notice is the visual recognition of the sound effect corresponding to the setting suggestion. It may be higher than the sex, that is, the light emitting mode corresponding to the reach notice may be easier to see than the light emitting mode corresponding to the setting suggestion. It should be noted that the light is turned on in response to the reach notice, but the light is turned off without being turned on in response to the setting suggestion.

That is, to execute the reach notice with priority over the setting suggestion means that the effect result is either the advantageous state suggestion result or the setting suggestion result as described in Examples 1 to 4 and Modifications 1 and 2. In some cases, not only the execution rate of the reach notice is increased, but also when the effect result is both the advantageous state suggestion result and the setting suggestion result, the effect mode such as the reach notice display, sound, and light is more than the setting suggestion effect mode. Including prioritization. Furthermore, executing the reach notice with priority over the setting suggestion means that the execution ratio, display, and sound are such that the effect of the reach notice given to the player is higher than the effect of the setting suggestion given to the player. It also includes performing different production modes such as light, light, and movement of a movable body.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the setting suggestion, as a suggestion regarding the setting in the CPU 103, a mode suggesting which of 1 to 6 is set as the set value is exemplified, but the present invention is limited to this. However, as a suggestion regarding the setting in the CPU 103, for example, the possibility that the set value has been changed or the possibility that the set value has not been changed (deferred) may be suggested.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a mode in which the jackpot gaming state is applied is illustrated as an example of an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the prize ball is paid out more than in the normal state. A high base state (time saving state) that makes it easier for the conditions to be met, a high probability gaming state (high probability state) that has a high probability of becoming a big hit game state, a high probability low base state (latent probability change state), and a special reach state (for example). , Super reach, etc.), including the state where the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern based on the jackpot fluctuation pattern.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko game machine 1 is illustrated as an example of the game machine, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a game ball having a predetermined number of balls is a game machine. The number of rented balls that are circulated inside and lent out in response to the player's request for rent and the number of prize balls given in response to winning are added, while the number of game balls used in the game is subtracted. The present invention can also be applied to a so-called enclosed gaming machine that is stored and stored. In these enclosed game machines, points and points are given to the player instead of the game ball, and the points and points given are given to the game value.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a spherical game ball (pachinko ball) has been applied as an example of the game medium, but the present invention is not limited to the spherical game medium, and for example, a non-spherical game such as a medal. It may be a medium.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko game machine is applied as an example of the game machine, but for example, the game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the game value. At the same time, one game is completed by deriving the variable display result to the variable display device capable of variablely displaying a plurality of types of symbols that can be identified by each, and according to the variable display result derived to the variable display device. It can also be applied to slot machines that can generate prizes.

Further, in the slot machine, the advantageous state for the player is a state in which a big bonus bonus or a regular bonus that increases the winning probability of a small winning combination, or a state in which an operation mode advantageous for the player is notified (for example, an AT (assist time) state). ), A state in which an operation mode advantageous to the player is notified, and a state in which the winning probability of the replay combination is increased (for example, an ART (assist replay time) state) and the like are included.

In addition, when the predetermined effect of the present invention can be executed on a slot machine, a special role such as a big bonus bonus or a regular bonus is internally won, but the combination of symbols is not aligned and is carried over to the special role. Suggestion effects suggesting the possibility that the combination of corresponding symbols may be derived and displayed, and setting suggestions suggesting the setting values set in the slot machine can be executed over multiple games (variable display multiple times), or in the AT state. It is possible to execute the game over a plurality of games (multiple variable displays) until the AT state or the ART state is won and the AT state or the ART state is started.

(Explanation of feature 097IW)
Next, the feature unit 097IW will be described.

(Variation pattern table)
FIG. 15-1 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the fluctuation pattern table in the feature unit 097IW. Of these, FIG. 15-1 (A) shows a specific example of the variation pattern table for detachment. Further, FIG. 15-1 (B) shows a specific example of the fluctuation pattern table for big hits. As shown in FIG. 15-1 (A), in this example, when the deviation occurs, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be one of the fluctuation patterns PA1 to PA5. Further, as shown in FIG. 15-1 (B), in this example, in the case of a big hit, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be one of the fluctuation patterns PB2 to PB5.

In this example, the variation pattern PA1 is a variation pattern that specifies normal variation. Further, the fluctuation patterns PA2 and PB2 are fluctuation patterns that specify that normal reach is executed during the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol. Further, the fluctuation patterns PA3 and PB3 are fluctuation patterns that specify that Super Reach A is executed during the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol. Further, the fluctuation patterns PA4 and PB4 are fluctuation patterns that specify that Super Reach B is executed during the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol. Further, the fluctuation patterns PA5 and PB5 are fluctuation patterns that specify that Super Reach C is executed during the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 15-1, when the super reach (super reach A, super reach B, super reach C) is executed, the expectation for the big hit is compared with the case where the normal reach is executed. The degree (reliability) is high. Of the three types of super reach, when Super Reach C is executed, the expectation (reliability) for the jackpot is the highest, and when Super Reach B is executed, the expectation (reliability) for the jackpot is next. It is high, and when Super Reach A is executed, the degree of expectation (reliability) for a big hit is the lowest. Therefore, in this example, the normal reach and the super reach (super reach A, super reach B, super reach C) are effects that suggest whether or not the hit is a big hit, and which type of reach is executed. The degree of expectation (reliability) for the jackpot differs depending on the type.

Next, the operation of the effect control means (effect control CPU 120) will be described.

(Variable display start setting process)
FIG. 15-2 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first reads the variable pattern command from the variable pattern command storage area (step 097IWS101). Next, the effect control CPU 120 receives the variation pattern command (effect control command for designating the variation pattern) read in step 097IWS101, and the data stored in the display result specification command storage area (that is, the received display result specification command (that is, the received display result specification command). The display result (stop symbol) of the decorative symbol is determined according to whether or not it is a big hit, whether or not it is a small hit, and the effect control command that specifies the big hit type) (step 097IWS102). That is, by executing the process of step 097IWS102 by the effect control CPU 120, the display result of the variable display of the identification information (stop of the decorative symbol) according to the variable display pattern (variable pattern) determined by the variable display pattern determining means. A display result determining means for determining a symbol) is realized. The effect control CPU 120 stores data indicating the determined stop symbol of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display result storage area. In step 097IWS102, the effect control CPU 120 may determine whether or not it is a big hit based on the received variation pattern command, and determine the stop symbol of the decorative symbol based only on the variation pattern command. ..

In step 097IWS102, for example, when the received display result designation command indicates a probability variation jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 has a decorative symbol having the same probability variation symbol (for example, an odd number symbol) as the stop symbol. Determine the combination. Further, for example, when the received display result designation command normally indicates a big hit, the effect control CPU 120 is a combination of decorative symbols in which the three symbols are the same as the stop symbol (for example, even-numbered symbols). To determine. Further, for example, when the received display result designation command indicates a small hit, the small hit symbol (for example, a combination of the symbols of "135") is determined as the stop symbol. If the received display result specification command indicates an error, a combination of decorative symbols other than the above is determined. However, when accompanied by a reach effect, a combination of decorative symbols in which the two left and right symbols are aligned is determined.

The effect control CPU 120 extracts, for example, a random number for determining a stop symbol, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating a combination of decorative symbols and a numerical value are associated with each other to generate a stop symbol for the decorative symbol. decide. That is, the stop symbol is determined by selecting the data indicating the combination of the decorative symbols corresponding to the numerical value corresponding to the extracted random number.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes a chance-up effect setting process for setting the presence / absence and type of the chance-up effect during super reach (step 097IWS103). In this example, the “chance-up effect” is an effect that is executed in such a manner that the expectation for the big hit is further increased (chance is increased) during the execution of the super reach.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 selects the process table according to the chance-up effect if the variation pattern and the execution of the chance-up effect are determined (step 097IWS104). Then, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 097IWS105).

The process table is a table in which process data to be referred to when the effect control CPU 120 executes control of the effect device is set. That is, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect device (effect component) such as the image display device 5 according to the process data set in the process table. The process table is composed of a collection of a plurality of combinations of process timer setting values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data. The display control execution data includes data and the like indicating each variation mode constituting the variation mode during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the decorative symbol. Specifically, data related to the change of the display screen of the image display device 5 is described. Further, in the process timer set value, the fluctuation time in the mode of the fluctuation is set. The effect control CPU 120 refers to the process table and controls the display control to display the decorative symbol in the variation mode set in the display control execution data only for the time set in the process timer set value. Further, the process table is stored in the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12. In addition, the process table is prepared according to each fluctuation pattern.

In the process table used when executing the effect control for the fluctuation pattern accompanied by the reach effect, the left symbol is stopped and displayed when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the fluctuation, and the right symbol is stopped when the predetermined time elapses. Process data indicating that it is to be displayed is set.

Further, in particular, in the case of fluctuation patterns with super reach A to C (variation patterns PA3 to PA5, PB3 to PB5), a process table including super reach A to C was selected in step 097IWS104, and the process table was selected. By executing the process of step 097IWS106 and step 097IWS305 of the variable display effect processing (step S172) according to the process table, super reach A to C are executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol.

Further, when executing Super Reach A to C, if the execution of the chance-up effect is determined in the chance-up effect setting process of step 097IWS103, the process table including the chance-up effect is selected in step 097IWS104. By executing the processing of step 097IWS106 and step 097IWS305 of the variable display effect processing (step S172) according to the selected process table, super reach A to C are executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the chance is increased. The production is executed.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 serves as an effect device (image display device 5 as an effect component, as an effect component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). Control of various lamps and speakers 8L, 8R as production parts) is executed (step 097IWS106).

In this feature unit 097IW, the effect control CPU 120 controls the variation pattern command so that the decorative pattern is variably displayed according to the variation pattern corresponding to one-to-one. However, the effect control CPU 120 controls the variation pattern command. The fluctuation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns corresponding to.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to the fluctuation time specified by the fluctuation pattern command in the fluctuation time timer (step 097IWS107). Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect process flag to “2” (step 097IWS108), and ends the variable display start setting process.

(Chance up production setting process)
FIG. 15-3 is a flowchart showing the chance-up effect setting process (step 097IWS103). In the chance-up effect setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern command is a variation pattern (variation pattern PA3, PB3) including the super reach A (step 097IWS201). ). If the variation pattern includes the super reach A, the effect control CPU 120 selects the chance-up effect determination table A as a table for determining the presence / absence and type of the chance-up effect (step 097IWS202). Then, the process proceeds to step 097IWS207.

If it is not a fluctuation pattern including super reach A, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern command is a fluctuation pattern including super reach B (variation patterns PA4, PB4) ( Step 097IWS203). If the variation pattern includes the super reach B, the effect control CPU 120 selects the chance-up effect determination table B as a table for determining the presence / absence and type of the chance-up effect (step 097IWS204). Then, the process proceeds to step 097IWS207.

If it is not a fluctuation pattern including super reach B, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern command is a fluctuation pattern including super reach C (variation patterns PA5 and PB5) ( Step 097IWS205). If the variation pattern includes the super reach C, the effect control CPU 120 selects the chance-up effect determination table C as a table for determining the presence / absence and type of the chance-up effect (step 097IWS206). Then, the process proceeds to step 097IWS207.

If the variation pattern does not include the super reach C (N in step 097IWS205), that is, if the variation pattern includes the non-reach loss or the normal reach, the chance-up effect setting process is terminated as it is.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs a lottery process based on random numbers using the chance-up effect determination table selected in steps 097IWS202, S204, and S206, and determines the presence / absence and type of the chance-up effect (step 097IWS207).

15-4 to 15-6 are explanatory views showing a specific example of the chance-up effect determination table. Of these, FIG. 15-4 shows a specific example of the chance-up effect determination table A selected in step 097IWS202. Further, FIG. 15-5 shows a specific example of the chance-up effect determination table B selected in step 097IWS204. Further, FIG. 15-6 shows a specific example of the chance-up effect determination table C selected in step 097IWS206.

First, the chance-up effect determination table A (chance-up effect determination table for super reach A) will be described with reference to FIGS. 15-4. As shown in FIG. 15-4, in the chance-up effect determination table A, determination values are assigned to each of the chance-up effect and the chance-up effects A1 to A7.

As shown in FIG. 15-4, in this example, when Super Reach A is executed, in principle, four images of Image A1, Image A2, Image A3, and Image A4 are displayed during the execution of Super Reach A. It is displayed in order. Further, as shown in FIG. 15-4, these images A1, image A2, image A3, and image A4 are displayed in any display color of white, blue, green, or red in principle. Of these display colors, white corresponds to the normal mode, and when these images A1, image A2, image A3, and image A4 are displayed in the white display color, it corresponds to no chance-up effect. Further, among these display colors, blue, green, and red correspond to special aspects, and when these images A1, image A2, image A3, and image A4 are displayed in blue, green, and red, chances are increased. Corresponds to the state in which the production is being executed. Therefore, in this example, when the image A1, the image A2, the image A3, and the image A4 are displayed in blue, green, or red during the super reach A, the expectation for the big hit is further increased (chance is increased).

In this example, the image A1 displayed in the super reach A, the image A2, the image A3, the image A4, the image B1 displayed in the super reach B described later, the image B2, the image B3, and the super described later. The image C1 and the image C2 displayed during the reach C are also referred to as a chance-up image.

As shown in FIG. 15-4, in this example, there are seven types of chance-up effects A1 to A7 executed during the super reach A. The "chance-up effect A1" is a chance-up effect in which the image A1, the image A2, the image A3, and the image A4 are displayed in a blue display color. Further, the "chance-up effect A2" is a chance-up effect in which the image A1, the image A2, the image A3, and the image A4 are displayed in a green display color. Further, the "chance-up effect A3" is a chance-up effect in which the image A1, the image A2, the image A3, and the image A4 are displayed in a red display color.

As shown in FIG. 15-4, in this example, when the chance-up effect A2 is executed, the expectation (reliability) for the jackpot is higher than when the chance-up effect A1 is executed. Further, in this example, when the chance-up effect A3 is executed, the degree of expectation (reliability) for the jackpot is higher than when the chance-up effect A2 is executed. Therefore, in this example, when the chance-up effect is executed, the expectation (reliability) for the jackpot is highest when each chance-up image is displayed in red, and each chance-up image is displayed in green. Next, the expectation (reliability) for the jackpot is the highest, and when each chance-up image is displayed in blue, the expectation (reliability) for the jackpot is the lowest (however, each chance-up image is white). Expectation (reliability) for big hits is higher than when it is displayed).

Further, as shown in FIG. 15-4, in this example, even if the chance-up image is displayed in blue, the chance-up image displayed thereafter may be displayed in green or red. The "chance-up effect A4" is a chance-up effect in which the images A1 and A2 are displayed in a blue display color, and then the images A3 and A4 are displayed in a green display color. Further, in the "chance-up effect A5", after the images A1 and A2 are displayed in the blue display color, the image A3 is displayed in the green display color, and the image A4 is further displayed in the red display color. It is an up production. In this example, even if the chance-up image is displayed in blue and the chance-up effect is started, the chance-up image displayed after that may be displayed in green or red, so the degree of expectation (reliability) for the big hit. Even when the chance-up image is displayed with a display color with a low), it is possible to have a sense of expectation for the chance-up image displayed thereafter.

Further, as shown in FIG. 15-4, in this example, even when the display color of the chance-up image changes, the display color with high expectation (reliability) for the jackpot changes from the display color with low expectation. (For example, after the chance-up image is displayed in red, the chance-up image displayed after that is not displayed in blue or green). With such a configuration, in this example, it is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged after the expectation for the big hit has increased.

Further, in this example, in principle, different chance-up images are displayed depending on which of Super Reach A to C, but a common chance-up image is displayed for Super Reach A and Super Reach B. May occur. The “chance-up effect A6” is a chance-up effect in which the image X that can be displayed in common with the super reach B is displayed instead of the image A1, and then the image A2, the image A3, and the image A4 are displayed in order. In this example, when a common image X is displayed, each chance-up image (image X, image A2, image A3, image A4) is displayed in a rainbow-colored display color. By displaying in a rainbow-colored display color different from blue, green, and red in this way, the player can be made to recognize that the image of the common mode is displayed as the chance-up image.

In this example, even when the chance-up image is displayed in rainbow color, the expectation for the big hit is further increased (chance is increased), so that the rainbow-colored display color also corresponds to the special mode.

Further, in this example, as shown in FIG. 15-4, even if the chance-up image is displayed in white (normal mode), the chance-up image displayed thereafter may be displayed in red. The “chance-up effect A7” is a chance-up effect in which the image A1, the image A2, and the image A3 are displayed in a white display color, and then the image A4 is displayed in a red display color. Further, as shown in FIG. 15-4, in this example, when the chance-up effect A7 is executed (when the display color of the chance-up image changes from white to red), it is determined only when it becomes a big hit. There is no value allocation, and the jackpot is fixed. With such a configuration, in this example, the expectation can be maintained even when the chance-up image is displayed in white (normal mode).

Next, the chance-up effect determination table B (chance-up effect determination table for super reach B) will be described with reference to FIGS. 15-5. As shown in FIG. 15-5, in the chance-up effect determination table B, determination values are assigned to each of the chance-up effect and the chance-up effects B1 to B7.

As shown in FIG. 15-5, in this example, when Super Reach B is executed, in principle, three images, Image B1, Image B2, and Image B3, are displayed in order during the execution of Super Reach B. To. Further, as shown in FIG. 15-5, these images B1, image B2, and image B3 are displayed in any display color of white, blue, green, or red in principle. Of these display colors, white corresponds to the normal mode, and when these images B1, image B2, and image B3 are displayed in the white display color, it corresponds to no chance-up effect. Further, among these display colors, blue, green, and red correspond to special modes, and when these images B1, image B2, and image B3 are displayed in blue, green, and red, a chance-up effect is executed. Corresponds to the state of being done. Therefore, in this example, when the image B1, the image B2, and the image B3 are displayed in blue, green, or red during the super reach B, the expectation for the big hit is further increased (chance is increased).

As shown in FIG. 15-5, in this example, there are seven types of chance-up effects B1 to B7 executed during the super reach B. The "chance-up effect B1" is a chance-up effect in which the image B1, the image B2, and the image B3 are displayed in a blue display color. Further, the "chance-up effect B2" is a chance-up effect in which the image B1, the image B2, and the image B3 are displayed in a green display color. Further, the "chance-up effect B3" is a chance-up effect in which the image B1, the image B2, and the image B3 are displayed in a red display color.

As shown in FIG. 15-5, in this example, when the chance-up effect B2 is executed, the expectation (reliability) for the jackpot is higher than when the chance-up effect B1 is executed. Further, in this example, when the chance-up effect B3 is executed, the degree of expectation (reliability) for the big hit is higher than when the chance-up effect B2 is executed. Therefore, in this example, when the chance-up effect is executed, the expectation (reliability) for the jackpot is highest when each chance-up image is displayed in red, and each chance-up image is displayed in green. Next, the expectation (reliability) for the jackpot is the highest, and when each chance-up image is displayed in blue, the expectation (reliability) for the jackpot is the lowest (however, each chance-up image is white). Expectation (reliability) for big hits is higher than when it is displayed).

Further, as shown in FIG. 15-5, in this example, even if the chance-up image is displayed in blue, the chance-up image displayed thereafter may be displayed in green or red. The "chance-up effect B4" is a chance-up effect in which the image B1 is displayed in a blue display color and then the image B2 and the image B3 are displayed in a green display color. Further, the "chance-up effect B5" is a chance-up effect in which the image B1 is displayed in the blue display color, the image B2 is displayed in the green display color, and the image B3 is displayed in the red display color. is there. In this example, even if the chance-up image is displayed in blue and the chance-up effect is started, the chance-up image displayed after that may be displayed in green or red, so the degree of expectation (reliability) for the big hit. Even when the chance-up image is displayed with a display color with a low), it is possible to have a sense of expectation for the chance-up image displayed thereafter.

Further, as shown in FIG. 15-5, in this example, even when the display color of the chance-up image changes, the display color with a high degree of expectation (reliability) for a big hit changes from a display color with a low degree of expectation (reliability). (For example, after the chance-up image is displayed in red, the chance-up image displayed after that is not displayed in blue or green). With such a configuration, in this example, it is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged after the expectation for the big hit has increased.

Further, in this example, in principle, different chance-up images are displayed depending on which of Super Reach A to C, but a common chance-up image is displayed for Super Reach A and Super Reach B. May occur. The "chance-up effect B6" is a chance-up effect in which the image X that can be displayed in common with the super reach A is displayed instead of the image B1, and then the image B2 and the image B3 are displayed in order. In this example, when a common image X is displayed, each chance-up image (image X, image B2, image B3) is displayed in a rainbow-colored display color. By displaying in a rainbow-colored display color different from blue, green, and red in this way, the player can be made to recognize that the image of the common mode is displayed as the chance-up image.

Further, in this example, as shown in FIG. 15-5, even if the chance-up image is displayed in white (normal mode), the chance-up image displayed thereafter may be displayed in red. The "chance-up effect B7" is a chance-up effect in which the image B1 and the image B2 are displayed in a white display color, and then the image B3 is displayed in a red display color. Further, as shown in FIG. 15-5, in this example, when the chance-up effect B7 is executed (when the display color of the chance-up image changes from white to red), it is determined only when it becomes a big hit. There is no value allocation, and the jackpot is fixed. With such a configuration, in this example, the expectation can be maintained even when the chance-up image is displayed in white (normal mode).

Next, the chance-up effect determination table C (chance-up effect determination table for super reach C) will be described with reference to FIGS. 15-6. As shown in FIG. 15-6, determination values are assigned to the chance-up effect determination table C for no chance-up effect and for chance-up effects C1 to C5, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 15-6, in this example, when the super reach C is executed, in principle, the two images of the image C1 and the image C2 are displayed in order during the execution of the super reach C. Further, as shown in FIG. 15-6, these images C1 and C2 are displayed in any display color of white, blue, green or red in principle. Of these display colors, white corresponds to the normal mode, and when these images C1 and C2 are displayed in the white display color, it corresponds to no chance-up effect. Further, among these display colors, blue, green, and red correspond to special modes, and when these images C1 and images C2 are displayed in blue, green, and red, a chance-up effect is executed. Corresponds to the state. Therefore, in this example, when the image C1 or the image C2 is displayed in blue, green, or red during the super reach C, the expectation for the big hit is further increased (chance is increased).

As shown in FIG. 15-6, in this example, there are five types of chance-up effects C1 to C5 executed during Super Reach C. The "chance-up effect C1" is a chance-up effect in which the image C1 and the image C2 are displayed in a blue display color. Further, the "chance-up effect C2" is a chance-up effect in which the image C1 and the image C2 are displayed in a green display color. Further, the "chance-up effect C3" is a chance-up effect in which the image C1 and the image C2 are displayed in a red display color.

As shown in FIG. 15-6, in this example, when the chance-up effect C2 is executed, the expectation (reliability) for the jackpot is higher than when the chance-up effect C1 is executed. Further, in this example, when the chance-up effect C3 is executed, the degree of expectation (reliability) for the jackpot is higher than when the chance-up effect C2 is executed. Therefore, in this example, when the chance-up effect is executed, the expectation (reliability) for the jackpot is highest when each chance-up image is displayed in red, and each chance-up image is displayed in green. Next, the expectation (reliability) for the jackpot is the highest, and when each chance-up image is displayed in blue, the expectation (reliability) for the jackpot is the lowest (however, each chance-up image is white). Expectation (reliability) for big hits is higher than when it is displayed).

Further, as shown in FIG. 15-6, in this example, even if the chance-up image is displayed in green, the chance-up image displayed thereafter may be displayed in red. The “chance-up effect C4” is a chance-up effect in which the image C1 is displayed in the green display color and then the image C2 is displayed in the red display color. In this example, even if the chance-up image is displayed in green and the chance-up effect is started, the chance-up image displayed after that may be displayed in red, so the degree of expectation (reliability) for the jackpot is high. Even when the chance-up image is displayed with a low display color, it is possible to have a sense of expectation for the chance-up image displayed thereafter.

Further, as shown in FIG. 15-6, in this example, even when the display color of the chance-up image changes, the display color with a high degree of expectation (reliability) for a big hit changes from a display color with a low degree of expectation (reliability). (For example, after the chance-up image is displayed in red, the chance-up image displayed after that is not displayed in blue or green). With such a configuration, in this example, it is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged after the expectation for the big hit has increased.

Further, in this example, as shown in FIG. 15-6, even if the chance-up image is displayed in white (normal mode), the chance-up image displayed thereafter may be displayed in red. The “chance-up effect C5” is a chance-up effect in which the image C1 is displayed in a white display color and then the image C2 is displayed in a red display color. Further, as shown in FIG. 15-6, in this example, when the chance-up effect C5 is executed (when the display color of the chance-up image changes from white to red), it is determined only when it becomes a big hit. There is no value allocation, and the jackpot is fixed. With such a configuration, in this example, the expectation can be maintained even when the chance-up image is displayed in white (normal mode).

In this example, the presence / absence of the chance-up effect and the display color of each chance-up image are collectively determined by one lottery process using the chance-up effect determination tables A to C shown in FIGS. 15-4 to 15-6. However, it is not limited to such a mode. For example, when executing Super Reach A, if it is decided to execute the chance-up effect in one lottery process, the display colors of each chance-up image (image A1, image A2, image A3, image A4) are individually displayed. It may be configured to be decided by the lottery process of.

Further, in this example, when the display color of the chance-up image changes, it is set in advance so that the display color having a high expectation (reliability) for a big hit does not change to a display color having a low degree of expectation (reliability). Although the case where the pattern (chance-up effect A4, A5, B4, B5, C4) is determined is shown, it is not limited to such a determination method. For example, if the display color of each chance-up image is determined by individual lottery processing, prohibition processing is performed so that the chance-up image displayed later does not become lower than the chance-up image displayed earlier. May be configured to do. In this case, for example, when the display color of the chance-up image to be displayed first is determined and the display color of the chance-up image to be displayed later is determined, the expectation is higher than or the same as the display color. By performing the lottery process using the determination table including only the display color, the display color of the chance-up image to be displayed later may be determined. Further, for example, when a display color having a lower expectation than the chance-up image displayed earlier is determined, the determination result is discarded, and a display color having a higher expectation or the same expectation than the display color is displayed. It may be configured to repeatedly execute the process of determining the display color of the chance-up image to be displayed later until the determination is made.

Further, the types of chance-up effects are not limited to those shown in FIGS. 15-4 to 15-6. For example, in this example, when the display color of the chance-up image changes (chance-up effect A4, A5, B4, B5, C4), the display color changes stepwise in the order of blue, green, and red. However, for example, it may be configured so that there is a pattern in which green is skipped and the color changes from blue to red.

Further, for example, in this example, when the display color of the chance-up image changes (chance-up effect A4, A5, B4, B5, C4), after the chance-up image is displayed in the earlier display color, it is later. The case where the displayed chance-up image is configured to be displayed in a different display color from the previous one (the display color of the once-displayed chance-up image itself does not change in the middle) is shown. It is not limited to any aspect. For example, when executing Super Reach A, the image A1 may be displayed in blue as a chance-up image, and then the display color of the image A1 itself may be configured to have a pattern of changing to green or red. ..

Further, in this example, when super reach A and B are executed, there is a case where a common image X is displayed as the first chance-up image (chance-up effects A6 and B6). However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, all the chance-up images displayed in Super Reach A and B may be configured to be displayed in the common image X, or two or three chance-up images may be displayed in the common image X. It may be configured as follows.

Further, in this example, the common image X may be displayed only when the super reach A and B are executed, but the common image X is also displayed when the super reach C is executed. May be configured so that there is a pattern in which is displayed.

Further, in this example, when the chance-up image is displayed in white (normal mode) and then the chance-up image is displayed in red (special mode) (chance-up effects A7, B7, C5), the jackpot is confirmed. Although the case of allocating the judgment value as described above is shown, it is not limited to such a mode. For example, even when the chance-up image changes from white (normal mode) to red (special mode), it may be configured so that it may shift with a low probability.

Further, for example, the chance-up image may be configured to have a pattern that changes from white (normal aspect) to blue, green, or rainbow color as a special aspect.

Further, even when the chance-up image changes from blue to green or red or from green to red as in the chance-up effect A4, A5, B4, B5, C4, the jackpot is confirmed. It may be configured to allocate the judgment value so that the judgment value may be assigned.

Further, in this example, the case where three types of super reach A to C are executablely configured has been shown, but the configuration is not limited to such a mode, and for example, four or more types of super reach can be configured to be executable. Alternatively, only two types of super reach may be configured to be executable. Further, a type of super reach that does not display the chance-up image and does not execute the chance-up effect may be provided.

Further, in this example, the case where the chance-up image can be displayed up to 4 times during the super reach is shown, but not limited to such a mode, the chance-up image can be displayed 5 times or more. Good.

As described above, various modes can be considered as the mode of the chance-up effect.

(Variable display during production processing)
FIG. 15-7 is a flowchart showing the variable display during effect processing (step S172) in the effect control process process. In the variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 first subtracts 1 from the process timer value (step 097IWS301) and 1 subtracts the variable time timer value (step 097IWS302). When the process timer times out (step 097IWS303), the process data is switched. That is, the next set process timer setting value in the process table is set in the process timer (step 097IWS304). Further, the control state for the effect device is changed based on the display control execution data, the lamp control execution data, and the sound number data set next (step 097IWS305).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not any one of Super Reach A to C is being executed (step 097IWS306). If none of Super Reach A to C is being executed, the process proceeds to step 097IWS316. If any one of Super Reach A to C is being executed, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not it is the display timing of any of the chance-up images (step 097IWS307). If it is the display timing of the chance-up image, the effect control CPU 120 determines the display color (white, blue, green, red,) of the chance-up image to be displayed in the image display device 5 by the chance-up effect setting process. Control to display in (rainbow color) (step 097IWS308). Further, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to display the effect display around the chance-up image in the same display color (white, blue, green, red, rainbow) as the displayed chance-up image. (Step 097IWS309).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the display color of the displayed chance-up image or effect image is white (normal mode) (step 097IWS310). If the display color is white (normal aspect), the process proceeds to step 097IWS316. If the display color is not white (normal mode) (that is, if it is a special mode), the effect control CPU 120 controls to output a predetermined notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R (step 097IWS311). Then, the process proceeds to step 097IWS316.

By executing the processing of steps 097IWS310 and S311, in this example, the notification sound is output only when the chance-up image is displayed in a special mode, so that the player is aware only when the expectation for the big hit is high. Can be made to.

If it is not the display timing of the chance-up image (N in step 097IWS307), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not it is within the operation valid period of the push button 31B (step 097IWS312). In this example, an operation valid period is provided in the latter half of the production period of each of the super reach A to C, and when the push button 31B is pressed within the operation valid period, or without the push button 31B being operated. When the operation valid period elapses, the image display device 5 controls to display a success / failure result notification that notifies whether or not a big hit is achieved. In this example, the display timing of each chance-up image is set in the first half of the production period of each super reach A to C (the period before the operation valid period), and each chance-up image can be displayed. It is configured so that the period during which the operation is valid and the period during which the result notification can be displayed do not overlap.

If it is not within the operation valid period, the process proceeds to step 097IWS316. Within the operation valid period, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the push button 31 is turned on (specifically, whether or not the detection signal from the push sensor 35B is input) (step 097IWS313). ). If the push button 31 is turned on, the process proceeds to step 097IWS315.

If the push button 31 is not turned on, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not it is the end timing of the operation valid period (step 097IWS314). If it is not the end timing of the operation valid period, the process proceeds to step 097IWS316. If the push button 31 is turned on (Y in step 097IWS313), or if the end timing of the operation valid period is reached (Y in step 097IWS314), the effect control CPU 120 determines the result in the image display device 5. Control to display the notification (step 097IWS315).

In step 097IWS315, the effect control CPU 120 confirms, for example, the display result indicated by the display result designation command, and if it becomes a big hit, controls to display a character display such as "big hit" as a hit / fail result notification. .. In addition, in the case of a loss, control is performed to display a character display such as "miss" as a notification of the result of success or failure.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the fluctuation time timer has timed out (step 097IWS316). If the variation time timer has timed out, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect process flag to "3" (step 097IWS317), and ends the variable display effect process.

(Direction execution timing)
Next, the display timing of the chance-up image during the execution of Super Reach and the notification of the result of success / failure will be described. FIG. 15-8 is a timing chart for explaining the display timing of the chance-up image during execution of the super reach and the notification of the result of success / failure. In the example shown in FIG. 15-8, as an example, a case where the chance-up effect A3 is executed when the super reach A is executed is shown.

In the example shown in FIG. 15-8, at the timing T1, the image display device 5 starts the variable display of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols, and then at the timing T2, the reach is established and the normal reach is started. Then, at the timing T3, when the development timing to the super reach comes, the super reach A is started.

Further, as shown in FIG. 15-8, the images A1, the image A2, the image A3, and the image A4 can be displayed as the chance-up images during the execution of the super reach A. As shown in FIG. 15-8, in this example, the images A1, the image A2, the image A3, and the image A4 are displayed in the period T3 to T4 in the first half of the production period of the super reach A before the operation valid period. Is possible. Further, as shown in FIG. 15-8, in this example, when the chance-up images (image A1, image A2, image A3, image A4) are displayed, the effect image is also displayed at the same time. In addition, the effect image is displayed in the same display color as the chance-up image. In the example shown in FIG. 15-8, the case where the effect image is displayed in red corresponding to each chance-up image being displayed in red is shown.

Note that FIG. 15-8 is an example. When each chance amplifier image is displayed in green, the effect image is also displayed in green, and when each chance amplifier image is displayed in blue, the effect image is also displayed. If it is displayed in blue and each chance amplifier image is displayed in rainbow color, the effect image is also displayed in rainbow color, and if each chance amplifier image is displayed in white (normal mode), the effect image is also displayed. Displayed in white (normal aspect).

Further, as shown in FIG. 15-8, in the latter half of the production period of Super Reach A, for example, when the operation valid period is started from the timing T4 and the pressing operation of the push button 31 is detected within the operation valid period, The display of the success / failure result notification is started from the timing (timing T5) when the pressing operation of the push button 31 is detected. If the push button 31B is not operated within the operation valid period, the display of the success / failure result notification is started at the end of the operation valid period. Then, when the variation time ends (timing T6), the variation display of the decorative symbol ends, and the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed on the image display device 5.

In this example, when the operation is not performed, the display of the success / failure result notification is started at the end of the operation valid period, but the case is not limited to such a mode and the operation is not performed. May be configured not to display the result notification.

As shown in FIG. 15-8, in this example, the chance-up image and the effect image can be displayed in the production in the first half of the execution period of the super reach, and the pass / fail result notification can be displayed in the production in the latter half. is there. In addition, it is restricted not to display chance-up images and effect images in the production during the latter half of the period. Therefore, the player's consciousness can be concentrated on the notification of the result of success or failure.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 15-8, the chance-up image and the effect image can be displayed only in the effect of the first half of the execution period of the super reach, and the result is notified in the effect of the latter half. Is shown, but is not limited to such a mode. For example, regardless of the timing during the execution period of Super Reach, the chance-up image or effect image can be displayed, and when the display timing of the chance-up image or effect image comes, the operation validity period If the inside or the result notification is being displayed, the prohibition process may be performed so as not to display the chance-up image or the effect image.

Further, for example, instead of displaying the chance-up image or the effect image at all during the operation valid period or the display of the pass / fail result notification, the chance-up image or the effect image may be displayed at an extremely low rate. .. Further, for example, when the operation valid period or the success / failure result notification is being displayed, the chance-up image or the effect image may be displayed in an inconspicuous display mode such as reducing the display size. It suffices if the display of the chance-up image or the effect image is restricted in some form.

(Example of super reach production)
Next, the production mode of super reach will be described. 15-9 to 15-16 are explanatory views for explaining a specific example of the effect mode of the super reach. Of these, FIGS. 15-9 and 15-10 show specific examples of the production mode of Super Reach A accompanied by a chance-up effect. Further, FIGS. 15-11 and 15-12 show specific examples of the production mode of Super Reach B accompanied by the chance-up effect. Further, FIGS. 15-13 and 15-14 show specific examples of the production mode of Super Reach A without the chance-up effect. Further, FIGS. 15-15 and 15-16 show specific examples of the production mode of Super Reach B without the chance-up effect. In FIGS. 15-9 to 15-16, the display screens transition in the order of (A), (B), (C), and so on.

First, with reference to FIGS. 15-9 and 15-10, an effect mode of Super Reach A accompanied by a chance-up effect will be described. In the examples shown in FIGS. 15-9 and 15-10, a case where the execution of the chance-up effect A3 is determined will be described as an example. As shown in FIG. 15-9 (A), the image display device 5 executes variable display of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols, and as shown in FIG. 15-9 (B), the left and right decorative symbols are the same. The symbol (in this example, the symbol "7") is stopped and displayed to reach the reach state. Next, it is the timing of development to Super Reach A, and as shown in FIG. 15-9 (C), a predetermined character image 097IW11 is displayed on the image display device 5, and characters such as "Super Reach A rush" are displayed as character lines. The display is displayed and Super Reach A is started. In this example, as shown in FIG. 15-9 (C), when the super reach A is started, the variation display of the decorative symbol is reduced and displayed on the upper left edge of the display screen of the image display device 5. It is shown.

Next, when the display timing of the image A1 comes, as shown in FIG. 15-9 (D), the image display device 5 displays the image 097IW12 imitating a bird as the image A1. Further, since the execution of the chance-up effect A3 has been decided, as shown in FIG. 15-9 (D), the bird wing portion is displayed in the red display color in the image 097IW12 (see step 097IWS308). .. Further, as shown in FIG. 15-9 (D), the effect image 097IW13 is displayed in a red display color around the image 097IW12 (see step 097IWS309). Further, since the chance-up image and the effect image are displayed in a special mode, the notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R (see step 097IWS311).

Next, when the display timing of the image A2 comes, as shown in FIG. 15-10 (E), the image display device 5 displays the image 097IW14 that imitates a bird different from the image A1 as the image A2. Further, since the execution of the chance-up effect A3 has been decided, as shown in FIG. 15-10 (E), the bird wing portion is displayed in the red display color in the image 097IW14 (see step 097IWS308). .. Further, as shown in FIG. 15-10 (E), the effect image 097IW15 is displayed in a red display color around the image 097IW14 (see step 097IWS309). Further, since the chance-up image and the effect image are displayed in a special mode, the notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R (see step 097IWS311).

Next, when the display timing of the image A3 comes, as shown in FIG. 15-10 (F), the image display device 5 displays the image 097IW16 as the image A3, which imitates a bird different from the images A1 and A2. .. Further, since the execution of the chance-up effect A3 has been decided, as shown in FIG. 15-10 (F), the bird wing portion is displayed in the red display color in the image 097IW16 (see step 097IWS308). .. Further, as shown in FIG. 15-10 (F), the effect image 097IW17 is displayed in a red display color around the image 097IW16 (see step 097IWS309). Further, since the chance-up image and the effect image are displayed in a special mode, the notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R (see step 097IWS311).

Next, when it comes to the display timing of the image A4, as shown in FIG. 15-10 (G), in the image display device 5, as the image A4, an image 097IW18 that imitates a bird different from the image A1, the image A2, and the image A3 is displayed. Is displayed. Further, since the execution of the chance-up effect A3 has been decided, as shown in FIG. 15-10 (G), the bird wing portion is displayed in the red display color in the image 097IW18 (see step 097IWS308). .. Further, as shown in FIG. 15-10 (G), the effect image 097IW19 is displayed in a red display color around the image 097IW18 (see step 097IWS309). Further, since the chance-up image and the effect image are displayed in a special mode, the notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R (see step 097IWS311).

Next, with reference to FIGS. 15-11 and 15-12, an effect mode of Super Reach B accompanied by a chance-up effect will be described. In the examples shown in FIGS. 15-11 and 15-12, a case where the execution of the chance-up effect B3 is determined will be described as an example. As shown in FIG. 15-11 (A), the image display device 5 executes variable display of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols, and as shown in FIG. 15-11 (B), the left and right decorative symbols are the same. The symbol (in this example, the symbol "7") is stopped and displayed to reach the reach state. Next, it is the timing of development to Super Reach B, and as shown in FIG. 15-11 (C), a predetermined character image 097IW21 is displayed on the image display device 5, and characters such as "Super Reach B rush" are displayed as character lines. The display is displayed and Super Reach B is started. In this example, as shown in FIG. 15-11 (C), when Super Reach B is started, the variation display of the decorative symbol is reduced and displayed on the upper left edge of the display screen of the image display device 5. It is shown.

Next, when the display timing of the image B1 comes, as shown in FIG. 15-11 (D), the image display device 5 displays the image 097IW22 imitating the moon as the image B1. Further, since the execution of the chance-up effect B3 has been decided, the moon is displayed in the red display color in the image 097IW22 as shown in FIG. 15-11 (D) (see step 097IWS308). Further, as shown in FIG. 15-11 (D), the effect image 097IW23 is displayed in a red display color around the image 097IW22 (see step 097IWS309). Further, since the chance-up image and the effect image are displayed in a special mode, the notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R (see step 097IWS311).

Next, when the display timing of the image B2 comes, as shown in FIG. 15-12 (E), the image display device 5 displays the image 097IW24 imitating Jupiter as the image B2. Further, since the execution of the chance-up effect B3 has been decided, Jupiter is displayed in the red display color in the image 097IW24 as shown in FIG. 15-12 (E) (see step 097IWS308). Further, as shown in FIG. 15-12 (E), the effect image 097IW25 is displayed in a red display color around the image 097IW24 (see step 097IWS309). Further, since the chance-up image and the effect image are displayed in a special mode, the notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R (see step 097IWS311).

Next, when the display timing of the image B3 comes, as shown in FIG. 15-12 (F), the image display device 5 displays the image 097IW26 imitating Saturn as the image B3. Further, since the execution of the chance-up effect B3 has been decided, Saturn is displayed in the red display color in the image 097IW26 as shown in FIG. 15-12 (F) (see step 097IWS308). Further, as shown in FIG. 15-12 (F), the effect image 097IW27 is displayed in a red display color around the image 097IW26 (see step 097IWS309). Further, since the chance-up image and the effect image are displayed in a special mode, the notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R (see step 097IWS311).

Next, with reference to FIGS. 15-13 and 15-14, an effect mode of Super Reach A without a chance-up effect will be described. Therefore, in the examples shown in FIGS. 15-13 and 15-14, it is assumed that the chance-up effect is not executed. As shown in FIG. 15-13 (A), the image display device 5 executes variable display of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols, and as shown in FIG. 15-13 (B), the left and right decorative symbols are the same. The symbol (in this example, the symbol "7") is stopped and displayed to reach the reach state. Next, it is the timing of development to Super Reach A, and as shown in FIG. 15-13 (C), a predetermined character image 097IW11 is displayed on the image display device 5, and characters such as "Super Reach A rush" are displayed as character lines. The display is displayed and Super Reach A is started. In this example, as shown in FIG. 15-13 (C), when the super reach A is started, the variation display of the decorative symbol is reduced and displayed on the upper left edge of the display screen of the image display device 5. It is shown.

Next, when the display timing of the image A1 comes, as shown in FIG. 15-13 (D), the image display device 5 displays the image 097IW32 imitating a bird as the image A1. Further, since it is decided not to execute the chance-up effect, the bird is displayed in a white display color in the image 097IW32 as shown in FIG. 15-13 (D) (see step 097IWS308). Further, as shown in FIG. 15-13 (D), the effect image 097IW33 is displayed in a white display color around the image 097IW32 (see step 097IWS309). Since the chance-up image and the effect image are displayed in the normal mode, the notification sound is not output.

Next, when the display timing of the image A2 comes, as shown in FIG. 15-14 (E), the image display device 5 displays the image 097IW34, which imitates a bird different from the image A1, as the image A2. Further, since it is decided not to execute the chance-up effect, the bird is displayed in a white display color in the image 097IW34 as shown in FIG. 15-14 (E) (see step 097IWS308). Further, as shown in FIG. 15-14 (E), the effect image 097IW35 is displayed in a white display color around the image 097IW34 (see step 097IWS309). Since the chance-up image and the effect image are displayed in the normal mode, the notification sound is not output.

Next, when the display timing of the image A3 comes, as shown in FIG. 15-14 (F), the image display device 5 displays the image 097IW36 as the image A3, which imitates a bird different from the image A1 and the image A2. .. Further, since it is decided not to execute the chance-up effect, the bird is displayed in a white display color in the image 097IW36 as shown in FIG. 15-14 (F) (see step 097IWS308). Further, as shown in FIG. 15-14 (F), the effect image 097IW37 is displayed in a white display color around the image 097IW36 (see step 097IWS309). Since the chance-up image and the effect image are displayed in the normal mode, the notification sound is not output.

Next, when it comes to the display timing of the image A4, as shown in FIG. 15-14 (G), in the image display device 5, as the image A4, an image 097IW38 that imitates a bird different from the images A1, the image A2, and the image A3 is displayed. Is displayed. Further, since it is decided not to execute the chance-up effect, the bird is displayed in a white display color in the image 097IW38 as shown in FIG. 15-14 (G) (see step 097IWS308). Further, as shown in FIG. 15-14 (G), the effect image 097IW39 is displayed in a white display color around the image 097IW38 (see step 097IWS309). Since the chance-up image and the effect image are displayed in the normal mode, the notification sound is not output.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 15-15 and 15-16, an effect mode of Super Reach B without a chance-up effect will be described. Therefore, in the examples shown in FIGS. 15-15 and 15-16, it is assumed that the chance-up effect is not executed. As shown in FIG. 15-15 (A), the image display device 5 executes variable display of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols, and as shown in FIG. 15-15 (B), the left and right decorative symbols are the same. The symbol (in this example, the symbol "7") is stopped and displayed to reach the reach state. Next, it is the timing of development to Super Reach B, and as shown in FIG. 15-15 (C), a predetermined character image 097IW21 is displayed on the image display device 5, and characters such as "Super Reach B rush" are displayed as character lines. The display is displayed and Super Reach B is started. In this example, as shown in FIG. 15-15 (C), when the super reach B is started, the variation display of the decorative symbol is reduced and displayed on the upper left edge of the display screen of the image display device 5. It is shown.

Next, when the display timing of the image B1 comes, as shown in FIG. 15-15 (D), the image display device 5 displays the image 097IW42 imitating the moon as the image B1. Further, since it is decided not to execute the chance-up effect, the moon is displayed in a white display color in the image 097IW42 as shown in FIG. 15-15 (D) (see step 097IWS308). Further, as shown in FIG. 15-15 (D), the effect image 097IW43 is displayed in a white display color around the image 097IW42 (see step 097IWS309). Since the chance-up image and the effect image are displayed in the normal mode, the notification sound is not output.

Next, when the display timing of the image B2 comes, as shown in FIG. 15-16 (E), the image display device 5 displays the image 097IW44 imitating Jupiter as the image B2. Further, since it is decided not to execute the chance-up effect, Jupiter is displayed in a white display color in the image 097IW44 as shown in FIG. 15-16 (E) (see step 097IWS308). Further, as shown in FIG. 15-16 (E), the effect image 097IW45 is displayed in a white display color around the image 097IW44 (see step 097IWS309). Since the chance-up image and the effect image are displayed in the normal mode, the notification sound is not output.

Next, when the display timing of the image B3 comes, as shown in FIG. 15-16 (F), the image display device 5 displays the image 097IW46 imitating Saturn as the image B3. Further, since it is decided not to execute the chance-up effect, Saturn is displayed in a white display color in the image 097IW46 as shown in FIG. 15-16 (F) (see step 097IWS308). Further, as shown in FIG. 15-16 (F), the effect image 097IW47 is displayed in a white display color around the image 097IW46 (see step 097IWS309). Since the chance-up image and the effect image are displayed in the normal mode, the notification sound is not output.

As shown in FIGS. 15-9 to 15-16, unlike the chance-up images, the character image 097IW11 and the character image 097IW21 do not change in particular depending on whether they are out-of-order fluctuations or jackpot fluctuations. , It is an image displayed in a display mode not related to the degree of expectation for a big hit.

Further, in FIGS. 15-9 to 15-16, Super Reach A and Super Reach B are shown as an example, but when Super Reach C is executed, it is executed in a similar manner. For example, FIGS. 15-9 to 15-16 show a case where an image imitating a bird or an image of a celestial body is displayed as a chance-up image, but when Super Reach C is executed, another image is used as a chance-up image. (For example, an image imitating a vehicle such as a car or an airplane) is displayed, and these chance-up images are displayed in a special aspect (blue, green, red) or in the same manner as in FIGS. 15-9 to 15-16. It may be displayed in a normal mode (white), or the effect image may be displayed in a special mode (blue, green, red) or a normal mode (white).

Further, for example, when the chance-up effect A6 or the chance-up effect B6 is executed, a common image (for example, a common character image or a common item image) is used as the image X instead of the image A1 and the image B1. The common image X and the effect image are displayed in rainbow colors, and the chance-up image and effect image displayed thereafter are also displayed in rainbow colors.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 15-13 to 15-16, the chance-up images (image A1, image A2, image A3, image A4) are displayed during the execution of super reach A, and the super When the chance-up image (image B1, image B2, image B3) is displayed during the execution of reach B, the chance-up image is displayed by adding the effect image of the common white display color, but it is added. The aspect of the common effect image to be performed is not limited to such an aspect. For example, an image having exactly the same shape and the same display color (for example, an effect image) may be added to display a chance-up image, or an image having a different shape but the same display color may be added. A common image may be added to display a chance-up image. When displaying such a chance-up image in a normal mode, not only when an effect element such as the exact same image is added, but also an effect element such as a similar image may be added, and in some form. Anything may be used as long as it is configured to display a chance-up image by adding a common effect element.

As described above, according to the feature unit 097IW, it is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, super reach A to C) that suggests whether or not the control is performed in an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state). It is possible to display a specific image (for example, a chance-up image) and a predetermined image (for example, character image 097IW11, character image 097IW21) different from the specific image during execution of the specific effect. Further, a plurality of types of specific effects (for example, super reach A to C) including at least the first specific effect (for example, super reach A) and the second specific effect (for example, super reach B) can be executed, and the specific image can be executed. As a result, at least, the first specific image (for example, image A1, image A2, image A3, image A4) can be displayed during the execution of the first specific effect, and the second specific image (for example, the second specific image (for example) during the execution of the second specific effect For example, image B1, image B2, and image B3) can be displayed. In addition, a specific image in a normal mode (for example, white) and a specific image in a special mode (for example, blue, green, red, iridescent) suggesting that the expectation of being controlled in an advantageous state is higher than that in the normal mode. The predetermined image is a display mode that is not related to the degree of expectation controlled in an advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 15-9 to 15-16, the character image 097IW11 and the character image 097IW21. The display mode of is not changed). Further, when displaying a specific image in a special mode, it is possible to add a first special effect element (for example, an effect image having a display color of blue, green, red, or rainbow color) to display the specific image. When displaying a specific image, a second special effect element different from the first special effect element (for example, an effect image having a white display color) can be added to display the specific image. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the specific image is a preview image, and it is possible to draw the player's attention to the specific image.

Specifically, when the chance-up image is displayed in a special mode (for example, blue, green, red, rainbow color), only the effect image in the special mode is displayed, and the chance-up image is displayed in the normal mode (for example, white). If it is configured not to display any effect image when displaying, it is not possible to make the player recognize that the chance-up image is a preview image. Therefore, in this example, even when the chance-up image is displayed in the normal mode, the effect image in the normal mode is displayed, so that the player knows that the chance-up image is a preview image. It is possible to draw the player's attention to the chance-up image.

Further, in this example, when the chance-up image or effect image is displayed in the normal mode (when the chance is not increased), the chance-up image or effect image is displayed in a relatively inconspicuous display color (white in this example). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the display from being unnecessarily conspicuous when the chance is not increased, and conversely, it is possible to increase the recognition degree when the chance-up image and the effect image are displayed in a special mode.

The addition of the first special effect element or the second special effect element may be configured to generate and display an image in which an effect image is added to the chance-up image, or the chance-up image and the effect. The process of synthesizing the image is not executed, but the chance-up image and the effect image are displayed in the vicinity or superimposed, and it looks as if the effect image is added to the chance-up image. May be good.

Further, the first special effect element and the second special effect element are not limited to the effect image, but are other images (for example, a character image or an item image) displayed so as to be added to the chance-up image in some form. ) May be. Further, for example, as the first special effect element or the second special effect element, a lamp or LED near the display area of the chance-up image is displayed, or a predetermined effect sound is output in a manner associated with the chance-up image. It may be, as long as it adds a production element in some form.

Further, in this example, the character image 097IW11 and the character image 097IW21 are shown as specific examples of the "predetermined image", but the present invention is not limited to such an aspect. For example, during the execution of super reach, the background image or the item image may be displayed as a predetermined image in a manner that does not change regardless of the degree of expectation.

Further, in this example, the case where the super reach A to C is executed is shown as a specific example of the "specific effect", but the present invention is not limited to such an aspect. For example, a preview effect or a pseudo-ream can be executed as a specific effect, and a chance-up image is displayed in a special mode or a normal mode and an effect image is displayed in a special mode or a normal mode during the execution of the notice effect or the pseudo-ream. It may be configured to do so. Further, for example, a promotion effect suggesting whether or not to be promoted to a probabilistic jackpot during the jackpot game may be configured to be executable as a specific effect, and the chance-up image may be displayed in a special mode or a normal mode during the execution of the promotion effect. The effect image may be displayed in a special mode or a normal mode. As such, various modes can be considered as specific effects.

Further, in this example, regarding "the predetermined image is a display mode not related to the expectation degree controlled in the advantageous state", specifically, the display mode of the character image 097IW11 and the character image 097IW21 other than the chance-up image is shown. As shown, "not related" means that the expectation for a big hit like the chance-up image is not an element that raises the chance. Therefore, even when displaying images other than these chance-up images, those with different expectations (reliability) for big hits are included depending on the type of super reach itself in which those images are displayed.

Further, according to the feature unit 097IW, during the execution of the first specific effect, the first specific image is displayed in different modes (for example, blue, green, red, rainbow color) according to the degree of expectation controlled in an advantageous state. The first specific image is displayed by adding the first special effect element (for example, an effect image of blue, green, red, and rainbow display colors) of the display mode corresponding to the mode of the first specific image that can be displayed. It is possible. Therefore, it is possible to emphasize the difference in the mode of the specific image depending on the display mode of the added first special effect element.

Further, according to the present feature unit 097IW, it is possible to display an image of a common mode (for example, image X) as the first specific image and the second specific image, and it is common when displaying the image of the common mode. It is possible to display the first specific image and the second specific image by adding the first special effect element (for example, an effect image of a rainbow-colored display color). Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the image of the common mode is displayed as the specific image.

Further, according to the feature unit 097IW, it is possible to execute a notification effect (for example, output of a notification sound) when a specific image is displayed by adding a first special effect element. Further, when the specific image is displayed by adding the second special effect element, the notification effect is not executed. Therefore, the player can be made aware of it only when the expectation of being controlled in an advantageous state is high.

In this example, a common notification sound is output regardless of whether the chance-up image or effect image is displayed in any of the display colors of blue, green, red, and rainbow. It is not limited to such an aspect. For example, when a common image X is displayed as a chance-up image and a chance-up image or effect image is displayed in rainbow colors, a dedicated notification sound different from that of blue, green, or red is output. It may be configured. Further, even when the chance-up image or the effect image is displayed in blue, green, or red, different notification sounds may be output depending on whether the image is blue, green, or red.

Further, according to the feature unit 097IW, it is possible to execute an effect (for example, chance-up effects A7, B7, C5) in which a specific image to which the second special effect element is added is changed to a specific image to which the first special effect element is added. Is. Therefore, the expectation can be maintained even when the specific image is displayed by adding the second special effect element.

Further, according to the feature unit 097IW, the production of the first period (for example, the production of the first half of the production period of Super Reach A to C) and whether or not it is controlled to an advantageous state after the first period. It is possible to execute a specific effect including an effect of a second period (for example, an effect of the latter half of the effect period of Super Reach A to C) including an effect of notifying the result (for example, notification of a result of success or failure). Further, the specific image can be displayed during the first period, and the display of the specific image is restricted during the second period (see FIG. 15-8). Therefore, the player's consciousness can be concentrated on whether or not the control is performed in an advantageous state.

In this example, the case where the display of the chance-up image and the effect image is restricted during the operation valid period in the latter half of the super reach and the period for displaying the pass / fail result notification is not limited to such a mode. For example, when performing a production that develops from a weak reach with low expectations to a strong reach with high expectations during super reach, chance-up images and effect images are frequently displayed during the weak reach, and are strong. It may be configured to hide or limit the chance-up image or effect image during the reach period.

Further, according to the feature unit 097IW, it is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, super reach A to C) suggesting whether or not the control is performed in an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state), and the execution of the specific effect. It is possible to display a specific image (for example, a chance-up image) and a predetermined image (for example, character image 097IW11, character image 097IW21) different from the specific image. Further, it is possible to execute a plurality of types of specific effects (for example, super reach A to C) including at least a first specific effect (for example, super reach A) and a second specific effect (for example, super reach B). In addition, a specific image in a normal mode (for example, white) and a specific image in a special mode (for example, blue, green, red, iridescent) suggesting that the expectation of being controlled in an advantageous state is higher than that in the normal mode. The predetermined image is a display mode that is not related to the degree of expectation controlled in an advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 15-9 to 15-16, the character image 097IW11 and the character image 097IW21. The display mode of is not changed). Further, when displaying a specific image in a special mode, it is possible to add a first special effect element (for example, an effect image having a display color of blue, green, red, or rainbow color) to display the specific image. When displaying a specific image, a second special effect element different from the first special effect element (for example, an effect image having a white display color) can be added to display the specific image. Then, the specific image can be displayed a different number of times depending on whether the first specific effect is executed or the second specific effect is executed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 15-4 and 15-5, the supermarket is displayed. Reach A can display the chance-up image four times (image A1, image A2, image A3, image A4), and Super Reach B can display the chance-up image three times (image B1, image B2, image B3). is there). Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the specific image is a preview image, and it is possible to draw the player's attention to the specific image.

Further, according to the present feature unit 097IW, when the specific image is displayed a plurality of times, when the specific image is displayed the first time and then the specific image is displayed the second time, the first time is performed at a high rate. It is possible to display a specific image in a mode having a higher degree of expectation that is controlled in a more advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 15-4 to 15-6, chance-up effects A4, A5, B4, B5, C4 Is feasible). Therefore, even when the specific image is displayed in a mode in which the degree of expectation is low in the first time, it is possible to have a feeling of expectation for the specific image displayed in the second time.

In this example, when performing Super Reach C, which has the highest expectation for a big hit among Super Reach A to C, the number of times the chance-up image is displayed is the smallest at 2 times, and the expectation for a big hit is the next highest. When Super Reach B is executed, the chance-up image is displayed 3 times, and when Super Reach A, which has the lowest expectation for a big hit, is displayed, the chance-up image is displayed 4 times, which is the largest number. ing. As such, in this example, the higher the expectation for the jackpot, the less the number of times the chance-up image is displayed, so that the chance-up image is frequently displayed even though the expectation is originally high. Is prevented from becoming annoying. On the contrary, in the case of a reach with a low expectation for a big hit, the player's expectation can be maintained even if the expectation for the reach is low by increasing the number of times the chance-up image is displayed. ..

The configuration shown in the feature unit 097IW can be appropriately combined with the configuration shown in the feature unit 103SG. For example, a configuration for setting the set value shown in the feature unit 103SG and a configuration for executing a predetermined effect of a specific mode for suggesting the setting are appropriately combined with a configuration for executing the chance-up effect shown in the feature unit 097IW. Can be configured.

1 ... Pachinko game machine 2 ... Game board 3 ... Game machine frame 4A, 4B ... Special symbol display device 5 ... Image display device 6A ... Winning ball device 6B ... Variable winning ball device 7 ... Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R ... Speaker 9 ... Frame LED
10… General winning opening 11… Main board 12… Production control board 13… Voice control board 14… LED control board 15… Relay board 17… Special variable winning ball device 20… Ordinary symbol display 21… Gate switch 22A, 22B… Start Mouth switch 23 ... 1st count switch 24 ... 2nd count switch 30 ... Hitting ball operation handle 31A ... Stick controller 31B ... Push button 32 ... Movable body 41 ... Passing gate 100 ... Game control microcomputer 101, 121 ... ROM
102, 122 ... RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124 ... Random number circuit 105, 125 ... I / O
120 ... CPU for production control
123… Display control unit

Claims (1)

It is a gaming machine equipped with an image display device that can be set to any of a plurality of set values having different advantages, can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and can display an effect image. hand,
A suggestion effect control means that can execute a suggestion effect that makes a suggestion regarding the setting,
It is equipped with an image generation means for arranging a three-dimensional object in a virtual space and drawing an image when the three-dimensional object is viewed from a specific viewpoint by perspective projection to generate an effect image.
The image generation means
A predetermined process of associating a special image imitating the effect display area of the image display device with a three-dimensional object arranged in the virtual space is performed.
The three-dimensional object subjected to the predetermined processing is changed, and an image when the three-dimensional object after the change is viewed from a specific viewpoint is drawn by perspective projection to generate an effect image.
further,
A specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect suggesting whether or not it is controlled in the advantageous state, and
An image display means capable of displaying a specific image and a predetermined image different from the specific image during execution of the specific effect is provided.
The specific effect executing means can execute a plurality of types of the specific effect including at least the first specific effect and the second specific effect.
The image display means
As the specific image, at least, the first specific image can be displayed during the execution of the first specific effect, and the second specific image can be displayed during the execution of the second specific effect.
It is possible to display the specific image according to the normal aspect and the specific image according to a special aspect suggesting that the expectation of being controlled in the advantageous state is higher than that of the normal aspect.
The predetermined image is a display mode that is not related to the degree of expectation controlled in the advantageous state.
The image display means
When displaying the specific image according to the special aspect, the specific image can be displayed by adding a first special effect element.
A gaming machine characterized in that when displaying the specific image according to the normal aspect, the specific image can be displayed by adding a second special effect element different from the first special effect element.

Images